WO2024131579A1 - Processing device, control apparatus, adjusting assembly, processing portion and method - Google Patents
Processing device, control apparatus, adjusting assembly, processing portion and method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024131579A1 WO2024131579A1 PCT/CN2023/137739 CN2023137739W WO2024131579A1 WO 2024131579 A1 WO2024131579 A1 WO 2024131579A1 CN 2023137739 W CN2023137739 W CN 2023137739W WO 2024131579 A1 WO2024131579 A1 WO 2024131579A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- processing
- circuit board
- adjustment
- component
- adjusting
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 3065
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 310
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 144
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 32
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 32
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 claims description 154
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 119
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 claims description 94
- 230000020347 spindle assembly Effects 0.000 claims description 82
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 claims description 40
- 238000005188 flotation Methods 0.000 claims description 36
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 claims description 36
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 claims description 24
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 48
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 29
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 24
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 22
- 238000005553 drilling Methods 0.000 description 22
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 5
- 101001121408 Homo sapiens L-amino-acid oxidase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102100026388 L-amino-acid oxidase Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 101000827703 Homo sapiens Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100023591 Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007514 turning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 101100012902 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) FIG2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100233916 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) KAR5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005489 elastic deformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011900 installation process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004148 unit process Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23Q—DETAILS, COMPONENTS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR MACHINE TOOLS, e.g. ARRANGEMENTS FOR COPYING OR CONTROLLING; MACHINE TOOLS IN GENERAL CHARACTERISED BY THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICULAR DETAILS OR COMPONENTS; COMBINATIONS OR ASSOCIATIONS OF METAL-WORKING MACHINES, NOT DIRECTED TO A PARTICULAR RESULT
- B23Q1/00—Members which are comprised in the general build-up of a form of machine, particularly relatively large fixed members
- B23Q1/25—Movable or adjustable work or tool supports
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B23—MACHINE TOOLS; METAL-WORKING NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B23Q—DETAILS, COMPONENTS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR MACHINE TOOLS, e.g. ARRANGEMENTS FOR COPYING OR CONTROLLING; MACHINE TOOLS IN GENERAL CHARACTERISED BY THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICULAR DETAILS OR COMPONENTS; COMBINATIONS OR ASSOCIATIONS OF METAL-WORKING MACHINES, NOT DIRECTED TO A PARTICULAR RESULT
- B23Q1/00—Members which are comprised in the general build-up of a form of machine, particularly relatively large fixed members
- B23Q1/70—Stationary or movable members for carrying working-spindles for attachment of tools or work
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K3/00—Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of circuit board processing equipment, and in particular to a processing equipment, a control device, an adjustment component, a processing part and a method.
- the spindle of the current circuit board processing equipment is completely fixed after assembly, and it is not easy to adjust the spindle position. Therefore, the absolute coordinates of the Y-axis of the machining center of each spindle are different.
- the first purpose of the present application is to propose a circuit board processing equipment, which is provided with a plurality of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing parts are arranged on a crossbeam and arranged along a first direction of a bed, and the processing parts are provided with an adjustment component that can be used for adjustment along a second direction, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle along the second direction of the bed, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the plurality of processing parts of each group of processing devices, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the first embodiment of the present application provides a circuit board processing device, including:
- each processing device comprising a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing parts being arranged on the crossbeam and arranged along a first direction of the bed;
- At least one processing part includes a main shaft and an adjusting component, wherein the adjusting component is connected to the main shaft, and the adjusting component is used to drive the main shaft to move along a second direction of the bed, wherein the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, and the multiple processing parts are arranged on the crossbeam and along the first direction of the bed.
- the processing part is provided with an adjustment component that can be used for adjustment along the second direction, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the main shaft along the second direction of the bed, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the multiple processing parts of each group of processing devices, which is beneficial to improve the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the performance of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the adjustment component is slidably connected to the main shaft, and the sliding direction of the adjustment component intersects with the second direction; or, the adjustment component is rotationally connected to the main shaft, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction.
- it also includes: a mounting portion, an adjustment assembly connected between the mounting portion and the main shaft, and the mounting portion is mounted on the crossbeam; the mounting portion is slidably mounted on the crossbeam along a first direction.
- the spindle includes a rotating drive member and a mounting frame
- the mounting frame includes a mounting plate and a movable frame
- the mounting plate is connected to the adjustment assembly
- the movable frame is mounted on the mounting plate
- the movable frame is movable relative to the mounting plate along a third direction of the bed
- the rotating drive member is mounted on the movable frame
- the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the adjustment assembly includes: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and fixedly connected to the main shaft, the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting portion, and the main shaft is driven to move along the second direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
- the second adjusting member is a screw rod, and the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod; the mounting portion has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, and the second adjusting member is inserted into the mounting hole.
- the adjustment assembly includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the main shaft and slidably disposed on the crossbeam, and the first driving member is used to drive the first slider to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
- it also includes: a first guide mechanism and a second guide mechanism, the first guide mechanism is arranged on the cross beam, the first slider is slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism, and the first guide mechanism and the second guide mechanism are guided and cooperated to enable the main shaft to move along the first direction.
- the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide mechanism has a first guide structure
- the end surface of the second guide mechanism opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure.
- the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to move the main shaft along the second direction.
- the adjustment assembly includes: an adjustment slider and an adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slide rail is installed on the installation portion, and the adjustment slider and the adjustment slide rail are slidably matched to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
- the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft in the second direction and the third direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the second direction on the adjusting slide rail is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the third direction on the adjusting slide rail.
- the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft in the first direction and the second direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the second direction on the adjusting slide rail is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the first direction on the adjusting slide rail.
- the adjustment component further includes: a driving unit, which is used to drive the adjustment slider to move on the adjustment slide rail, and the adjustment component further includes a locking mechanism, which is used to limit the movement of the adjustment slider on the adjustment slide rail.
- the circuit board processing equipment also includes a workbench, which moves along the second direction of the bed, and the spindle processes the circuit board along the third direction.
- the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- control system which is constructed to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle to move along the second direction, control the spindle to process the circuit board along the third direction, and control the corresponding processing part to move along the first direction.
- the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator, which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts in the first direction and the deviation distance in the second direction; an absolute grating scale is also provided on the beam, and the absolute grating scale is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts in the first direction; the adjustment component moves along the first direction following the corresponding spindle, and the adjustment component is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction between the corresponding spindle and the beam.
- a calibrator which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts in the first direction and the deviation distance in the second direction
- an absolute grating scale is also provided on the beam, and the absolute grating scale is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts in the first direction
- the adjustment component moves along the first direction following the corresponding spindle, and the adjustment component is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction between the corresponding spindle and the beam.
- the second objective of the present application is to provide a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
- the second aspect of the present application proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, the multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with multiple full plates, each full plate includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the multiple processing parts are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple processing areas.
- the method includes: obtaining an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full plate; controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; obtaining a deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction; calibrating at least one processing part according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, controlling the processing part to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page is obtained; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained; at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, which improves the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- At least one processing part includes an adjustment component, and the processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction to calibrate the processing part.
- At least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part.
- the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in a second direction so as to reach within a preset range of the target position.
- the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction according to the coordinate information.
- the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: controlling multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtaining the coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determining the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determining the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; and controlling the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one processing part, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset deviation range.
- obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page includes: determining the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board in the first direction that is completely in the same processing area; obtaining the coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
- the method also includes: obtaining position information of each processing area; determining a second circuit board based on the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, and the second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area; controlling the processing part to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
- the processing part is controlled to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board, including: determining a dividing line in the whole page, the dividing line is used to divide the processing area on the whole page; dividing the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determining the processing area where the first part and the second part are located; and controlling the processing part corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
- controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: obtaining quantity information of the second circuit board; allocating the second circuit board to the processing unit according to the quantity information so that the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing unit is within a preset difference range.
- the third objective of the present application is to provide a control device for circuit board processing equipment.
- the third aspect of the present application proposes a control device for circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, the multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with multiple full plates, each full plate includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the multiple processing parts are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple processing areas.
- the control device includes: an acquisition module, used to obtain the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full plate, and to obtain the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in a second direction, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; a control module, used to control at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; a calibration module, used to calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance; the control module is also used to control the processing part to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position.
- the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page is obtained by the acquisition module, and the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance by the calibration module; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction according to the offset distance by the control module, and after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position by the control module, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved.
- the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- the fourth objective of the present application is to provide a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment.
- the fourth aspect embodiment of the present application proposes a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, and the calibration method includes: obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction; controlling the processing part to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset distance range.
- the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained; the processing part is controlled to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset distance range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
- the fifth objective of the present application is to provide a layout method for circuit boards in circuit board layout.
- the fifth aspect embodiment of the present application proposes a layout method for a circuit board in a circuit board layout, wherein the circuit board layout is divided into multiple processing areas, and the layout method includes: obtaining the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in a first direction, and obtaining the number of processing areas in the circuit board layout; when the quotient of the layout number and the number of processing areas is an integer, using a first preset layout method to layout the circuit board to be layouted; when the quotient of the layout number and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, using a second preset layout method to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board layout of the embodiment of the present application if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction and the number of processing areas is an integer, the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, and if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the sixth object of the present application is to propose a processing equipment that can adjust the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction to be the same, or adjust the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
- the processing equipment includes: a crossbeam; a plurality of processing components, which are arranged on the crossbeam at intervals along a first direction, and the processing components are suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed; an adjustment device, which is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam, and the adjustment device is at least used to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component in a second direction, and the second direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
- the adjusting device further includes an adjusting mechanism, and the adjusting mechanism includes an adjusting slider and an adjusting slide rail, and the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail are used to guide the movement of the processing component.
- the adjusting slider when the adjusting slider moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail, the adjusting slider only moves in the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in a third direction and the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction; wherein, the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the machining axis of the machining component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the moving distance of the processing component in the third direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction, or the moving distance of the processing component in the first direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
- the adjustment device also includes: a transverse slide rail and a transverse slide seat, the transverse slide rail is arranged on the beam and extends along the first direction, the transverse slide seat is arranged on the transverse slide rail and can slide relative to the transverse slide rail, and the adjustment slide rail is arranged on the transverse slide seat.
- the adjustment device also includes a driving mechanism, which is used to drive the processing component to move, and when the adjustment slider moves along the extension direction of the adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slider moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction; wherein, the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing axis of the processing component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- a driving mechanism which is used to drive the processing component to move, and when the adjustment slider moves along the extension direction of the adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slider moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction; wherein, the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing axis of the processing component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the adjusting device further includes a driving mechanism, wherein the driving mechanism is used to drive the processing assembly to move, and the adjusting slide rail extends along the second direction.
- the driving mechanism further includes a driving member, an adjusting screw and an adjusting seat, the adjusting seat having an adjusting screw hole adapted to the adjusting screw and connected to the processing assembly, and the driving member is used to drive the adjusting screw to rotate.
- the adjusting device includes a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism locks the processing assembly at least in the second direction.
- the adjustment device includes an adjustment state and a locking state.
- the locking state the locking mechanism locks the processing component at least in the second direction; in the adjustment state, the locking mechanism unlocks the processing component, and the adjustment device is suitable for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component in the second direction.
- the processing equipment has at least one processing station, each of the processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components; the at least two adjacent processing components include a first processing component and a second processing component, and the adjustment device is used to adjust the positions of the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction so that the distance between the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction is within a second preset error range.
- the seventh objective of the present application is to provide a control method for a regulating device.
- the adjusting device is connected between a processing assembly and a crossbeam of a processing device, and the adjusting device is used to drive the processing assembly to move in at least a second direction.
- the control method includes:
- the adjusting device is controlled to drive the machining component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the coordinates of processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
- the adjusting device is movable along a first direction, the first direction is parallel to the direction in which the beam extends, and the control method includes:
- the adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the adjustment device when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component moves only in the second direction, or the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the first direction; wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the machining axis of the machining component moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method comprises:
- the adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the control method includes:
- the adjusting device is controlled to drive the processing assembly to move in the second direction, and the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly in the second direction are adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the control method includes:
- the adjustment device While controlling the adjustment device to move in the first direction, the adjustment device is controlled to drive the processing component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing component in the first direction and the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- control method after confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates, the control method further includes:
- the processing axis is driven to move in the third direction to compensate for the distance moved by the processing component in the third direction.
- the eighth objective of the present application is to provide a processing method for processing equipment.
- the processing equipment includes a processing platform and an adjustment device
- the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each of the processing stations corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components
- the adjustment device is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam of the processing equipment, the adjustment device can move in a first direction and is used to drive the processing component to move at least in a second direction
- at least the adjacent processing components include a first processing component, and at least the remaining processing components of the adjacent processing components are second processing components
- the processing method includes:
- Controlling the adjusting device to drive the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range;
- the processing method of the present application by using an adjusting device to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range, and by using an adjusting device to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to a second preset error range, multiple processing components can simultaneously process the same workpiece to be processed and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the automation performance of the processing equipment, reducing the operating intensity of the operators, improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
- the ninth objective of the present application is to propose an adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment, which can reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of adjacent spindles in the second direction, thereby improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment.
- an adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment includes an air flotation sleeve assembly, and the adjustment component includes: a driving member; an adjustment block, the adjustment block is connected between the driving member and the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the driving member is suitable for driving the adjustment block to move in a first direction; wherein, when the driving member 54 drives the adjustment block to move in the first direction, the adjustment block is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly to move in a second direction.
- the movement of the driving member in the first direction can drive the adjustment block to drive the air floating sleeve assembly to move in the second direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve assembly in the second direction, thereby reducing the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment further includes: a first bracket and a second bracket, a sliding space is defined between the first bracket and the second bracket, and the driving member 54 drives the adjustment block to slide along the first direction in the sliding space.
- the first bracket is provided with a first mating bevel
- the adjustment block is provided with a second mating bevel.
- the first mating bevel and the second mating bevel are slidably engaged with each other so that when the adjustment block slides downward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move in a direction away from the second bracket.
- the first bracket is provided with a third mating bevel
- the adjustment block is provided with a fourth mating bevel.
- the third mating bevel and the fourth mating bevel are slidably engaged with each other, so that when the adjustment block slides upward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move toward a direction close to the second bracket.
- the first bracket is provided with a first sliding protrusion
- the adjustment block is provided with a first sliding groove
- the first sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the first sliding groove
- the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment there may be multiple first sliding protrusions and multiple first sliding grooves, and the multiple first sliding protrusions and the multiple first sliding grooves correspond one to one.
- the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment includes a first mounting plate and a first guide block, the first guide block is connected to the first mounting plate, the first mounting plate is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the first sliding protrusion is arranged on the first guide block.
- the second bracket in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, includes a fixing portion and a guide portion, the fixing portion is connected to the fixing bracket, and the guide portion is slidably matched with the adjustment block.
- the guide portion is provided with a second sliding protrusion
- the adjustment block is provided with a second sliding groove
- the second sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the second sliding groove
- the driving member is configured as an adjustment bolt, which passes through the adjustment block and is threadedly engaged with the threaded hole of the second bracket.
- the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment further includes an elastic member, which is arranged between the adjustment block and the second bracket, and in the first direction, the elastic member is suitable for elastically pre-tightening the adjustment block toward the second bracket.
- the first direction is the Z-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment
- the second direction is the Y-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment
- the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the tenth objective of the present application is to provide a circuit board processing device.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes: a fixed bracket; a main shaft and a driving structure, wherein the driving structure and the main shaft are both installed on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft is movable relative to the fixed bracket, and the driving structure is connected to the main shaft and is used to drive the main shaft to move along a first direction relative to the fixed bracket; an air flotation sleeve assembly, wherein the air flotation sleeve assembly is installed on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft floats through the air flotation sleeve assembly along a first direction; an adjusting assembly, wherein the adjusting assembly is installed on the fixed bracket and is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the adjusting assembly is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly to move along a second direction relative to the fixed bracket, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the present application also proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
- the control method is applicable to circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes an air floating sleeve assembly and an adjustment assembly, the adjustment assembly includes a driving member and an adjustment block, the control method includes: detecting the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed; obtaining the position coordinates of the actual processing center in a second direction; controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to move along a first direction, and the adjustment block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move along the second direction relative to the position corresponding to the actual processing center during the movement along the first direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the control method for circuit board processing equipment of controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to move so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center includes: controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to rise so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move away from the position corresponding to the actual machining center; controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to descend so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move toward a position close to the position corresponding to the actual machining center.
- circuit board processing equipment and the control method for the circuit board processing equipment have the same advantages as those of the above-mentioned adjustment component, which will not be repeated here.
- the present application also proposes a circuit board processing device, which realizes the position adjustment of the processing component along the second direction of the bed. By adjusting the position of the processing component, the center coordinate error of different processing components can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment and improving the processing accuracy.
- circuit board processing device including:
- a bed the bed having a first crossbeam
- a processing platform which is arranged on the bed and is suitable for supporting the workpiece
- each processing part includes a processing component, a mounting frame and an adjustment component, the processing component is installed on the mounting frame, the mounting frame can be movably installed on the bed, the adjustment component is connected to the mounting frame by transmission, and the adjustment component is used to drive the mounting frame and the processing component to move along the second direction of the bed, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- At least one processing part includes a processing component, a mounting frame and an adjustment component.
- the processing component is installed on the mounting frame, and the mounting frame can be movably installed on the bed.
- the adjustment component is used to drive the processing component to move along the second direction of the bed, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component along the second direction of the bed.
- the adjustment assembly includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the mounting frame and slidably disposed on the first beam, and the first driving member is used to drive the first slider to drive the mounting frame to move along the second direction.
- each processing part further includes: a second driving member, the second driving member is transmission-connected to the mounting frame, and the second driving member is used to drive the mounting frame to move along the first direction.
- a first guide portion and a second guide portion are further included, wherein the first guide portion is disposed on the first beam, and the first slider is slidably disposed on the second guide portion, and the mounting frame is moved along the first direction through the guiding cooperation of the first guide portion and the second guide portion.
- one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is a guide block
- the other of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is a guide rail.
- the guide block is slidably disposed on the guide rail, and the guide rail extends along the first direction.
- the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide portion has a first guide structure
- the end surface of the second guide portion opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure
- the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to move the mounting frame along the second direction
- each processing part also includes: a third driving member, the mounting frame includes a second beam and a movable frame, the second beam is fixedly connected to the first slider, the movable frame is movably disposed on the second beam, the spindle of the processing assembly is disposed on the movable frame, the third driving member is connected to the movable frame, and the third driving member is used to drive the movable frame to move relative to the second beam along a third direction of the bed, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- a third driving member the mounting frame includes a second beam and a movable frame, the second beam is fixedly connected to the first slider, the movable frame is movably disposed on the second beam, the spindle of the processing assembly is disposed on the movable frame, the third driving member is connected to the movable frame, and the third driving member is used to drive the movable frame to move relative to the second beam along a third direction of the bed, and the first direction
- the second crossbeam has a guide sleeve
- the axial direction of the guide sleeve is parallel to the third direction
- the movable frame has a guide rod, which passes through the guide sleeve.
- the movable frame further comprises a mounting plate, the mounting plate is fixedly connected to the guide rod, and the main shaft is mounted on the mounting plate.
- the mounting frame also includes a first bracket and a second bracket, the first bracket is located between the mounting plate and the second beam and is fixedly connected to the mounting plate, the second bracket is located on a side of the second beam away from the mounting plate and is fixedly connected to the second beam, the third driving member passes through the second beam, and the third driving member is connected between the first bracket and the second bracket.
- the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam that are opposite to and spaced apart from each other, and the processing assembly is located between the first sub-beam and the second sub-beam.
- the second objective of the present application is to provide a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
- the second aspect of the present application proposes a control method for a circuit board processing equipment, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes a processing platform, the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts, wherein at least two adjacent processing parts include a first processing part, and the remaining processing part of at least two adjacent processing parts is a second processing part, and the control method includes: obtaining a predetermined spacing and a first preset error range in the first direction between the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts; confirming that the error between the actual spacing in the first direction between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range; obtaining the second preset error range in the second direction between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station; confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction is within the second
- the multiple processing parts are controlled to jointly process the workpiece, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts during joint processing, reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
- each second processing part includes an adjustment component, which is used to adjust the position of the second processing part in the second direction; after obtaining the second preset error range in the second direction of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts, and before confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range, the method also includes: obtaining the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction; if the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing part and the second processing part corresponding to each processing station in the second direction is not within the second preset error range, controlling the adjustment component to adjust the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction, so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range.
- each processing part also includes: a second driving member, the second driving member is used to drive the processing part to move along the first direction; before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the first direction and the first preset error range, the method also includes: obtaining the first preset position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the third preset error range; detecting the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction; if the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is not within the third preset error range, controlling the second driving member to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
- the present application also proposes a processing part, which can drive the spindle assembly to move as a whole in the first direction of the processing part through an adjustment component, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly.
- a processing part which can drive the spindle assembly to move as a whole in the first direction of the processing part through an adjustment component, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly.
- the spindle assembly can be positionally adjusted in time, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
- a processing unit including:
- a spindle assembly is used for processing a circuit board, the spindle assembly is mounted on a mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame in a first direction of the processing portion;
- the adjusting component is used to drive the main shaft component to move along the first direction.
- the spindle assembly is installed on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame in the first direction of the processing part, and the adjustment assembly is used to drive the spindle assembly to move along the first direction. Therefore, the spindle assembly can be driven to move as a whole in the first direction of the processing part through the adjustment assembly, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly.
- the spindle assembly is offset, the position of the spindle assembly can be adjusted in time, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
- the spindle assembly includes: a driving member and a mounting seat, the driving member is disposed on the mounting seat, the mounting seat is mounted on the mounting frame, and the mounting seat is movable relative to the mounting frame along a first direction.
- the adjustment component is disposed through the mounting frame along a first direction.
- the processing portion includes: an elastic member, a mounting frame defining an installation space, a spindle assembly installed in the installation space, an outer surface of the mounting seat having a first abutment surface, an inner side wall of the installation space having a second abutment surface, the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface are opposite to each other along a first direction, and the elastic member abuts between the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface.
- the mounting bracket is provided with a first guide structure
- the mounting seat is provided with a second guide structure
- the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to guide the mounting seat in a first direction
- the first guide structure is one of a guide groove and a guide pin
- the second guide structure is the other of the guide groove and the guide pin
- the guide pin is inserted into the guide groove
- the adjustment assembly includes: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and fixedly connected to the mounting seat, the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is driven to move along the first direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
- the second adjusting member is a screw rod
- the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod
- the mounting frame has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, and the screw rod is passed through the mounting hole
- the bearing is installed in the mounting hole, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing.
- it also includes: an end cover, the end cover has an avoidance hole, the end cover is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear, and the avoidance hole corresponds to the mounting hole, the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole, and the end cover is used to stop the bearing.
- the mounting frame defines an installation space
- the spindle assembly is installed in the installation space, and in the second direction of the processing portion
- the installation space has a first side wall and a second side wall relative to each other, and the first side wall and/or the second side wall are provided with a push rod
- the push rod is suitable for moving relative to the mounting frame along the second direction and suitable for abutting against the mounting seat
- the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the application also proposes a circuit board processing device.
- the second embodiment of the present application proposes a circuit board processing device, including:
- a machine base comprising a beam extending along a second direction
- a processing part multiple processing parts are slidably connected to the crossbeam along the second direction, the processing part is used to process the circuit board, each processing part includes a mounting frame and a spindle assembly, in the first direction of the processing part, the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application by providing the above-mentioned multiple processing parts, not only can the automated operation of the multiple processing parts be realized, thereby improving the processing efficiency, but also the spindle assembly can be moved relative to the mounting frame in the first direction of the processing part, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly of each processing part.
- the processing portion includes an adjusting assembly, and the adjusting assembly is used to drive the spindle assembly to move along a first direction.
- the circuit board processing equipment has at least one processing station, each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts, and the adjustment component is used to adjust the processing parts to be in the same position in the first direction.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is configured to control two adjacent processing parts to move a predetermined interval distance along the second direction, and control the spindle assembly of each processing part to move to the same position along the first direction.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is also constructed to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle component to move along a first direction, and to control the spindle component to process the circuit board along a third direction, and to control the corresponding processing part to move along a second direction, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of a circuit board processing device according to a first embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a processing unit according to a first embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3 is an exploded view of a driving portion, a mounting portion, a bearing and an end cover according to a second embodiment of the present application;
- FIG4 is a cross-sectional view of an adjustment assembly according to a third embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5 is a front view of an adjustment assembly according to a third embodiment of the present application.
- FIG6 is a side view of a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 is a side view of a circuit board processing device according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a first embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of a circuit board processing device according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a processing station for printing according to the first embodiment of the present application.
- FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a processing station for printing according to a second embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a second embodiment of the present application.
- FIG13 is a schematic diagram of drilling calibration of a processing part according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a third embodiment of the present application.
- FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
- FIG16 is a schematic structural diagram of a control device for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG17 is a flow chart of a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG18 is a flow chart of a method for layout of a circuit board in a circuit board layout according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a processing device according to some embodiments of the present application.
- FIG20 is a perspective view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG19 when assembled together;
- FIG21 is a front view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG10 when assembled together;
- Fig. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view along line A-A in Fig. 21;
- FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the adjustment device and the support base plate in FIG22 when assembled together;
- FIG24 is a schematic diagram of a portion of the structure of the adjustment device in FIG23;
- FIG25 is a schematic diagram of another part of the structure of the adjustment device in FIG23;
- FIG26 is a schematic diagram of processing equipment according to other embodiments of the present application.
- FIG27 is a perspective view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG26 when assembled together;
- FIG28 is a front view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG26 when assembled together;
- Fig. 29 is a schematic cross-sectional view along line B-B in Fig. 28;
- FIG30 is a schematic diagram of a circuit board processing device according to some embodiments of the present application.
- FIG31 is a schematic diagram of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG30 with the beam hidden;
- FIG32 is a schematic diagram of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG31 from another perspective;
- Fig. 33 is a cross-sectional view of point A in Fig. 32;
- FIG34 is a schematic diagram of an adjustment assembly of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG30;
- FIG35 is an exploded view of the adjustment assembly shown in FIG34;
- FIG36 is a front view of the adjustment assembly shown in FIG34 with the drive member hidden;
- Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the adjustment assembly shown in Fig. 34;
- FIG38 is a flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to some embodiments of the present application.
- FIG39 is a second flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to some embodiments of the present application.
- FIG40 is a front view of a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 41 is a cross-sectional view along line A-A in Fig. 1;
- FIG42 is a cross-sectional view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG43 is a front view of a processing portion along a second direction according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG44 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG45 is a perspective view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG46 is an exploded view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 47 is a schematic diagram of the first adjusting member according to an embodiment of the present application.
- circuit board processing equipment the control method of the circuit board processing equipment, the control device of the circuit board processing equipment, the calibration method of the circuit board processing equipment, and the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board full layout proposed in the embodiments of the present application.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 includes: a plurality of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, the plurality of processing parts 4 are arranged on the beam 3 and arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1, at least one processing part 4 includes a spindle 40 and an adjustment component 43, the adjustment component 43 is connected to the spindle 40, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y of the bed 1, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a bed 1, a beam 3 is fixed to the bed 1 of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and a beam support 11 is also provided on the upper surface of the bed 1.
- the beam 3 is fixedly mounted on the beam support 11 and extends along the first direction X of the bed 1.
- a plurality of processing devices 400 arranged in sequence along the first direction X are arranged on the beam 3.
- the number of the processing devices 400 can be set to an even number such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or an odd number such as 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc. The specific number is selected and set according to needs, and no specific limitation is made here.
- each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, and the plurality of processing parts 4 are also arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1.
- each group of processing devices 400 includes two processing parts 4, and each group of processing devices 400 is responsible for one processing station, that is, during the processing, every two processing parts 4 process one processing station at the same time, thereby greatly improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate, and is particularly suitable for processing PCB boards waiting to be processed with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication.
- the processing part 4 includes a spindle 40 and an adjustment component 43.
- the adjustment component 43 can be but is not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- a nut is fixedly provided on the spindle 40, and the adjustment component 43 can be rotatably connected to the nut on the spindle 40 through a lead screw, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y.
- each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, and the plurality of processing parts 4 are arranged on the crossbeam 3 and arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1.
- the processing part 4 is provided with an adjustment component 43 that can be used for adjustment along the second direction Y, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y of the bed 1, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the plurality of processing parts 4 of each group of processing devices 400, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices 400 when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the plurality of processing parts 4 include a first processing part and a second processing part for processing the same circuit board, and the second processing part includes an adjustment component 43, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y close to the first processing part.
- the multiple processing parts 4 can be respectively set with a first processing part and a second processing part, wherein the first processing part is fixed, and the second processing part includes an adjustment component 43.
- the adjustment component 43 of the second processing part is controlled based on the first processing part to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the first processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
- the plurality of processing parts 4 include a first processing part and a second processing part that process the same circuit board, and the first processing part includes an adjustment component 43, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the first processing part in the second direction Y to approach the second processing part.
- the second processing part among the multiple processing parts 4 is fixed, and the first processing part includes an adjustment component 43.
- the adjustment component 43 of the first processing part is controlled to drive the first processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the second processing part based on the second processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
- the adjustment component 43 is slidably connected to the main shaft 40, and the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y; or, the adjustment component 43 is rotationally connected to the main shaft 40, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y.
- the adjustment component 43 can be slidably connected to the main shaft 40, and can also be rotatably connected to the main shaft 40.
- the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y.
- the adjustment component 43 can slide along the first direction X, or slide along the first direction X and the second direction Y at the same time, or slide along the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time.
- the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y, and the micro-movement in the second direction Y is achieved by sliding in a direction other than the second direction Y, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy.
- the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y. This method of directly achieving movement in the second direction Y by rotation has a simple manual adjustment structure, low cost, and high adjustment accuracy.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 further includes: a mounting portion 432 , an adjusting assembly 43 connected between the mounting portion 432 and the spindle 40 , and the mounting portion 432 is mounted on the beam 3 .
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a mounting portion 432, and the mounting portion 432 is installed on the beam 3.
- Each processing portion 4 is symmetrically provided with two adjustment components 43, and the two adjustment components 43 are connected between their respective mounting portions 432 and the main shaft 40. Such a setting can make the position adjustment of the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y more stable.
- the mounting portion 432 is slidably mounted on the beam 3 along the first direction X. It should be noted that the mounting portion 432 may be directly mounted on the beam 3, or the mounting portion 432 may be indirectly mounted on the beam 3 through other components.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a third drive mechanism 6.
- the third drive mechanism 6 can be directly installed on the bed 1, or the third drive mechanism 6 can be indirectly installed on the bed 1 through other components.
- the third drive mechanism 6 can be but is not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- the third driving mechanism 6 and the processing part 4 can be connected by gears and racks, and there is no specific limitation here, as long as the transmission between the third driving mechanism 6 and the processing part 4 can be achieved.
- the mounting part 432 is mounted on the beam 3 and can move along the beam 3 in the first direction X.
- the spindle 40 is mounted on the mounting part 432 through the adjustment component 43. When the third driving mechanism 6 is working, the position of the spindle 40 in the first direction X can be adjusted.
- the position of the spindle 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be adjusted simultaneously by combining the adjustment component 43 with the mounting part 432, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of multiple processing parts in the first direction X and the second direction Y, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
- the mounting portion 432 has a slide groove 4321
- the beam 3 has a first guide rail 31 extending along the first direction X
- the first guide rail 31 is installed in the slide groove 4321 .
- the crossbeam 3 is provided with two first guide rails 31 corresponding to the mounting portion 432, and the first guide rails 31 are installed in cooperation with the slide groove 4321 of the mounting portion 432.
- the main shaft 40 can move along the first direction X under the guidance of the slide groove 4321 and the first guide rail 31. Therefore, through the coordinated use of the slide groove 4321 and the first guide rail 31, it is possible to ensure that the main shaft 40 moves smoothly along the first direction X, avoid directional deviation during the movement, and improve the stability of the position adjustment of the main shaft 40 in the first direction X.
- the spindle 40 includes a rotating drive member 41 and a mounting frame 42
- the rotating drive member 41 is used to drive the tool to rotate
- the mounting frame 42 includes a mounting plate 421 and a movable frame 422
- the mounting plate 421 is connected to the adjustment component 43
- the movable frame 422 is arranged on the mounting plate 421
- the movable frame 422 is movable relative to the mounting plate 421 along the third direction Z of the bed 1
- the rotating drive member 41 is installed on the movable frame 422, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- the spindle 40 includes a rotating drive member 41 and a mounting frame 42.
- the rotating drive member 41 drives the tool to rotate during operation.
- the mounting plate 421 is mounted on the adjusting component 43. It should be noted that the mounting plate 421 can be directly mounted on the adjusting component 43, or the mounting plate 421 can be indirectly mounted on the adjusting component 43 through other components.
- the adjusting component 43 is used to drive the mounting plate 421 to move in the second direction Y, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y.
- the axial direction of the spindle 40 is parallel to the third direction Z and is fixedly mounted on the mobile frame 422. Along the third direction Z, the mobile frame 422 is movable relative to the mounting plate 421.
- the rotating drive member 41 is mounted on the mobile frame 422, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the rotating drive member 41 in the third direction Z, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the tool during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the processing unit 4 further includes: a first driving mechanism 44 , and the first driving mechanism 44 is used to drive the corresponding moving frame 422 to move along the third direction Z relative to the mounting plate 421 .
- the first drive mechanism 44 can be, but is not limited to, a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- the first drive mechanism 44 is connected to the moving frame 422. Further, the first drive mechanism 44 can be installed on the mounting plate 421. When the first drive mechanism 44 is installed on the mounting plate 421, a nut is fixedly provided on the moving frame 422.
- the first drive mechanism 44 can be connected to the nut on the moving frame 422 through a lead screw. When the first drive mechanism 44 drives the lead screw to rotate, the lead screw drives the nut to drive the moving frame 422 to move along the third direction Z; the first drive mechanism 44
- the mechanism 44 can be installed on the movable frame 422.
- the first driving mechanism 44 When the first driving mechanism 44 is installed on the movable frame 422, a nut is fixedly provided on the mounting plate 421. Since the mounting plate 421 is fixed in the third direction Z, when the first driving mechanism 44 drives the lead screw to rotate, the movable frame 422 moves along the third direction Z under the reaction of the nut of the mounting plate 421. Therefore, the position adjustment of the movable frame 422 in the third direction Z is realized by driving the first driving mechanism 44, and then the position adjustment of the rotating driving member 41 in the third direction Z is realized, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the tool during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the movable frame 422 is provided with a first guide portion 4221
- the mounting plate 421 is provided with a second guide portion 4211 .
- the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 cooperate to guide the movable frame 422 in the third direction Z.
- the first guide portion 4221 is fixedly installed on the movable frame 422, and the second guide portion 4211 is fixedly installed on the mounting plate 421.
- the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide are cooperatively installed so that the first guide portion 4221 can move in the third direction Z along the second guide portion 4211.
- the movable frame 422 can move in the third direction Z under the guiding action of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211, wherein the axial directions of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 are parallel to the third direction Z.
- one of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 is a second guide rail
- the other of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 is a slider
- the second guide rail extends along the third direction Z
- the slider is slidably mounted on the second guide rail.
- the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 are correspondingly arranged. If the first guide portion 4221 is arranged as a second guide rail, the second guide portion 4211 is arranged as a slider. If the first guide portion 4221 is arranged as a slider, the second guide portion 4211 is arranged as a second guide rail.
- the second guide rail extends along the third direction Z, and the slider can slide along the second guide rail in the third direction Z.
- the smooth movement of the moving frame 422 in the third direction Z can be achieved through the coordinated use of the slider and the second guide rail, and the slider and the second guide rail have simple structures and are easy to assemble.
- the processing unit 4 further includes: a grating ruler 45 , which is disposed on the mounting plate 421 , and is used to detect the position of the moving frame 422 along the third direction Z.
- the grating ruler 45 is a measurement feedback device that works based on the optical principle of a grating.
- the grating ruler 45 is often used to detect linear displacement or angular displacement. It has the characteristics of a large detection range, high detection accuracy, and a fast response speed.
- the grating ruler 45 is fixedly set on the mounting plate 421 to detect the displacement of the moving frame 422 along the third direction Z, and can accurately provide the position of the moving frame 422 in the third direction Z.
- the adjustment component 43 includes: a first adjustment member 4311 and a second adjustment member 4312, the first adjustment member 4311 is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member 4312 and is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, and the second adjustment member 4312 is rotatably provided on the mounting portion 432, and the main shaft 40 is driven to move along the second direction Y by rotating the second adjustment member 4312.
- the first adjusting member 4311 is fixedly mounted on the main shaft 40, and the mounting method may be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
- the first adjusting member 4311 may define a mounting groove with one end open, and the inner circumferential surface of the mounting groove is provided with an internal thread, and the outer circumferential surface of the second adjusting member 4312 is provided with an external thread, and the second adjusting member 4312 is inserted into the mounting groove, and the internal thread of the mounting groove and the external thread of the second adjusting member 4312 are matched and connected.
- the second adjusting member 4312 is rotatably disposed on the mounting portion 432.
- the rotation of the second adjusting member 4312 drives the first adjusting member 4311 to move along the second direction Y.
- the first adjusting member 4311 is driven to move toward the away direction along the second direction Y under the action of the rotation of the threads, and the first adjusting member 4311 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the position of the main shaft 40.
- the second adjusting member 4312 is a screw rod
- the first adjusting member 4311 is sleeved on the screw rod. That is, when the second adjusting member 4312 is selected as a screw rod, the mounting groove of the first adjusting member 4311 is sleeved on the screw rod, so that the screw rod can rotate relative to the first adjusting member 4311, and when the screw rod rotates, it drives the first adjusting member 4311 to move along the second direction Y, so that the position of the main shaft 40 can be finely adjusted.
- the screw rod has a simple and reliable structure and low cost, which is conducive to improving assembly efficiency and reducing costs.
- the mounting portion 432 has a mounting ear 4322
- the mounting ear 4322 has a mounting hole 43221
- the second adjustment member 4312 is inserted into the mounting hole 43221 .
- the mounting portion 432 has a mounting ear 4322, which can increase the contact area between the mounting portion 432 and the mounting frame 42 and improve the stability of the installation.
- the second adjusting member 4312 is installed in cooperation with the mounting hole 43221 of the mounting ear 4322, and the mounting groove of the first adjusting member 4311 is installed in the mounting hole 43221, and the outer circumference of the mounting groove is transitionally matched with the inner circumference of the mounting hole 43221, thereby providing a certain support and guiding effect for the first adjusting member 4311.
- the mounting hole 43221 can provide a guiding effect for the first adjusting member 4311, thereby making the movement between the first adjusting member 4311 and the second adjusting member 4312 smoother when adjusting the second adjusting member 4312.
- FIG. 3 it further includes: a bearing 46 , the bearing 46 is installed in the installation hole 43221 , and the second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 46 .
- the bearing 46 is assembled along the second direction Y toward the direction close to the second adjusting member 4312, so that the bearing 46 is installed in the mounting hole 43221, and the second adjusting member 4312 is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 46 and transitionally fits with the inner ring of the bearing 46.
- the second adjusting member 4312 is provided with a stop surface to stop the bearing 46.
- Such a setting can provide a certain support for the second adjusting member 4312, so that when the second adjusting member 4312 is rotated, the stability of the rotation between the first adjusting member 4311 and the second adjusting member 4312 can be improved.
- FIG. 3 it also includes: an end cover 47, the end cover 47 has an avoidance hole 471, the end cover 47 is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear 4322, and the avoidance hole 471 corresponds to the mounting hole 43221, the second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the avoidance hole 471, and the end cover 47 is used to stop the bearing 46.
- the end cover 47 is fixedly installed on the outer surface of the mounting ear 4322, and ensure that the avoidance hole 471 of the end cover 47 is placed corresponding to the mounting hole 43221 of the mounting ear 4322, wherein the fixed installation method can be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
- the second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the avoidance hole 471 and extends a certain length to facilitate the rotation adjustment of the second adjustment member 4312.
- the end cover 47 is also used to stop the bearing 46, limit the movement of the bearing 46 along the second direction Y, and then limit the movement of the second adjustment member 4312 along the second direction Y, so as to provide a reaction force for the movement of the main shaft 40 when the second adjustment member 4312 rotates.
- the adjustment component 43 includes: a first driving member 433 and a first slider 434, the first slider 434 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40 and is slidably disposed on the beam 3, and the first driving member 433 is used to drive the first slider 434 to drive the main shaft 40 to move along the second direction Y.
- the first slider 434 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, the first slider 434 is installed on the beam 3 and can slide along the second direction Y, the first driving member 433 is used to drive the first slider 434 to move along the second direction Y, optionally, the first driving member 433 can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc., the first slider 434 is fixedly provided with a nut, the first driving member 433 can be connected to the nut of the first slider 434 through a screw, when the first driving member 433 drives the screw to rotate, the screw drives the nut to drive the first slider 434 to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring that the main shaft 40 fixedly connected thereto moves smoothly along the second direction Y, thus, through the coordinated use of the first driving member 433 and the first slider 434, the continuity and stability of the position adjustment of the processing part 4 can be guaranteed, so that the movement of the processing part 4 along
- the adjusting assembly 43 is rotationally connected to the main shaft 40, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y. This method of directly achieving Y-direction movement through rotation realizes automatic adjustment with high adjustment accuracy.
- the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8 are also included.
- the first guide mechanism 7 is arranged on the beam 3. It should be noted that the first guide mechanism 7 can be directly installed on the beam 3, or the first guide mechanism 7 can be indirectly installed on the beam 3 through other components.
- the first slider 434 is slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism 8, and the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8 are guided and matched to enable the main shaft 40 to move along the first direction X.
- the first guide mechanism 7 is fixedly mounted on the crossbeam 3
- the second guide mechanism 8 is installed in cooperation with the first guide mechanism 7 so that the second guide mechanism 8 can move along the first guide mechanism 7 in the first direction X
- the spindle 40 is installed on the second guide mechanism 8 through the first slider 434, and the spindle 40 can move along the first direction X under the guidance of the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8.
- the spindle 40 can be ensured to move smoothly along the first direction X, and the direction deviation during the movement can be avoided, thereby improving the stability of the spindle 40 moving in the first direction X, and the first slider 434 can be slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism 8, so that the spindle 40 can move along the second direction Y in the second guide mechanism 8.
- the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be achieved at the same time, and the central coordinate deviation of multiple processing parts in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
- the end surface of the first slider 434 opposite to the second guide mechanism 8 has a first guide structure 81
- the end surface of the second guide mechanism 8 opposite to the first slider 434 has a second guide structure 82
- the first guide structure 81 and the second guide structure 82 guide and cooperate to move the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y.
- the lower end surface of the first slider 434 and the second guide mechanism 8 form a first guide structure 81
- a second guide structure 82 is provided between the upper end surface of the second guide mechanism 8 and the first slider 434.
- the second guide structure 82 can move along the second direction Y in the first guide structure 81, so that the main shaft 40 moves along the second direction Y.
- the first guide structure 81 and the second guide structure 82 that cooperate with each other can be set as cross roller bearings. With such a setting, the cross roller bearings can withstand larger axial forces and radial forces, ensuring that the movement of the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y is smoother, and the spatial layout is simple, which is particularly suitable for short-distance and small-range movement.
- the adjustment component 43 includes: an adjustment slider 4313 and an adjustment rail 4314, the adjustment rail 4314 is installed on the mounting portion 432, and the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 are slidably matched to drive the main shaft 40 to move along the second direction Y.
- the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314 are used to guide the movement of the spindle 40.
- the adjusting rail 4314 can limit the adjusting slider 4313 in a direction perpendicular to the extension of the adjusting rail 4314, so that the adjusting slider 4313 can only move in the direction in which the adjusting rail 4314 extends.
- the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 is parallel to the second direction Y, that is, when the adjusting rail 4314 is horizontally installed on the circuit board processing equipment 100
- the spindle 40 moves along the second direction Y under the sliding cooperation of the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y.
- the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 cooperate with each other to prevent the spindle 40 from being displaced in the first direction X or the third direction Z, so that the adjustment component 43 can reliably adjust the spindle 40 to a predetermined position, thereby improving the reliability of position adjustment and further improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314 slide together to guide the movement of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- the adjusting rail 4314 when the adjusting rail 4314 is installed on the mounting portion 432, and the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 is at a certain angle with the second direction Y, that is, the adjusting rail 4314 is installed obliquely relative to the mounting portion 432, when the adjusting slider 4313 slides along the adjusting rail 4314, the spindle 40 will move in the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time.
- the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the third direction Z, thereby obtaining the actual position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y; and when the spindle 40 moves in the third direction Z, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the third direction Z can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the spindle 40 in the third direction Z after the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y is adjusted.
- the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
- the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the second direction Y on the adjusting rail 4314 is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the third direction Z on the adjusting rail 4314 .
- the angle between the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 4314 and the second direction Y is not less than 45° and not more than 90°, so as to ensure that the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting slide rail 4314 along the second direction Y is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting slide rail 4314 along the third direction Z.
- the error between the calculated moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be made smaller, and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting component 43 for adjusting the position of the processing part 4 in the second direction Y, improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y at the same time, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- the spindle 40 will move in the first direction X and in the second direction Y at the same time. Since the spindle 40 runs synchronously in the first direction X and the second direction Y, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the first direction X, thereby obtaining the actual position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y.
- the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the first direction X can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the spindle 40 in the first direction X after the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y is adjusted.
- the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
- the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the second direction Y on the adjusting rail 4314 is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the first direction X on the adjusting rail 4314 .
- the adjusting rail 4314 is horizontally installed on the mounting portion 432, and the angle between the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 and the first direction X is not greater than 45°, thereby ensuring that the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting rail 4314 along the second direction Y is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting rail 4314 along the first direction X.
- the error between the calculated moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be made smaller, and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting component 43 for adjusting the position of the processing portion 4 in the second direction Y, improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the adjustment assembly further includes: a driving unit 4315 , and the driving unit 4315 is used to drive the adjustment slider 4313 to move on the adjustment rail 4314 .
- the driving unit 4315 includes an adjusting screw 43151 and an adjusting seat 43152
- the adjusting seat 43152 has an adjusting screw hole and is connected to the main shaft 40
- the adjusting screw 43151 extends along the third direction Z
- one end of the adjusting screw 43151 is threadedly engaged with the adjusting screw hole
- the other end of the adjusting screw 43151 is connected to the mounting portion 432.
- the adjusting screw 43151 can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 43152 to move so that the adjusting seat 43152 is away from or close to the mounting portion 432, thereby driving the spindle 40 to move.
- the spindle 40 will move along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 when the adjusting screw 43151 drives the adjusting seat 43152 to move, and the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y will change, thereby realizing the adjustment of the position of the processing portion 4 in the second direction Y, with a simple structure and easy use.
- the adjusting screw 43151 By setting the adjusting screw 43151 to cooperate with the adjusting seat 43152 in a threaded manner, the adjusting screw 43151 can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 43152 to move, thereby driving the spindle 40 to move. In this way, the movement distance of the driving spindle 40 can be controlled more accurately, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the processing unit 4, so that the errors between the positions of all the spindles 40 corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction Y are smaller, so that the circuit board processing equipment 100 can process the workpiece more accurately and improve the processing quality.
- the adjusting screw 43151 is arranged to extend along the third direction Z, so that the size occupied by the driving unit 4315 in the second direction Y can be smaller, making the structure more compact, and making the structure of the circuit board processing equipment 100 compact; moreover, this can also reduce the distance from the beam 3 to the processing part 4, so that the processing part 4 can be more reliably fixed relative to the beam 3, preventing the processing part 4 from shaking relative to the beam 3, improving the processing accuracy of the processing part 4, ensuring the production quality, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the adjustment assembly 43 further includes a locking mechanism 4316 , and the locking mechanism 4316 is used to limit the movement of the adjustment slider 4313 on the adjustment rail 4314 .
- the adjustment component 43 includes a locking mechanism 4316, which is used to lock the processing unit 4 on the beam 3.
- the processing unit 4 can be locked on the beam 3 by the locking mechanism 4316, and then all the processing units 4 can be controlled to process the workpiece. In this way, it is possible to prevent the vibration during the processing from being transmitted to the adjustment component 43 and causing the processing unit 4 to be displaced relative to the beam 3, so that the processing unit 4 can be reliably fixed relative to the beam 3, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100 when processing the workpiece to be processed and ensuring the production quality.
- a control system is also included, which is constructed to control the adjustment component 43 to drive the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y, control the spindle 40 to process the circuit board along the third direction Z, and control the corresponding processing part 4 to move along the first direction X.
- the first direction X, the second direction Y, and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 43 to drive the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different spindles 40, reducing the center coordinate errors of different spindles 40, and reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100, thereby improving the processing accuracy;
- the control system can also control the corresponding processing part 4 to move along the first direction X.
- the control system can control the processing parts 4 to move along the first direction X respectively to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 4 along the first direction X, so that the two processing parts 4 can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board.
- the control system can also control the spindle 40 to start processing the circuit board along the third direction Z.
- At least one processing part 4 is further provided with an adjusting device, and the control system controls the adjusting device to adjust the corresponding processing part 4 to a corresponding position in the first direction X, so as to adjust the distance between two adjacent processing parts 4 to within a preset range.
- the processing unit 4 is also provided with an adjusting device, which is used to adjust the position of the processing unit 4 in the first direction X, so as to ensure that the spacing between two adjacent processing units 4 is within a preset range, thereby reducing the relative position error of the two adjacent processing units 4 in the first direction X.
- the coordinate deviation of the two adjacent processing units 4 in the first direction X during processing can be reduced, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
- the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y is L, which satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ m ⁇ L ⁇ 1 mm.
- the spindle 40 is installed on the beam 3, and the movable distance of the spindle 40 relative to the beam 3 along the second direction Y is L. Furthermore, the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y can be set to values such as 1 ⁇ m, 10 ⁇ m, 100 ⁇ m, 1mm, etc. The moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can avoid the conflict between the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y and the spacing distance between the spindle 40 and the beam 3, thereby avoiding the possibility of collision between the spindle 40 and the beam 3.
- each spindle 40 has different position deviations due to assembly errors.
- the position deviation of adjacent spindles 40 may be in any possible numerical range such as 1 ⁇ m, 100 ⁇ m, 1mm, 10mm, etc.
- the adjustment component 43 can control the accuracy of its position deviation within 1 ⁇ m-3 ⁇ m, thereby improving the accuracy of the replication processing of adjacent spindles 40.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 has at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 4, and multiple processing parts 4 corresponding to the same processing station can process the same circuit board at the same time.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board.
- the number of processing stations is set according to actual needs.
- Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two adjacent processing parts 4, and the number of processing parts 4 provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 4.
- a circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 4 provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time.
- multiple processing parts 4 can process one circuit board at the same time, thereby improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100 per unit time and unit area, and is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, which is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a workbench 2, which moves along the second direction Y of the bed 1, and the spindle 40 processes the circuit board along the third direction Z.
- the first direction X, the second direction Y, and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- a second driving mechanism 5 is provided between the bed 1 and the workbench 2, and a fourth guide portion cooperating with the third guide portion is provided below the workbench 2.
- the workbench 2 can be moved along the second direction Y of the bed 1 through the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion.
- the second driving mechanism 5 is in operation, the workbench 2 can be moved relative to the bed 1 along the second direction Y under the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion.
- This arrangement facilitates moving the workpiece to a suitable position and can also achieve rapid positioning of the workpiece, thereby improving processing efficiency.
- the spindle 40 is controlled to move along the third direction Z and process the circuit board.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a calibrator, which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X and the deviation distance in the second direction Y; an absolute grating ruler 32 is also provided on the beam 3, and the absolute grating ruler 32 is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X; the adjustment component 43 follows the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the first direction X, and the adjustment component 43 is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction Y between the corresponding spindle 40 and the beam 3.
- a calibrator which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X and the deviation distance in the second direction Y
- an absolute grating ruler 32 is also provided on the beam 3
- the absolute grating ruler 32 is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X
- the adjustment component 43 follows the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the first direction X
- the calibrator in the circuit board processing equipment 100 is used to detect the deviation distance of multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X to determine whether the relative positions between the multiple processing parts 4 are accurate. If the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X exceeds the preset range, the absolute grating ruler 32 is used to fine-tune and compensate the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X is within the preset range; at the same time, the calibrator is also used to detect the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y to determine the center coordinate error of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y.
- the adjustment component 43 is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction Y between the corresponding spindle 40 and the beam 3 so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y is within the preset range, and the adjustment component 43 moves along the first direction X with the corresponding spindle 40, thereby realizing the overall movement of the spindle 40 and the adjustment component 43 in the first direction X.
- the absolute grating ruler 32 has a zero-free function, which can prevent the processing part 4 from colliding when moving in the first direction X. At the same time, it can also provide a positioning reference for the processing part 4 in the first direction X, which is convenient for the subsequent positioning adjustment and compensation of the spindle 40 in the first direction X, thereby further reducing the first direction X coordinate deviation of the spindle 40 and improving the processing accuracy.
- the system further includes: a second driving mechanism 5 , which is used to drive the workbench 2 to move along the second direction Y relative to the bed 1 .
- a second driving mechanism 5 is provided between the bed 1 and the workbench 2, and a fourth guide portion coordinated with the third guide portion is provided below the workbench 2.
- the workbench 2 can be moved along the second direction Y of the bed 1 through the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion.
- the second driving mechanism 5 is in operation, the workbench 2 can be moved relative to the bed 1 along the second direction Y under the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion.
- This arrangement facilitates moving the workpiece to a suitable position. At the same time, it can also achieve rapid positioning of the workpiece, further improving processing efficiency.
- FIG8 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to the first embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple full pages, each full page includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and multiple processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple processing areas.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing device 100 includes 6 groups of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a processing part A and a processing part B, and the 6 groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with 6 full pages 9.
- each full page 9 includes a processing area A and a processing area B, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the number of circuit boards is set as needed, and is not specifically limited here.
- the processing part A and the processing part B are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the processing area A and the processing area B, respectively.
- control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
- Step S101 obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full page.
- each processing part when multiple processing areas corresponding to each entire page are processed separately by multiple processing parts, it is necessary to determine the relative position of each processing part so that each processing part can process its own processing area at the same time.
- processing part A and processing part B process processing area A and processing area B at the same time, it is necessary to obtain the relative position of processing part A and processing part B.
- the relative position of processing part A and processing part B is determined according to the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in the entire page, that is, according to the offset distance between processing area A and processing area B.
- obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page includes: determining the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X; obtaining the coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
- the coordinate information of each circuit board in the whole page can be a copy layout or a non-copy layout.
- the coordinate information of the circuit board in the whole page is a copy layout, it is only necessary to list the coordinate information X0Y0 of a circuit board master, and then set the copy distance along the first direction X and the copy distance along the second direction Y, as well as the copy number along the first direction X and the copy number along the second direction Y, so that a matrix copy layout array can be formed, as shown in Figures 10 and 11.
- the coordinate information of each circuit board can be obtained according to the coordinate information of the circuit board master, the copy distance and the copy number along the first direction X, and the copy distance and the copy number along the second direction Y; when the coordinate information of the circuit board in the whole page is a non-copy layout, it is necessary to obtain the coordinate information of each circuit board at the time of specific input.
- each processing part is processed row by row in its respective processing area, the offset distances of different rows in adjacent processing areas in the first direction X may be different.
- DX1, DX2, DX3 and DX4 may be the same or different, and are set according to actual conditions.
- Step S102 controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance.
- At least one processing unit in each processing device group is controlled to move according to the offset distance, so that the processing unit in each processing device group moves to the corresponding position.
- processing unit B is controlled to move to the corresponding position along the first direction X, so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is equal to the offset distance between processing areas A and processing areas B; or with processing unit B as a reference, processing unit A is controlled to move to the corresponding position along the first direction X, so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is equal to the offset distance between processing areas A and processing areas B; or processing unit B as a reference, processing unit A is controlled to move to the corresponding position along the first direction X, so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is equal to the offset distance between processing areas A and processing areas B; or processing unit A and processing unit B move simultaneously in the first direction X, so that processing unit A and processing unit B move to a predetermined offset distance in the first direction X.
- Step S103 obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction.
- the axis of the processing part will have a certain degree of deflection, and as the processing part is used, the degree of deflection of the axis will become larger and larger, which will have a great impact on the processing accuracy. Therefore, before processing the circuit board, it is necessary to calibrate the multiple processing parts in the processing device to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of the processing part.
- the spindle of the processing part is completely fixed after clamping, and it is difficult to adjust the spindle in the second direction Y. Therefore, the center coordinate deviation of the processing part is usually in the second direction Y.
- each group of processing devices includes a processing unit A and a processing unit B.
- the processing unit A and the processing unit B are processed simultaneously, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing unit A and the processing unit B in the second direction Y, and obtain the deviation distance of the processing unit A and the processing unit B in the second direction Y.
- Step S104 calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance.
- any processing part can be selected as a reference, and the processing part that needs to be calibrated is controlled to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
- Step S105 after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- the processing parts in each group of processing devices are moved to the target position, that is, the distance between adjacent processing parts of each group of processing devices in the first direction X is consistent with the offset distance between corresponding adjacent processing areas in the first direction X, or is within a preset range; and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within the preset range, the processing parts are controlled to process the circuit boards in the corresponding processing areas.
- processing unit A and processing unit B when processing unit A and processing unit B process processing area A and processing area B at the same time, processing unit A and processing unit B first process the first row of circuit boards in processing area A and processing area B, and the offset distance of the first row in processing area A and processing area B is DX1.
- Processing unit A and/or processing unit B are controlled to move so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B along the first direction X is DX1.
- processing unit B processes the circuit boards in processing area B from the third direction Z in sequence. Since the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is fixed at the offset distance DX1, when processing unit A processes circuit board X1Y0, processing unit B is guaranteed to process circuit board X3Y0.
- control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
- Step S201 obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction;
- Step S202 calibrating at least one processing part according to the deviation distance
- Step S203 obtaining an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full page
- Step S204 controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance; wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction;
- Step S205 after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- processing units When multiple processing units have completed all the circuit boards in the current row of their respective processing areas, they need to process all the circuit boards in the next row, and need to re-control the processing units to perform processing based on the offset distance of the next row. For example, referring to FIG10 , when processing unit A and processing unit B have completed processing all the circuit boards in the first row, the workbench is controlled to move a distance DY1 along the second direction Y, and the offset distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is adjusted to DX2.
- processing unit A processes circuit board X0Y1, processing unit B processes circuit board X2Y1; when processing unit A processes circuit board X1Y1, processing unit B processes circuit board X3Y1, and so on, the processing units are controlled to complete the processing of the entire plate.
- multiple processing units can jointly process the same whole plate, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the distance between adjacent processing units along the first direction X and the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in each whole plate in the first direction X are controlled, and the deviation distance of all processing units in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is made within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing units jointly process, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- At least one processing part includes an adjustment component to calibrate the processing part according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction Y to calibrate the processing part.
- At least one processing part in each group of processing devices includes an adjustment component.
- the processing part without the adjustment component can be selected as a reference, and the adjustment component in the processing part that needs to be calibrated can be controlled so that the adjustment component drives the corresponding processing part to move along the second direction Y, so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
- At least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part. Based on the first processing part, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in the second direction Y to reach within a preset range of the target position.
- At least one processing part when at least one processing part processes the same circuit board at the same time, at least one processing part can be respectively set as a first processing part and a second processing part.
- processing part A is set as the first processing part
- processing part B is set as the second processing part, wherein the first processing part is fixed
- the second processing part includes an adjustment component.
- the adjustment component of the second processing part is controlled based on the first processing part to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the first processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
- the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y based on the coordinate information.
- multiple processing parts can be calibrated by means of a calibrator installed on a workbench, and the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices can be obtained by the calibrator, and the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y can be determined according to the coordinate information.
- the processing device includes a processing part A and a processing part B
- the calibrator is placed on the workbench, and the processing part A and the processing part B are adjusted to the center position of the calibrator in turn, and the coordinate information of the processing part A and the processing part B are obtained respectively.
- the deviation distance of the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is determined. Therefore, by setting up the calibrator, it is convenient to obtain the deviation distance of multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, which improves the efficiency of obtaining the deviation distance and is conducive to the adjustment of the center coordinates between multiple processing parts.
- the calibrator can be installed on the workbench all the time or be removed and temporarily installed on the workbench only during calibration.
- the calibration tool can be a calibrator or other position measurement sensors, including but not limited to: tool setting probe, CCD camera, grating scale, magnetic grating, AOI detection device, etc. It is only necessary to obtain the position deviation value of the B-axis relative to the A-axis in the X and Y directions, and no specific restrictions are made here.
- the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: controlling multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtaining the coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determining the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determining the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; and controlling the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one of the processing parts, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset deviation range.
- the processing unit is controlled to perform pre-processing on the corresponding preset circuit board, and coordinate information of the pre-processing position of the preset circuit board is obtained to determine the deviation distance of multiple processing units in the second direction Y.
- the processing unit A and the processing unit B are controlled to perform pre-processing on the first circuit board of the processing area A that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X and the first circuit board of the processing area B that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X, respectively.
- the pre-processing includes but is not limited to drilling, cutting, etc., to obtain the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B.
- the coordinate information of the drilling position of the circuit board and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B determine the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y, and determine the position information of any processing part among the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position, that is, determine the position information of the processing part A, and use the position information of the processing part A as a reference to determine whether the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset distance range.
- the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, use the position information of the processing part A as a reference to control the processing part B to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset range. Therefore, using the position information of one of the multiple processing parts as a reference, control the other processing parts among the multiple processing parts to move along the second direction Y until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within the preset range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating the improvement of processing accuracy.
- control method of the circuit board processing equipment further includes the following steps:
- Step S301 obtaining the position information of each processing area.
- Step S302 determining a second circuit board according to the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, wherein the second circuit board is not completely located in the same processing area.
- Step S303 controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
- the processing area includes a processing area A and a processing area B.
- the position information of processing area A and processing area B are respectively obtained, and the second circuit board is determined according to the coordinate information of each circuit board in the whole page and the position information of processing area A and processing area B.
- the second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area.
- the determined second circuit boards are X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3, respectively.
- multiple processing sections in the processing device corresponding to the whole page are used to process the second circuit boards respectively, that is, the processing section A and/or the processing section B are used to process the second circuit boards X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 respectively, so as to prevent the omission of the second circuit board during the processing.
- controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: determining a dividing line in the entire page, the dividing line being used to divide the processing area on the entire page; dividing the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determining the processing area in which the first part and the second part are located; and controlling the processing unit corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
- a dividing line between any two adjacent processing areas in the first direction X of the whole page is determined, and after the second circuit board is determined, the second circuit board on the dividing line is distinguished, and the second circuit board is divided into a first part and a second part along the dividing line.
- a dividing line between any two adjacent processing areas in the first direction X of the whole page is determined, and after the second circuit board is determined, the second circuit board on the dividing line is distinguished, and the second circuit board is divided into a first part and a second part along the dividing line.
- the processing area A and the processing area B have a dividing line (shown by a dotted line in the figure), and the second circuit boards X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 are divided into a first part and a second part by the dividing line, wherein the first part is located in the processing area A, and the second part is located in the processing area B.
- the first and second parts are assigned to the corresponding processing areas
- the first and second parts of the second circuit board are processed according to the processing parts corresponding to the corresponding processing areas, that is, the second circuit board of the first part in the processing area A is processed by the processing part A, and the second circuit board of the second part in the processing area B is processed by the processing part B.
- the processing part B stops the processing action.
- the processing part B is controlled to move to the position of the second circuit board of the second part and process it.
- the second circuit board in two adjacent processing areas can be divided into the first part and the second part, and the first part and the second part of the second circuit board are processed respectively according to the processing parts of the processing areas corresponding to the first part and the second part, thereby realizing the processing of the second circuit board in two adjacent processing areas, improving the processing efficiency, and preventing processing omissions.
- controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: obtaining quantity information of the second circuit board; allocating the second circuit board to the processing unit according to the quantity information so that the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing unit is within a preset difference range.
- the quantity information of the second circuit boards on the dividing line in the entire page is determined, and the second circuit boards on the dividing line are allocated to the processing departments corresponding to the two processing areas for processing.
- the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards processed by the processing departments corresponding to the two processing areas is within a preset range, that is, try to keep the two processing departments processing the same number of second circuit boards, thereby ensuring that the processing time of the processing departments is basically the same, and ensuring that the use cycles of multiple processing departments are as similar as possible.
- the number of second circuit boards is 4, and the second circuit boards are X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 respectively.
- two second circuit boards are processed by processing part A and two second circuit boards are processed by processing part B respectively.
- the second circuit board X2Y0 is first processed by processing part A, then the second circuit board X1Y1 is processed by processing part B, then the second circuit board X2Y2 is processed by processing part A, and finally the second circuit board X2Y3 is processed by processing part B, thereby completing the processing of all second circuit boards.
- the above-mentioned processing order of processing part A and processing part B is only used as an example, and other orders can also be used for processing, and no specific limitation is made here.
- all the second circuit boards are processed in sequence by the processing parts of two adjacent processing areas respectively, which can not only prevent the omission of processing of the second circuit boards, but also ensure that the service life of multiple processing parts is as similar as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the wear of the processing tool and improve the processing accuracy.
- FIG. 15 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 15 , the control method for a circuit board processing device includes the following steps:
- Step S401 obtaining coordinate information of all circuit boards in the entire page.
- Step S402 determine whether it is a copy layout, if yes, execute step S303, if not, execute step S304.
- Step S403 extracting the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard.
- Step S404 inputting the offset distance between adjacent processing areas.
- Step S405 reading the offset distance between adjacent processing areas.
- step S406 the processing unit processes the duplicated layout circuit boards in the respective processing areas of the entire page at the same time.
- Step S407 the processing department processes the non-copy layout circuit boards in the respective processing areas of the entire page separately.
- the circuit board processing equipment can process the circuit boards with duplicate layout and the circuit boards with non-duplicate layout in the whole page, thereby expanding the application scope of the circuit board processing equipment.
- the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page is obtained; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance; the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained; at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved.
- the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction X is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- FIG16 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple full pages, each full page includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and multiple processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple processing areas.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing device 100 includes 6 groups of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a processing part A and a processing part B, and the 6 groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with 6 full pages 9.
- each full page 9 includes a processing area A and a processing area B, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the number of circuit boards is set as needed, and is not specifically limited here.
- the processing part A and the processing part B are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the processing area A and the processing area B, respectively.
- the control device 200 of the circuit board processing equipment includes: an acquisition module 210 , a control module 220 and a calibration module 230 .
- the acquisition module 210 is used to obtain the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in each full page in the first direction X, and to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y; the control module 220 is used to control at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance; the calibration module 230 is used to calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance; the control module 220 is also used to control the processing part in each group of processing devices to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area after the processing part moves to the target position.
- At least one processing part includes an adjustment component
- the calibration module 230 is further specifically used for: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction Y to calibrate the processing part.
- At least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part. Based on the first processing part, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in the second direction Y to reach within a preset range of the target position.
- the circuit board processing equipment further includes a calibrator
- the acquisition module 210 is specifically used to: obtain coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; and determine the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information.
- the calibration module 230 is also specifically used to: control multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtain coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determine the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determine the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; control the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one of the processing parts, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset deviation range.
- the acquisition module 210 is specifically used to: determine the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board in the first direction X that is completely in the same processing area; obtain coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determine the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
- the acquisition module 210 is also specifically used to: acquire the position information of each processing area; the control module 220 is also specifically used to: determine the second circuit board based on the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, the second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area, and control the processing part to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
- control module 220 is also specifically used to: determine a dividing line in the whole page, the dividing line is used to divide the processing area on the whole page; divide the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determine the processing area where the first part and the second part are located; control the processing part corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
- control module 220 is further specifically used to: obtain quantity information of the second circuit boards; and allocate the second circuit boards to the processing parts according to the quantity information so that the difference in quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing part is within a preset difference range.
- control device of the circuit board processing equipment in this application please refer to the description of the control method of the circuit board processing equipment in this application, and the details will not be repeated here.
- the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page is obtained by the acquisition module, and the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance by the calibration module; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance by the control module, and after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position by the control module, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
- multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved.
- the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction X is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- FIG17 is a flow chart of a calibration method for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts.
- the calibration method for the circuit board processing device includes the following steps:
- Step S501 obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction.
- Step S502 controlling the processing parts to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance, until the deviation distances of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y are within a preset distance range.
- the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, then one of the multiple processing parts is used as a reference to control the other processing parts in the multiple processing parts to move along the second direction Y until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within the preset range.
- the processing unit A and the processing unit B are controlled to perform pre-processing on the first circuit board in the processing area A that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X and the first circuit board in the processing area B that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X, respectively.
- the pre-processing includes but is not limited to drilling, cutting, etc., so as to obtain the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B.
- the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B Determine the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y, and determine the position information of any processing part among the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position, that is, determine the position information of processing part A, and use the position information of processing part A as a reference to judge whether the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is within a preset distance range; if the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, use the position information of processing part A as a reference to control processing part B to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset range.
- the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained; the processing part is controlled to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset distance range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y based on the coordinate information.
- multiple processing parts can be calibrated by means of a calibrator installed on a workbench, and the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices can be obtained by the calibrator, and the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y can be determined according to the coordinate information.
- the processing device includes a processing part A and a processing part B
- the calibrator is placed on the workbench, and the processing part A and the processing part B are adjusted to the center position of the calibrator in turn, and the coordinate information of the processing part A and the processing part B are obtained respectively.
- the deviation distance of the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is determined. Therefore, by setting up the calibrator, it is convenient to obtain the deviation distance of multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, which improves the efficiency of obtaining the deviation distance and is conducive to the adjustment of the center coordinates between multiple processing parts.
- the calibrator can be installed on the workbench all the time or be removed and temporarily installed on the workbench only during calibration.
- the calibration tool can be a calibrator or other position measurement sensors. It is only necessary to obtain the position deviation value of the B-axis relative to the A-axis in the X and Y directions. No specific restrictions are made here.
- At least one of the multiple processing parts includes an adjustment component to control the processing part to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one of the multiple processing parts to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance to calibrate the processing part.
- At least one processing part in each group of processing devices includes an adjustment component.
- the processing part without the adjustment component can be selected as a reference, and the adjustment component in the processing part that needs to be calibrated can be controlled so that the adjustment component drives the corresponding processing part to move along the second direction Y, so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
- the multiple processing parts include a first processing part and a second processing part
- the first processing part and/or the second processing part include an adjustment component, which controls the processing part to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls the first processing part and/or the second processing part to move closer in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance to reach within a preset range of the target position.
- the plurality of processing parts include a first processing part and a second processing part, wherein the first processing part includes an adjustment component, or the second processing part includes an adjustment component, or both the first processing part and the second processing part include an adjustment component.
- the adjustment component 43 of the second processing part is controlled to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the first processing part, so as to reach the preset range of the target position, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, and reducing the center coordinate error;
- the adjustment component 43 of the first processing part is controlled to drive the first processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the second processing part, so as to reach the preset range of the target position, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, and reducing the center coordinate error; when both the first processing part and the
- FIG18 is a flow chart of a layout method of a circuit board in a circuit board layout according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board layout is divided into a plurality of processing areas, as shown in FIG18 , and the layout method includes the following steps:
- Step S601 obtaining the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction, and obtaining the number of processing areas in the entire layout of the circuit board.
- the entire layout of the circuit board is layouted according to the acquired layout quantity of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas in the entire layout of the circuit board.
- Step S602 when the quotient of the layout quantity and the number of processing areas is an integer, a first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X is 4, and the number of processing areas is 2.
- the quotient of the two is an integer, then the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- a first preset typesetting method is used to typeset the circuit board to be typeset, including: obtaining coordinate information of a circuit board motherboard in the circuit board to be typeset, a preset spacing distance and an offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset, wherein the offset distance is determined based on the coordinate information of the circuit boards in adjacent processing areas; and typeset the circuit board to be typeset based on the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance.
- the coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typeset, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area.
- the coordinate information X0Y0 of the circuit board mother, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the preset spacing distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset is set according to actual needs, and the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area.
- the coordinate information of the first circuit board is determined, for example, according to the distance between the first circuit board X0Y0 and the first circuit board X2Y0 in the processing area A and the processing area B in the first direction X, and the circuit boards to be typed are typed according to the obtained coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typed, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typed, so that the typesetting is relatively uniform, and a reasonable number of circuit boards to be processed are allocated to each processing area, which improves the rationality of the whole-page typesetting, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the whole page of the circuit board, and thus improves the output efficiency of the whole page of circuit boards per unit area.
- Step S603 when the quotient of the layout quantity and the number of processing areas is not an integer, a second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X is 5, and the number of processing areas is 2.
- the quotient of the two is a non-integer, then the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- a second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, including: obtaining coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the circuit board to be layouted, and a preset spacing distance and an offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be layouted, wherein the offset distance is determined based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area, and the first circuit board is the first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X; and layout the circuit board to be layouted based on the coordinate information of the circuit board mother, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance.
- the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard in the first direction X, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X.
- the coordinate information X0Y0 of the circuit board motherboard, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the preset spacing distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset is set according to actual needs, and the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area in the first direction X.
- the coordinate information of the first first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X is determined, for example, by the distance between the first circuit board X0Y0 and the first circuit board X3Y0 in the processing area A and the processing area B in the first direction X.
- the circuit boards to be typed are typed according to the obtained coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typed, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typed, which can ensure that the typesetting is relatively uniform, and each processing area is allocated a reasonable number of circuit boards to be processed, which improves the rationality of the whole-page typesetting, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the whole page of the circuit board, and thus improves the output efficiency of the whole page of circuit boards per unit area.
- the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board layout of the embodiment of the present application if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is an integer, the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, and if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- computer-readable media include the following: an electrical connection portion with one or more wirings (electronic device), a portable computer disk box (magnetic device), a random access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable and editable read-only memory (EPROM or flash memory), an optical fiber device, and a portable compact disk read-only memory (CDROM).
- the computer-readable medium may even be paper or other suitable medium on which the program is printed, since the program may be obtained electronically, for example, by optically scanning the paper or other medium and then editing, interpreting or otherwise processing in a suitable manner if necessary, and then stored in a computer memory.
- the processing equipment 100a can be a circuit board operating equipment such as drilling equipment, molding equipment, laser processing equipment, AOI inspection equipment, etc., and the above-mentioned equipment can all apply the adjustment device 10a and control method of the embodiment of the present application, and no limitation is made here.
- the processing equipment 100a includes: a crossbeam 50a, multiple processing components 60a and an adjustment device 10a.
- the processing equipment 100a also includes a machine platform, which includes a processing platform and a machine base.
- the processing platform is arranged on the machine base, and the processing platform can move along a second direction (refer to the Y direction in the accompanying drawing).
- the processing platform has a processing station for placing the workpiece to be processed; the crossbeam 50a is arranged on the machine base, and the crossbeam 50a is located above the processing platform.
- a plurality of processing components 60a are arranged on the crossbeam 50a at intervals along a first direction (refer to the X direction in the attached drawings), the processing components 60a are suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed, the adjustment device 10a is connected between the processing components 60a and the crossbeam 50a, and the adjustment device 10a is at least used to adjust the position of the corresponding processing components 60a in a second direction, the second direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a moves, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- the processing component 60a includes a bottom plate 61a and a processing axis 62a
- the adjustment device 10a connects the crossbeam 50a and the bottom plate 61a
- the processing axis 62a is arranged on the bottom plate 61a and can move along a third direction (refer to the up and down direction in the attached drawings), and the processing axis 62a is suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed; the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the third direction is the center of gravity direction (refer to the up and down direction in the accompanying drawing), so that the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a can move along the center of gravity direction, which can reduce the decrease in processing accuracy caused by the influence of the gravity of the processing axis 62a itself, so that the processing component 60a has higher processing accuracy and improves the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- At least two processing components 60a can be adjusted to the top of the processing station first, so that the processing station corresponds to at least two processing components 60a, and then the distance between two adjacent ones of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station is adjusted to the preset distance, and then the adjustment device 10a is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, and the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to within the second preset error range, and then all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station.
- both the maximum value of the first preset error and the maximum value of the second preset error range are not greater than the error allowed by the machining accuracy of the workpiece to be machined.
- the efficiency of processing the workpiece to be processed can be improved; since the processing components 60a are all arranged on the beam 50a, and the adjusting device 10a can adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of the plurality of processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the plurality of processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within the second preset error range, so that the processing accuracy of the plurality of processing axes 62a on the same workpiece to be processed can be ensured, the production quality can be ensured, the production cost can be reduced, and the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a can be improved.
- the adjusting device 10a adjusts the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is not changed.
- the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or when the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to within the second preset error range, it is not necessary to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction again, which can improve the adjustment efficiency and the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the number of adjusting devices 10a and processing components 60a is the same and corresponds one to one, and each adjusting device 10a independently adjusts the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction. It is possible to achieve precise adjustment of the position of each processing component 60a in the second direction, making the position adjustment methods of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction more diverse and improving the adjustment efficiency.
- the actual position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be detected by the detection module of the processing equipment 100a (for example, the detection module can be a tool setting instrument of the processing equipment), and the positions of the remaining processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted based on the detected actual position of the processing axis 62a in the second direction;
- the detection module can be used to detect the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the next processing component 60a in the second direction, adjust the position of the previous processing component 60a in the second direction, and adjust the position of the previous processing axis 62a in the second direction, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency.
- the position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be preset in advance in the control system of the processing equipment 100a.
- a position reference can be preset in the second direction (for example, this position reference can be the middle value of the positions of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction as the position reference), and all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to move toward this position reference. This reduces the total distance of movement of all processing components 60a in the second direction, reduces the adjustment time of all processing components 60a in the second direction, and improves the adjustment efficiency.
- the number of adjusting devices 10a is less than the number of processing components 60a, and each adjusting device 10a independently adjusts the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction.
- the processing components provided with adjusting devices 10a can be arranged at intervals between multiple processing components 60a not provided with adjusting devices 10a.
- the actual position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be detected by the detection module of the processing equipment 100a (for example, the detection module can be a tool setting instrument of the processing equipment), and the positions of the remaining processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted based on the average value of the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the processing components 60a directly connected to the beam 50a in the second direction; in this way, the number of adjustment devices 10a of the processing equipment 100a can be reduced, thereby reducing the production cost of the processing equipment 100a.
- the detection module of the processing equipment 100a for example, the detection module can be a tool setting instrument of the processing equipment
- two adjacent processing components 60a form a group, which is divided into 6 groups in total. All processing components 60a in each group process the upper circuit board of a processing station at the same time.
- the processing components 60a in each group include a first processing component and a second processing component. Any one of the first processing component or the second processing component is provided with an adjustment device 10a, and the other does not need an adjustment device 10a. When the first processing component is not provided with an adjustment device, the second processing component is provided with an adjustment device 10a.
- the adjustment device 10a of the second processing component adjusts the second processing component to the same position or error range of the first processing component in the second direction, so that the replication processing accuracy between the first processing component and the second processing component can be ensured, while improving efficiency, saving the number of adjustment devices 10a and thus reducing costs.
- the adjustment device 10a includes a locking mechanism 3a, which locks the processing assembly 60a at least in the second direction.
- the processing assembly 60a can be locked by the locking mechanism 3a, and then all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece.
- the adjusting device 10a includes an adjusting state and a locking state.
- the locking state the locking mechanism 3a locks the processing component 60a; in the adjusting state, the locking mechanism 3a unlocks the processing component 60a, and the adjusting device 10a is suitable for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction.
- the adjusting device 10a When it is necessary to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the adjusting device 10a can be adjusted to the unlocked state, and then the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the corresponding processing component 60a. After the corresponding processing component 60a is adjusted into place in the second direction, the adjusting device 10a is adjusted to the locked state to lock the processing component 60a and fix the processing component 60a relative to the beam 50a in the second direction.
- the adjusting device 10a can be used to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction.
- the processing component 60a can be fixed relative to the beam 50a in the second direction to prevent the processing component 60a from being displaced relative to the beam 50a in the second direction, which would cause a decrease in the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a. This can improve the overall performance of the adjusting device and ensure the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting device 10a also includes an adjusting device 1a, the adjusting device 1a includes an adjusting slider 11a and an adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a and the adjusting slide rail 12a are used to guide the movement of the processing component 60a, for example, the adjusting slide rail 12a can limit the adjusting slider 11a in a direction perpendicular to the extension of the adjusting slide rail 12a, so that the adjusting slider 11a can only move along the direction of extension of the adjusting slide rail 12a.
- the adjusting slider 11a may be a square structure, and the position of the processing assembly 60a connected to the adjusting slider 11a in the second direction is changed by changing the position of the adjusting slider 11a on the adjusting rail 12a.
- the adjusting slider 11a and the adjusting rail 12a cooperate with each other to prevent the processing component 60a from being displaced in the first direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the processing component 60a to a predetermined position, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting slider 11a when the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a only moves in the second direction, that is, the adjusting rail 12a extends along the second direction, wherein the second direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a moves, and the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a moves.
- the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction can be directly adjusted by adjusting the slider 11a, which has a simple and reliable structure, is easy to install, and is easy to adjust.
- the guide rail 24a and the guide slider 25a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction, and prevent the driving mechanism 2a from deviating in the first direction or the third direction when moving in the second direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction. Since the third direction is parallel to the movement direction of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a, the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected by calculating the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a in the second direction of the processing component 60a; and the processing axis 62a can move in the third direction, so that after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction can be adjusted to compensate for the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction. In this way, the length of the adjusting rail 12a can be shortened, the adjustment range of the adjusting slider 11a can be larger, and it is
- the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
- the angle between the adjustment direction in which the adjusting device 10a adjusts the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction and the second direction is not less than 45° and not greater than 90°.
- the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction is set to be greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
- the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction is calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction. This can reduce the error between the calculated moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction and the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction.
- the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjustment device 10a for position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the adjusting device 10a can move in the first direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted, the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the first direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the adjusting device 10a in the first direction.
- the length of the adjusting slide rail 12a can be shortened, the adjustment range of the adjusting slider 11a can be larger, and it is convenient to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction through the adjusting slider 11a.
- the movement distance of the processing assembly 60a in the first direction is greater than the movement distance in the second direction.
- the angle between the adjustment direction in which the adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction and the first direction is not less than 45° and not more than 90°.
- the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the first direction is set to be greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
- the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction is calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction. This can reduce the error between the calculated moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction and the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction.
- the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjustment device 10a for position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the moving distance in the first direction is 1 ⁇ m-150 ⁇ m
- the moving distance in the third direction is 1 ⁇ m-150 ⁇ m
- the moving distance in the second direction is 1 ⁇ m-100 ⁇ m.
- each processing component 60a has different position deviations due to assembly errors.
- the position deviation of adjacent processing components 60a may be in any possible numerical range such as 1 ⁇ m, 100 ⁇ m, 1mm, 10mm, etc.
- the adjustment device 10a can control the accuracy of its position deviation within 1 ⁇ m-3 ⁇ m, thereby improving the accuracy of the copy processing of adjacent processing components 60a.
- the adjustment device 10a further includes: a transverse slide rail 41a and a transverse slide seat 42a, the transverse slide rail is arranged on the crossbeam 50a, and the transverse slide rail 41a extends along the first direction, the transverse slide seat 42a is arranged on the transverse slide rail 41a, and the transverse slide seat 42a can slide relative to the transverse slide rail, and the adjustment slide rail 12a is arranged on the transverse slide seat 42a.
- the transverse slide rail 41a can limit the transverse slide seat 42a in the second direction and the third direction, so that the transverse slide seat 42a can only move in the first direction.
- the transverse slide 42a and the transverse slide rail 41a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the processing component 60a, and prevent the processing component 60a from being offset in the second direction or the third direction when moving in the first direction, so that the adjustment device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjustment device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjustment device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move.
- a driving mechanism 2a which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move.
- the adjustment slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a
- the adjustment slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis 62a of the processing assembly 60a moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the driving mechanism 2a can drive the processing assembly 60a to move by driving the adjustment slider 11a to move along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a. In this way, the processing assembly 60a can be driven to move more conveniently, and the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction can be adjusted more conveniently, thereby improving the overall performance of the adjustment device 10a.
- the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, and the adjusting slider 11a is connected to the processing component 60a. Therefore, when the driving mechanism 2a drives the processing component 60a to move, the processing component 60a will move in the third direction while moving in the second direction.
- the distance moved by the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the movement distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the processing axis 62a is movable in the third direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the movement distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, and the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
- the driving mechanism 2a includes an adjusting screw 21a and an adjusting seat 22a, the adjusting seat 22a has an adjusting screw hole adapted to the adjusting screw 21a, and the adjusting seat 22a is connected to the processing assembly 60a, for example, one end of the adjusting screw 21a is threadedly matched with the adjusting screw hole, and the other end of the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the transverse slide 42a.
- the adjusting seat 22a can be driven to move by rotating the adjusting screw 21a so that the adjusting seat 22a moves away from or close to the transverse slide 42a, thereby driving the processing assembly 60a to move.
- the processing assembly 60a will move along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a when the adjusting screw 21a drives the adjusting seat 22a to move, and the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction will change, so that the adjusting device 10a can adjust the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction, which has a simple structure and is easy to use.
- the adjusting screw 21a By setting the adjusting screw 21a to cooperate with the adjusting seat 22a in a threaded manner, the adjusting screw 21a can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 22a to move and drive the processing component 60a to move. In this way, the movement distance of the driving processing component 60a can be controlled more accurately, and the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting device 10a can be improved, so that the errors between the positions of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction are smaller, so that the processing equipment 100a can process the workpiece more accurately and improve the processing quality.
- the adjusting screw 21a extends along the third direction.
- the adjusting screw 21a is arranged to extend along the third direction, so that the size occupied by the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction can be smaller, and the space between the processing assembly 60a and the crossbeam 50a can be cleverly utilized, so that the structure of the adjusting device 10a is more compact, and the structure of the processing equipment 100a is compact;
- this can also reduce the distance from the beam 50a to the processing component 60a, so that the processing component 60a can be more reliably fixed relative to the beam 50a, preventing the processing component 60a from shaking relative to the beam 50a, improving the processing accuracy of the processing component 60a, ensuring production quality, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move.
- a driving mechanism 2a which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move.
- the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction, and the adjusting slider 11a is connected to the processing component 60a. Therefore, when the driving mechanism 2a drives the processing component 60a to move, the processing component 60a will move in the first direction while moving in the second direction.
- the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the adjusting device 10a is movable in the first direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the adjusting device 10a in the first direction, and the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
- the locking mechanism 3a may include a locking member 31a, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the adjusting screw 21a.
- the locking member 31a In the locked state, the locking member 31a locks the adjusting screw 21a and fixes the adjusting screw 21a relative to the adjusting seat 22a; in the unlocked state, the locking member 31a unlocks the adjusting screw 21a, and the adjusting screw 21a can rotate around its central axis.
- the locking member 31a may be a locking nut. In this way, the locking mechanism 3a can achieve the purpose of locking the processing assembly 60a on the beam 50a, and the structure is simple and easy to use.
- the locking member 31a can also be a pneumatic shaft lock or an electric shaft lock.
- the locking member 31a is electrically connected to the control system, and the control system is suitable for controlling the locking member 31a to lock the adjusting screw 21a and unlock the adjusting screw 21a.
- This facilitates the automatic switching between the locked state and the unlocked state of the adjusting device 10a, and can shorten the switching time of the adjusting device 10a between the locked state and the unlocked state, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency of the adjusting device 10a on the processing component 60a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the driving mechanism 2a further includes a driving member 23a, which is used to drive the adjusting screw 21a to rotate, for example, the driving member 23a can be a motor.
- the adjusting device 10a can be electrically controlled to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, which can reduce the work intensity of the operator, improve the adjustment efficiency of the adjusting device 10a to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improve the overall performance of the adjusting device 10a, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the driving member 23a can be arranged on the transverse slide 42a and located on the upper side of the beam 50a.
- the space on the upper side of the beam 50a can be reasonably utilized to place the driving member 23a, and there is no need to set an avoidance space between the processing component 60a and the beam 50a to avoid the driving member 23a.
- the distance between the processing component 60a and the beam 50a can be made smaller, and the processing component 60a can be reliably fixed relative to the beam 50a.
- the vibration of the processing component 60a relative to the beam 50a can be effectively prevented, thereby improving the processing accuracy of the workpiece to be processed, improving the production quality, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the driving mechanism 2a further includes a guide rail 24a and a guide slider 25a
- the guide rail 24a is disposed on the transverse slide 42a, and the guide rail 24a extends along the second direction
- the guide slider 25a is slidably disposed on the guide rail 24a
- the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the guide rail 24a.
- the guide rail 24a can limit the guide in the first direction and the third direction, so that the guide slider 25a can only move in the second direction.
- the guide rail 24a and the guide slider 25a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction, and prevent the driving mechanism 2a from deviating in the first direction or the third direction when moving in the second direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move, and the adjusting slide rail 12a extends along a second direction, which is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a.
- the driving mechanism 2a includes an adjusting screw 21a and an adjusting seat 22a, the adjusting seat 22a has an adjusting screw hole, and the adjusting seat 22a is connected to the processing assembly 60a, the adjusting screw 21a extends along the second direction, one end of the adjusting screw 21a is threadedly engaged with the adjusting screw hole, and the other end of the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the adjusting slide rail 12a.
- the adjusting seat 22a can be driven to move by rotating the adjusting screw 21a to move the adjusting seat 22a away from or close to the transverse slide 42a, thereby driving the processing assembly 60a to move.
- the processing assembly 60a Since the adjustment rail 12a extends along the second direction, when the driving mechanism drives the processing assembly 60a to move, the processing assembly 60a will move along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a (ie, the second direction). In this way, the movement distance of the processing assembly 60a can be directly read, and the structure is simple and easy to use.
- the processing equipment 100a has at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components 60a; the at least two adjacent processing components 60a include a first processing component 60a and a second processing component 60a, and the adjustment device 10a is used to adjust the positions of the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the second direction so that the spacing between the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the second direction is within a second preset error range, and the second direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing station may also correspond to two adjacent processing components 60a, three adjacent processing components 60a, four adjacent processing components 60a, five adjacent processing components 60a, or six adjacent processing components 60a.
- the processing device 100a is described below based on the case where the processing station corresponds to two adjacent processing components 60a.
- the two adjacent processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station can be adjusted to the top of the processing station first, and then the position of one of the processing components 60a in the first direction is used as a reference to move the other processing component 60a along the first direction to adjust the spacing between the two processing components 60a to a preset spacing; then the adjustment device 10a is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, and the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of the two processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or the error between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the two processing components 60a in the second direction is adjusted to within the second preset error range, and then the two processing axes 62a are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station.
- the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction to be the same, or the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction to within a second preset error range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy of multiple processing axes 62a for the same workpiece to be processed, ensuring production quality, improving the efficiency of processing the workpiece to be processed, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing equipment 100a includes: a control system, the control system is used to:
- the control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the positions of the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the first direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to within a first preset error range;
- the control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the positions of the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the second direction to adjust the actual spacing between the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the second direction to within a second preset error range.
- the adjustment device 10a can realize automatic adjustment of the position of the processing component 60a, thereby improving the degree of automation of the processing equipment 100a, reducing the workload of operators, improving the adjustment efficiency of the positions of the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjusting device 10a is connected between a processing assembly 60a and a beam 50a of a processing device 100a, and the adjusting device 10a is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move in at least a second direction.
- the control method includes:
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then determine the position range to which all processing components 60a can be adjusted, and select a position in this position range as the working position coordinates of all processing components 60a in the second direction.
- the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then determine the position range to which all processing components 60a can be adjusted, and select a position in this position range as the working position coordinates of all processing components 60a in the second direction.
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing component 60a to move in the second direction, adjusts the processing component 60a to the working coordinate position, or adjusts the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a and the working position coordinates to within the second preset error.
- the actual position coordinates of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be consistent, or the errors between the actual position coordinates of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjustment device 10a is movable along a first direction, the first direction is parallel to the direction in which the beam 50a extends, and the control method includes:
- the control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the first direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then use the actual position coordinates of one of the processing components 60a in the first direction as a reference, and calculate the working position coordinates of the remaining processing components 60a according to the preset spacing between the processing components 60a.
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing component 60a to move in the first direction, adjusts the processing component 60a to the working position coordinates or adjusts the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a and the working position coordinates to within the second preset error.
- the actual spacing of the multiple processing components 60a in the first direction can be adjusted to the preset spacing, or the error between the actual spacing of the multiple processing components 60a in the first direction and the preset spacing can be adjusted to within the first preset error range, so that the multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the control method includes:
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing assembly 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction to the working position coordinates;
- the control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is first adjusted, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted.
- the adjustment amplitude of the position of the processing component 60a is small each time, which can prevent the processing component 60a from moving in multiple directions and causing the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment to be inaccurate.
- the control system can accurately and reliably adjust the processing component 60a to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency, improving the production efficiency, reducing the production cost, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the control method includes:
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted.
- the adjustment amplitude of the position of the processing component 60a is small each time, which can prevent the processing component 60a from moving in multiple directions and causing the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment to be inaccurate.
- the control system can accurately and reliably adjust the processing component 60a to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency, improving the production efficiency, reducing the production cost, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the control method includes:
- control and adjustment device 10a While the control and adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction, the control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the first direction and the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- Simultaneously adjusting the position of the processing axis in the first direction and the second direction can shorten the adjustment time of the control system for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, improve the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the position of the processing component 60a, improve production efficiency, and reduce production costs.
- control method after confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates, the control method further includes:
- the processing axis is driven to move in the third direction to compensate for the distance moved by the processing assembly 60a in the third direction.
- the position errors of the machining axis in the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are all within the machining error range, thereby ensuring the machining accuracy of the machining equipment 100a for the workpiece.
- the control method includes:
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing assembly 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates;
- the control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- the processing component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and in the first direction, when the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted, the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction will also change to a certain extent.
- the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted first, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted. There is no need to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction again, which can shorten the adjustment time of the control system for adjusting the corresponding position of the processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, improve the adjustment efficiency of the position of the processing component 60a, improve production efficiency, and reduce production costs.
- the processing equipment 100a includes a machine table, a crossbeam 50a and a plurality of processing components 60a, the machine table includes a processing platform and a machine base, the processing platform is arranged on the machine base, and the processing platform can move along the second direction, the processing platform has at least one processing station for placing the workpiece to be processed, and each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components.
- the crossbeam 50a is arranged on the machine base, and the crossbeam 50a is located above the processing platform; the plurality of processing components 60a are arranged on the crossbeam 50a at intervals along the first direction, and the processing component 60a includes a processing shaft 62a for processing the workpiece to be processed, and the processing shaft 62a can move along the third direction.
- the adjusting device 10a is connected between the processing assembly 60a and the crossbeam 50a of the processing equipment 100a, and the adjusting device 10a can move in a first direction, and the adjusting device 10a is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move at least in a second direction.
- the adjusting device 10a can be electrically connected to a control system, and the control system can control the adjusting device 10a to adjust the position of the corresponding processing assembly 60a in the first direction.
- at least the adjacent processing assembly 60a includes a first processing assembly, and at least the remaining processing assembly 60a of the adjacent processing assembly 60a is a second processing assembly
- the processing method includes:
- the control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range;
- the control and adjustment device 10a drives the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within a second preset error range;
- the processing axes 62a of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing stations are controlled to process the workpieces to be processed.
- the number of components 60a that can be processed simultaneously at each processing station can be determined based on the processing features of the workpiece to be processed, and the predetermined spacing between the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction (for example, the predetermined spacing can be the spacing between two identical processing features of the workpiece to be processed in the first direction) can be confirmed.
- the predetermined spacing can be the spacing between two identical processing features of the workpiece to be processed in the first direction
- the first preset error range in the first direction and the second preset error range in the second direction of the first processing component and all the second processing components can be confirmed.
- the actual position coordinates of the first processing component and the second processing component in the first direction can be detected first, and then it is determined whether the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing is within a first preset error range. If not, the positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction are adjusted to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to within the first preset error range;
- the positions of the first processing assembly and the second processing assembly corresponding to the processing station in the second direction are adjusted to adjust the spacing between the actual positions of the first processing assembly and the second processing assembly corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within the second preset error range;
- the processing axes 62a of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed.
- multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure processing accuracy, ensure production quality, improve the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a, reduce production costs, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction can be achieved.
- This allows the operator to avoid manually adjusting the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, facilitates the automatic adjustment of the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, and facilitates the automatic control of adjusting the spacing of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within the second preset error range.
- This can improve the automation performance of the processing equipment 100a, reduce the operating intensity of the operator, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the adjustment device 10a by using the adjustment device 10a to adjust the error between the actual spacing and the predetermined spacing of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction to a first preset error range, and by using the adjustment device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to a second preset error range, multiple processing components 60a can be used to process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the automation performance of the processing equipment 100a, reducing the operating intensity of the operating personnel, improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing method further includes:
- Detect the actual positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction Detect the actual positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction, and determine whether the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction is within a second preset error range.
- control adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing assembly in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing in the first direction of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and the second processing assembly and the predetermined spacing to within the first preset error range;
- control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station and the second processing component in the second direction to within the second preset error range.
- the control system can more accurately calculate the distance that the first processing component and the second processing component need to move, so that the adjustment device 10a can more accurately adjust the position of the first processing component and the second processing component, thereby improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing method includes:
- the adjustment amplitude of the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components is small each time, which can prevent the first processing component and all the second processing components from moving in multiple directions, resulting in inaccurate positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment.
- the control system can accurately and reliably adjust the first processing component and all the second processing components to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving adjustment efficiency, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing method includes:
- the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components are detected multiple times, which can effectively ensure the position accuracy of each first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction and the position accuracy of each second processing component in the second direction, and ensure the processing accuracy of all the first processing components and all the second processing components corresponding to each processing station for processing the same first processing component and all the second processing components, thereby ensuring production quality, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing method before controlling the adjustment device 10a to move in the first direction, the processing method includes:
- the adjustment amplitude of the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components is small each time, which can prevent the first processing component and all the second processing components from moving in multiple directions, resulting in inaccurate positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment.
- the control system can accurately and reliably adjust the first processing component and all the second processing components to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving adjustment efficiency, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the processing method includes:
- the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components are detected multiple times, which can effectively ensure the position accuracy of each first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction and the position accuracy of each second processing component in the second direction, and ensure the processing accuracy of all the first processing components and all the second processing components corresponding to each processing station for processing the same first processing component and all the second processing components, thereby ensuring production quality, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the step of controlling the adjusting device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range includes:
- the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly at the second position can be detected by the detection module first (for example, the control system can directly read the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the control system to obtain the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the second direction), and then the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly are set as the reference coordinates;
- control system can detect the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction through the detection module, calculate the error between the actual position coordinates of each second processing component in the second direction and the reference coordinates, and if it is determined that the errors between the actual position coordinates of all the second processing components in the second direction and the reference coordinates are outside the second preset error, then it is determined that the positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction have been adjusted to the correct position;
- control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction to within the second preset error, and then the second processing component is detected again by the detection module.
- control system determines that the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction is within the second preset error, the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position; if the control system determines that the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction is outside the second preset error, the above steps are repeated until the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position.
- the control system can accurately control the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of one of the second processing components in the second direction, and there is no need to adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction.
- the method is simple, and can improve the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction, thereby improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the step of controlling the adjusting device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range includes:
- the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the first direction can be detected by the detection module (for example, the control system can directly read the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the control system to obtain the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the first direction), and then the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly are set as the reference coordinates;
- control system can detect the actual positions of all the second processing components in the second direction through the detection module, calculate the error between the actual spacing between each second processing component and the first processing component in the first direction and the preset spacing, and if it is determined that the errors between the actual spacing between all the second processing components and the first processing components in the first direction and the preset spacing are all outside the second preset error, then it is determined that the positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction have been adjusted to the correct position;
- control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the first direction to within the first preset error, and then the actual position of the second processing component is detected again by the detection module.
- control system determines that the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the second direction is within the first preset error, the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position; if the control system determines that the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the second direction is outside the first preset error, the above steps are repeated until the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the first direction has been adjusted to the right position.
- the control system can accurately control the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of one of all the second processing components in the first direction, and there is no need to adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the first direction.
- the method is simple, and the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction can be improved, thereby improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b includes an air floating sleeve component 40b, as shown in Figures 33 to 37, and the adjustment component 50b includes: a driving member 54b and an adjustment block 53b.
- the adjustment block 53b is connected between the driving member 54b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and the driving member 54b is suitable for driving the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction; wherein, when the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction, the adjustment block 53b is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b to move along the second direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b can be constructed as a drilling machine, a drilling machine, or a forming machine, etc.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b is taken as a drilling machine as an example below.
- the driving member 54b is installed on the Z-axis base plate 12b of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, and the adjustment block 53b is connected between the driving member 54b and the air floating sleeve assembly.
- the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction
- the adjustment block 53b can drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move along the second direction.
- the first direction may be the Z-axis direction
- the second direction may be the Y-axis direction
- the adjustment block can be driven to move in the Z-axis direction through the driving member 54b, so that the adjustment block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move along the Y-axis direction relative to the Z-axis base plate 12b, and then the air floating sleeve assembly 40b after adjusting the position can reposition the spindle 20b to adjust the machining center of the spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction.
- the machining center of the spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b of the present application may be provided with at least two adjacent spindles 20b, and the two spindles 20b can process the circuit board at the same time to improve the processing efficiency, wherein at least one of the two spindles 20b is guided and positioned by an air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can adjust its position in the Y-axis direction through the adjustment assembly 50b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the adjustment assembly 50b, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b can process a circuit board simultaneously through at least two spindles 20b to improve processing efficiency, and the processing center of the corresponding spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction by adjusting the component 50b, which is beneficial to improve processing accuracy.
- the above-mentioned limitations of the first direction and the second direction and the above-mentioned circuit board are only used for illustration, that is, the circuit board may also be other workpieces to be processed that meet the requirements, and are not limited here.
- the adjustment component 50b for circuit board processing equipment can drive the adjustment block 53b to drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move in the second direction through the movement of the driving member 54b in the first direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b in the second direction, thereby reducing the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the adjustment assembly 50b further includes: a first bracket 51b and a second bracket 52b.
- the first bracket 51b is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b
- the second bracket 52b is connected to the circuit board processing equipment 100b
- a sliding space is defined between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b.
- the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to slide along the first direction in the sliding space. During the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the first direction, it is suitable for driving the first bracket 51b to move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first bracket 51b is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b
- the second bracket 52b is connected to the fixed bracket 10b
- a sliding space is defined between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b.
- the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to slide along the first direction in the sliding space. During the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the first direction, it is suitable for driving the first bracket 51b to move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b are spaced apart and distributed in the second direction to define a sliding space between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b, and the adjustment block 53b is clamped between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b, and when the adjustment block 53b slides along the first direction, the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b to make the first bracket 51b move in the second direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first direction is the Z-axis direction
- the second direction is the Y-axis direction
- the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b, so that the first bracket 51b moves in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b in the Y-axis direction, thereby driving the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then guiding and positioning the corresponding spindle 20b through the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and facilitating the reduction of the absolute coordinate error of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20
- the movement direction of the adjustment block 53b is different from the movement direction of the first bracket 51b, so as to reduce the size of the adjustment component 50b in the first direction and facilitate the miniaturization design of the adjustment component 50b.
- the first bracket 51b is provided with a first mating bevel 513b
- the adjustment block 53b is provided with a second mating bevel 533b.
- the first mating bevel 513b and the second mating bevel 533b are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket 51b to move in a direction away from the second bracket 52b.
- the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction
- the first mating bevel 513b and the second mating bevel 533b slide and cooperate to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b
- the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b.
- the first direction is the Z-axis direction
- the second direction is the Y-axis direction
- the adjustment block 53b when the adjustment block 53b slides downward in the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move along the Y-axis direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is driven to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then the corresponding main shaft 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding main shaft 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent main shaft 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the first bracket 51b is provided with a third mating bevel 514b
- the adjustment block 53b is provided with a fourth mating bevel 534b.
- the third mating bevel 514b and the fourth mating bevel 534b are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block 53b slides upward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket 51b to move toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
- the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction
- the third mating inclined surface 514b and the fourth mating inclined surface 534b slide and cooperate to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b
- the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first direction is the Z-axis direction
- the second direction is the Y-axis direction
- the adjustment block 53b when the adjustment block 53b slides upward in the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b will drive the first bracket 51b to move along the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, and at the same time, it can realize automatic resetting of the first bracket 51b, that is, realize automatic resetting of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, which is conducive to reducing the difficulty of operation.
- the first mating slope 513b, the second mating slope 533b, the third mating slope 514b and the fourth mating slope 534b all extend obliquely toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first mating bevel 513b of the adjustment block 53b presses against the second mating bevel 533b, so that the first bracket 51b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b, and when the adjustment block 53b slides upward along the Z-axis direction, the third mating bevel 514b of the adjustment block 53b presses against the fourth mating bevel 534b, so that the first bracket 51b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
- the first bracket 51 b is provided with a first sliding protrusion 516 b
- the adjustment block 53 b is provided with a first sliding groove 535 b
- the first sliding protrusion 516 b is slidably installed in the first sliding groove 535 b .
- first sliding protrusion 516b into the first sliding groove 535b to slidingly cooperate with the first sliding groove 535b, it is convenient to enhance the connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b, so that the first bracket 51b can slide and cooperate with the adjustment block 53b more stably.
- the first mating bevel 513b and the third mating bevel 514b are respectively two side surfaces of the first sliding protrusion 516b arranged opposite to each other in the second direction
- the second mating bevel 533b and the fourth mating bevel 534b are respectively two inner wall surfaces of the first sliding groove 535b arranged opposite to each other in the second direction.
- the adjustment block 53b can slide in the first direction while driving the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction, thereby realizing the adjustment of the coordinate of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b on the Y-axis.
- a plurality of first sliding protrusions 516 b and a plurality of first sliding grooves 535 b may be provided, and the plurality of first sliding protrusions 516 b and the plurality of first sliding grooves 535 b correspond one to one.
- first sliding protrusions 516b and two first sliding grooves 535b may be provided, the two first sliding protrusions 516b and the two first sliding grooves 535b correspond one to one, and the adjustment block 53b is sandwiched between the two first sliding protrusions 516b.
- connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b can be enhanced, which helps to make the first bracket 51b more stably slideably cooperate with the adjustment block 53b.
- the first bracket 51 b includes a first mounting plate 511 b and a first guide block 512 b .
- the first guide block 512b is connected to the first mounting plate 511b, the first mounting plate 511b is connected to the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the first sliding protrusion 516b is disposed on the first guide block 512b.
- the first mounting plate 511b can be connected to the air floating sleeve support seat 41b by a fixing bolt 515b, and the first guide block 512b is installed on the side of the first mounting plate 511b away from the air floating sleeve support seat 41b.
- the first sliding protrusion 516b can be processed on the first guide block 512b separately, and then the first guide block 512b can be installed on the first mounting plate 511b, which is convenient for reducing the difficulty of setting the first sliding protrusion 516b, and the first guide block 512b is fixed on the first mounting plate 511b, and can be connected to the air floating sleeve support seat 41b through the first mounting plate 511b, so as to increase the force-bearing area of the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, and then when the adjusting block 53b pushes the first guide block 512b, so that the first guide block 512b pushes the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move through the first mounting plate 511b, the force balance of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is ensured.
- connection method between the first mounting plate 511b and the air floating sleeve support seat 41b can also be a snap connection, a plug connection, a bonding connection, or a magnetic connection, which is not limited here.
- the second bracket 52b includes a fixing portion 521b and a guiding portion 522b, the fixing portion 521b is connected to the fixing bracket 10b, and the guiding portion 522b is slidably matched with the adjusting block 53b.
- the second bracket 52b is connected to the fixing bracket 10b, and the guide portion 522b can slide with the adjustment block 53b to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b, thereby facilitating the sliding of the adjustment block 53b.
- connection method between the second bracket 52b and the fixed bracket 10b includes but is not limited to connection by bolts, or snap connection, or plug connection, or bonding connection, or magnetic attraction and the like.
- the guide portion 522b is provided with a second sliding protrusion 523b
- the adjustment block 53b is provided with a second sliding groove 532b
- the second sliding protrusion 523b is slidably installed in the second sliding groove 532b.
- a plurality of second sliding protrusions 523 b and a plurality of second sliding grooves 532 b may be provided, and the plurality of second sliding protrusions 523 b and the plurality of second sliding grooves 532 b may correspond one to one.
- two second sliding protrusions 523b and two second sliding grooves 532b may be provided, the two second sliding protrusions 523b correspond to the two second sliding grooves 532b one by one, and the adjustment block 53b is sandwiched between the two second sliding protrusions 523b.
- connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b can be enhanced, which helps to make the second bracket 52b more stably slideably cooperate with the adjustment block 53b.
- the driving member 54 b is configured as an adjusting bolt, which passes through the through hole 531 b of the adjusting block 53 b and is threadedly engaged with the threaded hole 524 b of the second bracket 52 b.
- the adjustment block 53b can be slidably moved in the Z-axis direction by manually turning the adjustment bolt, that is, changing the degree of fit between the adjustment bolt and the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b, so as to facilitate control of the adjustment block 53b.
- the adjusting block 53b slides downward in the Z-axis direction, and the adjusting block 53b pushes the first bracket 51b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, so that the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves in the Y-axis direction toward and away from the second bracket 52b.
- the user can turn the adjusting bolt to loosen the adjusting bolt, that is, the length of the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b extended by the adjusting bolt is shortened.
- the adjusting block 53b slides upward in the Z-axis direction, and the adjusting block 53b pulls the first bracket 51b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, so that the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves in the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b, thereby realizing the resetting of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b.
- the length of the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b can be changed, thereby controlling the sliding direction of the adjusting block 53b in the Z-axis direction, and then controlling the movement direction of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, which makes it easier to control the adjusting block 53b, that is, the operation is simpler.
- the adjustment assembly 50 b further includes an elastic member 55 b .
- the elastic member 55b is disposed between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b, and in the first direction, the elastic member 55b is suitable for elastically pre-tightening the adjustment block 53b toward the second bracket 52b.
- the elastic member 55 b is constructed as a spring, and the spring is sleeved on the adjusting bolt.
- the elastic member 55b may also be configured as a butterfly spring, which is not limited here.
- the first direction is the Z-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment 100 b
- the second direction is the Y-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment 100 b
- the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular.
- the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b to make the first bracket 51b move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b in the Y-axis direction, thereby driving the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then guiding and positioning the corresponding spindle 20b through the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and facilitating the reduction of the absolute coordinate error of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, or making the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the movement direction of the adjustment block 53b is different from the movement direction of the first bracket 51b, so as to reduce the size of the adjustment component 50b in the Z-axis direction and facilitate the miniaturization design of the adjustment component 50b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 b includes: a fixed bracket 10 b , a main shaft 20 b , a driving structure 30 b , an air floating sleeve assembly 40 b and an adjustment assembly 50 b .
- the driving structure 30b and the main shaft 20b are both installed on the fixed bracket 10b, and the main shaft 20b is movable relative to the fixed bracket 10b.
- the driving structure 30b is connected to the main shaft 20b and is used to drive the main shaft 20b to move along a first direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b.
- the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b is installed on the fixed bracket 10b, and the main shaft 20b floats along the first direction and penetrates the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b.
- the adjustment assembly 50b is an adjustment assembly 50b for circuit board processing equipment of any of the above-mentioned embodiments.
- the adjustment assembly 50b is installed on the fixed bracket 10b and is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b.
- the adjustment assembly 50b is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b to move along a second direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the position of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b can be adjusted in the second direction, thereby driving the spindle 20b to move along the second direction through the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and then adjusting the machining center of the spindle 20b in the second direction to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100 b includes a fixed bracket 10 b , a spindle 20 b , a driving structure 30 b , an air floating sleeve assembly 40 b and an adjustment assembly 50 b .
- the fixed bracket 10b includes a crossbeam 11b and a Z-axis base plate 12b.
- the Z-axis base plate 12b is slidably connected to the crossbeam 11b through a guide rail 13b.
- the main shaft 20b, the driving structure 30b, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, etc. are all installed on the Z-axis base plate 12b.
- the driving structure 30b can be constructed as a driving motor 31b, and the driving motor 31b can be slidably matched with the Z-axis base plate through a guide rail slider 32b.
- the main shaft 20b floats along a first direction and is penetrated by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b. In this way, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be used to guide and position the main shaft 20b, and a processing terminal for processing the circuit board is provided at the lower end of the main shaft 20b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b includes: an air floating sleeve support seat 41b, an air floating sleeve flange 42b, and an air floating sleeve 43b.
- the adjustment component 50b is fixed on the Z-axis base plate 12b to enhance the structural stability of the adjustment component 50b, and in the second direction, the adjustment component 50b is located between the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, the air floating sleeve flange 42b is fixed on the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, and the air floating sleeve 43b is installed on the air floating sleeve flange 42b, so that the adjustment component 50b can adjust the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b in the second direction.
- the sliding direction of the Z-axis base plate 12b relative to the cross beam 11b can be the X-axis direction
- the driving structure 30b can drive the main shaft 20b to move up and down along the first direction relative to the Z-axis base plate 12b to facilitate the placement and processing of circuit boards
- the adjustment component 50b can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the second direction, wherein the first direction can be the Z-axis direction, the second direction can be the Y-axis direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- the driving structure 30b can be used to drive the spindle 20b to move upward so that the circuit board can be placed on the operating table below the processing terminal. Then, in the X-axis direction, the Z-axis base plate 12b can slide relative to the crossbeam 11b to adjust the processing center of the spindle 20b in the X-axis direction, and the adjustment component 50b can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the Y-axis direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b. Then, the air floating sleeve component 40b after adjusting the position can reposition the spindle 20b to adjust the processing center of the spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction. Finally, the driving structure 30b drives the spindle 20b to move downward to realize drilling and drilling processing of the circuit board through the processing terminal.
- the machining center of the spindle 20b can be adjusted in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction respectively, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b of the present application may be provided with at least two adjacent spindles 20b, and the two spindles 20b can process the circuit board at the same time to improve the processing efficiency, wherein at least one of the two spindles 20b is guided and positioned by an air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can adjust its position in the Y-axis direction through the adjustment assembly 50b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the adjustment assembly 50b, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b can process a circuit board simultaneously through at least two spindles 20b to improve processing efficiency, and the processing center of the corresponding spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction by adjusting the component 50b, which is beneficial to improve processing accuracy.
- the above-mentioned limitations of the first direction and the second direction and the above-mentioned circuit board are only used for illustration, that is, the circuit board may also be other workpieces to be processed that meet the requirements, and are not limited here.
- its driving component 50 can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the second direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b, so that the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b can be adjusted in the second direction, thereby driving the spindle 20b to move along the second direction through the air floating sleeve component 40b, and then adjusting the machining center of the spindle 20b in the second direction, so as to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the adjustment component 50b is installed between the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and at least a portion of the adjustment component 50b can be integrated into the Z-axis base plate 12b, so that the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b can be used to shield the adjustment component 50b, and it is convenient to reduce the impact of the setting of the adjustment component 50b on the overall size of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, which is conducive to the miniaturization design of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100b further includes: an image detection tool.
- the image detection tool can be used in conjunction with the adjustment component 50b, and the image detection tool can detect the center coordinates of the main shaft 20b in real time.
- the center coordinate of the main shaft 20b can be detected in real time by the image detection tooling to ensure that the adjustment is in place, avoid adjustment errors such as adjustment transition, and help improve the adjustment accuracy.
- the present application also proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
- the control method is applicable to the circuit board processing equipment 100b in the above embodiment, the circuit board processing equipment 100b includes an air floating sleeve assembly 40b and an adjustment assembly 50b, the adjustment assembly 50b includes a driving member 54b and an adjustment block 53b, and as shown in FIG38, the control method includes:
- the circuit board to be processed may be a circuit board, and the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed may be detected by an image detection tool to obtain the position coordinates of the actual processing center in the second direction, so as to determine the movement distance of the driving member 54b driving the adjustment block 53b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to ensure the adjustment accuracy.
- the adjusting block 53b can be driven to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the second direction, and then the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves along the second direction relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center, so as to reduce the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be aligned with the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, so that the corresponding spindle 20b can be guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b, so as to reduce the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be aligned with the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, thereby reducing the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or making the machining error within an allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
- controlling the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to move so that the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center includes:
- the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction away from the actual machining center.
- the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the Z-axis bottom plate 12b, so as to realize the automatic reset of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b.
- the adjusting block 53b of the driving member 54b slides downward along the first direction
- the adjusting block 53b drives the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the actual machining center.
- the adjusting block 53b drives the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the position corresponding to the actual machining center, so as to achieve the alignment of the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b with the actual machining center, thereby facilitating the reduction of machining errors.
- the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the second direction can be adjusted by controlling the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to rise or fall in the first direction, so as to reduce the difficulty of adjustment.
- circuit board processing device 100 c The following describes a circuit board processing device 100 c according to an embodiment of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c includes: a bed 10, a processing platform 20c and a plurality of processing parts 30c, the bed 10 has a first beam 11c, the processing platform 20c is arranged on the upper surface of the bed 10, the processing platform 20c is suitable for supporting the workpiece to be processed, and the workpiece to be processed can be a circuit board, the plurality of processing parts 30c are all arranged on the first beam 11c and located above the processing platform 20c, and the plurality of processing parts 30c are arranged along the first direction X of the bed 10, at least one processing part 30c includes a processing assembly 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjustment assembly 33c, the processing assembly 31c is installed on the mounting frame 32c, and the mounting frame 32c is movably installed on the bed 10.
- the mounting frame 32c can be directly and movably installed on the bed 10, or the mounting frame 32c can be indirectly and movably installed on the bed 10 through other components.
- the adjusting assembly 33c is in driving connection with the mounting frame 32c.
- the adjusting assembly 32c is used to drive the mounting frame 31 and the processing assembly 31c to move as a whole along the second direction Y of the bed 1.
- the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
- a processing platform 20c is provided on the upper surface of the bed 10, and the processing platform 20c is used to place the processed parts such as circuit boards.
- Twelve processing parts 30c are arranged in sequence on the first beam 11c, wherein every two processing parts 30c form a group, which are divided into 6 groups of processing parts 30c in total, and each group of processing parts 30c can be used to process the same circuit board to be processed.
- At least one processing section 30c includes a processing assembly 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjusting assembly 33c, the processing assembly 31c is mounted on the mounting frame 32c, the mounting frame 32c is movably mounted on the bed 10, and the adjusting assembly 33c is used to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10, so that the processing assembly 31c follows the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10 under the drive of the adjusting assembly 33c, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the second direction Y of the bed 10.
- two adjacent processing sections 30c in each group are used When processing the same circuit board to be processed, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing components 31c in the two adjacent processing parts 30c.
- the two adjacent processing parts 30c are arranged in sequence along the first direction X of the vehicle body.
- the consistency adjustment of the processing components 31c in the second direction Y can be achieved by adjusting the adjustment components 33c of the two adjacent processing parts 30c, thereby ensuring the consistency of the coordinates of the two adjacent processing components 31c.
- Similar adjustment strategies can be adopted for other groups of processing parts 30c, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing components 31c, reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, and improving the processing accuracy.
- At least one processing part 30c includes a processing component 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjustment component 33c.
- the processing component 31c is installed on the mounting frame 32c, and the mounting frame 32c can be movably installed on the bed 10.
- the adjustment component 33c can be used to drive the processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component 31c along the second direction Y of the bed 10.
- the center coordinate error of different processing components 31c can be reduced, which is beneficial to reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100c and improving the processing accuracy.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c has at least one processing station, and each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 30c.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board.
- the number of processing stations is set according to actual needs.
- Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two adjacent processing parts 30c, and the number of processing parts 30c provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 30c.
- a circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 30c provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time.
- multiple processing parts 30c can process one circuit board at the same time, thereby improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100c per unit time and unit area. It is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, which is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- each processing portion 30c can be movably disposed on the first crossbeam 11c, and each processing portion 30c can move relative to the first crossbeam 11c along the first direction X. That is, each processing portion 30c is mounted on the first crossbeam 11c of the bed 10 , and is sequentially spaced and distributed along the first direction X, and each processing portion 30c can move along the first crossbeam 11c in the first direction X, thereby realizing flexible adjustment of the position of the processing portion 30c in the first direction X, and the first crossbeam 11c can play a certain supporting and guiding role in the movement of the processing portion 30c, so that the adjustment of the processing portion 30c is more stable.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c includes a control system, which is configured to control the adjustment component 33c to drive the corresponding processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y, and also to control the corresponding processing part 30c to move along the first direction X.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 33c to drive the corresponding processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different processing components 31c, reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing components 31c, and reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, thereby improving the processing accuracy; the control system can also control the corresponding processing part 30c to move along the first direction X.
- control system can control the processing parts 30c to move along the first direction X respectively to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 30c along the first direction X, so that the two processing parts 30c can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board.
- the adjustment assembly 33c may include: a first driving member 331c and a first slider 332c, the first slider 332c is fixedly connected to the mounting frame 32c and slidably disposed on the first beam 11c, it should be noted that the first slider 332c may be directly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c, or the first slider 332c may be indirectly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c through other components.
- the first driving member 331c is used to drive the first slider 332c to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y.
- the first slider 332c is indirectly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c, and the first driving member 331c is used to drive the first slider 332c to move along the second direction Y.
- the first driving member 331c can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- the first slider 332c is fixed with a nut, and the first driving member 331c can be connected to the nut of the first slider 332c through a screw.
- the screw drives the nut to drive the first slider 332c to move along the second direction Y, which can ensure that the mounting frame 32c fixedly connected thereto moves smoothly along the second direction Y. Therefore, through the coordinated use of the first driving member 331c and the first slider 332c, the stability of the position adjustment of the processing component 31c can be guaranteed, and the direction deviation of the processing component 31c when it moves along the second direction Y can be avoided.
- each processing portion 30c may further include: a second driving member 34c, the second driving member 34c is transmission-connected to the mounting frame 32c, and the second driving member 34c is used to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the first direction X.
- the second driving member 34c can be, but is not limited to, a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- the second driving member 34c and the mounting frame 32c can be connected by transmission through a gear or a rack. No specific limitation is made here, as long as the transmission between the second driving member 34c and the mounting frame 32c can be realized.
- the mounting frame 32c is equipped with a rack connected with the gear, and the second driving member 34c is fixedly installed on the first beam 11c. It should be noted that the second driving member 34c can be directly installed on the first beam 11c, or the second driving member 34c can be indirectly installed on the first beam 11c through other parts.
- the second driving member 34c is used to drive the gear to rotate, the gear rotation drives the rack to move along the first direction X, and the rack drives the mounting frame 32c to move along the first direction X, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the first direction X. Therefore, by setting the second driving member 34c, the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the first direction X is realized, which is convenient for processing the workpiece.
- the circuit board processing equipment 100c may further include a first guide portion 40c and a second guide portion 50c.
- the first guide portion 40c is disposed on the first beam 11c. It should be noted that the first guide portion 40c may be directly mounted on the first beam 11c, or the first guide portion 40c may be indirectly mounted on the first beam 11c through other components.
- the first slider 332c may be slidably disposed on the second guide portion 50c, and the mounting frame 32c may be moved along the first direction X through the guiding cooperation of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c.
- the first guide portion 40c is fixedly mounted on the first crossbeam 11c, and the second guide portion 50c is installed in cooperation with the first guide portion 40c.
- the mounting frame 32c can move along the first direction X under the guiding action of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c.
- the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c it is possible to ensure that the mounting frame 32c moves smoothly along the first direction X, avoid directional deviation during the movement, and improve the stability of the movement of the processing assembly 31c in the first direction X.
- the first slider 332c is slidably arranged on the second guide portion 50c, thereby realizing the movement of the processing assembly 31c along the second direction Y on the second guide portion 50c. Therefore, by using the first guide portion 40c, the second guide portion 50c and the first slider 332c in combination, the position adjustment of the processing component 31c in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be achieved simultaneously, and the center coordinate deviation of the multiple processing parts 30c in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
- one of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c is a guide block, and the other of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c is a guide rail.
- the guide block is slidably disposed on the guide rail, and the guide rail extends along the first direction X.
- the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c are correspondingly arranged. If the first guide portion 40c is arranged as a guide block, the second guide portion 50c is arranged as a guide rail. If the first guide portion 40c is arranged as a guide rail, the second guide portion 50c is arranged as a guide block, and the guide block can slide along the guide rail in the first direction X. Therefore, the smooth movement of the processing assembly 31c in the first direction X can be achieved by the coordinated use of the guide block and the guide rail, and the guide block and the guide rail have simple structures and are easy to assemble.
- the end surface of the first slider 332c opposite to the second guide portion 50c has a first guide structure 60c
- the end surface of the second guide portion 50c opposite to the first slider 332c has a second guide structure 70c
- the first guide structure 60c and the second guide structure 70c cooperate to guide and move the mounting frame 32c along the second direction Y.
- first slider 332c and the second guide portion 50c form a first guide structure 60c
- a second guide structure 70c is provided between the second guide portion 50c and the first slider 332c.
- the second guide structure 70c can move along the second direction Y in the first guide structure 60c.
- the first guide structure 60c and the second guide structure 70c that cooperate with each other can be set as a cross roller bearing. With such a setting, the cross roller bearing can withstand larger axial force and radial force, ensuring that the movement of the processing component 31c along the second direction Y is smoother, and the spatial layout is simple, which is particularly suitable for short-distance and small-range movement.
- each processing part 30c may also include: a third driving member 35c, the mounting frame 32c includes a second beam 321c and a movable frame 322c, the second beam 321c is fixedly connected to the first slider 332c, the movable frame 322c is movably disposed on the second beam 321c, the spindle of the processing assembly 31c is disposed on the movable frame 322c, the third driving member 35c is connected to the movable frame 322c, and the third driving member 35c is used to drive the movable frame 322c to move relative to the second beam 321c along the third direction Z of the bed 10, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
- the second beam 321c is fixedly arranged above the first slider 332c, and the first driving member 331c drives the second beam 321c to move along the second direction Y when driving the first slider 332c.
- the movable frame 322c can only move along the third direction Z of the bed 10 relative to the second beam 321c, and the spindle of the processing assembly 31c is arranged on the movable frame 322c. In this way, the first driving member 331c drives the first slider 332c to realize the movement of the second beam 321c in the second direction Y, thereby realizing the processing assembly 31c.
- the position of the main shaft in the first direction X is adjusted; optionally, the third driving member 35c can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
- the third driving member 35c is connected to the movable frame 322c and is used to drive the movable frame 322c to move along the third direction Z of the bed 10 relative to the second beam 321c.
- the position of the processing component 31c in the third direction Z can be adjusted, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the processing component 31c during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100c.
- the second crossbeam 321c has a guide sleeve 3211c, the axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c is parallel to the third direction Z, and the movable frame 322c has a guide rod 3221c, which is passed through the guide sleeve 3211c.
- the second crossbeam 321c and the movable frame 322c are respectively provided with a guide sleeve 3211c and a guide rod 3221c for use therewith.
- a guide sleeve 3211c and a guide rod 3221c for use therewith.
- four guide sleeves 3211c and four guide rods 3221c are correspondingly arranged.
- the guide rod 3221c is inserted through the guide sleeve 3211c and can move along the axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c.
- the axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c is parallel to the third direction Z.
- Such an arrangement can limit the guide rod 3221c to move along the guide sleeve 3211c in the third direction Z, thereby avoiding the guide rod 3221c from being offset during the movement, ensuring the stability of the movement of the movable frame 322c relative to the second crossbeam 321c, and helping to improve the processing accuracy.
- the movable frame 322c further has a mounting plate 3222c, the mounting plate 3222c is fixedly connected to the guide rod 3221c, and the processing assembly 31c is mounted on the mounting plate 3222c.
- the mounting plate 3222c is horizontally arranged, and the processing assembly 31c and the guide rod 3221c are fixedly installed on the mounting plate 3222c along the third direction Z.
- the third driving member 35c drives the movable frame 322c to move
- the guide rod 3221c moves along the guide sleeve 3211c in the third direction Z, thereby driving the processing assembly 31c fixedly installed on the mounting plate 3222c to move along the third direction Z.
- Such an arrangement can ensure the stability of the processing assembly 31c when it moves with the movable frame 322c relative to the second crossbeam 321c, avoid the deviation of the processing assembly 31c when it moves along the third direction Z, and is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
- the mounting frame 32c also includes a first bracket 323c and a second bracket 324c, the first bracket 323c is located between the mounting plate 3222c and the second beam 321c and is fixedly connected to the mounting plate 3222c, the second bracket 324c is located on a side of the second beam 321c away from the mounting plate 3222c and is fixedly connected to the second beam 321c, the third driving member 35c is passed through the second beam 321c, and the third driving member 35c is connected between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c.
- the first bracket 323c is provided with a first support plate, a second support plate and a first connecting plate, the first support plate, the second support plate and the first connecting plate define a first avoidance space, the processing assembly 31c is located in the avoidance space, and during the installation of the first bracket 323c, the first connecting plate is located between the mounting plate 3222c and the second beam 321c, the first support plate and the second support plate are fixedly connected to the mounting plate 3222c, and the second bracket 324c is provided with a third support plate, a fourth support plate and a second connecting plate, and the third support plate, the fourth support plate and the second connecting plate limit the first avoidance space.
- a second avoidance space is defined.
- the second connecting plate is located on the side of the second beam 321c away from the mounting plate 3222c.
- the third support plate and the fourth support plate are fixedly connected to the second beam 321c.
- An avoidance hole is provided in the middle of the second beam 321c.
- the third driving member 35c passes through the avoidance hole of the second beam 321c and is fixedly connected to the first connecting plate of the first bracket 323c and the second connecting plate of the second bracket 324c, respectively, so as to connect the third driving member 35c between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c.
- the second bracket 324c is fixedly connected to the second crossbeam 321c
- the third driving member 35c is connected between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c
- the second bracket 324c is fixed relative to the third driving member 35c
- the third driving member 35c can drive the first bracket 323c to move along the third direction Z relative to the second bracket 324c, thereby driving the mounting plate 3222c to move along the third direction Z, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component 31c in the third direction Z
- the entire transmission design structure is simple and easy to assemble.
- the first crossbeam 11c is provided with a guide rail
- the guide rail extends along the first direction X
- the mounting frame 32c is provided with a sliding member
- the sliding member is slidably provided on the guide rail and can move along the extension direction of the guide rail.
- the sliding member can slide along the guide rail in the first direction X, so through the coordinated use of the guide rail and the sliding member, the mounting frame 32c can be driven to slide along the first crossbeam 11c in the first direction, and because the guide rail has a certain guiding effect on the sliding member, it can ensure that the mounting frame 32c can run smoothly along the first crossbeam 11c without problems such as deviation.
- the first beam 11c includes a first sub-beam 111c and a second sub-beam 112c that are oppositely and spaced apart, and the processing assembly 31c is located between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c.
- the first beam 11c includes a first sub-beam 111c and a second sub-beam 112c that are relatively and spaced apart.
- the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c define a moving space.
- the processing component 31c can move along the first direction X in the moving space.
- the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c are both provided with guide rails, thereby ensuring that the processing part 30c can run smoothly along the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c in the first direction X.
- the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c are located on both sides of 30, which can provide good support for the processing part 30c.
- the first beam 11c has good rigidity, thereby ensuring that the processing part 30c is more stable during movement, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board equipment.
- the second beam 321c extends along the second direction Y, and the second direction Y is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform 20c moves.
- the adjustable direction of the second beam 321c is consistent with the direction in which the processing platform 20c moves, thereby ensuring that when the second beam 321c is adjusted along the second direction Y, the second beam 321c moves parallel to the processing platform 20c in the second direction Y, thereby preventing the second beam 321c from shifting in the second direction Y during the adjustment process, thereby preventing the processing assembly 31c from shifting during the adjustment process, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy and facilitating improving the processing quality.
- the moving distance of the processing component 31c is L, which satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ m ⁇ L ⁇ 10 ⁇ m.
- the processing component 31c is located between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c, and the sum of the moving distances of the processing component 31c between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c is L.
- the moving distance of the processing component 31c can be set to values such as 1 ⁇ m, 5 ⁇ m, and 10 ⁇ m. The moving distance of the processing component 31c is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can ensure that the processing component 31c can move in the second direction Y, and limit the moving distance to avoid collision between the processing component 31c and other components during the movement.
- Figure 44 is a flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a processing platform, the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 30c, wherein at least two adjacent processing parts 30c include a first processing part, and the remaining processing parts 30c of at least two adjacent processing parts 30c are second processing parts.
- the structure of the circuit board processing equipment that executes the control method of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG. 44 can be as shown in FIG.
- the processing platform is provided with 6 processing stations, each processing station is provided with two processing parts 30c, one of which is the first processing part and the other is the second processing part, each processing station is placed with a circuit board, and the two processing parts 30c provided in the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time, so that multiple processing parts 30c can process a circuit board at the same time, improve the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment, and improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment per unit time and unit area, which is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, and is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
- control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
- Step S101 obtaining a predetermined distance between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and a first preset error range.
- Step S102 confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within a first preset error range.
- Step S103 obtaining a second preset error range in the second direction Y of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station.
- Step S104 confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within a second preset error range.
- Step S105 controlling the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts to process the workpiece simultaneously.
- the center coordinates of the multiple processing parts need to be adjusted so that the center coordinates of the multiple processing parts are basically consistent, thereby reducing the center coordinate error and improving the processing accuracy.
- the first processing part is used as a reference, and the position of the second processing part is adjusted based on the first processing part.
- the control system obtains the predetermined spacing and the first preset error range of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the first direction X, and obtains the second preset error range of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the second direction Y. If the error between the actual spacing and the predetermined spacing of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the first direction X is within the first preset error range, and the error between the actual positions of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range, the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts in each processing station are controlled to process the workpiece simultaneously.
- the multiple processing parts are controlled to jointly process the workpiece, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts during joint processing, reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
- each second processing portion includes an adjustment component 33 c , and the adjustment component 33 c is used to adjust the position of the second processing portion in the second direction Y.
- the method further includes:
- control adjustment component 33c adjusts the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction Y so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range.
- the control system detects the actual positions of the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the second direction Y. If the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the second direction Y is not within the second preset error range, the control system controls the adjustment component 33c to adjust the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction Y, so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a second driving member 34 c, and the second driving member 34 c is used to adjust the positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts in the first direction X.
- the method further includes:
- the control system detects the actual spacing in the first direction X between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station.
- the second driving member 34c is controlled to adjust the positions of the corresponding first processing parts and the second processing parts in the first direction X so that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing parts corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range.
- the control system detects the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X. If the error between the actual spacing between two of the first processing parts and the second processing parts adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is not within the first preset error range, the control system controls the second driving member 34c to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part and the second processing part in the first direction X, so that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range.
- the second driving member 34c adjusts the position of the first processing part and/or the second processing part in the first direction X, ensuring that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part of each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range, thereby ensuring the relative position relationship of multiple processing parts in each processing station in the first direction X, reducing the center coordinate error of different processing parts in the first direction X, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
- each processing part further includes: a second driving member 34c, and the second driving member 34c is used to drive the processing part to move along the first direction X; before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the first preset error range, the method further includes:
- the first preset position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the third preset error range are obtained.
- the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X is detected.
- the second driving member 34c is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
- the control system Before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the first preset error range, it is necessary to determine the position of the first processing part in each processing station in the first direction X, obtain the first preset position and the third preset error range of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X through the control system, and detect the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X.
- the control system controls the second driving member 34c to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
- the first processing part of each processing station is pre-positioned before processing, which improves the positioning accuracy of the first processing part, thereby facilitating the improvement of the positioning accuracy of the second processing part in the first direction X and the second direction Y, and improving the processing accuracy.
- the method further includes: controlling the processing platform to move to the second preset position along the second direction Y. That is, before controlling the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station to process the workpiece at the same time, the processing platform can also be controlled by the control system to move to the second preset position along the second direction Y, thereby realizing rapid positioning of the workpiece during the processing, and further improving the processing efficiency.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes at least one of the following: drilling equipment, molding equipment, laser processing equipment, AOI inspection equipment, etc.
- the above equipment can all apply the adjustment component 33c and control method of the embodiments of the present application, and no limitation is made here.
- the processing part 100d includes: a mounting frame 10d, a spindle assembly 31d and an adjustment assembly 40d.
- the spindle assembly 31d is used to process the circuit board.
- the spindle assembly 31d is mounted on the mounting frame 10d.
- the spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d in the first direction X of the processing portion 100d.
- the adjustment assembly 40d is used to drive the spindle assembly 31d to move along the first direction X.
- the spindle assembly 31d can be driven to move as a whole along the first direction X by the adjustment assembly 40d, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly 31d in the first direction X.
- the spindle assembly 31d is offset, the position of the spindle assembly 31d can be adjusted in time, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
- the spindle assembly 31d includes: a driving member 20d and a mounting seat 30d, the driving member 20d is arranged on the mounting seat 30d, and the driving member 20d is used to process the circuit board, the mounting seat 30d is installed on the mounting frame 10d, and the mounting seat 30d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X.
- the mounting seat 30d can be sleeved on the driving member 20d.
- a small interference fit is adopted between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d, and the driving member 20d is installed on the mounting seat 30d by shrink sleeve, so that the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d are integrated, thereby ensuring the position accuracy between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d;
- the driving member 20d with the mounting seat 30d can also be customized according to the size of the mounting frame 10d, and the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d are integrated, thereby saving the installation steps between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d, and improving the assembly efficiency.
- a rotating tool 21d is also installed below the driving member 20d. When the circuit board processing equipment is running, the driving member 20d drives the tool 21d to rotate to realize the gong cutting processing of the circuit board.
- the driving member 20d is installed on the mounting seat 30d, and the mounting seat 30d is installed on the mounting frame 10d and can move relative to the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X of the processing portion 100d.
- the adjustment component 40d drives the mounting seat 30d to move along the first direction X
- the driving member 20d moves along the first direction X with the mounting seat 30d, thereby realizing the adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d.
- the adjustment component 40 d is disposed along the first direction X through the mounting frame 10 d .
- the adjustment component 40d is installed along the first direction X from the direction away from the driving member 20d to the direction close to the driving member 20d, and is passed through the mounting frame 10d, thereby ensuring that the assembly direction of the adjustment component 40d is consistent with the adjustment direction of the mounting seat 30d, thereby ensuring the stability of the adjustment direction of the mounting seat 30d and avoiding directional deviation during the adjustment process.
- the above-mentioned processing portion 100d also includes: an elastic member 50d, the mounting frame 10d can be an integrally formed member, or a detachable assembly of a first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d.
- the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d are assembled together to define an installation space 13d
- the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d
- the outer surface of the mounting seat 30d has a first abutment surface
- the inner side wall of the installation space 13d has a second abutment surface.
- the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface are opposite to each other along the first direction X
- the elastic member 50d abuts between the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface.
- the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d are connected by bolts and define an installation space 13d for installing the mounting seat 30d.
- the mounting seat 30d has a first abutment surface on the outer surface of the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X, and the inner side wall of the installation space 13d has a second abutment surface opposite to the first abutment surface.
- the mounting seat 30d moves along the first direction X toward the first mounting frame 11d for matching installation, and the second mounting frame 12d provides a clamping force for it, so that the spindle assembly 31d can be installed in the installation space 13d, and the elastic member 50d is located between the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface.
- the first abutting surface of the mounting seat 30d abuts against one end of the elastic member 50d
- the second abutting surface of the inner side wall of the installation space 13d abuts against the other end of the elastic member 50d.
- the elastic member 50d abuts against Between the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface, a clamping force along the first direction X can be provided for the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface, thereby ensuring the position accuracy between the main shaft assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d.
- the elastic member 50d itself also has an elastic deformation function.
- the elastic member 50d changes its own elastic state according to the change of the clamping force, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the main shaft assembly 31d along the first direction X, and then achieving fine adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d along the first direction X.
- the mounting frame 10d is provided with a first guiding structure
- the mounting seat 30d is provided with a second guiding structure
- the mounting seat 30d is guided in the first direction X through the cooperation of the first guiding structure and the second guiding structure.
- the first mounting frame 11d and the mounting seat 30d are respectively provided with a first guide structure and a second guide structure for guiding cooperation.
- the second guide structure of the mounting seat 30d moves along the first guide structure of the first mounting frame 11d to achieve the coordinated installation of the two.
- the coordinated use of the first guide structure and the second guide structure can also ensure that no misalignment occurs during the fine-tuning process, thereby ensuring the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d, and further ensuring the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the driving member 20d.
- the first guide structure is one of the guide groove and the guide pin
- the second guide structure is the other of the guide groove and the guide pin
- the guide pin is inserted into the guide groove
- the first guide structure and the second guide structure are set correspondingly. If the first guide structure is set as a guide groove, the second guide structure is set as a guide pin. If the first guide structure is set as a guide pin, the second guide structure is set as a guide groove.
- the guide pin can be inserted into the guide groove. Therefore, the assembly of the mounting seat 30d and the mounting frame 10d and the guiding function during the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d can be achieved through the coordinated use of the guide pin and the guide groove. At the same time, the coordinated use of the guide pin and the guide groove can not only ensure the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d, but also has a simple structure and convenient assembly, thereby improving the assembly efficiency.
- the adjustment assembly 40d includes: a first adjustment member 41d and a second adjustment member 42d, the first adjustment member 41d is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member 42d and is fixedly connected to the mounting seat 30d, and the second adjustment member 42d is rotatably provided on the mounting frame 10d, and the spindle assembly 31d is driven to move along the first direction X by rotating the second adjustment member 42d.
- the first adjusting member 41d is fixedly mounted on the mounting seat 30d, and the mounting method may be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
- the first adjusting member 41d may define a mounting groove 411d with one end open, and the inner circumferential surface of the mounting groove 411d is provided with an internal thread, and the outer circumferential surface of the second adjusting member 42d is provided with an external thread, and the second adjusting member 42d is inserted into the mounting groove 411d, and the internal thread of the mounting groove 411d and the external thread of the second adjusting member 42d are matched and connected.
- the second adjusting member 42d is rotatably provided on the second mounting frame 12d, but the second adjusting member 42d is not movable in the first direction X relative to the second mounting frame 12d.
- the second adjusting member 42d rotates, since the first adjusting member 41d and the second adjusting member 42d are threadedly connected and the first adjusting member 41d is fixed and cannot rotate, under the action of the reaction force, the rotation of the second adjusting member 42d will drive the first adjusting member 41d to move along the first direction X.
- the first adjusting member 41d can move along the first direction X toward the first mounting bracket 11d, then when the second adjusting member 42d is rotated counterclockwise, the first adjusting member 41d is driven by the rotation of the thread and the action of the elastic member 50d to move along the first direction X toward the direction away from the first mounting bracket 11d, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the position of the spindle assembly 31d, and further achieving fine adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d.
- the second adjusting member 42d can be configured as a screw rod, and the first adjusting member 41d is sleeved on the screw rod. That is, when the second adjusting member 42d is selected as a screw rod, the mounting groove 411d of the first adjusting member 41d is sleeved on the screw rod, so that the screw rod can rotate relative to the first adjusting member 41d, and when the screw rod rotates, it drives the first adjusting member 41d to move along the first direction X, so that the position of the mounting seat 30d can be finely adjusted.
- the screw rod has a simple and reliable structure and low cost, which is conducive to improving assembly efficiency and reducing costs.
- the mounting frame 10d has a mounting ear 121d.
- the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d
- the mounting ear 121d is arranged on the second mounting frame 12d
- the mounting ear 121d has a mounting hole 1211d
- the screw rod is passed through the mounting hole 1211d.
- the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example.
- the mounting ear 121d on the second mounting frame 12d is installed in cooperation with the mounting seat 30d and provides a clamping force for the mounting seat 30d so that the mounting seat 30d can be installed in the mounting space 13d.
- the mounting ear 121d also has a mounting hole 1211d.
- the mounting ear 121d When the mounting ear 121d is fixedly installed with the mounting seat 30d, the mounting ear 121d can provide a certain support for the first adjusting member 41d, so that when the lead screw is rotated, the rotation between the first adjusting member 41d and the lead screw is smoother.
- the processing portion 100d further includes: a bearing 60d, the bearing 60d is installed in the mounting hole 1211d, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 60d.
- the bearing 60d is assembled along the first direction X toward the direction close to the mounting ear 121d, so that the bearing 60d is installed in the mounting hole 1211d, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 60d and transitionally matched with the inner ring of the bearing 60d.
- the screw rod is provided with a stop surface to stop the bearing 60d.
- the above-mentioned processing part 100d also includes: an end cover 70d, the end cover 70d has an avoidance hole 71d, the end cover 70d is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear 121d, and the avoidance hole 71d corresponds to the mounting hole 1211d, the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole 71d, and the end cover 70d is used to stop the bearing 60d.
- the end cover 70d is fixedly installed on the outer surface of the mounting ear 121d, and the avoidance hole 71d of the end cover 70d is placed corresponding to the mounting hole 1211d of the mounting ear 121d, wherein the fixed installation method can be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
- the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole 71d and extends a certain length to facilitate the rotation adjustment of the screw rod.
- the end cover 70d is also used to stop the bearing 60d, limit the movement of the bearing 60d along the first direction X, and then limit the movement of the screw rod along the first direction X, so as to provide a reaction force for the movement of the driving member 20d when the screw rotates.
- the above-mentioned processing part 100d also includes: a locking member 90d, and the locking member 90d is used to lock the lead screw.
- the driving member 20d can be maintained at the adjusted position, thereby preventing the driving member 20d from being reset, thereby improving the stability of the position adjustment of the driving member 20d.
- the mounting frame 10d may be an integrally formed part, or may be a removable assembly of a first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d. As shown in FIG. 45 , the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d cooperate to be assembled and define an installation space 13d.
- the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d.
- the installation space 13d has a first side wall 131d and a second side wall 132d relative to each other.
- the first side wall 131d and/or the second side wall 132d are provided with a push rod 80d.
- the push rod 80d is suitable for moving relative to the mounting frame 10d along the second direction Y and for abutting against the mounting seat 30d.
- the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y.
- the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example for explanation
- the mounting space 13d has a first side wall 131d and a second side wall 132d opposite to each other in the second direction Y, wherein only the first side wall 131d may be provided with a top rod 80d, only the second side wall 132d may be provided with a top rod 80d, or both the first side wall 131d and the second side wall 132d may be provided with a top rod 80d.
- the first side wall 131d and the second side wall 132d are provided with a top rod 80d as an example for explanation, the first side wall 131d and The second side wall 132d is provided with a through hole for installing a push rod 80d.
- the push rod 80d is movable relative to the first mounting frame 11d along the second direction Y, and the push rod 80d can abut against the mounting seat 30d.
- the verticality of the spindle assembly 31d can be ensured, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy.
- an insulating layer is provided on the outer surface of the mounting seat 30d, which can ensure the insulation requirements of the mounting seat 30d and the driving member 20d, avoid safety accidents caused by the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d due to conduction, and improve the safety of the processing part 100d.
- the first direction X is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the circuit board processing equipment moves.
- the adjustable direction of the driving member 20d is consistent with the direction in which the processing platform of the circuit board processing equipment moves, thereby ensuring that when the driving member 20d is adjusted along the first direction X, the spindle moves parallel to the processing platform, avoiding the driving member 20d from being offset during the adjustment process, ensuring the processing accuracy, and facilitating improving the processing quality.
- the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d is L1, satisfying the relationship: 10 ⁇ m ⁇ L1 ⁇ 30 ⁇ m.
- the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d defined by the mounting frame 10d, and along the first direction X, the mounting frame 10d reserves a certain spacing distance relative to both sides of the spindle assembly 31d, and the sum of the spacing distances on both sides is L1.
- the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d can be set to values such as 10 ⁇ m, 15 ⁇ m, 20 ⁇ m, 30 ⁇ m, etc.
- the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can ensure that there is enough space between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d, and avoid collision between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d when adjusting.
- the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X is L2, satisfying the relationship: 1 ⁇ m ⁇ L2 ⁇ 10 ⁇ m.
- the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d defined by the mounting frame 10d, and along the first direction X, the front and rear movable distance of the mounting seat 30d relative to the mounting frame 10d is L2.
- the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X can be set to values such as 1 ⁇ m, 5 ⁇ m, and 10 ⁇ m. The moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X is reasonably selected according to the specific situation.
- Such a setting can avoid the conflict between the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X and the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d, and further avoid the possibility of collision between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d.
- a circuit board processing device includes:
- a machine base comprising a beam extending along a second direction Y;
- the processing part 100d is the processing part 100d in the embodiment of the first aspect, and multiple processing parts 100d are slidably connected to the beam along the second direction Y.
- the processing part 100d is used to process the circuit board.
- Each processing part 100d includes a mounting frame 10d and a spindle assembly 31d. In the first direction X of the processing part 100d, the spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
- a plurality of processing parts 100d are distributed in sequence along the second direction Y on the crossbeam of the base of the circuit board processing equipment, wherein each processing part 100d corresponds to its own processing area, and each processing part 100d can be processed independently in its own processing area, or can be processed in cooperation with other processing equipment.
- a plurality of processing parts 100d process their own processing areas at the same time, or a plurality of processing parts 100d control the corresponding processing parts 100d to perform processing in sequence according to a preset program, thereby realizing the automated operation of the circuit board processing equipment and improving the processing efficiency.
- each processing section 100d is provided with a mounting frame 10d and a spindle assembly 31d, the spindle assembly 31d is mounted on the mounting frame 10d, and the spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d in the first direction X of the processing section 100d, so that the spindle assembly 31d of each processing section 100d can be position-adjusted in the first direction X to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of multiple processing sections 100d.
- the processing portion 100d includes an adjusting component 40d, and the adjusting component 40d is used to drive the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X.
- each processing part 100d is also provided with an adjusting component 40d, and the adjusting component 40d is used to drive the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X.
- the spindle component 31d is provided with a driving member 20d, and the driving member 20d is integrated with the spindle component 31d.
- the driving component 40 drives the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction
- the driving member 20d moves along the first direction X with the spindle component 31d, so that the position of the driving member 20d can be adjusted.
- the circuit board processing equipment has at least one processing station, each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts 100d, and the adjustment component 40d is used to adjust the processing parts 100d to have the same position along the first direction X.
- the circuit board processing equipment is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board.
- the number of processing stations is set according to actual needs.
- Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts 100d, and the number of processing parts 100d provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs.
- the circuit board processing equipment is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 100d.
- a circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 100d provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time.
- the common processing of the same circuit board by multiple processing parts 100d is realized, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment per unit time and unit area, which is beneficial to improving product competitiveness.
- the adjustment component 40d is used to adjust the position of the processing part 100d in the first direction X, so that the multiple processing parts 100d are in the same position in the first direction X. Specifically, when at least two processing parts 100d process one processing station at the same time, in order to ensure that at least two processing parts 100d are in the same position in the first direction X, the adjustment component 40d of each processing part respectively adjusts the position of the corresponding spindle component 31d to ensure that the spindle component 31d is in the same position in the first direction X.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is constructed to control two adjacent processing parts 100d to move a predetermined interval distance along the second direction Y, and control the spindle assembly 31d of each processing part 100d to move to the same position along the first direction X.
- the circuit board processing equipment further includes a control system, the control system controls the driving unit to drive the circuit board processing equipment to operate, the driving unit includes a first driving unit and a second driving unit, the first driving unit is mounted on the machine base, and is used to drive the processing unit 100d to move along the second direction Y, so as to control two adjacent processing units 100d to move a predetermined spacing distance along the second direction Y, and the second driving unit is mounted on the processing unit 100d, and is used to drive the spindle assembly 31d to move along the first direction X, so as to adjust the positions of the spindle assemblies 31d of the multiple processing units 100d in the first direction X, and ensure that the spindle assemblies 31d of the multiple processing units 100d are in the same position in the first direction X.
- the control system controls the driving unit to drive the circuit board processing equipment to operate
- the driving unit includes a first driving unit and a second driving unit
- the first driving unit is mounted on the machine base, and is used to drive the processing unit 100d to move along the
- the second driving unit is an adjustment assembly.
- the control system first controls the first driving unit to drive the processing part 100d to move along the second direction Y to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 100d along the second direction Y, so that the two processing parts 100d can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board, and then controls the second driving unit to drive two or any one of the mounting seats 30d of the two processing parts 100d to move along the first direction X, thereby ensuring the consistency of the positions of the two processing parts 100d in the first direction X, which is beneficial to improving the accuracy of the joint processing of multiple processing parts 100d.
- the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is also constructed to control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, and to control the spindle component 31d to process the circuit board along the third direction Z, and to control the corresponding processing part 100d to move along the second direction Y, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- a control system which is also constructed to control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, and to control the spindle component 31d to process the circuit board along the third direction Z, and to control the corresponding processing part 100d to move along the second direction Y, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- the circuit board processing equipment also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, so as to control the spindle component 31d of each processing part 100d to move to the same position along the first direction X, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different processing parts 100d, reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts 100d, reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment, and improving the processing accuracy; the control system can also control the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the second direction Y.
- a control system which can control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, so as to control the spindle component 31d of each processing part 100d to move to the same position along the first direction X, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different processing parts 100d, reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts 100d, reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment, and improving the processing
- the control system can control the processing parts 100d to move along the second direction Y respectively, so as to adjust the two adjacent processing parts 100d to move a predetermined spacing distance along the second direction Y.
- the control system controls the driving member 20d of the spindle component 31d to start processing the circuit board along the third direction Z.
- first and second are used for descriptive purposes only and should not be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of the indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include at least one of the features. In the description of this application, the meaning of "plurality” is at least two, such as two, three, etc., unless otherwise clearly and specifically defined.
- the terms “installed”, “connected”, “connected”, “fixed” and the like should be understood in a broad sense, for example, it can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral connection; it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection; it can be a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements, unless otherwise clearly defined.
- installed can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral connection
- it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection
- it can be a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements, unless otherwise clearly defined.
- the specific meanings of the above terms in this application can be understood according to specific circumstances.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Machine Tool Units (AREA)
Abstract
A processing device. The coordinates of processing shafts of a plurality of processing assemblies in a second direction can be adjusted to the same, or an error between actual positions of the processing shafts of the plurality of processing assemblies in the second direction is adjusted to be within a second preset error range, so that the plurality of processing assemblies can simultaneously process a same piece to be processed and ensure the processing precision, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing device, and improving the overall performance of the processing device. Further comprised are a control apparatus, an adjusting assembly, a processing portion and a method.
Description
本申请要求2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211634241.2、发明名称为“加工设备、控制方法和加工方法”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211634240.8、发明名称为“调节组件、电路板加工设备和控制方法”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211634236.1、发明名称为“加工部及电路板加工设备”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211634238.0、发明名称为“电路板加工设备及其控制方法”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202211634244.6、发明名称为“电路板加工设备及其控制方法、控制装置及校准方法”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202223423969.9、发明名称为“电路板加工设备”;2022年12月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202223425408.2、发明名称为“加工设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims that the application number submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022 is 202211634241.2, and the invention name is "Processing equipment, control method and processing method"; the application number submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022 is 202211634240.8, and the invention name is "Adjustment component, circuit board processing equipment and control method"; the application number submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022 is 202211634236.1, and the invention name is "Processing unit and circuit board processing equipment"; the application number submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022 is 202211634238.0 , invention name is "Circuit board processing equipment and its control method"; submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022, application number is 202211634244.6, invention name is "Circuit board processing equipment and its control method, control device and calibration method"; submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022, application number is 202223423969.9, invention name is "Circuit board processing equipment"; submitted to the China Patent Office on December 19, 2022, application number is 202223425408.2, invention name is "Processing equipment" The priority of the Chinese patent application, all of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及电路板加工设备技术领域,特别涉及一种加工设备、控制装置、调节组件、加工部及方法。The present application relates to the technical field of circuit board processing equipment, and in particular to a processing equipment, a control device, an adjustment component, a processing part and a method.
相关技术中,目前电路板加工设备(如PCB钻锣机)的主轴有两种主流固定方式,一种是通过半圆形的主轴夹和主轴压套抱紧固定,由电机驱动,在Z轴底板上做上、下进给运动,实现电路板的钻、锣加工;另一种是通过精密气浮套给主轴导向定位,同样通过电机驱动,在Z轴底板上做上、下进给运动。In the related technology, there are currently two mainstream fixing methods for the spindle of circuit board processing equipment (such as PCB drilling and drilling machines). One is to fix the spindle by a semicircular spindle clamp and a spindle pressure sleeve, which is driven by a motor to make up and down feed movements on the Z-axis base plate to achieve drilling and drilling processing of circuit boards; the other is to guide and position the spindle through a precision air floating sleeve, which is also driven by a motor to make up and down feed movements on the Z-axis base plate.
但是,目前电路板加工设备的主轴装配完成后被完全固定,不易对主轴位置进行调整,因此各主轴的加工中心的Y轴的绝对坐标各不相同,当电路板加工设备多个主轴同时加工一块电路板时,容易出现多个主轴中心坐标不一致,造成加工误差偏大,降低了加工精度;并且当主轴组件位置发生偏移时,加工精度下降。However, the spindle of the current circuit board processing equipment is completely fixed after assembly, and it is not easy to adjust the spindle position. Therefore, the absolute coordinates of the Y-axis of the machining center of each spindle are different. When multiple spindles of the circuit board processing equipment process a circuit board at the same time, it is easy for the coordinates of the multiple spindle centers to be inconsistent, resulting in large machining errors and reduced machining accuracy; and when the position of the spindle assembly is offset, the machining accuracy is reduced.
本申请旨在解决相关技术中存在的技术问题之一。为此,本申请的第一个目的在于提出一种电路板加工设备,该电路板加工设备设置多个加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多个加工部设于横梁上且沿床身的第一方向排布,加工部设置了可用于沿第二方向调节的调节组件,从而实现了主轴沿床身第二方向的位置调整,可以减小每组加工装置多个加工部的中心坐标偏差,有利于提高每组加工装置同时加工时的加工精度,进而提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能。The present application aims to solve one of the technical problems existing in the related art. To this end, the first purpose of the present application is to propose a circuit board processing equipment, which is provided with a plurality of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing parts are arranged on a crossbeam and arranged along a first direction of a bed, and the processing parts are provided with an adjustment component that can be used for adjustment along a second direction, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle along the second direction of the bed, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the plurality of processing parts of each group of processing devices, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请第一方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备,包括:To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the first embodiment of the present application provides a circuit board processing device, including:
多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多个加工部设于横梁上且沿床身的第一方向排布;A plurality of processing devices, each processing device comprising a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing parts being arranged on the crossbeam and arranged along a first direction of the bed;
至少一个加工部包括主轴和调节组件,调节组件与主轴连接,调节组件用于驱动主轴沿床身的第二方向移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向。At least one processing part includes a main shaft and an adjusting component, wherein the adjusting component is connected to the main shaft, and the adjusting component is used to drive the main shaft to move along a second direction of the bed, wherein the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多个加工部设于横梁上且沿床身的第一方向排布,加工部设置了可用于沿第二方向调节的调节组件,从而实现了主轴沿床身第二方向的位置调整,可以减小每组加工装置多个加工部的中心坐标偏差,有利于提高每组加工装置同时加工时的加工精度,进而提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能。According to the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, and the multiple processing parts are arranged on the crossbeam and along the first direction of the bed. The processing part is provided with an adjustment component that can be used for adjustment along the second direction, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the main shaft along the second direction of the bed, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the multiple processing parts of each group of processing devices, which is beneficial to improve the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the performance of the circuit board processing equipment.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节组件与主轴滑动连接,调节组件的滑动方向与第二方向相交;或,调节组件与主轴转动连接,转动的轴心线平行于第二方向。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjustment component is slidably connected to the main shaft, and the sliding direction of the adjustment component intersects with the second direction; or, the adjustment component is rotationally connected to the main shaft, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,还包括:安装部,调节组件连接在安装部和主轴之间,安装部安装于横梁;安装部沿第一方向可滑动地安装于横梁。According to an embodiment of the present application, it also includes: a mounting portion, an adjustment assembly connected between the mounting portion and the main shaft, and the mounting portion is mounted on the crossbeam; the mounting portion is slidably mounted on the crossbeam along a first direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,主轴包括旋转驱动件和安装架,安装架包括安装板和移动架,安装板与调节组件连接,移动架设于安装板,且沿床身的第三方向移动架相对安装板可移动,旋转驱动件安装于移动架,第一方向、第二方向和第三方向相互垂直。According to one embodiment of the present application, the spindle includes a rotating drive member and a mounting frame, the mounting frame includes a mounting plate and a movable frame, the mounting plate is connected to the adjustment assembly, the movable frame is mounted on the mounting plate, and the movable frame is movable relative to the mounting plate along a third direction of the bed, the rotating drive member is mounted on the movable frame, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节组件包括:第一调节件和第二调节件,第一调节件与第二调节件转动连接且与主轴固定连接,第二调节件可转动地设于安装部,通过转动第二调节件以驱动主轴沿第二方向移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjustment assembly includes: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and fixedly connected to the main shaft, the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting portion, and the main shaft is driven to move along the second direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
根据本申请的一个实施例,第二调节件为丝杆,第一调节件套设于丝杆;安装部具有安装耳,安装耳具有安装孔,第二调节件穿设于安装孔。According to an embodiment of the present application, the second adjusting member is a screw rod, and the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod; the mounting portion has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, and the second adjusting member is inserted into the mounting hole.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节组件包括:第一驱动件和第一滑块,第一滑块与主轴固定连接且可滑动地设于横梁,第一驱动件用于驱动第一滑块带动主轴沿第二方向移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjustment assembly includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the main shaft and slidably disposed on the crossbeam, and the first driving member is used to drive the first slider to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,还包括:第一导向机构和第二导向机构,第一导向机构设于横梁,第一滑块可滑动地设于第二导向机构,通过第一导向机构和第二导向机构导向配合以使主轴沿第一方向移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, it also includes: a first guide mechanism and a second guide mechanism, the first guide mechanism is arranged on the cross beam, the first slider is slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism, and the first guide mechanism and the second guide mechanism are guided and cooperated to enable the main shaft to move along the first direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,第一滑块与第二导向机构相对的端面具有第一导向结构,第二导向机构与第一滑块相对的端面具有第二导向结构,第一导向结构和第二导向结构导向配合以使主轴沿第二方向移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide mechanism has a first guide structure, and the end surface of the second guide mechanism opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure. The first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to move the main shaft along the second direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节组件包括:调节滑块和调节滑轨,调节滑轨安装于安装部,调节滑块和调节滑轨滑动配合以驱动主轴沿第二方向移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjustment assembly includes: an adjustment slider and an adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slide rail is installed on the installation portion, and the adjustment slider and the adjustment slide rail are slidably matched to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节滑块和调节滑轨滑动配合以同时在第二方向和第三方向对主轴运动进行导向,调节滑块在调节滑轨上沿第二方向的移动距离小于调节滑块在调节滑轨上沿第三方向的移动距离。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft in the second direction and the third direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the second direction on the adjusting slide rail is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the third direction on the adjusting slide rail.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节滑块和调节滑轨滑动配合以同时在第一方向和第二方向对主轴运动进行导向,调节滑块在调节滑轨上沿第二方向的移动距离小于调节滑块在调节滑轨上沿第一方向的移动距离。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft in the first direction and the second direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the second direction on the adjusting slide rail is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider along the first direction on the adjusting slide rail.
根据本申请的一个实施例,调节组件还包括:驱动单元,驱动用于驱动调节滑块在调节滑轨上的移动,调节组件还包括锁紧机构,锁紧机构用于限制调节滑块在调节滑轨上的移动。According to one embodiment of the present application, the adjustment component further includes: a driving unit, which is used to drive the adjustment slider to move on the adjustment slide rail, and the adjustment component further includes a locking mechanism, which is used to limit the movement of the adjustment slider on the adjustment slide rail.
根据本申请的一个实施例,电路板加工设备还包括工作台,工作台沿床身的第二方向移动,主轴沿第三方向加工电路板,第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。According to one embodiment of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a workbench, which moves along the second direction of the bed, and the spindle processes the circuit board along the third direction. The first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
根据本申请的一个实施例,还包括控制系统,控制系统被构造为用于控制调节组件驱动相应主轴沿第二方向上移动,控制主轴沿第三方向加工电路板,还用于控制相应加工部沿第一方向移动,第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。According to one embodiment of the present application, it also includes a control system, which is constructed to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle to move along the second direction, control the spindle to process the circuit board along the third direction, and control the corresponding processing part to move along the first direction. The first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
根据本申请的一个实施例,电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,校准仪用于检测多个加工部之间在第一方向上的偏差距离和在第二方向上的偏差距离;横梁上还设有绝对光栅尺,绝对光栅尺用于微调和补偿多个加工部之间在第一方向上的偏差距离;调节组件跟随对应的主轴沿第一方向移动,调节组件用于微调对应的主轴与横梁之间的第二方向上的偏差距离。According to one embodiment of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator, which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts in the first direction and the deviation distance in the second direction; an absolute grating scale is also provided on the beam, and the absolute grating scale is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts in the first direction; the adjustment component moves along the first direction following the corresponding spindle, and the adjustment component is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction between the corresponding spindle and the beam.
本申请的第二个目的在于提出一种电路板加工设备的控制方法。The second objective of the present application is to provide a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请第二方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备的控制方法,电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个整版包括多个加工区域,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,多个加工部与多个加工区域一一对应设置,方法包括:获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离;根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直;在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the second aspect of the present application proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, the multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with multiple full plates, each full plate includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the multiple processing parts are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple processing areas. The method includes: obtaining an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full plate; controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; obtaining a deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction; calibrating at least one processing part according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, controlling the processing part to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法,获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离;根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直;在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。由此,实现多个加工部对同一整版的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,同时,在控制多个加工部加工之前,控制相邻加工部沿第一方向的距离与每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离一种,并且使得每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,从而保证了多个加工部共同加工时的加工精度,提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能,有利于提高产品竞争力。According to the control method of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page is obtained; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained; at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area. In this way, multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, which improves the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment. At the same time, before controlling the processing of multiple processing parts, the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
根据本申请的一个实施例,至少一个加工部包括调节组件,根据偏差距离对加工部进行校准,包括:调节组件控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第二方向上移动,以对加工部进行校准。According to one embodiment of the present application, at least one processing part includes an adjustment component, and the processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction to calibrate the processing part.
根据本申请的一个实施例,至少一个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,以第一加工部为基准,第二加工部的调节组件控制第二加工部在第二方向上向第一加工部移动靠近,以到达目标位置的预设范围内。According to one embodiment of the present application, at least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part. With the first processing part as a reference, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in a second direction so as to reach within a preset range of the target position.
根据本申请的一个实施例,电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,包括:通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息;根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离。According to one embodiment of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction according to the coordinate information.
根据本申请的一个实施例,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,包括:控制多个加工部进行预加工处理;获取每个加工部对应的预加工位置的坐标信息;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息;根据任一个加工部的位置信息控制多个加工部中的其他加工部移动,以使多个加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设偏差范围。According to one embodiment of the present application, the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: controlling multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtaining the coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determining the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determining the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; and controlling the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one processing part, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset deviation range.
根据本申请的一个实施例,获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离,包括:确定每个加工区域中的第一电路板,第一电路板为第一方向上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的电路板;获取每个第一电路板的坐标信息;根据第一电路板的坐标信息确定相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离。According to one embodiment of the present application, obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page includes: determining the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board in the first direction that is completely in the same processing area; obtaining the coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
根据本申请的一个实施例,方法还包括:获取每个加工区域的位置信息;根据每个电路板的坐标信息和加工区域的位置信息确定第二电路板,第二电路板未完全处于同一个加工区域中;控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工。According to one embodiment of the present application, the method also includes: obtaining position information of each processing area; determining a second circuit board based on the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, and the second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area; controlling the processing part to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
根据本申请的一个实施例,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工,包括:确定整版中的分割线,分割线用于划分整版上的加工区域;根据分割线将第二电路板划分为第一部分和第二部分,并确定第一部分和第二部所处的加工区域;控制与加工区域对应的加工部对第一部分和第二部分进行加工。According to one embodiment of the present application, the processing part is controlled to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board, including: determining a dividing line in the whole page, the dividing line is used to divide the processing area on the whole page; dividing the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determining the processing area where the first part and the second part are located; and controlling the processing part corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
根据本申请的一个实施例,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工,包括:获取第二电路板的数量信息;根据数量信息向加工部分配第二电路板,以使各加工部所分配到的第二电路板的数量之差处于预设差值范围。According to one embodiment of the present application, controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: obtaining quantity information of the second circuit board; allocating the second circuit board to the processing unit according to the quantity information so that the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing unit is within a preset difference range.
本申请的第三个目的在于提出一种电路板加工设备的控制装置。The third objective of the present application is to provide a control device for circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请第三方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备的控制装置,电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个整版包括多个加工区域,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,多个加工部与多个加工区域一一对应设置,控制装置包括:获取模块,用于获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离、以及获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直;控制模块,用于根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;校准模块,用于根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准;控制模块,还用于在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the third aspect of the present application proposes a control device for circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, the multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with multiple full plates, each full plate includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the multiple processing parts are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple processing areas. The control device includes: an acquisition module, used to obtain the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full plate, and to obtain the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in a second direction, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction; a control module, used to control at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction according to the offset distance; a calibration module, used to calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance; the control module is also used to control the processing part to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制装置,通过获取模块获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离、以及获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直,通过校准模块根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准;通过控制模块根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动,以及通过控制模块在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。由此,实现多个加工部对同一整版的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,同时,在控制多个加工部加工之前,控制相邻加工部沿第一方向的距离与每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离一种,并且使得每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,从而保证了多个加工部共同加工时的加工精度,提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能,有利于提高产品竞争力。According to the control device of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page is obtained by the acquisition module, and the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance by the calibration module; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction according to the offset distance by the control module, and after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position by the control module, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area. Thus, multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved. At the same time, before controlling the processing of multiple processing parts, the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
本申请的第四个目的在于提出一种电路板加工设备的校准方法。The fourth objective of the present application is to provide a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请第四方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备的校准方法,电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,校准方法包括:获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向移动,直至多个加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设距离范围。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the fourth aspect embodiment of the present application proposes a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, and the calibration method includes: obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction; controlling the processing part to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset distance range.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的校准方法,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向移动,直至多个加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设距离范围,从而保证了多个加工部在第二方向Y的坐标一致性,减小了中心坐标偏差,有利于提高加工精度。According to the calibration method of the circuit board processing equipment in the embodiment of the present application, the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction is obtained; the processing part is controlled to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction is within a preset distance range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
本申请的第五个目的在于提出一种电路板整版中电路板的排版方法。The fifth objective of the present application is to provide a layout method for circuit boards in circuit board layout.
为达到上述目的,本申请第五方面实施例提出了一种电路板整版中电路板的排版方法,电路板整版被划分为多个加工区域,排版方法包括:获取待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量,以及获取电路板整版中加工区域的数量;在排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为整数时,采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版;在排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为非整数时,采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the fifth aspect embodiment of the present application proposes a layout method for a circuit board in a circuit board layout, wherein the circuit board layout is divided into multiple processing areas, and the layout method includes: obtaining the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in a first direction, and obtaining the number of processing areas in the circuit board layout; when the quotient of the layout number and the number of processing areas is an integer, using a first preset layout method to layout the circuit board to be layouted; when the quotient of the layout number and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, using a second preset layout method to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
根据本申请实施例的电路板整版中电路板的排版方法,若待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为整数时,采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,若待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为非整数时,采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。由此,根据待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量和电路板整版中加工区域的数量采用不同的排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,提高了整版排版的合理性,有利于提高电路板整版的版面利用率,进而提高单位面积电路板整版的产出效率。According to the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board layout of the embodiment of the present application, if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction and the number of processing areas is an integer, the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, and if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted. Thus, different layout methods are used to layout the circuit board to be layouted according to the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction and the number of processing areas in the circuit board layout, which improves the rationality of the layout of the whole layout, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the circuit board layout, and thus improves the output efficiency of the circuit board layout per unit area.
本申请的第六个目的在于提出一种加工设备,可以将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备的加工效率,提高加工设备的整体性能。The sixth object of the present application is to propose a processing equipment that can adjust the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction to be the same, or adjust the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,根据本申请第六方面实施例的加工设备,包括:横梁;多个加工组件,所述多个加工组件沿第一方向间隔设置于横梁上,所述加工组件适于加工待加工件;调节装置,所述调节装置连接于所述加工组件和所述横梁之间,所述调节装置至少用于调节对应的所述加工组件的在第二方向上的位置,所述第二方向平行于所述加工设备的加工平台运动的方向,所述第二方向与所述第一方向垂直。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the processing equipment according to the sixth aspect of the present application includes: a crossbeam; a plurality of processing components, which are arranged on the crossbeam at intervals along a first direction, and the processing components are suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed; an adjustment device, which is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam, and the adjustment device is at least used to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component in a second direction, and the second direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
根据本申请的加工设备,通过设置用于调节对应的加工组件的在第二方向上的位置的调节装置,可以将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备的加工效率,提高加工设备的整体性能。According to the processing equipment of the present application, by providing an adjustment device for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component in the second direction, the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置还包括调节机构,所述调节机构包括调节滑块和调节滑轨,所述调节滑块和所述调节滑轨用于对所述加工组件的运动进行导向。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device further includes an adjusting mechanism, and the adjusting mechanism includes an adjusting slider and an adjusting slide rail, and the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail are used to guide the movement of the processing component.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节滑块沿调节滑轨的延伸方向运动时,所述调节滑块仅在所述第二方向上移动,或,所述调节滑块在第三方向和所述第二方向上同步移动,或,所述调节滑块在所述第一方向和所述第二方向上同步移动;其中,所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。According to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjusting slider moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail, the adjusting slider only moves in the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in a third direction and the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction; wherein, the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the machining axis of the machining component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置控制所述加工组件在所述第二方向上移动至预定位置时,所述加工组件在所述第三方向上的移动距离大于所述第二方向上的移动距离,或,所述加工组件在所述第一方向上的移动距离大于所述第二方向上的移动距离。According to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjusting device controls the processing component to move to a predetermined position in the second direction, the moving distance of the processing component in the third direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction, or the moving distance of the processing component in the first direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置还包括:横移滑轨和横移滑座,所述横移滑轨设于所述横梁上且沿所述第一方向延伸,所述横移滑座设于所述横移滑轨上且相对所述横移滑轨可滑动,所述调节滑轨设于所述横移滑座上。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device also includes: a transverse slide rail and a transverse slide seat, the transverse slide rail is arranged on the beam and extends along the first direction, the transverse slide seat is arranged on the transverse slide rail and can slide relative to the transverse slide rail, and the adjustment slide rail is arranged on the transverse slide seat.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述调节装置还包括驱动机构,所述驱动机构用于驱动所述加工组件运动,所述调节滑块沿调节滑轨的延伸方向运动时,所述调节滑块在所述第三方向和所述第二方向上同步移动;其中,所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。In some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device also includes a driving mechanism, which is used to drive the processing component to move, and when the adjustment slider moves along the extension direction of the adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slider moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction; wherein, the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing axis of the processing component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置还包括驱动机构,所述驱动机构用于驱动所述加工组件运动,所述调节滑轨沿第二方向延伸。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device further includes a driving mechanism, wherein the driving mechanism is used to drive the processing assembly to move, and the adjusting slide rail extends along the second direction.
根据本申请的一些可选地实施例,所述驱动机构还包括驱动件、调节螺杆和调节座,所述调节座具有与所述调节螺杆相适配的调节螺孔且与所述加工组件相连,所述驱动件用于驱动所述调节螺杆转动。According to some optional embodiments of the present application, the driving mechanism further includes a driving member, an adjusting screw and an adjusting seat, the adjusting seat having an adjusting screw hole adapted to the adjusting screw and connected to the processing assembly, and the driving member is used to drive the adjusting screw to rotate.
根据本申请的一些可选地实施例,所述调节装置包括锁紧机构,所述锁紧机构至少在所述第二方向上将所述加工组件锁定。According to some optional embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device includes a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism locks the processing assembly at least in the second direction.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置包括调节状态和锁止状态,在所述锁止状态,所述锁紧机构至少在所述第二方向上将所述加工组件锁定;在所述调节状态,所述锁紧机构解锁所述加工组件,所述调节装置适于对对应的所述加工组件的在所述第二方向上的位置进行调节。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device includes an adjustment state and a locking state. In the locking state, the locking mechanism locks the processing component at least in the second direction; in the adjustment state, the locking mechanism unlocks the processing component, and the adjustment device is suitable for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component in the second direction.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述加工设备具有至少一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应至少两个相邻的所述加工组件;所述至少两个相邻加工组件包括第一加工组件和第二加工组件,所述调节装置用于调节所述第一加工组件和所述第二加工组件在所述第二方向上的位置,以使所述第一加工组件与所述第二加工组件在第二方向上的间距在第二预设误差范围内。In some embodiments of the present application, the processing equipment has at least one processing station, each of the processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components; the at least two adjacent processing components include a first processing component and a second processing component, and the adjustment device is used to adjust the positions of the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction so that the distance between the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction is within a second preset error range.
本申请的第七个目的在于提出一种调节装置的控制方法。The seventh objective of the present application is to provide a control method for a regulating device.
为达到上述目的,根据本申请第七方面实施例的调节装置的控制方法,所述调节装置连接于加工设备的加工组件和横梁之间,所述调节装置用于驱动所述加工组件至少在第二方向上运动,所述控制方法包括:To achieve the above object, according to a control method of an adjusting device of a seventh aspect of the present application, the adjusting device is connected between a processing assembly and a crossbeam of a processing device, and the adjusting device is used to drive the processing assembly to move in at least a second direction. The control method includes:
获取所述加工组件在所述第二方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component in the second direction;
检测所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction;
控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to drive the machining component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
根据本申请的控制方法,通过利用调节装置调节加工组件在第二方向上的位置,可以将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备的加工效率,提高加工设备的整体性能。According to the control method of the present application, by using an adjusting device to adjust the position of a processing component in the second direction, the coordinates of processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of processing axes of multiple processing components in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置沿第一方向可运动,所述第一方向平行于所述横梁延伸的方向,所述控制方法包括:According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device is movable along a first direction, the first direction is parallel to the direction in which the beam extends, and the control method includes:
获取所述加工组件在所述第一方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component in the first direction;
检测所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction;
控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动,或,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和所述第一方向上同步移动;其中,所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:According to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component moves only in the second direction, or the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the first direction; wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the machining axis of the machining component moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method comprises:
控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标;Controlling the adjusting device to drive the processing assembly to move in the second direction, and adjusting the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly in the second direction to the working position coordinates;
确认所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;
控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动;其中,所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:According to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the processing component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the processing component moves only in the second direction; wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis of the processing component moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method includes:
控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Controlling the adjusting device to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates;
确认所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;
控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to drive the processing assembly to move in the second direction, and the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly in the second direction are adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates.
根据本申请的一些实施例,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动;其中,所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:According to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the processing component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the processing component moves only in the second direction; wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis of the processing component moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method includes:
在控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动的同时,控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上和第二方向上的实际位置坐标均调节至工作位置坐标的位置。While controlling the adjustment device to move in the first direction, the adjustment device is controlled to drive the processing component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing component in the first direction and the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
根据本申请的一些实施例,在确认所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置之后,所述控制方法还包括:According to some embodiments of the present application, after confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates, the control method further includes:
驱动所述加工轴在所述第三方向上运动,以补偿所述加工组件在所述第三方向上移动的距离。The processing axis is driven to move in the third direction to compensate for the distance moved by the processing component in the third direction.
本申请的第八个目的在于提出一种加工设备的加工方法。The eighth objective of the present application is to provide a processing method for processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,根据本申请第八方面实施例的加工设备的加工方法,所述加工设备包括加工平台和调节装置,所述加工平台至少包括一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工组件,所述调节装置连接于所述加工设备的加工组件和横梁之间,所述调节装置可在第一方向上运动且用于驱动所述加工组件至少在第二方向上运动;其中,至少相邻的所述加工组件包括一个第一加工组件,至少相邻的所述加工组件的剩余的加工组件为第二加工组件,所述加工方法包括:To achieve the above-mentioned object, according to a processing method of a processing equipment of an eighth aspect of the present application, the processing equipment includes a processing platform and an adjustment device, the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each of the processing stations corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components, the adjustment device is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam of the processing equipment, the adjustment device can move in a first direction and is used to drive the processing component to move at least in a second direction; wherein at least the adjacent processing components include a first processing component, and at least the remaining processing components of the adjacent processing components are second processing components, and the processing method includes:
控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的所述第二加工组件在所述第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围;Controlling the adjusting device to move in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range;
控制所述调节装置驱动对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的所述第二加工组件在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内;Controlling the adjusting device to drive the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range;
控制所述加工工位对应的所有的所述加工组件的加工轴加工待加工件。Control the machining axes of all the machining components corresponding to the machining stations to machine the workpiece.
根据本申请的加工方法,通过利用调节装置将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围,利用调节装置将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围,可以使得多个加工组件同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备的自动化性能,降低作业人员的操作强度,提高加工设备的加工效率,提高加工设备的整体性能。According to the processing method of the present application, by using an adjusting device to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range, and by using an adjusting device to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to a second preset error range, multiple processing components can simultaneously process the same workpiece to be processed and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the automation performance of the processing equipment, reducing the operating intensity of the operators, improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment.
本申请的第九个目的在于提出一种用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,能够减少相邻的主轴在第二方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差,利于提高电路板加工设备的加工精度。The ninth objective of the present application is to propose an adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment, which can reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of adjacent spindles in the second direction, thereby improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,根据本申请第九方面实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,电路板加工设备包括气浮套组件,所述调节组件包括:驱动件;调节块,所述调节块连接于所述驱动件和所述气浮套组件之间,且所述驱动件适于驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动;其中,当所述驱动件54驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动时,所述调节块适于带动所述气浮套组件沿第二方向运动。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, according to the ninth aspect of the present application, an adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment includes an air flotation sleeve assembly, and the adjustment component includes: a driving member; an adjustment block, the adjustment block is connected between the driving member and the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the driving member is suitable for driving the adjustment block to move in a first direction; wherein, when the driving member 54 drives the adjustment block to move in the first direction, the adjustment block is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly to move in a second direction.
根据本申请实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,通过驱动件在第一方向上的运动,能够驱动调节块在第二方向上带动气浮套组件运动,从而便于改变气浮套组件在第二方向上的位置,进而减少相邻的主轴在第二方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差,利于提高电路板加工设备的加工精度。According to the adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment in the embodiment of the present application, the movement of the driving member in the first direction can drive the adjustment block to drive the air floating sleeve assembly to move in the second direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve assembly in the second direction, thereby reducing the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,还包括:第一支架和第二支架,所述第一支架和所述第二支架之间限定出滑动空间,所述驱动件54驱动所述调节块在所述滑动空间内沿所述第一方向滑动。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment further includes: a first bracket and a second bracket, a sliding space is defined between the first bracket and the second bracket, and the driving member 54 drives the adjustment block to slide along the first direction in the sliding space.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一支架设有第一配合斜面,所述调节块设有第二配合斜面,所述第一配合斜面和所述第二配合斜面滑动配合,以使所述调节块沿所述第一方向向下滑动时驱动所述第一支架朝向远离所述第二支架的方向运动。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the first bracket is provided with a first mating bevel, and the adjustment block is provided with a second mating bevel. The first mating bevel and the second mating bevel are slidably engaged with each other so that when the adjustment block slides downward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move in a direction away from the second bracket.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一支架设有第三配合斜面,所述调节块设有第四配合斜面,所述第三配合斜面和所述第四配合斜面滑动配合,以使所述调节块沿所述第一方向向上滑动时驱动所述第一支架朝向靠近所述第二支架的方向运动。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the first bracket is provided with a third mating bevel, and the adjustment block is provided with a fourth mating bevel. The third mating bevel and the fourth mating bevel are slidably engaged with each other, so that when the adjustment block slides upward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move toward a direction close to the second bracket.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一支架设有第一滑动凸起,所述调节块设有第一滑动槽,所述第一滑动凸起可滑动地安装于所述第一滑动槽内。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the first bracket is provided with a first sliding protrusion, the adjustment block is provided with a first sliding groove, and the first sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the first sliding groove.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一滑动凸起和所述第一滑动槽均可设有多个,多个所述第一滑动凸起和多个所述第一滑动槽一一对应。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, there may be multiple first sliding protrusions and multiple first sliding grooves, and the multiple first sliding protrusions and the multiple first sliding grooves correspond one to one.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一支架包括第一安装板和第一导向块,所述第一导向块与所述第一安装板相连,所述第一安装板与所述气浮套组件相连,且所述第一滑动凸起设于所述第一导向块。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the first bracket includes a first mounting plate and a first guide block, the first guide block is connected to the first mounting plate, the first mounting plate is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the first sliding protrusion is arranged on the first guide block.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第二支架包括固定部和导向部,所述固定部与所述固定支架相连,所述导向部与所述调节块滑动配合。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the second bracket includes a fixing portion and a guide portion, the fixing portion is connected to the fixing bracket, and the guide portion is slidably matched with the adjustment block.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述导向部设有第二滑动凸起,所述调节块设有第二滑动槽,所述第二滑动凸起可滑动地安装于所述第二滑动槽内。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the guide portion is provided with a second sliding protrusion, the adjustment block is provided with a second sliding groove, and the second sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the second sliding groove.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述驱动件构造为调节螺栓,所述调节螺栓贯穿所述调节块且与所述第二支架的螺纹孔螺纹配合。According to some embodiments of the present application, in the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment, the driving member is configured as an adjustment bolt, which passes through the adjustment block and is threadedly engaged with the threaded hole of the second bracket.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述调节组件还包括弹性件,所述弹性件设于所述调节块与所述第二支架之间,且在所述第一方向上,所述弹性件适于将所述调节块朝向所述第二支架弹性预紧。According to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment further includes an elastic member, which is arranged between the adjustment block and the second bracket, and in the first direction, the elastic member is suitable for elastically pre-tightening the adjustment block toward the second bracket.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,所述第一方向为所述电路板加工设备的Z轴方向,所述第二方向为所述电路板加工设备的Y轴方向,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。According to some embodiments of the present application, in an adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment, the first direction is the Z-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment, the second direction is the Y-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
本申请的第十个目的在于提出一种电路板加工设备。The tenth objective of the present application is to provide a circuit board processing device.
根据本申请第十方面实施例的电路板加工设备,包括:固定支架;主轴和驱动结构,所述驱动结构和所述主轴均安装于所述固定支架,且所述主轴相对于所述固定支架可活动,所述驱动结构与所述主轴相连且用于驱动所述主轴相对于所述固定支架沿第一方向运动;气浮套组件,所述气浮套组件安装于所述固定支架,且所述主轴沿第一方向浮动穿设于所述气浮套组件;调节组件,所述调节组件安装于所述固定支架且与所述气浮套组件相连,所述调节组件适于驱动所述气浮套组件相对于所述固定支架沿第二方向运动,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。According to the tenth aspect of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes: a fixed bracket; a main shaft and a driving structure, wherein the driving structure and the main shaft are both installed on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft is movable relative to the fixed bracket, and the driving structure is connected to the main shaft and is used to drive the main shaft to move along a first direction relative to the fixed bracket; an air flotation sleeve assembly, wherein the air flotation sleeve assembly is installed on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft floats through the air flotation sleeve assembly along a first direction; an adjusting assembly, wherein the adjusting assembly is installed on the fixed bracket and is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the adjusting assembly is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly to move along a second direction relative to the fixed bracket, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
本申请还提出了一种用于电路板加工设备的控制方法。The present application also proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
根据本申请实施例的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法,所述控制方法适用于电路板加工设备,所述电路板加工设备包括气浮套组件和调节组件,所述调节组件包括驱动件和调节块,所述控制方法包括:检测待加工电路板的实际加工中心;获取所述实际加工中心在第二方向上的位置坐标;控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动,且所述调节块在沿所述第一方向运动过程中带动所述气浮套组件沿所述第二方向相对于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动,所述第一方向与第二方向垂直。According to the control method for circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, the control method is applicable to circuit board processing equipment, the circuit board processing equipment includes an air floating sleeve assembly and an adjustment assembly, the adjustment assembly includes a driving member and an adjustment block, the control method includes: detecting the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed; obtaining the position coordinates of the actual processing center in a second direction; controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to move along a first direction, and the adjustment block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move along the second direction relative to the position corresponding to the actual processing center during the movement along the first direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
根据本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法,控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块运动,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件相对于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动包括:控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块上升,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件朝远离于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动;控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块下降,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件朝靠近于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动。According to some embodiments of the present application, the control method for circuit board processing equipment of controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to move so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center includes: controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to rise so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move away from the position corresponding to the actual machining center; controlling the driving member to drive the adjustment block to descend so that the adjustment block drives the air flotation sleeve assembly to move toward a position close to the position corresponding to the actual machining center.
所述电路板加工设备、所述用于电路板加工设备的控制方法均与上述的调节组件所具有的优势相同,在此不再赘述。The circuit board processing equipment and the control method for the circuit board processing equipment have the same advantages as those of the above-mentioned adjustment component, which will not be repeated here.
本申请还提出了一种电路板加工设备,该电路板加工设备实现了加工组件沿床身第二方向的位置调节,通过对加工组件的位置调节能够减小不同加工组件的中心坐标误差,从而可以降低电路板加工设备的加工误差,提高加工精度。The present application also proposes a circuit board processing device, which realizes the position adjustment of the processing component along the second direction of the bed. By adjusting the position of the processing component, the center coordinate error of different processing components can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment and improving the processing accuracy.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备,包括:To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the present application provides a circuit board processing device, including:
床身,床身具有第一横梁;A bed, the bed having a first crossbeam;
加工平台,加工平台设于床身,加工平台适于支撑被加工件;A processing platform, which is arranged on the bed and is suitable for supporting the workpiece;
多个加工部,多个加工部均设于第一横梁且位于加工平台上方,且多个加工部沿床身的第一方向排布,至少一个每个加工部包括加工组件、安装架和调节组件,加工组件安装于安装架,安装架可活动地安装于床身,调节组件与安装架传动连接,调节组件用于驱动安装架和加工组件沿床身的第二方向移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向。Multiple processing parts are provided on the first cross beam and above the processing platform, and the multiple processing parts are arranged along the first direction of the bed, at least one of each processing part includes a processing component, a mounting frame and an adjustment component, the processing component is installed on the mounting frame, the mounting frame can be movably installed on the bed, the adjustment component is connected to the mounting frame by transmission, and the adjustment component is used to drive the mounting frame and the processing component to move along the second direction of the bed, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备,至少一个加工部包括加工组件、安装架和调节组件,加工组件安装于安装架,安装架可活动地安装于床身,调节组件用于驱动加工组件沿床身第二方向移动,实现了加工组件沿床身第二方向的位置调节,通过对加工组件的位置调节能够减小不同加工组件的中心坐标误差,从而可以降低电路板加工设备的加工误差,提高加工精度。According to the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, at least one processing part includes a processing component, a mounting frame and an adjustment component. The processing component is installed on the mounting frame, and the mounting frame can be movably installed on the bed. The adjustment component is used to drive the processing component to move along the second direction of the bed, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component along the second direction of the bed. By adjusting the position of the processing component, the center coordinate error of different processing components can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment and improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些示例中,调节组件包括:第一驱动件和第一滑块,第一滑块与安装架固定连接且可滑动地设于第一横梁,第一驱动件用于驱动第一滑块带动安装架沿第二方向移动。In some examples of the present application, the adjustment assembly includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the mounting frame and slidably disposed on the first beam, and the first driving member is used to drive the first slider to drive the mounting frame to move along the second direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,每个加工部还包括:第二驱动件,第二驱动件与安装架传动连接,第二驱动件用于驱动安装架沿第一方向移动。In some examples of the present application, each processing part further includes: a second driving member, the second driving member is transmission-connected to the mounting frame, and the second driving member is used to drive the mounting frame to move along the first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,还包括第一导向部和第二导向部,第一导向部设于第一横梁,第一滑块可滑动地设于第二导向部,通过第一导向部和第二导向部导向配合以使安装架沿第一方向移动。In some examples of the present application, a first guide portion and a second guide portion are further included, wherein the first guide portion is disposed on the first beam, and the first slider is slidably disposed on the second guide portion, and the mounting frame is moved along the first direction through the guiding cooperation of the first guide portion and the second guide portion.
在本申请的一些示例中,第一导向部和第二导向部中的一个为导向块,第一导向部和第二导向部中的另一个为导轨,导向块可滑动地设于导轨,导轨沿第一方向延伸。In some examples of the present application, one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is a guide block, and the other of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is a guide rail. The guide block is slidably disposed on the guide rail, and the guide rail extends along the first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,第一滑块与第二导向部相对的端面具有第一导向结构,第二导向部与第一滑块相对的端面具有第二导向结构,第一导向结构和第二导向结构导向配合以使安装架沿第二方向移动。In some examples of the present application, the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide portion has a first guide structure, and the end surface of the second guide portion opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure, and the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to move the mounting frame along the second direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,每个加工部还包括:第三驱动件,安装架包括第二横梁和移动架,第二横梁与第一滑块固定连接,移动架可移动地设于第二横梁,加工组件的主轴设于移动架,第三驱动件与移动架连接,第三驱动件用于驱动移动架沿床身的第三方向相对第二横梁移动,第一方向、第二方向和第三方向相互垂直。In some examples of the present application, each processing part also includes: a third driving member, the mounting frame includes a second beam and a movable frame, the second beam is fixedly connected to the first slider, the movable frame is movably disposed on the second beam, the spindle of the processing assembly is disposed on the movable frame, the third driving member is connected to the movable frame, and the third driving member is used to drive the movable frame to move relative to the second beam along a third direction of the bed, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
在本申请的一些示例中,第二横梁具有导向套筒,导向套筒的轴向方向与第三方向平行,移动架具有导向杆,导向杆穿设于导向套筒。In some examples of the present application, the second crossbeam has a guide sleeve, the axial direction of the guide sleeve is parallel to the third direction, and the movable frame has a guide rod, which passes through the guide sleeve.
在本申请的一些示例中,移动架还具有安装板,安装板与导向杆固定连接,主轴安装于安装板。In some examples of the present application, the movable frame further comprises a mounting plate, the mounting plate is fixedly connected to the guide rod, and the main shaft is mounted on the mounting plate.
在本申请的一些示例中,安装架还包括第一支架和第二支架,第一支架位于安装板和第二横梁之间且与安装板固定连接,第二支架位于第二横梁远离安装板的一侧且与第二横梁固定连接,第三驱动件穿设于第二横梁,且第三驱动件连接在第一支架和第二支架之间。In some examples of the present application, the mounting frame also includes a first bracket and a second bracket, the first bracket is located between the mounting plate and the second beam and is fixedly connected to the mounting plate, the second bracket is located on a side of the second beam away from the mounting plate and is fixedly connected to the second beam, the third driving member passes through the second beam, and the third driving member is connected between the first bracket and the second bracket.
在本申请的一些示例中,第一横梁包括相对且间隔设置的第一子横梁和第二子横梁,加工组件位于第一子横梁和第二子横梁之间。In some examples of the present application, the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam that are opposite to and spaced apart from each other, and the processing assembly is located between the first sub-beam and the second sub-beam.
本申请的第二个目的在于提出了一种电路板加工设备的控制方法。The second objective of the present application is to provide a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请第二方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备的控制方法,电路板加工设备包括加工平台,加工平台包含至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工部,其中,至少两个相邻的加工部中包括一个第一加工部,至少两个相邻的加工部中剩余的加工部为第二加工部,控制方法包括:获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围;确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内;获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的第二预设误差范围;确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内;控制每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部同时加工被加工件。To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the second aspect of the present application proposes a control method for a circuit board processing equipment, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes a processing platform, the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts, wherein at least two adjacent processing parts include a first processing part, and the remaining processing part of at least two adjacent processing parts is a second processing part, and the control method includes: obtaining a predetermined spacing and a first preset error range in the first direction between the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts; confirming that the error between the actual spacing in the first direction between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range; obtaining the second preset error range in the second direction between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station; confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction is within the second preset error range; and controlling the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station to simultaneously process the workpiece.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法,在确定多个加工部中心坐标的基本一致时,控制多加工部共同加工被加工件,从而减小了共同加工时不同加工部的中心坐标误差,降低了电路板加工设备的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。According to the control method of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, when it is determined that the center coordinates of multiple processing parts are basically consistent, the multiple processing parts are controlled to jointly process the workpiece, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts during joint processing, reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些示例中,每个第二加工部包括调节组件,调节组件用于调节第二加工部在第二方向上的位置;在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的第二预设误差范围之后,在确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内之前,方法还包括:获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的实际位置;若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和第二加工部中有两个在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差不在第二预设误差范围内,控制调节组件调节相应的第二加工部在第二方向上的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内。In some examples of the present application, each second processing part includes an adjustment component, which is used to adjust the position of the second processing part in the second direction; after obtaining the second preset error range in the second direction of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts, and before confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range, the method also includes: obtaining the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction; if the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing part and the second processing part corresponding to each processing station in the second direction is not within the second preset error range, controlling the adjustment component to adjust the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction, so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range.
在本申请的一些示例中,每个加工部还包括:第二驱动件,第二驱动件用于驱动加工部沿第一方向移动;在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围之前,方法还包括:获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向上的第一预设位置以及第三预设误差范围;检测每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置;若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差不在第三预设误差范围内,控制第二驱动件调节相应的第一加工部的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差在第三预设误差范围内。In some examples of the present application, each processing part also includes: a second driving member, the second driving member is used to drive the processing part to move along the first direction; before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the first direction and the first preset error range, the method also includes: obtaining the first preset position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the third preset error range; detecting the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction; if the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is not within the third preset error range, controlling the second driving member to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
本申请还提出了一种加工部,该加工部通过调节组件可以驱动主轴组件在加工部的第一方向上整体移动,从而实现了对主轴组件的位置调节,当主轴组件出现位置偏移时,能够及时对主轴组件进行位置调节,有利于提高加工精度下降。The present application also proposes a processing part, which can drive the spindle assembly to move as a whole in the first direction of the processing part through an adjustment component, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly. When the spindle assembly is positionally offset, the spindle assembly can be positionally adjusted in time, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例提出了一种加工部,包括:To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the embodiment of the present application proposes a processing unit, including:
安装架;Mount;
主轴组件,用于加工电路板,主轴组件安装于安装架,在加工部的第一方向上主轴组件相对安装架可移动;A spindle assembly is used for processing a circuit board, the spindle assembly is mounted on a mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame in a first direction of the processing portion;
调节组件,调节组件用于驱动主轴组件沿第一方向移动。The adjusting component is used to drive the main shaft component to move along the first direction.
根据本申请实施例的加工部,主轴组件安装于安装架,在加工部的第一方向上主轴组件相对安装架可移动,调节组件用于驱动主轴组件沿第一方向移动。由此,通过调节组件可以驱动主轴组件在加工部的第一方向上整体移动,从而实现了对主轴组件的位置调节,当主轴组件出现位置偏移时,能够及时对主轴组件进行位置调节,有利于提高加工精度下降。According to the processing part of the embodiment of the present application, the spindle assembly is installed on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame in the first direction of the processing part, and the adjustment assembly is used to drive the spindle assembly to move along the first direction. Therefore, the spindle assembly can be driven to move as a whole in the first direction of the processing part through the adjustment assembly, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly. When the spindle assembly is offset, the position of the spindle assembly can be adjusted in time, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些示例中,主轴组件包括:驱动件和安装座,驱动件设于安装座,安装座安装于安装架,沿第一方向上安装座相对安装架可移动。In some examples of the present application, the spindle assembly includes: a driving member and a mounting seat, the driving member is disposed on the mounting seat, the mounting seat is mounted on the mounting frame, and the mounting seat is movable relative to the mounting frame along a first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,调节组件沿第一方向穿设于安装架。In some examples of the present application, the adjustment component is disposed through the mounting frame along a first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,加工部包括:弹性件,安装架限定出安装空间,主轴组件安装于安装空间内,安装座的外表面具有第一抵接面,安装空间的内侧壁具有第二抵接面,第一抵接面和第二抵接面沿第一方向相对,弹性件抵接在第一抵接面和第二抵接面之间。In some examples of the present application, the processing portion includes: an elastic member, a mounting frame defining an installation space, a spindle assembly installed in the installation space, an outer surface of the mounting seat having a first abutment surface, an inner side wall of the installation space having a second abutment surface, the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface are opposite to each other along a first direction, and the elastic member abuts between the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface.
在本申请的一些示例中,安装架设有第一导向结构,安装座设有第二导向结构,通过第一导向结构和第二导向结构导向配合以在第一方向对安装座导向。In some examples of the present application, the mounting bracket is provided with a first guide structure, and the mounting seat is provided with a second guide structure, and the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to guide the mounting seat in a first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,第一导向结构为导向槽和导向销中的一个,第二导向结构为导向槽和导向销中的另一个,导向销插入导向槽内。In some examples of the present application, the first guide structure is one of a guide groove and a guide pin, the second guide structure is the other of the guide groove and the guide pin, and the guide pin is inserted into the guide groove.
在本申请的一些示例中,调节组件包括:第一调节件和第二调节件,第一调节件与第二调节件转动连接且与安装座固定连接,第二调节件可转动地设于安装架,通过转动第二调节件以驱动主轴组件沿第一方向移动。In some examples of the present application, the adjustment assembly includes: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and fixedly connected to the mounting seat, the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is driven to move along the first direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
在本申请的一些示例中,第二调节件为丝杆,第一调节件套设于丝杆;安装架具有安装耳,安装耳具有安装孔,丝杆穿设于安装孔;轴承安装于安装孔内,且丝杆穿设于轴承的内圈。In some examples of the present application, the second adjusting member is a screw rod, and the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod; the mounting frame has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, and the screw rod is passed through the mounting hole; the bearing is installed in the mounting hole, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing.
在本申请的一些示例中,还包括:端盖,端盖具有避让孔,端盖设于安装耳的外表面,且避让孔与安装孔对应,丝杆穿设于避让孔,端盖用于止挡轴承。In some examples of the present application, it also includes: an end cover, the end cover has an avoidance hole, the end cover is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear, and the avoidance hole corresponds to the mounting hole, the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole, and the end cover is used to stop the bearing.
在本申请的一些示例中,安装架限定出安装空间,主轴组件安装于安装空间内,在加工部的第二方向上,安装空间具有相对的第一侧壁和第二侧壁,第一侧壁和/或第二侧壁设有顶杆,顶杆适于沿第二方向相对安装架移动且适于与安装座抵接,第一方向与第二方向垂直。In some examples of the present application, the mounting frame defines an installation space, the spindle assembly is installed in the installation space, and in the second direction of the processing portion, the installation space has a first side wall and a second side wall relative to each other, and the first side wall and/or the second side wall are provided with a push rod, the push rod is suitable for moving relative to the mounting frame along the second direction and suitable for abutting against the mounting seat, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
本申请还提出了一种电路板加工设备。The application also proposes a circuit board processing device.
为达到上述目的,本申请第二方面实施例提出了一种电路板加工设备,包括:To achieve the above-mentioned purpose, the second embodiment of the present application proposes a circuit board processing device, including:
机座,包括沿第二方向延伸的横梁;A machine base, comprising a beam extending along a second direction;
加工部,多个加工部沿第二方向滑接于横梁,加工部用于对电路板加工,每个加工部均包括安装架和主轴组件,在加工部的第一方向上,主轴组件相对安装架可移动,第二方向垂直于第一方向。A processing part, multiple processing parts are slidably connected to the crossbeam along the second direction, the processing part is used to process the circuit board, each processing part includes a mounting frame and a spindle assembly, in the first direction of the processing part, the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备,通过设有上述的多个加工部,不仅可以实现多个加工部的自动化运行,提高了加工效率,而且在加工部的第一方向上,主轴组件相对安装架可移动,从而实现了对每个加工部的主轴组件的位置调节。According to the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, by providing the above-mentioned multiple processing parts, not only can the automated operation of the multiple processing parts be realized, thereby improving the processing efficiency, but also the spindle assembly can be moved relative to the mounting frame in the first direction of the processing part, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly of each processing part.
在本申请的一些示例中,加工部包括调节组件,调节组件用于驱动主轴组件沿第一方向移动。In some examples of the present application, the processing portion includes an adjusting assembly, and the adjusting assembly is used to drive the spindle assembly to move along a first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,电路板加工设备具有至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应设置至少两个加工部,调节组件用于调节加工部在第一方向上处于相同位置。In some examples of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment has at least one processing station, each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts, and the adjustment component is used to adjust the processing parts to be in the same position in the first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,电路板加工设备包括控制系统,控制系统被构造为控制相邻两个加工部沿第二方向移动预定间隔距离,控制每个加工部的主轴组件沿第一方向上移动至相同位置。In some examples of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is configured to control two adjacent processing parts to move a predetermined interval distance along the second direction, and control the spindle assembly of each processing part to move to the same position along the first direction.
在本申请的一些示例中,电路板加工设备包括控制系统,控制系统还被构造为用于控制调节组件驱动相应的主轴组件沿第一方向移动,并控制主轴组件沿第三方向加工电路板,以及用于控制相应的加工部沿第二方向移动,第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。In some examples of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is also constructed to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle component to move along a first direction, and to control the spindle component to process the circuit board along a third direction, and to control the corresponding processing part to move along a second direction, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
本申请的附加方面和优点将在下面的描述中部分给出,部分将从下面的描述中变得明显,或通过本申请的实践了解到。Additional aspects and advantages of the present application will be given in part in the description below, and in part will become apparent from the description below, or will be learned through the practice of the present application.
图1为根据本申请第一个实施例的电路板加工设备的结构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic structural diagram of a circuit board processing device according to a first embodiment of the present application;
图2为根据本申请第一个实施例的加工部的示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a processing unit according to a first embodiment of the present application;
图3为根据本申请第二个实施例的驱动部、安装部、轴承和端盖的爆炸图;FIG3 is an exploded view of a driving portion, a mounting portion, a bearing and an end cover according to a second embodiment of the present application;
图4为根据本申请第三个实施例的调节组件的剖视图;FIG4 is a cross-sectional view of an adjustment assembly according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图5为根据本申请第三个实施例的调节组件的主视图;FIG5 is a front view of an adjustment assembly according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图6为根据本申请第四个实施例的电路板加工设备的侧视图;FIG6 is a side view of a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图7为根据本申请第五个实施例的电路板加工设备的侧视图;FIG7 is a side view of a circuit board processing device according to a fifth embodiment of the present application;
图8为根据本申请第一个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图;FIG8 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a first embodiment of the present application;
图9为根据本申请第六个实施例的电路板加工设备的结构示意图;FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of a circuit board processing device according to a sixth embodiment of the present application;
图10为根据本申请第一个实施例的一个加工工位整版的示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a processing station for printing according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图11为根据本申请第二个实施例的一个加工工位整版的示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a processing station for printing according to a second embodiment of the present application;
图12为根据本申请第二个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图;12 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a second embodiment of the present application;
图13为根据本申请一个实施例的加工部钻孔校准示意图;FIG13 is a schematic diagram of drilling calibration of a processing part according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为根据本申请第三个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的结构示意图;FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图15为根据本申请第四个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的结构示意图;FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图16为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制装置的结构示意图;FIG16 is a schematic structural diagram of a control device for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图17为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板加工设备的校准方法的流程图;FIG17 is a flow chart of a calibration method for circuit board processing equipment according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板整版中电路板的排版方法的流程图;FIG18 is a flow chart of a method for layout of a circuit board in a circuit board layout according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19是根据本申请的一些实施例的加工设备的示意图;FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a processing device according to some embodiments of the present application;
图20是图19中的加工组件和调节装置装配在一起时的立体图;FIG20 is a perspective view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG19 when assembled together;
图21是图10中的加工组件和调节装置装配在一起时的主视图;FIG21 is a front view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG10 when assembled together;
图22是沿图21中的A-A线的局部剖视图;Fig. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view along line A-A in Fig. 21;
图23是图22中的调节装置和支撑底板装配在一起时的示意图;FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the adjustment device and the support base plate in FIG22 when assembled together;
图24是图23中的调节装置的一部分结构的示意图;FIG24 is a schematic diagram of a portion of the structure of the adjustment device in FIG23;
图25是图23中的调节装置的又一部分结构的示意图;FIG25 is a schematic diagram of another part of the structure of the adjustment device in FIG23;
图26是根据本申请的另一些实施例的加工设备的示意图;FIG26 is a schematic diagram of processing equipment according to other embodiments of the present application;
图27是图26中的加工组件和调节装置装配在一起时的立体图;FIG27 is a perspective view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG26 when assembled together;
图28是图26中的加工组件和调节装置装配在一起时的主视图;FIG28 is a front view of the processing assembly and the adjustment device in FIG26 when assembled together;
图29是沿图28中的B-B线的剖视示意图;Fig. 29 is a schematic cross-sectional view along line B-B in Fig. 28;
图30是根据本申请一些实施例的电路板加工设备的示意图;FIG30 is a schematic diagram of a circuit board processing device according to some embodiments of the present application;
图31是图30中所示的电路板加工设备影藏横梁的示意图;FIG31 is a schematic diagram of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG30 with the beam hidden;
图32是图31中所示的电路板加工设备的另一视角的示意图;FIG32 is a schematic diagram of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG31 from another perspective;
图33是图32中A处的剖视图;Fig. 33 is a cross-sectional view of point A in Fig. 32;
图34是图30中所示的电路板加工设备的调节组件的示意图;FIG34 is a schematic diagram of an adjustment assembly of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG30;
图35是图34中所示的调节组件的爆炸图;FIG35 is an exploded view of the adjustment assembly shown in FIG34;
图36是图34中所示的调节组件影藏驱动件的主视图;FIG36 is a front view of the adjustment assembly shown in FIG34 with the drive member hidden;
图37是图34中所示的调节组件的剖面图;Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the adjustment assembly shown in Fig. 34;
图38是本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图之一;FIG38 is a flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to some embodiments of the present application;
图39是本申请一些实施例的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图之二;FIG39 is a second flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to some embodiments of the present application;
图40为根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的主视图;FIG40 is a front view of a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图41为沿图1中的A-A的剖视图;Fig. 41 is a cross-sectional view along line A-A in Fig. 1;
图42为根据本申请实施例的加工部的剖视图;FIG42 is a cross-sectional view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application;
图43为根据本申请实施例的加工部沿第二方向的主视图;FIG43 is a front view of a processing portion along a second direction according to an embodiment of the present application;
图44为根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图;FIG44 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图45为根据本申请实施例的加工部的立体图;FIG45 is a perspective view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application;
图46为根据本申请实施例的加工部的爆炸图;FIG46 is an exploded view of a processing portion according to an embodiment of the present application;
图47为根据本申请实施例的第一调节件的示意图。Figure 47 is a schematic diagram of the first adjusting member according to an embodiment of the present application.
下面详细描述本申请的实施例,实施例的示例在附图中示出,其中自始至终相同或类似的标号表示相同或类似的元件或具有相同或类似功能的元件。下面通过参考附图描述的实施例是示例性的,旨在用于解释本申请,而不能理解为对本申请的限制。The embodiments of the present application are described in detail below, and examples of the embodiments are shown in the accompanying drawings, wherein the same or similar reference numerals throughout represent the same or similar elements or elements having the same or similar functions. The embodiments described below with reference to the accompanying drawings are exemplary and are intended to be used to explain the present application, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
下面参考附图描述本申请实施例提出的电路板加工设备、电路板加工设备的控制方法、电路板加工设备的控制装置、电路板加工设备的校准方法及电路板整版中电路板的排版方法。The following describes, with reference to the accompanying drawings, the circuit board processing equipment, the control method of the circuit board processing equipment, the control device of the circuit board processing equipment, the calibration method of the circuit board processing equipment, and the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board full layout proposed in the embodiments of the present application.
如图1-图7所示,根据本申请第一个实施例的电路板加工设备100包括:多个加工装置400,每组加工装置400包括多个加工部4,多个加工部4设于横梁3上且沿床身1的第一方向X排布,至少一个加工部4包括主轴40和调节组件43,调节组件43与主轴40连接,调节组件43用于驱动主轴40沿床身1的第二方向Y移动,第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X。As shown in Figures 1 to 7, the circuit board processing equipment 100 according to the first embodiment of the present application includes: a plurality of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, the plurality of processing parts 4 are arranged on the beam 3 and arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1, at least one processing part 4 includes a spindle 40 and an adjustment component 43, the adjustment component 43 is connected to the spindle 40, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y of the bed 1, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
具体地,作为一个具体示例,参考图1所示,电路板加工设备100还包括床身1,横梁3固定于电路板加工设备100的床身1,床身1的上表面还设有横梁支座11,横梁3固定安装在横梁支座11上并沿床身1的第一方向X延伸,横梁3上设置有多个沿第一方向X依次排布的加工装置400,进一步地,加工装置400数量可以设置为2、4、6、8、10、12等偶数个,也可设置为1、3、5、7、9等奇数个,具体数量根据需要选择设置,此处不做具体限制。Specifically, as a specific example, referring to Figure 1, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a bed 1, a beam 3 is fixed to the bed 1 of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and a beam support 11 is also provided on the upper surface of the bed 1. The beam 3 is fixedly mounted on the beam support 11 and extends along the first direction X of the bed 1. A plurality of processing devices 400 arranged in sequence along the first direction X are arranged on the beam 3. Furthermore, the number of the processing devices 400 can be set to an even number such as 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or an odd number such as 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, etc. The specific number is selected and set according to needs, and no specific limitation is made here.
本申请以6组加工装置400为例进行说明,每组加工装置400包括多个加工部4,多个加工部4同样沿床身1的第一方向X排布,如图1所示,每组加工装置400包括两个加工部4,每组加工装置400负责一个加工工位,也就是说,在加工过程中,每两个加工部4同时对一个加工工位进行加工,从而极大的提高了加工效率和稼动率,尤其适用于加工有对称、复制等加工需求的PCB板等待加工件。The present application is illustrated by taking 6 groups of processing devices 400 as an example, each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, and the plurality of processing parts 4 are also arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1. As shown in FIG1 , each group of processing devices 400 includes two processing parts 4, and each group of processing devices 400 is responsible for one processing station, that is, during the processing, every two processing parts 4 process one processing station at the same time, thereby greatly improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate, and is particularly suitable for processing PCB boards waiting to be processed with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication.
当两个加工部4同时对一个加工工位进行加工时,由于每个加工部4的主轴40本身具有的加工和装配误差,导致两个加工部4的主轴40存在中心坐标偏差,降低了两个加工部4同时对一个被加工件加工时的加工精度,现有技术中,主轴40装配完成后被完全固定,难以对主轴40在第二方向Y上进行调整,因此主轴40通常在第二方向Y上存在中心坐标偏差。When two processing units 4 process one processing station at the same time, due to the processing and assembly errors of the spindle 40 of each processing unit 4, there is a center coordinate deviation in the spindles 40 of the two processing units 4, which reduces the processing accuracy when the two processing units 4 process one workpiece at the same time. In the prior art, the spindle 40 is completely fixed after assembly, and it is difficult to adjust the spindle 40 in the second direction Y. Therefore, the spindle 40 usually has a center coordinate deviation in the second direction Y.
基于此,在本申请中,至少一个加工部4设置了可用于沿第二方向Y调节的调节组件43,具体来说,如图2所示,加工部4包括主轴40和调节组件43,调节组件43可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,可选的,主轴40上固定设置有螺母,调节组件43可以通过丝杠与主轴40上的螺母进行转动连接,转动的轴心线与第二方向Y方向平行,当调节组件43驱动丝杠转动时,丝杠带动螺母驱动主轴沿第二方向Y移动,从而实现了主轴40沿第二方向Y的位置调整。继续参考图1结合图2所示,当每组加工部4用于加工同一块待加工板时,为了保证两个加工部4的主轴40中心坐标的一致性,通过调节加工部4各自的调节组件43,或以其中一个加工部4为标准调整另一个加工部4的调节组件43,均可实现主轴40在第二方向Y中心坐标的一致性调节,对于其它各组加工部4可以采用类似的调节策略,从而可以降低每组加工部4中的主轴40中心坐标偏差,进而降低电路板加工设备100的加工误差,提高加工精度。Based on this, in the present application, at least one processing part 4 is provided with an adjustment component 43 that can be used for adjustment along the second direction Y. Specifically, as shown in Figure 2, the processing part 4 includes a spindle 40 and an adjustment component 43. The adjustment component 43 can be but is not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc. Optionally, a nut is fixedly provided on the spindle 40, and the adjustment component 43 can be rotatably connected to the nut on the spindle 40 through a lead screw, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y. When the adjustment component 43 drives the lead screw to rotate, the lead screw drives the nut to drive the spindle to move along the second direction Y, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y. Continuing to refer to Figure 1 in combination with Figure 2, when each group of processing parts 4 is used to process the same board to be processed, in order to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of the spindles 40 of the two processing parts 4, the consistency of the center coordinates of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be achieved by adjusting the adjustment components 43 of each processing part 4, or adjusting the adjustment components 43 of the other processing part 4 based on one of the processing parts 4. Similar adjustment strategies can be adopted for other groups of processing parts 4, thereby reducing the deviation of the center coordinates of the spindle 40 in each group of processing parts 4, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100 and improving the processing accuracy.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100,每组加工装置400包括多个加工部4,多个加工部4设于横梁3上且沿床身1的第一方向X排布,加工部4设置了可用于沿第二方向Y调节的调节组件43,从而实现了主轴40沿床身1第二方向Y的位置调整,可以减小每组加工装置400多个加工部4的中心坐标偏差,有利于提高每组加工装置400同时加工时的加工精度,进而提高了电路板加工设备100的使用性能。According to the circuit board processing equipment 100 of the embodiment of the present application, each group of processing devices 400 includes a plurality of processing parts 4, and the plurality of processing parts 4 are arranged on the crossbeam 3 and arranged along the first direction X of the bed 1. The processing part 4 is provided with an adjustment component 43 that can be used for adjustment along the second direction Y, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y of the bed 1, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of the plurality of processing parts 4 of each group of processing devices 400, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of each group of processing devices 400 when processing simultaneously, thereby improving the performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,多个加工部4包括加工同一电路板的第一加工部和第二加工部,第二加工部包括调节组件43,调节组件43用于驱动第二加工部在第二方向Y上移动靠近第一加工部。In some embodiments, the plurality of processing parts 4 include a first processing part and a second processing part for processing the same circuit board, and the second processing part includes an adjustment component 43, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y close to the first processing part.
具体地,当多个加工部4同时加工同一电路板时,多个加工部4可以分别设置第一加工部和第二加工部,其中,第一加工部固定不动,第二加工部包括调节组件43,当第一加工部与第二加工部的中心坐标在第二方向Y上存在偏差时,以第一加工部为基准,控制第二加工部的调节组件43驱动第二加工部在第二方向Y上朝靠近第一加工部的方向移动,从而在第二方向Y上保持第一加工部和第二加工部中心坐标的一致性,减小中心坐标误差。Specifically, when multiple processing parts 4 process the same circuit board at the same time, the multiple processing parts 4 can be respectively set with a first processing part and a second processing part, wherein the first processing part is fixed, and the second processing part includes an adjustment component 43. When there is a deviation between the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, the adjustment component 43 of the second processing part is controlled based on the first processing part to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the first processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
在一些实施例中,多个加工部4包括加工同一电路板的第一加工部和第二加工部,第一加工部包括调节组件43,调节组件43用于驱动第一加工部在第二方向Y上靠近第二加工部。In some embodiments, the plurality of processing parts 4 include a first processing part and a second processing part that process the same circuit board, and the first processing part includes an adjustment component 43, and the adjustment component 43 is used to drive the first processing part in the second direction Y to approach the second processing part.
也就是说,当多个加工部4同时加工同一电路板时,多个加工部4中的第二加工部固定不动,第一加工部包括调节组件43,当第一加工部与第二加工部的中心坐标在第二方向Y上存在偏差时,以第二加工部为基准,控制第一加工部的调节组件43驱动第一加工部在第二方向Y上朝靠近第二加工部的方向移动,从而在第二方向Y上保持第一加工部和第二加工部中心坐标的一致性,减小中心坐标误差。That is to say, when multiple processing parts 4 process the same circuit board at the same time, the second processing part among the multiple processing parts 4 is fixed, and the first processing part includes an adjustment component 43. When there is a deviation between the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, the adjustment component 43 of the first processing part is controlled to drive the first processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the second processing part based on the second processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
在一些实施例中,调节组件43与主轴40滑动连接,调节组件43的滑动方向与第二方向Y相交;或,调节组件43与主轴40转动连接,转动的轴心线平行于第二方向Y。In some embodiments, the adjustment component 43 is slidably connected to the main shaft 40, and the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y; or, the adjustment component 43 is rotationally connected to the main shaft 40, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y.
也就是说,调节组件43可以与主轴40滑动连接,也可以与主轴40转动连接,当调节组件43与主轴40滑动连接时,调节组件43的滑动方向与第二方向Y方向相交,调节组件43可沿第一方向X滑动,或者同时沿第一方向X和第二方向Y滑动,或者同时沿第二方向Y和第三方向Z滑动,总之,调节组件43的滑动方向与第二方向Y方向相交,通过非第二方向Y的滑动实现第二方向Y方向的微动,提高了调节精度;当调节组件43与主轴40转动连接时,转动的轴心线平行于第二方向Y方向,这种直接通过转动实现第二方向Y移动的方式,手动调节结构简单,成本低,调节精度高。That is to say, the adjustment component 43 can be slidably connected to the main shaft 40, and can also be rotatably connected to the main shaft 40. When the adjustment component 43 is slidably connected to the main shaft 40, the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y. The adjustment component 43 can slide along the first direction X, or slide along the first direction X and the second direction Y at the same time, or slide along the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time. In short, the sliding direction of the adjustment component 43 intersects with the second direction Y, and the micro-movement in the second direction Y is achieved by sliding in a direction other than the second direction Y, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy. When the adjustment component 43 is rotatably connected to the main shaft 40, the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y. This method of directly achieving movement in the second direction Y by rotation has a simple manual adjustment structure, low cost, and high adjustment accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,电路板加工设备100还包括:安装部432,调节组件43连接在安装部432和主轴40之间,安装部432安装于横梁3。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 2 , the circuit board processing equipment 100 further includes: a mounting portion 432 , an adjusting assembly 43 connected between the mounting portion 432 and the spindle 40 , and the mounting portion 432 is mounted on the beam 3 .
具体地,参考图1结合图2所示,电路板加工设备100还包括安装部432,安装部安装432安装于横梁3,每个加工部4上下对称设置两个调节组件43,两个调节组件43均连接在各自的安装部432和主轴40之间,如此设置,能够使得主轴40沿第二方向Y的位置调节更加平稳。Specifically, referring to Figure 1 and Figure 2, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a mounting portion 432, and the mounting portion 432 is installed on the beam 3. Each processing portion 4 is symmetrically provided with two adjustment components 43, and the two adjustment components 43 are connected between their respective mounting portions 432 and the main shaft 40. Such a setting can make the position adjustment of the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y more stable.
在一些实施例中,如图1所示,安装部432沿第一方向X可滑动地安装于横梁3。需要说明的是,安装部432可以直接安装于横梁3,或者安装部432可以通过其他零部件间接安装于横梁3。In some embodiments, as shown in Fig. 1 , the mounting portion 432 is slidably mounted on the beam 3 along the first direction X. It should be noted that the mounting portion 432 may be directly mounted on the beam 3, or the mounting portion 432 may be indirectly mounted on the beam 3 through other components.
具体地,如图1所示,电路板加工设备100还包括第三驱动机构6,需要说明的是,第三驱动机构6可以直接安装于床身1,或者第三驱动机构6可以通过其他零部件间接安装于床身1,第三驱动机构6可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等。Specifically, as shown in Figure 1, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a third drive mechanism 6. It should be noted that the third drive mechanism 6 can be directly installed on the bed 1, or the third drive mechanism 6 can be indirectly installed on the bed 1 through other components. The third drive mechanism 6 can be but is not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc.
进一步地,第三驱动机构6与加工部4可以通过齿轮、齿条进行传动连接,此处不作具体限制,只要能够实现第三驱动机构6与加工部4之间的传动即可。安装部432安装于横梁3且可沿横梁3在第一方向X移动,主轴40通过调节组件43安装于安装部432,当第三驱动机构6工作时,可以实现主轴40在第一方向X的位置调整,由此,通过调节组件43结合安装部432,可以同时实现主轴40在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的位置调整,能够降低多个加工部在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的的中心坐标偏差,从而降低电路板加工设备100的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。Furthermore, the third driving mechanism 6 and the processing part 4 can be connected by gears and racks, and there is no specific limitation here, as long as the transmission between the third driving mechanism 6 and the processing part 4 can be achieved. The mounting part 432 is mounted on the beam 3 and can move along the beam 3 in the first direction X. The spindle 40 is mounted on the mounting part 432 through the adjustment component 43. When the third driving mechanism 6 is working, the position of the spindle 40 in the first direction X can be adjusted. Therefore, the position of the spindle 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be adjusted simultaneously by combining the adjustment component 43 with the mounting part 432, which can reduce the center coordinate deviation of multiple processing parts in the first direction X and the second direction Y, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图1和图2所示,安装部432具有滑槽4321,横梁3具有沿第一方向X延伸的第一导轨31,第一导轨31安装于滑槽4321内。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 , the mounting portion 432 has a slide groove 4321 , the beam 3 has a first guide rail 31 extending along the first direction X, and the first guide rail 31 is installed in the slide groove 4321 .
具体地,横梁3设置两个与安装部432相对应的第一导轨31,第一导轨31与安装部432的滑槽4321配合安装,当第三驱动机构6工作时,主轴40可以在滑槽4321和第一导轨31的导向作用下沿第一方向X的移动,由此,通过滑槽4321和第一导轨31的配合使用,能够保证主轴40沿第一方向X平稳移动,避免移动过程中出现方向偏移,提高了主轴40在第一方向X位置调节的稳定性。Specifically, the crossbeam 3 is provided with two first guide rails 31 corresponding to the mounting portion 432, and the first guide rails 31 are installed in cooperation with the slide groove 4321 of the mounting portion 432. When the third driving mechanism 6 is working, the main shaft 40 can move along the first direction X under the guidance of the slide groove 4321 and the first guide rail 31. Therefore, through the coordinated use of the slide groove 4321 and the first guide rail 31, it is possible to ensure that the main shaft 40 moves smoothly along the first direction X, avoid directional deviation during the movement, and improve the stability of the position adjustment of the main shaft 40 in the first direction X.
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,主轴40包括旋转驱动件41和安装架42,旋转驱动件41用于驱动刀具转动,安装架42包括安装板421和移动架422,安装板421与调节组件43连接,移动架422设于安装板421,且沿床身1的第三方向Z移动架422相对安装板421可移动,旋转驱动件41安装于移动架422,第一方向X、第二方向Y和第三方向Z相互垂直。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 2, the spindle 40 includes a rotating drive member 41 and a mounting frame 42, the rotating drive member 41 is used to drive the tool to rotate, the mounting frame 42 includes a mounting plate 421 and a movable frame 422, the mounting plate 421 is connected to the adjustment component 43, the movable frame 422 is arranged on the mounting plate 421, and the movable frame 422 is movable relative to the mounting plate 421 along the third direction Z of the bed 1, the rotating drive member 41 is installed on the movable frame 422, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,主轴40包括旋转驱动件41和安装架42,旋转驱动件41在工作过程中驱动刀具转动,安装板421安装于调节组件43上,需要说明的是,安装板421可以直接安装于调节组件43,或者安装板421可以通过其他零部件间接安装于调节组件43,调节组件43用于驱动安装板421在第二方向Y上移动,从而实现主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置调整,主轴40的轴向方向与第三方向Z平行且固定安装于移动架422,沿第三方向Z,移动架422相对安装板421可移动,旋转驱动件41安装于移动架422,从而实现了旋转驱动件41在第三方向Z上的位置调整,便于电路板加工设备100运行过程中刀具的定位加工。Specifically, the spindle 40 includes a rotating drive member 41 and a mounting frame 42. The rotating drive member 41 drives the tool to rotate during operation. The mounting plate 421 is mounted on the adjusting component 43. It should be noted that the mounting plate 421 can be directly mounted on the adjusting component 43, or the mounting plate 421 can be indirectly mounted on the adjusting component 43 through other components. The adjusting component 43 is used to drive the mounting plate 421 to move in the second direction Y, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y. The axial direction of the spindle 40 is parallel to the third direction Z and is fixedly mounted on the mobile frame 422. Along the third direction Z, the mobile frame 422 is movable relative to the mounting plate 421. The rotating drive member 41 is mounted on the mobile frame 422, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the rotating drive member 41 in the third direction Z, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the tool during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,加工部4还包括:第一驱动机构44,第一驱动机构44用于驱动相应的移动架422沿第三方向Z相对安装板421移动。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 2 , the processing unit 4 further includes: a first driving mechanism 44 , and the first driving mechanism 44 is used to drive the corresponding moving frame 422 to move along the third direction Z relative to the mounting plate 421 .
具体地,第一驱动机构44可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,第一驱动机构44与移动架422连接,进一步地,第一驱动机构44可以安装在安装板421上,当第一驱动机构44安装在安装板421上时,移动架422上固定设置有螺母,第一驱动机构44可以通过丝杠与移动架422上的螺母进行传动连接,当第一驱动机构44驱动丝杠转动时,丝杠带动螺母驱动移动架422沿第三方向Z移动;第一驱动机构44可以安装在移动架422上,当第一驱动机构44安装在移动架422上时,安装板421上固定设置有螺母,由于安装板421在第三方向Z上固定不动,当第一驱动机构44驱动丝杠转动时,在安装板421螺母的反作用下移动架422沿第三方向Z移动,由此,通过驱动第一驱动机构44实现了移动架422在第三方向Z上的位置调整,进而实现了旋转驱动件41在第三方向Z上的位置调整,便于电路板加工设备100运行过程中刀具的定位加工。Specifically, the first drive mechanism 44 can be, but is not limited to, a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc. The first drive mechanism 44 is connected to the moving frame 422. Further, the first drive mechanism 44 can be installed on the mounting plate 421. When the first drive mechanism 44 is installed on the mounting plate 421, a nut is fixedly provided on the moving frame 422. The first drive mechanism 44 can be connected to the nut on the moving frame 422 through a lead screw. When the first drive mechanism 44 drives the lead screw to rotate, the lead screw drives the nut to drive the moving frame 422 to move along the third direction Z; the first drive mechanism 44 The mechanism 44 can be installed on the movable frame 422. When the first driving mechanism 44 is installed on the movable frame 422, a nut is fixedly provided on the mounting plate 421. Since the mounting plate 421 is fixed in the third direction Z, when the first driving mechanism 44 drives the lead screw to rotate, the movable frame 422 moves along the third direction Z under the reaction of the nut of the mounting plate 421. Therefore, the position adjustment of the movable frame 422 in the third direction Z is realized by driving the first driving mechanism 44, and then the position adjustment of the rotating driving member 41 in the third direction Z is realized, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the tool during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,移动架422设有第一导向部4221,安装板421设有第二导向部4211,第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211导向配合以在第三方向Z对移动架422导向。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 2 , the movable frame 422 is provided with a first guide portion 4221 , and the mounting plate 421 is provided with a second guide portion 4211 . The first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 cooperate to guide the movable frame 422 in the third direction Z.
具体地,第一导向部4221固定安装于移动架422,第二导向部4211固定安装于安装板421,第一导向部4221和第二导向配合安装以使第一导向部4221能够沿着第二导向部4211在第三方向Z上移动,当第一驱动机构44工作时,移动架422可以在第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211的导向作用下沿第三方向Z的移动,其中,第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211的轴向方向均与第三方向Z平行,如此设置,通过第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211的配合使用,能够保证移动架422沿第三方向Z平稳移动,避免移动过程中出现方向偏移,提高了移动架422在第三方向Z移动的平稳性。Specifically, the first guide portion 4221 is fixedly installed on the movable frame 422, and the second guide portion 4211 is fixedly installed on the mounting plate 421. The first guide portion 4221 and the second guide are cooperatively installed so that the first guide portion 4221 can move in the third direction Z along the second guide portion 4211. When the first driving mechanism 44 is working, the movable frame 422 can move in the third direction Z under the guiding action of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211, wherein the axial directions of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 are parallel to the third direction Z. With such an arrangement, through the cooperative use of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211, it is possible to ensure that the movable frame 422 moves smoothly in the third direction Z, avoid directional deviation during the movement, and improve the stability of the movable frame 422 in the third direction Z.
在一些实施例中,第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211中的一个为第二导轨,第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211中的另一个为滑块,第二导轨沿第三方向Z延伸,滑块可滑动地安装于第二导轨。In some embodiments, one of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 is a second guide rail, the other of the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 is a slider, the second guide rail extends along the third direction Z, and the slider is slidably mounted on the second guide rail.
具体地,第一导向部4221和第二导向部4211对应设置,若第一导向部4221设置为第二导轨,则第二导向部4211设置为滑块,若第一导向部4221设置为滑块,则第二导向部4211设置为第二导轨,第二导轨沿第三方向Z延伸,滑块可以沿第二导轨在第三方向Z上滑动。由此,通过滑块和第二导轨的配合使用可以实现移动架422在第三方向Z上的平稳移动,而且滑块和第二导轨结构简单,便于装配。Specifically, the first guide portion 4221 and the second guide portion 4211 are correspondingly arranged. If the first guide portion 4221 is arranged as a second guide rail, the second guide portion 4211 is arranged as a slider. If the first guide portion 4221 is arranged as a slider, the second guide portion 4211 is arranged as a second guide rail. The second guide rail extends along the third direction Z, and the slider can slide along the second guide rail in the third direction Z. Thus, the smooth movement of the moving frame 422 in the third direction Z can be achieved through the coordinated use of the slider and the second guide rail, and the slider and the second guide rail have simple structures and are easy to assemble.
在一些实施例中,如图2所示,加工部4还包括:光栅尺45,光栅尺45设于安装板421,光栅尺45用于检测移动架422沿第三方向Z的位置。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 2 , the processing unit 4 further includes: a grating ruler 45 , which is disposed on the mounting plate 421 , and is used to detect the position of the moving frame 422 along the third direction Z.
具体地,光栅尺45是一种利用光栅的光学原理工作的测量反馈装置,光栅尺45经常用作直线位移或者角位移的检测,其具有检测范围大,检测精度高,响应速度快的特点,将光栅尺45固定设置在安装板421上可以检测移动架422沿第三方向Z的位移,能够精确提供移动架422在第三方向Z上的位置。Specifically, the grating ruler 45 is a measurement feedback device that works based on the optical principle of a grating. The grating ruler 45 is often used to detect linear displacement or angular displacement. It has the characteristics of a large detection range, high detection accuracy, and a fast response speed. The grating ruler 45 is fixedly set on the mounting plate 421 to detect the displacement of the moving frame 422 along the third direction Z, and can accurately provide the position of the moving frame 422 in the third direction Z.
在一些实施例中,如图3所示,调节组件43包括:第一调节件4311和第二调节件4312,第一调节件4311与第二调节件4312转动连接且与主轴40固定连接,第二调节件4312可转动地设于安装部432,通过转动第二调节件4312以驱动主轴40沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 3, the adjustment component 43 includes: a first adjustment member 4311 and a second adjustment member 4312, the first adjustment member 4311 is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member 4312 and is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, and the second adjustment member 4312 is rotatably provided on the mounting portion 432, and the main shaft 40 is driven to move along the second direction Y by rotating the second adjustment member 4312.
具体地,第一调节件4311固定安装于主轴40上,安装方式可以为焊接、螺栓连接等,此处不作具体限制,可选的,第一调节件4311可以限定出一端敞开的安装槽,安装槽的内周面设置有内螺纹,第二调节件4312的外周面设置有外螺纹,第二调节件4312插入安装槽内,安装槽的内螺纹和第二调节件4312的外螺纹配合连接。Specifically, the first adjusting member 4311 is fixedly mounted on the main shaft 40, and the mounting method may be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here. Optionally, the first adjusting member 4311 may define a mounting groove with one end open, and the inner circumferential surface of the mounting groove is provided with an internal thread, and the outer circumferential surface of the second adjusting member 4312 is provided with an external thread, and the second adjusting member 4312 is inserted into the mounting groove, and the internal thread of the mounting groove and the external thread of the second adjusting member 4312 are matched and connected.
进一步地,第二调节件4312可转动地设于安装部432,当第二调节件4312转动时,由于第一调节件4311和第二调节件4312螺纹转动连接且第一调节件4311固定不可转动,因此,在反作用力的作用下,第二调节件4312的转动会驱动第一调节件4311沿第二方向Y移动。举例来说,假设顺时针旋转第二调节件4312可以使得第一调节件4311沿第二方向Y朝靠近方向移动,则当第二调节件4312逆时针旋转时,第一调节件4311在螺纹转动的作用下驱动第一调节件4311沿第二方向Y朝远离的方向移动,第一调节件4311与主轴40固定连接,从而实现了对主轴40位置的微调节。Further, the second adjusting member 4312 is rotatably disposed on the mounting portion 432. When the second adjusting member 4312 rotates, since the first adjusting member 4311 and the second adjusting member 4312 are rotatably connected by threads and the first adjusting member 4311 is fixed and cannot rotate, under the action of the reaction force, the rotation of the second adjusting member 4312 drives the first adjusting member 4311 to move along the second direction Y. For example, assuming that the second adjusting member 4312 is rotated clockwise to move the first adjusting member 4311 toward the approaching direction along the second direction Y, when the second adjusting member 4312 rotates counterclockwise, the first adjusting member 4311 is driven to move toward the away direction along the second direction Y under the action of the rotation of the threads, and the first adjusting member 4311 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the position of the main shaft 40.
在一些实施例中,第二调节件4312为丝杆,第一调节件4311套设于丝杆。也就是说,当第二调节件4312选择为丝杆时,将第一调节件4311的安装槽套设于丝杆上,如此设置丝杆相对于第一调节件4311可以转动,当丝杆转动时会驱动第一调节件4311沿第二方向Y移动,从而可以实现对主轴40位置的微调节,同时,丝杠结构简单可靠,成本低廉,有利于提高装配效率和降低成本。In some embodiments, the second adjusting member 4312 is a screw rod, and the first adjusting member 4311 is sleeved on the screw rod. That is, when the second adjusting member 4312 is selected as a screw rod, the mounting groove of the first adjusting member 4311 is sleeved on the screw rod, so that the screw rod can rotate relative to the first adjusting member 4311, and when the screw rod rotates, it drives the first adjusting member 4311 to move along the second direction Y, so that the position of the main shaft 40 can be finely adjusted. At the same time, the screw rod has a simple and reliable structure and low cost, which is conducive to improving assembly efficiency and reducing costs.
在一些实施例中,如图3所示,安装部432具有安装耳4322,安装耳4322具有安装孔43221,第二调节件4312穿设于安装孔43221。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3 , the mounting portion 432 has a mounting ear 4322 , the mounting ear 4322 has a mounting hole 43221 , and the second adjustment member 4312 is inserted into the mounting hole 43221 .
具体地,安装部432具有安装耳4322,安装耳4322可以增大安装部432与安装架42之间的接触面积,提高安装的稳定性,第二调节件4312与安装耳4322安装孔43221配合安装,第一调节件4311的安装槽安装于安装孔43221,且安装槽的外周面与安装孔43221的内周面过渡配合,从而可以为第一调节件4311提供一定的支撑导向作用,当第二调节件4312驱动第一调节件4311连同主轴40一起移动时,安装孔43221能够为第一调节件4311提供导向作用,从而可以在调节第二调节件4312时,使第一调节件4311和第二调节件4312之间的移动更加平稳。Specifically, the mounting portion 432 has a mounting ear 4322, which can increase the contact area between the mounting portion 432 and the mounting frame 42 and improve the stability of the installation. The second adjusting member 4312 is installed in cooperation with the mounting hole 43221 of the mounting ear 4322, and the mounting groove of the first adjusting member 4311 is installed in the mounting hole 43221, and the outer circumference of the mounting groove is transitionally matched with the inner circumference of the mounting hole 43221, thereby providing a certain support and guiding effect for the first adjusting member 4311. When the second adjusting member 4312 drives the first adjusting member 4311 to move together with the main shaft 40, the mounting hole 43221 can provide a guiding effect for the first adjusting member 4311, thereby making the movement between the first adjusting member 4311 and the second adjusting member 4312 smoother when adjusting the second adjusting member 4312.
在一些实施例中,如图3所示,还包括:轴承46,轴承46安装于安装孔43221内,且第二调节件4312穿设于轴承46的内圈。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3 , it further includes: a bearing 46 , the bearing 46 is installed in the installation hole 43221 , and the second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 46 .
具体地,当安装耳4322固定安装后,将轴承46沿第二方向Y朝靠近第二调节件4312的方向装配,以使轴承46安装于安装孔43221内,第二调节件4312穿设于轴承46的内圈并与轴承46内圈过渡配合,同时第二调节件4312设置有止挡面,以对轴承46进行止挡,如此设置能够对第二调节件4312提供一定的支撑作用,从而可以在转动第二调节件4312时,提高第一调节件4311与第二调节件4312之间转动的平稳性。Specifically, after the mounting ear 4322 is fixedly installed, the bearing 46 is assembled along the second direction Y toward the direction close to the second adjusting member 4312, so that the bearing 46 is installed in the mounting hole 43221, and the second adjusting member 4312 is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 46 and transitionally fits with the inner ring of the bearing 46. At the same time, the second adjusting member 4312 is provided with a stop surface to stop the bearing 46. Such a setting can provide a certain support for the second adjusting member 4312, so that when the second adjusting member 4312 is rotated, the stability of the rotation between the first adjusting member 4311 and the second adjusting member 4312 can be improved.
在一些实施例中,如图3所示,还包括:端盖47,端盖47具有避让孔471,端盖47设于安装耳4322的外表面,且避让孔471与安装孔43221对应,第二调节件4312穿设于避让孔471,端盖47用于止挡轴承46。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 3, it also includes: an end cover 47, the end cover 47 has an avoidance hole 471, the end cover 47 is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear 4322, and the avoidance hole 471 corresponds to the mounting hole 43221, the second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the avoidance hole 471, and the end cover 47 is used to stop the bearing 46.
具体地,将端盖47固定安装于安装耳4322的外表面,且保证端盖47的避让孔471与安装耳4322的安装孔43221对应放置,其中,固定安装方式可以为焊接、螺栓连接等,此处不作具体限制,第二调节件4312穿设于避让孔471并伸出一定长度,以便于第二调节件4312的转动调节,同时,端盖47还用于止挡轴承46,限制轴承46沿第二方向Y移动,进而限制第二调节件4312沿第二方向Y移动,从而在第二调节件4312转动时,为主轴40的移动提供反作用力。Specifically, the end cover 47 is fixedly installed on the outer surface of the mounting ear 4322, and ensure that the avoidance hole 471 of the end cover 47 is placed corresponding to the mounting hole 43221 of the mounting ear 4322, wherein the fixed installation method can be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here. The second adjustment member 4312 is passed through the avoidance hole 471 and extends a certain length to facilitate the rotation adjustment of the second adjustment member 4312. At the same time, the end cover 47 is also used to stop the bearing 46, limit the movement of the bearing 46 along the second direction Y, and then limit the movement of the second adjustment member 4312 along the second direction Y, so as to provide a reaction force for the movement of the main shaft 40 when the second adjustment member 4312 rotates.
在一些实施例中,如图4所示,调节组件43包括:第一驱动件433和第一滑块434,第一滑块434与主轴40固定连接且可滑动地设于横梁3,第一驱动件433用于驱动第一滑块434带动主轴40沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 4, the adjustment component 43 includes: a first driving member 433 and a first slider 434, the first slider 434 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40 and is slidably disposed on the beam 3, and the first driving member 433 is used to drive the first slider 434 to drive the main shaft 40 to move along the second direction Y.
具体地,第一滑块434与主轴40固定连接,第一滑块434安装于横梁3并可沿第二方向Y滑动,第一驱动件433用于驱动第一滑块434沿第二方向Y移动,可选的,第一驱动件433可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,第一滑块434固设有螺母,第一驱动件433可以通过丝杠与第一滑块434的螺母进行传动连接,当第一驱动件433驱动丝杠转动时,丝杠带动螺母驱动第一滑块434沿第二方向Y移动,从而可以保证与其固定连接的主轴40一起沿第二方向Y平稳移动,由此,通过第一驱动件433和第一滑块434的配合使用,能够保证加工部4位置调节的连续性和稳定性,使得加工部4沿第二方向Y的移动更加平稳。当第一驱动件433与第一滑块434转动连接,使调节组件43与主轴40转动连接,转动的轴心线平行于第二方向Y方向,这种直接通过转动实现Y方向移动的方式,实现了自动化的调节,且调节精度高。Specifically, the first slider 434 is fixedly connected to the main shaft 40, the first slider 434 is installed on the beam 3 and can slide along the second direction Y, the first driving member 433 is used to drive the first slider 434 to move along the second direction Y, optionally, the first driving member 433 can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc., the first slider 434 is fixedly provided with a nut, the first driving member 433 can be connected to the nut of the first slider 434 through a screw, when the first driving member 433 drives the screw to rotate, the screw drives the nut to drive the first slider 434 to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring that the main shaft 40 fixedly connected thereto moves smoothly along the second direction Y, thus, through the coordinated use of the first driving member 433 and the first slider 434, the continuity and stability of the position adjustment of the processing part 4 can be guaranteed, so that the movement of the processing part 4 along the second direction Y is smoother. When the first driving member 433 is rotationally connected to the first slider 434, the adjusting assembly 43 is rotationally connected to the main shaft 40, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction Y. This method of directly achieving Y-direction movement through rotation realizes automatic adjustment with high adjustment accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图4结合图1所示,还包括:第一导向机构7和第二导向机构8,第一导向机构7设于横梁3,需要说明的是,第一导向机构7可以直接安装于横梁3,或者第一导向机构7可以通过其他零部件间接安装于横梁3。第一滑块434可滑动地设于第二导向机构8,通过第一导向机构7和第二导向机构8导向配合以使主轴40沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG4 in combination with FIG1, the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8 are also included. The first guide mechanism 7 is arranged on the beam 3. It should be noted that the first guide mechanism 7 can be directly installed on the beam 3, or the first guide mechanism 7 can be indirectly installed on the beam 3 through other components. The first slider 434 is slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism 8, and the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8 are guided and matched to enable the main shaft 40 to move along the first direction X.
具体地,第一导向机构7固定安装于横梁3,第二导向机构8与第一导向机构7配合安装以使第二导向机构8可以沿着第一导向机构7在第一方向X上移动,主轴40通过第一滑块434安装于第二导向机构8,主轴40可以在第一导向机构7和第二导向机构8的导向作用下沿第一方向X的移动,通过第一导向机构7和第二导向机构8的配合使用,能够保证主轴40沿第一方向X平稳移动,避免移动过程中出现方向偏移,提高了主轴40在第一方向X移动的平稳性,且第一滑块434可滑动地设于第二导向机构8,从而实现了主轴40在第二导向机构8沿第二方向Y移动。由此,通过第一导向机构7、第二导向机构8以及第一滑块434的结合使用,可以同时实现主轴40在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的位置调整,能够降低多个加工部在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的的中心坐标偏差,从而降低电路板加工设备100的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, the first guide mechanism 7 is fixedly mounted on the crossbeam 3, the second guide mechanism 8 is installed in cooperation with the first guide mechanism 7 so that the second guide mechanism 8 can move along the first guide mechanism 7 in the first direction X, the spindle 40 is installed on the second guide mechanism 8 through the first slider 434, and the spindle 40 can move along the first direction X under the guidance of the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8. Through the cooperation of the first guide mechanism 7 and the second guide mechanism 8, the spindle 40 can be ensured to move smoothly along the first direction X, and the direction deviation during the movement can be avoided, thereby improving the stability of the spindle 40 moving in the first direction X, and the first slider 434 can be slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism 8, so that the spindle 40 can move along the second direction Y in the second guide mechanism 8. Therefore, through the combined use of the first guide mechanism 7, the second guide mechanism 8 and the first slider 434, the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be achieved at the same time, and the central coordinate deviation of multiple processing parts in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图5所示,第一滑块434与第二导向机构8相对的端面具有第一导向结构81,第二导向机构8与第一滑块434相对的端面具有第二导向结构82,第一导向结构81和第二导向结构82导向配合以使主轴40沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5, the end surface of the first slider 434 opposite to the second guide mechanism 8 has a first guide structure 81, and the end surface of the second guide mechanism 8 opposite to the first slider 434 has a second guide structure 82, and the first guide structure 81 and the second guide structure 82 guide and cooperate to move the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y.
具体地,第一滑块434的下端面与第二导向机构8形成第一导向结构81,第二导向机构8的上端面与第一滑块434之间设有第二导向结构82,第二导向结构82可以在第一导向结构81中沿第二方向Y移动,从而使得主轴40沿第二方向Y移动,可选的,相互配合的第一导向结构81和第二导向结构82可以设置为交叉滚子轴承,如此设置,交叉滚子轴承能够承受较大的轴向力和径向力,保证主轴40沿第二方向Y的移动更加平稳,并且空间布置简单,尤其适用于短距离小范围移动。Specifically, the lower end surface of the first slider 434 and the second guide mechanism 8 form a first guide structure 81, and a second guide structure 82 is provided between the upper end surface of the second guide mechanism 8 and the first slider 434. The second guide structure 82 can move along the second direction Y in the first guide structure 81, so that the main shaft 40 moves along the second direction Y. Optionally, the first guide structure 81 and the second guide structure 82 that cooperate with each other can be set as cross roller bearings. With such a setting, the cross roller bearings can withstand larger axial forces and radial forces, ensuring that the movement of the main shaft 40 along the second direction Y is smoother, and the spatial layout is simple, which is particularly suitable for short-distance and small-range movement.
在一些实施例中,如图6和图7所示,调节组件43包括:调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314,调节滑轨4314安装于安装部432,调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314滑动配合以驱动主轴40沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 6 and 7, the adjustment component 43 includes: an adjustment slider 4313 and an adjustment rail 4314, the adjustment rail 4314 is installed on the mounting portion 432, and the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 are slidably matched to drive the main shaft 40 to move along the second direction Y.
具体地,调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314用于对主轴40的运动进行导向,例如调节滑轨4314可以在垂直于调节滑轨4314延伸的方向上对调节滑块4313进行限位,使调节滑块4313仅沿调节滑轨4314延伸的方向可运动。当调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第二方向Y平行时,即调节滑轨4314水平安装于电路板加工设备100时,在调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314滑动配合作用下,主轴40沿第二方向Y移动,从而实现了主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置调节。Specifically, the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314 are used to guide the movement of the spindle 40. For example, the adjusting rail 4314 can limit the adjusting slider 4313 in a direction perpendicular to the extension of the adjusting rail 4314, so that the adjusting slider 4313 can only move in the direction in which the adjusting rail 4314 extends. When the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 is parallel to the second direction Y, that is, when the adjusting rail 4314 is horizontally installed on the circuit board processing equipment 100, the spindle 40 moves along the second direction Y under the sliding cooperation of the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y.
当调节组件43调节对应的主轴40位置时,调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314相互配合,可以防止主轴40在第一方向X或第三方向Z上产生位移,使得调节组件43可以可靠地将主轴40调节至预定位置,提高了位置调节的可靠性,进而提高电路板加工设备100的整体性能。When the adjustment component 43 adjusts the corresponding position of the spindle 40, the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 cooperate with each other to prevent the spindle 40 from being displaced in the first direction X or the third direction Z, so that the adjustment component 43 can reliably adjust the spindle 40 to a predetermined position, thereby improving the reliability of position adjustment and further improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图6和图7所示,调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314滑动配合以同时在第二方向Y和第三方向Z对主轴40运动进行导向,第一方向X、第二方向Y和第三方向Z相互垂直。6 and 7 , the adjusting slider 4313 and the adjusting rail 4314 slide together to guide the movement of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,当调节滑轨4314安装于安装部432,且调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第二方向Y存在一定夹角时,即调节滑轨4314相对于安装部432倾斜安装,当调节滑块4313沿调节滑轨4314滑动时,主轴40会在第二方向Y上运动的同时在第三方向Z上运动,由于主轴40在第二方向Y和第三方向Z同步运行,这样可以通过检测主轴40在第三方向Z上的移动距离,计算出主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离,从而得到主轴40在第二方向Y上的实际位置;而且主轴40在第三方向Z上运动,可以在将主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节主轴40在第三方向Z上的距离补偿主轴40在第三方向Z上运动的距离,结构可靠、布局合理。Specifically, when the adjusting rail 4314 is installed on the mounting portion 432, and the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 is at a certain angle with the second direction Y, that is, the adjusting rail 4314 is installed obliquely relative to the mounting portion 432, when the adjusting slider 4313 slides along the adjusting rail 4314, the spindle 40 will move in the second direction Y and the third direction Z at the same time. Since the spindle 40 runs synchronously in the second direction Y and the third direction Z, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the third direction Z, thereby obtaining the actual position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y; and when the spindle 40 moves in the third direction Z, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the third direction Z can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the spindle 40 in the third direction Z after the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y is adjusted. The structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
在一些实施例中,调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第二方向Y的移动距离小于调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第三方向Z的移动距离。In some embodiments, the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the second direction Y on the adjusting rail 4314 is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the third direction Z on the adjusting rail 4314 .
也就是说,将调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第二方向Y的夹角不小于45°且不大于90°,从而保证调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第二方向Y的移动距离小于调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第三方向Z的移动距离,如此设置,在通过检测主轴40在第三方向Z上的移动距离计算主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离时,可以使得计算出的主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离与主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的实际距离之间的误差更小,更为精准、可靠地检测出主轴40在第二方向Y上实际移动的距离,提高调节组件43在第二方向Y对加工部4位置调节的调节精度,提高电路板加工设备100的加工精度,提高电路板加工设备100的整体性能。That is to say, the angle between the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 4314 and the second direction Y is not less than 45° and not more than 90°, so as to ensure that the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting slide rail 4314 along the second direction Y is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting slide rail 4314 along the third direction Z. With such a configuration, when calculating the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the third direction Z, the error between the calculated moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be made smaller, and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting component 43 for adjusting the position of the processing part 4 in the second direction Y, improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图6和图7所示,调节滑块4313和调节滑轨4314滑动配合以同时在第一方向X和第二方向Y对主轴40运动进行导向,第一方向X、第二方向Y和第三方向Z相互垂直。In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 6 and 7, the adjustment slider 4313 and the adjustment rail 4314 slide together to guide the movement of the main shaft 40 in the first direction X and the second direction Y at the same time, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,当调节滑轨4314水平安装于安装部432,且调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第一方向X存在一定夹角时,当调节滑块4313沿调节滑轨4314滑动时,主轴40会在第一方向X上运动的同时在第二方向Y上运动,由于主轴40在第一方向X和第二方向Y同步运行,这样可以通过检测主轴40在第一方向X上的移动距离,计算出主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离,从而得到主轴40在第二方向Y上的实际位置;而且主轴40在第一方向X上运动,可以在将主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节主轴40在第一方向X上的距离补偿主轴40在第一方向X上运动的距离,结构可靠、布局合理。Specifically, when the adjusting rail 4314 is horizontally mounted on the mounting portion 432, and the extending direction of the adjusting rail 4314 is at a certain angle to the first direction X, when the adjusting slider 4313 slides along the adjusting rail 4314, the spindle 40 will move in the first direction X and in the second direction Y at the same time. Since the spindle 40 runs synchronously in the first direction X and the second direction Y, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the first direction X, thereby obtaining the actual position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y. Moreover, when the spindle 40 moves in the first direction X, the distance moved by the spindle 40 in the first direction X can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the spindle 40 in the first direction X after the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y is adjusted. The structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
在一些实施例中,调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第二方向Y的移动距离小于调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第一方向X的移动距离。In some embodiments, the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the second direction Y on the adjusting rail 4314 is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 along the first direction X on the adjusting rail 4314 .
也就是说,调节滑轨4314水平安装于安装部432,且调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第一方向X的夹角不大于45°,从而保证调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第二方向Y的移动距离小于调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上沿第一方向X的移动距离,如此设置,在通过检测主轴40在第一方向X的移动距离计算主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离时,可以使得计算出的主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的距离与主轴40在第二方向Y上移动的实际距离之间的误差更小,更为精准、可靠地检测出主轴40在第二方向Y上实际移动的距离,提高调节组件43在第二方向Y对加工部4位置调节的调节精度,提高电路板加工设备100的加工精度,提高电路板加工设备100的整体性能。That is to say, the adjusting rail 4314 is horizontally installed on the mounting portion 432, and the angle between the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 and the first direction X is not greater than 45°, thereby ensuring that the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting rail 4314 along the second direction Y is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider 4313 on the adjusting rail 4314 along the first direction X. With such a configuration, when calculating the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y by detecting the moving distance of the spindle 40 in the first direction X, the error between the calculated moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be made smaller, and the actual moving distance of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting component 43 for adjusting the position of the processing portion 4 in the second direction Y, improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图6和图7所示,调节组件还包括:驱动单元4315,驱动单元4315用于驱动调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上的移动。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 , the adjustment assembly further includes: a driving unit 4315 , and the driving unit 4315 is used to drive the adjustment slider 4313 to move on the adjustment rail 4314 .
具体地,如图6和图7所示,驱动单元4315包括调节螺杆43151和调节座43152,调节座43152具有调节螺孔且与主轴40相连,调节螺杆43151沿第三方向Z延伸,调节螺杆43151的一端与调节螺孔螺纹配合,调节螺杆43151的另一端与安装部432相连。Specifically, as shown in Figures 6 and 7, the driving unit 4315 includes an adjusting screw 43151 and an adjusting seat 43152, the adjusting seat 43152 has an adjusting screw hole and is connected to the main shaft 40, the adjusting screw 43151 extends along the third direction Z, one end of the adjusting screw 43151 is threadedly engaged with the adjusting screw hole, and the other end of the adjusting screw 43151 is connected to the mounting portion 432.
当需要调节主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置时,可以通过旋转调节螺杆43151驱动调节座43152运动以使调节座43152远离或靠近安装部432,从而带动主轴40运动,由于调节滑轨4314与调节滑块4313适于对主轴40的运动进行导向,且调节滑轨4314的延伸方向与第二方向Y的夹角为锐角,所以在调节螺杆43151驱动调节座43152运动时主轴40会沿着调节滑轨4314的延伸方向运动,主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置会发生改变,从而可以实现对加工部4在第二方向Y上的位置的调节,结构简单,使用方便。When it is necessary to adjust the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y, the adjusting screw 43151 can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 43152 to move so that the adjusting seat 43152 is away from or close to the mounting portion 432, thereby driving the spindle 40 to move. Since the adjusting rail 4314 and the adjusting slider 4313 are suitable for guiding the movement of the spindle 40, and the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 and the angle between the second direction Y and the adjusting slide rail 4314 are acute, the spindle 40 will move along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 4314 when the adjusting screw 43151 drives the adjusting seat 43152 to move, and the position of the spindle 40 in the second direction Y will change, thereby realizing the adjustment of the position of the processing portion 4 in the second direction Y, with a simple structure and easy use.
通过设置调节螺杆43151与调节座43152螺纹配合,可以通过旋转调节螺杆43151驱动调节座43152运动带动主轴40运动,这样可以较为精确地控制驱动主轴40运动的距离,提高加工部4的调节精度,使得加工工位对应的所有主轴40在第二方向Y上的位置之间的误差较小,使得电路板加工设备100可以更为精确地对待加工件进行加工,提高加工质量。By setting the adjusting screw 43151 to cooperate with the adjusting seat 43152 in a threaded manner, the adjusting screw 43151 can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 43152 to move, thereby driving the spindle 40 to move. In this way, the movement distance of the driving spindle 40 can be controlled more accurately, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the processing unit 4, so that the errors between the positions of all the spindles 40 corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction Y are smaller, so that the circuit board processing equipment 100 can process the workpiece more accurately and improve the processing quality.
将调节螺杆43151设置为沿第三方向Z延伸,这样可以使得驱动单元4315在第二方向Y上的占用的尺寸较小,使得的结构较为紧凑,使得电路板加工设备100的结构紧凑;而且,这样也可以减少横梁3至加工部4的距离,使得加工部4可以更为可靠地相对横梁3固定,防止加工部4相对横梁3产生晃动,提高加工部4的加工精度,保证生产质量,提高电路板加工设备100的整体性能。The adjusting screw 43151 is arranged to extend along the third direction Z, so that the size occupied by the driving unit 4315 in the second direction Y can be smaller, making the structure more compact, and making the structure of the circuit board processing equipment 100 compact; moreover, this can also reduce the distance from the beam 3 to the processing part 4, so that the processing part 4 can be more reliably fixed relative to the beam 3, preventing the processing part 4 from shaking relative to the beam 3, improving the processing accuracy of the processing part 4, ensuring the production quality, and improving the overall performance of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,如图6和图7所示,调节组件43还包括锁紧机构4316,锁紧机构4316用于限制调节滑块4313在调节滑轨4314上的移动。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 , the adjustment assembly 43 further includes a locking mechanism 4316 , and the locking mechanism 4316 is used to limit the movement of the adjustment slider 4313 on the adjustment rail 4314 .
具体地,调节组件43包括锁紧机构4316,锁紧机构4316用于将加工部4锁定在横梁3上。在将加工部4在第一方向X上的位置和第二方向Y上的位置调节到位时,可以通过锁紧机构4316将加工部4锁定在横梁3上,然后控制所有加工部4对待加工件进行加工。这样可以防止加工过程中的振动传递至调节组件43而导致加工部4相对横梁3产生位移,使得加工部4可以可靠地相对横梁3固定,保证电路板加工设备100加工待加工件时的加工精度,保证生产质量。Specifically, the adjustment component 43 includes a locking mechanism 4316, which is used to lock the processing unit 4 on the beam 3. When the position of the processing unit 4 in the first direction X and the position in the second direction Y are adjusted to the right position, the processing unit 4 can be locked on the beam 3 by the locking mechanism 4316, and then all the processing units 4 can be controlled to process the workpiece. In this way, it is possible to prevent the vibration during the processing from being transmitted to the adjustment component 43 and causing the processing unit 4 to be displaced relative to the beam 3, so that the processing unit 4 can be reliably fixed relative to the beam 3, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100 when processing the workpiece to be processed and ensuring the production quality.
在一些实施例中,还包括控制系统,控制系统被构造为用于控制调节组件43驱动相应主轴40沿第二方向Y上移动,控制主轴40沿第三方向Z加工电路板,还用于控制相应加工部4沿第一方向X移动,第一方向X、第二方向Y、第三方向Z相互垂直。In some embodiments, a control system is also included, which is constructed to control the adjustment component 43 to drive the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y, control the spindle 40 to process the circuit board along the third direction Z, and control the corresponding processing part 4 to move along the first direction X. The first direction X, the second direction Y, and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,电路板加工设备100还包括控制系统,控制系统可以控制调节组件43驱动相应主轴40沿第二方向Y上移动,从而可以保证不同主轴40中心坐标的一致性,减少不同主轴40的中心坐标误差,可以降低电路板加工设备100的加工误差,提高加工精度;控制系统还可以控制相应加工部4沿第一方向X移动,举例来说,假设一个加工工位具有两个加工部4,控制系统可以分别控制加工部4沿第一方向X移动,以调节相邻两个加工部4沿第一方向X的间隔距离,使得两个加工部4能够在同一加工工位内,使其能够共同加工一块电路板,当加工部4在第一方向X上的位置和第二方向Y上的位置调节到位时控制系统还可以控制主轴40沿第三方向Z开始加工电路板。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 43 to drive the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different spindles 40, reducing the center coordinate errors of different spindles 40, and reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100, thereby improving the processing accuracy; the control system can also control the corresponding processing part 4 to move along the first direction X. For example, assuming that a processing station has two processing parts 4, the control system can control the processing parts 4 to move along the first direction X respectively to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 4 along the first direction X, so that the two processing parts 4 can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board. When the position of the processing part 4 in the first direction X and the position in the second direction Y are adjusted in place, the control system can also control the spindle 40 to start processing the circuit board along the third direction Z.
在一些实施例中,至少一个加工部4还设置有调节装置,控制系统控制调节装置将相应的加工部4在第一方向X上调节至相应位置,以将相邻两个加工部4间的间距调节到预设范围内。In some embodiments, at least one processing part 4 is further provided with an adjusting device, and the control system controls the adjusting device to adjust the corresponding processing part 4 to a corresponding position in the first direction X, so as to adjust the distance between two adjacent processing parts 4 to within a preset range.
具体地,加工部4还设置有调节装置,调节装置被用于调节加工部4在第一方向X上的位置,从而保证相邻两个加工部4间的间距在预设范围之内,减少了相邻两个加工部4在第一方向X上的相对位置误差,当相邻两个加工部4在加工同一块电路板时,能够减小相邻两个加工部4在加工时的第一方向X的坐标偏差,有利于提高电路板加工设备100的加工精度。Specifically, the processing unit 4 is also provided with an adjusting device, which is used to adjust the position of the processing unit 4 in the first direction X, so as to ensure that the spacing between two adjacent processing units 4 is within a preset range, thereby reducing the relative position error of the two adjacent processing units 4 in the first direction X. When the two adjacent processing units 4 are processing the same circuit board, the coordinate deviation of the two adjacent processing units 4 in the first direction X during processing can be reduced, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100.
在一些实施例中,主轴40沿第二方向Y的移动距离为L,满足关系式:1μm≤L≤1mm。In some embodiments, the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y is L, which satisfies the relationship: 1 μm≤L≤1 mm.
具体地,主轴40安装于横梁3上,沿第二方向Y,主轴40相对于横梁3的可移动距离为L,进一步地,主轴40沿第二方向Y的移动距离可以设置为1μm、10μm、100μm、1mm等数值,主轴40沿第二方向Y的移动距离根据具体情况合理选择,如此设置能够避免主轴40沿第二方向Y的移动距离与主轴40与横梁3之间的间隔距离发生冲突,避免了主轴40与横梁3之间发生碰撞的可能性。Specifically, the spindle 40 is installed on the beam 3, and the movable distance of the spindle 40 relative to the beam 3 along the second direction Y is L. Furthermore, the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y can be set to values such as 1μm, 10μm, 100μm, 1mm, etc. The moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can avoid the conflict between the moving distance of the spindle 40 along the second direction Y and the spacing distance between the spindle 40 and the beam 3, thereby avoiding the possibility of collision between the spindle 40 and the beam 3.
在本申请的上下文的各个实施例中,各个主轴40由于装配的误差存在不同的位置偏差,在第二方向上,相邻主轴40的位置偏差可能为1μm、100μm、1mm、10mm等任意可能的数值范围,调节组件43可将其位置偏差的精度控制在1μm—3μm,提高了相邻主轴40复制加工的精度。In each embodiment in the context of the present application, each spindle 40 has different position deviations due to assembly errors. In the second direction, the position deviation of adjacent spindles 40 may be in any possible numerical range such as 1μm, 100μm, 1mm, 10mm, etc. The adjustment component 43 can control the accuracy of its position deviation within 1μm-3μm, thereby improving the accuracy of the replication processing of adjacent spindles 40.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100具有至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工部4,与同一个加工工位对应的多个加工部4可同时加工同一个电路板。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment 100 has at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 4, and multiple processing parts 4 corresponding to the same processing station can process the same circuit board at the same time.
具体地,电路板加工设备100至少设置一个加工工位,一个加工工位可以加工一张电路板,加工工位的数量根据实际需要设置,每个加工工位对应设置至少两个相邻的加工部4,每个加工工位设置的加工部4的数量同样根据实际需要设置,作为一个具体示例,如图1所示,电路板加工设备100设置6个加工工位,每个加工工位设置两个加工部4,每个加工工位放置一张电路板,加工工位设置的两个加工部4可以同时对该电路板进行加工,如此设置,实现了多个加工部4同时对一块电路板进行加工,提高了电路板加工设备100的加工效率和稼动率,可以提高电路板加工设备100单位时间单位面积的产出效率,尤其适用于加工有对称、复制等加工需求的电路板,有利于提高产品竞争力。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment 100 is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board. The number of processing stations is set according to actual needs. Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two adjacent processing parts 4, and the number of processing parts 4 provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs. As a specific example, as shown in FIG1 , the circuit board processing equipment 100 is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 4. A circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 4 provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time. With such a setting, multiple processing parts 4 can process one circuit board at the same time, thereby improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment 100, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100 per unit time and unit area, and is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, which is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100还包括工作台2,工作台2沿床身1的第二方向Y移动,主轴40沿第三方向Z加工电路板,第一方向X、第二方向Y、第三方向Z相互垂直。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a workbench 2, which moves along the second direction Y of the bed 1, and the spindle 40 processes the circuit board along the third direction Z. The first direction X, the second direction Y, and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,在床身1与工作台2之间设有第二驱动机构5,在工作台2的下方设有与第三导向部导向配合的第四导向部,通过第三导向部和第四导向部导向配合可以使工作台2沿床身1的第二方向Y移动,当第二驱动机构5运行过程中,在第三导向部和第四导向部导向配合下,工作台2可以沿第二方向Y相对于床身1进行移动,如此设置便于将被加工件移动至合适位置,同时,还可以实现对被加工件的快速定位,提高了加工效率;在工作台2上的待加工电路板移动到合适位置后,控制主轴40沿第三方向Z移动以及进行电路板加工。Specifically, a second driving mechanism 5 is provided between the bed 1 and the workbench 2, and a fourth guide portion cooperating with the third guide portion is provided below the workbench 2. The workbench 2 can be moved along the second direction Y of the bed 1 through the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion. When the second driving mechanism 5 is in operation, the workbench 2 can be moved relative to the bed 1 along the second direction Y under the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion. This arrangement facilitates moving the workpiece to a suitable position and can also achieve rapid positioning of the workpiece, thereby improving processing efficiency. After the circuit board to be processed on the workbench 2 is moved to a suitable position, the spindle 40 is controlled to move along the third direction Z and process the circuit board.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100还包括校准仪,校准仪用于检测多个加工部4之间在第一方向X上的偏差距离和在第二方向Y上的偏差距离;横梁3上还设有绝对光栅尺32,绝对光栅尺32用于微调和补偿多个加工部4之间在第一方向X上的偏差距离;调节组件43跟随对应的主轴40沿第一方向X移动,调节组件43用于微调对应的主轴40与横梁3之间的第二方向Y上的偏差距离。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment 100 also includes a calibrator, which is used to detect the deviation distance between multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X and the deviation distance in the second direction Y; an absolute grating ruler 32 is also provided on the beam 3, and the absolute grating ruler 32 is used to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X; the adjustment component 43 follows the corresponding spindle 40 to move along the first direction X, and the adjustment component 43 is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction Y between the corresponding spindle 40 and the beam 3.
具体地,电路板加工设备100中的校准仪用于检测多个加工部4在第一方向X上的偏差距离,以确定多个加工部4之间的相对位置是否准确,若多个加工部4在第一方向X上的偏差距离超出预设范围,通过绝对式光栅尺32微调和补偿多个加工部4之间在第一方向X上的偏差距离,以使得多个加工部4在第一方向X上的偏差距离处于预设范围内;同时,校准仪还用于检测多个加工部4在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,以确定多个加工部4在第二方向Y上的中心坐标误差,若多个加工部4在第二方向Y上的偏差距离超出预设范围,通过调节组件43微调对应的主轴40与横梁3之间的第二方向Y上的偏差距离,以使得多个加工部4在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,调节组件43跟随对应的主轴40沿第一方向X移动,从而实现主轴40与调节组件43在第一方向X上的整体移动。Specifically, the calibrator in the circuit board processing equipment 100 is used to detect the deviation distance of multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X to determine whether the relative positions between the multiple processing parts 4 are accurate. If the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X exceeds the preset range, the absolute grating ruler 32 is used to fine-tune and compensate the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the first direction X is within the preset range; at the same time, the calibrator is also used to detect the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y to determine the center coordinate error of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y. If the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y exceeds the preset range, the adjustment component 43 is used to fine-tune the deviation distance in the second direction Y between the corresponding spindle 40 and the beam 3 so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts 4 in the second direction Y is within the preset range, and the adjustment component 43 moves along the first direction X with the corresponding spindle 40, thereby realizing the overall movement of the spindle 40 and the adjustment component 43 in the first direction X.
需要说明的是,绝对式光栅尺32具有免回零功能,能够防止加工部4在第一方向X移动时发生碰撞,同时还可以提供加工部4在第一方向X上的定位参考,便于后续对主轴40在第一方向X上进行定位调节和补偿,从而进一步减小主轴40的第一方向X坐标偏差,提高加工精度。It should be noted that the absolute grating ruler 32 has a zero-free function, which can prevent the processing part 4 from colliding when moving in the first direction X. At the same time, it can also provide a positioning reference for the processing part 4 in the first direction X, which is convenient for the subsequent positioning adjustment and compensation of the spindle 40 in the first direction X, thereby further reducing the first direction X coordinate deviation of the spindle 40 and improving the processing accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图1所示,还包括:第二驱动机构5,第二驱动机构5用于驱动工作台2沿第二方向Y相对床身1移动。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1 , the system further includes: a second driving mechanism 5 , which is used to drive the workbench 2 to move along the second direction Y relative to the bed 1 .
具体地,在床身1与工作台2之间设有第二驱动机构5,在工作台2的下方设有与第三导向部导向配合的第四导向部,通过第三导向部和第四导向部导向配合可以使工作台2沿床身1的第二方向Y移动,当第二驱动机构5运行过程中,在第三导向部和第四导向部导向配合下,工作台2可以沿第二方向Y相对于床身1进行移动,如此设置便于将被加工件移动至合适位置,同时,还可以实现对被加工件的快速定位,进一步提高加工效率。Specifically, a second driving mechanism 5 is provided between the bed 1 and the workbench 2, and a fourth guide portion coordinated with the third guide portion is provided below the workbench 2. The workbench 2 can be moved along the second direction Y of the bed 1 through the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion. When the second driving mechanism 5 is in operation, the workbench 2 can be moved relative to the bed 1 along the second direction Y under the cooperation between the third guide portion and the fourth guide portion. This arrangement facilitates moving the workpiece to a suitable position. At the same time, it can also achieve rapid positioning of the workpiece, further improving processing efficiency.
图8为根据本申请第一个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图。电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个整版包括多个加工区域,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,多个加工部与多个加工区域一一对应设置。作为一种具体示例,执行图8所示的电路板加工设备的控制方法的电路板加工设备的结构可以如图9所示,图9为根据本申请一个实施例的执行电路板加工设备的控制方法的电路板加工设备的结构示意图。电路板加工设备100包括6组加工装置400,每组加工装置400包括加工部A和加工部B,6组加工装置与6个整版9一一对应设置,参考图10和图11所示,每个整版9包括加工区域A和加工区域B,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,电路板的数量根据需要设置,此处不作具体限制,加工部A和加工部B分别和加工区域A和加工区域B一一对应设置。FIG8 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to the first embodiment of the present application. The circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple full pages, each full page includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and multiple processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple processing areas. As a specific example, the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device shown in FIG8 can be shown in FIG9, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application. The circuit board processing device 100 includes 6 groups of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a processing part A and a processing part B, and the 6 groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with 6 full pages 9. Referring to FIG10 and FIG11, each full page 9 includes a processing area A and a processing area B, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the number of circuit boards is set as needed, and is not specifically limited here. The processing part A and the processing part B are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the processing area A and the processing area B, respectively.
如图8所示,该电路板加工设备的控制方法包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG8 , the control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
步骤S101,获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离。Step S101, obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full page.
具体地,在通过多个加工部分别对每个整版的对应的多个加工区域进行加工时,需要确定每个加工部的相对位置,以便于每个加工部能够对各自的加工区域同时加工,举例来说,参考图9-图11所示,当加工部A和加工部B同时对加工区域A和加工区域B进行加工时,需要获取加工部A和加工部B的相对位置,加工部A和加工部B的相对位置根据整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离确定,也就是说根据加工区域A和加工区域B之间的偏置距离确定。Specifically, when multiple processing areas corresponding to each entire page are processed separately by multiple processing parts, it is necessary to determine the relative position of each processing part so that each processing part can process its own processing area at the same time. For example, referring to Figures 9-11, when processing part A and processing part B process processing area A and processing area B at the same time, it is necessary to obtain the relative position of processing part A and processing part B. The relative position of processing part A and processing part B is determined according to the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in the entire page, that is, according to the offset distance between processing area A and processing area B.
在一些实施例中,获取每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离,包括:确定每个加工区域中的第一电路板,第一电路板为第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的电路板;获取每个第一电路板的坐标信息;根据第一电路板的坐标信息确定相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离。In some embodiments, obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page includes: determining the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X; obtaining the coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
具体地,整版中每个电路板的坐标信息可以为复制排版,也可以为非复制排版,进一步地,当整版中电路板的坐标信息为复制排版时,只需要列出一个电路板母版的坐标信息X0Y0,然后设置沿第一方向X的复制距离和沿第二方向Y的复制距离,以及沿第一方向X的复制数量和沿第二方向Y的复制数量,从而可以形成矩阵式复制排版阵列,如图10和图11所示,因此根据电路板母版的坐标信息、沿第一方向X的复制距离和复制数量以及沿第二方向Y的复制距离和复制数量即可获得每个电路板的坐标信息;当整版中电路板的坐标信息为非复制排版时,需要获取具体输入时的每个电路板的坐标信息。Specifically, the coordinate information of each circuit board in the whole page can be a copy layout or a non-copy layout. Further, when the coordinate information of the circuit board in the whole page is a copy layout, it is only necessary to list the coordinate information X0Y0 of a circuit board master, and then set the copy distance along the first direction X and the copy distance along the second direction Y, as well as the copy number along the first direction X and the copy number along the second direction Y, so that a matrix copy layout array can be formed, as shown in Figures 10 and 11. Therefore, the coordinate information of each circuit board can be obtained according to the coordinate information of the circuit board master, the copy distance and the copy number along the first direction X, and the copy distance and the copy number along the second direction Y; when the coordinate information of the circuit board in the whole page is a non-copy layout, it is necessary to obtain the coordinate information of each circuit board at the time of specific input.
确定每个加工区域在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板,举例来说,参考图10和图11所示,确定加工区域A在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板X0Y0与加工区域B在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板X2Y0,获取电路板X0Y0与电路板X2Y0的坐标信息,根据电路板X0Y0与电路板X2Y0在第一方向X上距离获取偏置距离DX1,需要说明的是,由于每个加工部在各自加工区域是逐行加工,因此相邻加工区域在第一方向X上不同行的偏置距离可以不同,如图10和图11所示,DX1、DX2、DX3和DX4可以相同也可以不同,具体根据实际情况设置。Determine the first first circuit board in each processing area that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X. For example, referring to Figures 10 and 11, determine the first first circuit board X0Y0 in the processing area A that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X and the first circuit board X2Y0 in the processing area B that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X, obtain coordinate information of the circuit board X0Y0 and the circuit board X2Y0, and obtain the offset distance DX1 according to the distance between the circuit board X0Y0 and the circuit board X2Y0 in the first direction X. It should be noted that since each processing part is processed row by row in its respective processing area, the offset distances of different rows in adjacent processing areas in the first direction X may be different. As shown in Figures 10 and 11, DX1, DX2, DX3 and DX4 may be the same or different, and are set according to actual conditions.
步骤S102,根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动。Step S102: controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance.
具体地,在获取每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离后,控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部根据偏置距离进行移动,以使得每组加工装置中的加工部移动至相应位置。作为一个具体示例,参考图10所示,当获取相邻加工区域A和加工区域B之间的偏置距离后,根据加工区域A和加工区域B之间的偏置距离,以加工部A为基准,控制加工部B沿第一方向X移动至相应位置,使得加工部A和加工部B的距离等于加工区域A和加工区域B之间的偏置距离;或以加工部B为基准,控制加工部A沿第一方向X移动至相应位置,使得加工部A和加工部B的距离等于加工区域A和加工区域B之间的偏置距离;或加工部A和加工部B同时在第一方向X上移动,以使加工部A和加工部B在第一方向X上移动到预定的偏置距离。加工部A和加工部B在第一方向X上的移动分别通过各自第一方向X上的驱动电机来实现,在此不再赘述。Specifically, after obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page, at least one processing unit in each processing device group is controlled to move according to the offset distance, so that the processing unit in each processing device group moves to the corresponding position. As a specific example, referring to FIG10, after obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas A and B, based on the offset distance between processing areas A and B, with processing unit A as a reference, processing unit B is controlled to move to the corresponding position along the first direction X, so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is equal to the offset distance between processing areas A and processing areas B; or with processing unit B as a reference, processing unit A is controlled to move to the corresponding position along the first direction X, so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is equal to the offset distance between processing areas A and processing areas B; or processing unit A and processing unit B move simultaneously in the first direction X, so that processing unit A and processing unit B move to a predetermined offset distance in the first direction X. The movement of processing unit A and processing unit B in the first direction X is realized by the respective driving motors in the first direction X, which will not be repeated here.
步骤S103,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离。Step S103, obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction.
需要说明的是,由于加工部的加工和装配误差,加工部的轴心会出现一定的偏摆,并且随着加工部的使用,轴心的偏摆程度会越来越大,从而会对加工精度造成很大的影响,因此在进行电路板进行加工之前,需要对加工装置中的多个加工部进行校准,以保证加工部中心坐标的一致性。现有技术中,加工部的主轴装夹完成后被完全固定,难以对主轴在第二方向Y上进行调整,因此加工部的中心坐标偏差通常在第二方向Y上。It should be noted that due to the processing and assembly errors of the processing part, the axis of the processing part will have a certain degree of deflection, and as the processing part is used, the degree of deflection of the axis will become larger and larger, which will have a great impact on the processing accuracy. Therefore, before processing the circuit board, it is necessary to calibrate the multiple processing parts in the processing device to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of the processing part. In the prior art, the spindle of the processing part is completely fixed after clamping, and it is difficult to adjust the spindle in the second direction Y. Therefore, the center coordinate deviation of the processing part is usually in the second direction Y.
具体地,当多个加工部共同加工一个整版电路板时,为保证复制加工的精度,需要保证加工部在第二方向Y上坐标的一致性,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。作为一个具体示例,参考图9所示,每组加工装置包括加工部A和加工部B,当加工部A和加工部B同时加工时,需要保证加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上坐标的一致性,获取加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。Specifically, when multiple processing units jointly process a full-page circuit board, in order to ensure the accuracy of the replication processing, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing units in the second direction Y, and obtain the deviation distance of the processing units in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y. As a specific example, referring to FIG9 , each group of processing devices includes a processing unit A and a processing unit B. When the processing unit A and the processing unit B are processed simultaneously, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing unit A and the processing unit B in the second direction Y, and obtain the deviation distance of the processing unit A and the processing unit B in the second direction Y.
步骤S104,根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直。Step S104: calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
具体地,在获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离后,根据偏差距离对加工部进行校准,在校准过程中,可以选择任意加工部为基准,对需要校准的加工部控制其沿第二方向Y移动,以使得所有加工部之前的偏差距离处于预设范围。Specifically, after obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, the processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance. During the calibration process, any processing part can be selected as a reference, and the processing part that needs to be calibrated is controlled to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
步骤S105,在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。Step S105, after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
具体地,当每组加工装置中的加工部均移动到目标位置后,即每组加工装置相邻加工部之间在第一方向X上的距离与相对应的相邻加工区域之间在第一方向X上的偏置距离一致,或者在预设范围内;且每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,则控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。Specifically, when the processing parts in each group of processing devices are moved to the target position, that is, the distance between adjacent processing parts of each group of processing devices in the first direction X is consistent with the offset distance between corresponding adjacent processing areas in the first direction X, or is within a preset range; and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within the preset range, the processing parts are controlled to process the circuit boards in the corresponding processing areas.
进一步地,作为一个具体示例,参考图10所示,当加工部A和加工部B同时对加工区域A和加工区域B进行加工时,加工部A和加工部B首先对加工区域A和加工区域B中的第一行电路板进行加工,加工区域A和加工区域B中第一行的偏置距离为DX1,控制加工部A和/或加工部B移动以使加工部A和/或加工部B沿第一方向X的距离为DX1,当加工部A依次从第三方向Z上对加工区域A中的电路板进行加工时,加工部B依次从第三方向Z上对加工区域B中的电路板进行加工,由于加工部A和加工部B的距离固定为偏置距离DX1,当加工部A对电路板X1Y0加工时,保证加工部B对电路板X3Y0进行加工。Further, as a specific example, referring to Figure 10, when processing unit A and processing unit B process processing area A and processing area B at the same time, processing unit A and processing unit B first process the first row of circuit boards in processing area A and processing area B, and the offset distance of the first row in processing area A and processing area B is DX1. Processing unit A and/or processing unit B are controlled to move so that the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B along the first direction X is DX1. When processing unit A processes the circuit boards in processing area A from the third direction Z in sequence, processing unit B processes the circuit boards in processing area B from the third direction Z in sequence. Since the distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is fixed at the offset distance DX1, when processing unit A processes circuit board X1Y0, processing unit B is guaranteed to process circuit board X3Y0.
在本申请的另一实施方式中,如图12所示,该电路板加工设备的控制方法包括以下步骤:In another embodiment of the present application, as shown in FIG12 , the control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
步骤S201,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;Step S201, obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction;
步骤S202,根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准;Step S202, calibrating at least one processing part according to the deviation distance;
步骤S203,获取每个整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离;Step S203, obtaining an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each full page;
步骤S204,根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;其中,第一方向与第二方向垂直;Step S204, controlling at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance; wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction;
步骤S205,在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。Step S205, after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area.
在此实施方式中,只是改变了第一方向和第二方向的先后顺序,其它与前述实施例的控制方法相同,此处不再赘述。In this implementation, only the order of the first direction and the second direction is changed, and the other control methods are the same as those in the previous embodiment, which will not be described again.
当多个加工部完成各自加工区域当前行中的所有电路板后,需要对下一行的所有电路板进行加工,需要根据下一行的偏置距离重新控制加工部进行加工,举例来说,继续参考图10所示,当加工部A和加工部B完成加工第一行中的所有电路板后,控制工作台沿第二方向Y移动距离DY1,并将加工部A和加工部B之间的偏置距离调整为DX2,类似的,当加工部A对电路板X0Y1加工时,加工部B对电路板X2Y1进行加工,当加工部A对电路板X1Y1加工时,加工部B对电路板X3Y1进行加工,依次类推,控制加工部完成整个整版的加工。When multiple processing units have completed all the circuit boards in the current row of their respective processing areas, they need to process all the circuit boards in the next row, and need to re-control the processing units to perform processing based on the offset distance of the next row. For example, referring to FIG10 , when processing unit A and processing unit B have completed processing all the circuit boards in the first row, the workbench is controlled to move a distance DY1 along the second direction Y, and the offset distance between processing unit A and processing unit B is adjusted to DX2. Similarly, when processing unit A processes circuit board X0Y1, processing unit B processes circuit board X2Y1; when processing unit A processes circuit board X1Y1, processing unit B processes circuit board X3Y1, and so on, the processing units are controlled to complete the processing of the entire plate.
由此,实现多个加工部对同一整版的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,同时,在控制多个加工部加工之前,控制相邻加工部沿第一方向X的距离与每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离一种,并且使得每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,从而保证了多个加工部共同加工时的加工精度,提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能,有利于提高产品竞争力。Thus, multiple processing units can jointly process the same whole plate, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment. At the same time, before controlling the processing of the multiple processing units, the distance between adjacent processing units along the first direction X and the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in each whole plate in the first direction X are controlled, and the deviation distance of all processing units in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is made within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing units jointly process, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
在一些实施例中,至少一个加工部包括调节组件,根据偏差距离对加工部进行校准,包括:调节组件控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第二方向Y上移动,以对加工部进行校准。In some embodiments, at least one processing part includes an adjustment component to calibrate the processing part according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction Y to calibrate the processing part.
具体地,每组加工装置的加工部中的至少一个加工部包括调节组件,在根据偏差距离对加工部进行校准时,可以选择不具有调节组件的加工部为基准,控制需要校准的加工部中的调节组件,使得调节组件驱动相应的加工部沿第二方向Y移动,以使得所有加工部之前的偏差距离处于预设范围。Specifically, at least one processing part in each group of processing devices includes an adjustment component. When calibrating the processing part according to the deviation distance, the processing part without the adjustment component can be selected as a reference, and the adjustment component in the processing part that needs to be calibrated can be controlled so that the adjustment component drives the corresponding processing part to move along the second direction Y, so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
在一些实施例中,至少一个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,以第一加工部为基准,第二加工部的调节组件控制第二加工部在第二方向Y上向第一加工部移动靠近,以到达目标位置的预设范围内。In some embodiments, at least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part. Based on the first processing part, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in the second direction Y to reach within a preset range of the target position.
具体地,当至少一个加工部同时加工同一电路板时,至少一个加工部可以分别设置第一加工部和第二加工部,举例来说,如图9所示,加工部A设置为第一加工部,加工部B设置为第二加工部,其中,第一加工部固定不动,第二加工部包括调节组件,当第一加工部与第二加工部的中心坐标在第二方向Y上存在偏差距离时,以第一加工部为基准,控制第二加工部的调节组件驱动第二加工部在第二方向Y上朝靠近第一加工部的方向移动,从而在第二方向Y上保持第一加工部和第二加工部中心坐标的一致性,减小中心坐标误差。Specifically, when at least one processing part processes the same circuit board at the same time, at least one processing part can be respectively set as a first processing part and a second processing part. For example, as shown in Figure 9, processing part A is set as the first processing part, and processing part B is set as the second processing part, wherein the first processing part is fixed, and the second processing part includes an adjustment component. When there is a deviation distance between the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, the adjustment component of the second processing part is controlled based on the first processing part to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the first processing part, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y and reducing the center coordinate error.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,包括:通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息;根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y based on the coordinate information.
具体地,可以通过在工作台安装的校准仪的方式对多个加工部进行校准,通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息,根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。进一步地,作为一个具体示例,如图13所示,假设加工装置包括加工部A和加工部B,将校准仪放置在工作台上,将加工部A和加工部B依次调整到校准仪的中心位置,分别获取加工部A和加工部B的坐标信息,根据记录的加工部A和加工部B的坐标现象,确定加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。由此,通过设置校准仪便于获取多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,提高了偏差距离的获取效率,有利于多个加工部之间的中心坐标调节。Specifically, multiple processing parts can be calibrated by means of a calibrator installed on a workbench, and the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices can be obtained by the calibrator, and the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y can be determined according to the coordinate information. Further, as a specific example, as shown in FIG13, assuming that the processing device includes a processing part A and a processing part B, the calibrator is placed on the workbench, and the processing part A and the processing part B are adjusted to the center position of the calibrator in turn, and the coordinate information of the processing part A and the processing part B are obtained respectively. According to the recorded coordinate phenomena of the processing part A and the processing part B, the deviation distance of the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is determined. Therefore, by setting up the calibrator, it is convenient to obtain the deviation distance of multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, which improves the efficiency of obtaining the deviation distance and is conducive to the adjustment of the center coordinates between multiple processing parts.
需要说明的是,校准仪可以是一直安装在工作台上,也可以取下来,只有校准时才临时安装在工作台上,校准工具可以是校准仪,也可以是其他位置测量传感器,包括但不限于:对刀仪、CCD相机、光栅尺、磁栅、AOI检测装置等,只需要获取到B轴相对A轴在X和Y方向的位置偏差值,此处不做具体限制。It should be noted that the calibrator can be installed on the workbench all the time or be removed and temporarily installed on the workbench only during calibration. The calibration tool can be a calibrator or other position measurement sensors, including but not limited to: tool setting probe, CCD camera, grating scale, magnetic grating, AOI detection device, etc. It is only necessary to obtain the position deviation value of the B-axis relative to the A-axis in the X and Y directions, and no specific restrictions are made here.
在一些实施例中,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,包括:控制多个加工部进行预加工处理;获取每个加工部对应的预加工位置的坐标信息;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息;根据任一个加工部的位置信息控制多个加工部中的其他加工部移动,以使多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设偏差范围。In some embodiments, the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: controlling multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtaining the coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determining the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determining the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; and controlling the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one of the processing parts, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset deviation range.
具体地,控制加工部对相应的预设电路板进行预加工处理,获取预设电路板的预加工位置的坐标信息,以确定多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,作为一个具体示例,参考图10和图11所示,控制加工部A和加工部B分别对加工区域A在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板与加工区域B在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板进行预加工处理,预加工处理包括但不限于钻孔、切割等,以获取加工区域A第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息和加工区域B第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息,根据加工区域A第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息和加工区域B第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息确定加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,并根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息,即确定加工部A的位置信息,并以加工部A的位置信息为基准,判断加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离是否在预设距离范围内,如果加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离未处于预设距离范围,以加工部A的位置信息为基准,控制加工部B沿第二方向Y移动,以使加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内。由此,以多个加工部中的一个加工部的位置信息为基准,控制多个加工部中的其他加工部沿第二方向Y移动,直至多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围,从而保证了多个加工部在第二方向Y的坐标一致性,减小了中心坐标偏差,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, the processing unit is controlled to perform pre-processing on the corresponding preset circuit board, and coordinate information of the pre-processing position of the preset circuit board is obtained to determine the deviation distance of multiple processing units in the second direction Y. As a specific example, referring to Figures 10 and 11, the processing unit A and the processing unit B are controlled to perform pre-processing on the first circuit board of the processing area A that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X and the first circuit board of the processing area B that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X, respectively. The pre-processing includes but is not limited to drilling, cutting, etc., to obtain the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B. The coordinate information of the drilling position of the circuit board and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B determine the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y, and determine the position information of any processing part among the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position, that is, determine the position information of the processing part A, and use the position information of the processing part A as a reference to determine whether the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset distance range. If the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, use the position information of the processing part A as a reference to control the processing part B to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset range. Therefore, using the position information of one of the multiple processing parts as a reference, control the other processing parts among the multiple processing parts to move along the second direction Y until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within the preset range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating the improvement of processing accuracy.
在一些实施例中,如图14所示,上述的电路板加工设备的控制方法还包括以下步骤:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 14 , the control method of the circuit board processing equipment further includes the following steps:
步骤S301,获取每个加工区域的位置信息。Step S301, obtaining the position information of each processing area.
步骤S302,根据每个电路板的坐标信息和加工区域的位置信息确定第二电路板,第二电路板未完全处于同一个加工区域中。Step S302, determining a second circuit board according to the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, wherein the second circuit board is not completely located in the same processing area.
步骤S303,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工。Step S303, controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
具体地,获取每个加工区域的位置信息,举例来说,如图10和图11所示,加工区域包括加工区域A和加工区域B,分别获取加工区域A和加工区域B的位置信息,并根据整版中每个电路板的坐标信息以及加工区域A和加工区域B的位置信息确定第二电路板,第二电路板未完全处于同一个加工区域中,如图11所示,确定的第二电路板板分别为X2Y0、X1Y1、X2Y2和X2Y3,对于确定的第二电路板采用与整版对应的加工装置中的多个加工部分别对第二电路板进行加工,即采用加工部A和/或加工部B分别对第二电路板板X2Y0、X1Y1、X2Y2和X2Y3进行加工,以防止在加工过程中对第二电路板的遗漏。Specifically, the position information of each processing area is obtained. For example, as shown in Figures 10 and 11, the processing area includes a processing area A and a processing area B. The position information of processing area A and processing area B are respectively obtained, and the second circuit board is determined according to the coordinate information of each circuit board in the whole page and the position information of processing area A and processing area B. The second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area. As shown in Figure 11, the determined second circuit boards are X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3, respectively. For the determined second circuit boards, multiple processing sections in the processing device corresponding to the whole page are used to process the second circuit boards respectively, that is, the processing section A and/or the processing section B are used to process the second circuit boards X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 respectively, so as to prevent the omission of the second circuit board during the processing.
在一些实施例中,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工,包括:确定整版中的分割线,分割线用于划分整版上的加工区域;根据分割线将第二电路板划分为第一部分和第二部分,并确定第一部分和第二部所处的加工区域;控制与加工区域对应的加工部对第一部分和第二部分进行加工。In some embodiments, controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: determining a dividing line in the entire page, the dividing line being used to divide the processing area on the entire page; dividing the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determining the processing area in which the first part and the second part are located; and controlling the processing unit corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
具体地,在根据加工部划分加工区域后,确定整版在第一方向X上任意相邻两个加工区域之间的分割线,并并在确定第二电路板后,将处于分割线上的第二电路板进行区分,将第二电路板沿分割线划分为第一部分和第二部分,作为一种具体示例,如图11所示,加工区域A和加工区域B具有一条分割线(图中虚线所示),第二电路板X2Y0、X1Y1、X2Y2和X2Y3被分割线划分为第一部分和第二部分,其中第一部分位于加工区域A,第二部分位于加工区域B,在将第一部分和第二部分归属到相应的加工区域后,根据相应的加工区域所对应的加工部对第二电路板的第一部分和第二部分进行加工,也就是说,通过加工部A对处于加工区域A中的第一部分的第二电路板进行加工,以及通过加工部B对处于加工区域B中的第二部分的第二电路板进行加工,需要说明的是,在加工部A对第一部分的第二电路板进行加工时,加工部B停止加工动作,当加工部A完成对第一部分的第二电路板加工后,控制加工部B移动至第二部分的第二电路板位置并进行加工。由此,可以将处于相邻两个加工区域的第二电路板划分为第一部分和第二部分,并根据第一部分和第二部分所对应的加工区域的加工部分别对第二电路板的第一部分和第二部分进行加工,从而实现了对对处于两个相邻加工区域第二电路板的加工,提高了加工效率,并可以防止加工遗漏。Specifically, after the processing area is divided according to the processing part, a dividing line between any two adjacent processing areas in the first direction X of the whole page is determined, and after the second circuit board is determined, the second circuit board on the dividing line is distinguished, and the second circuit board is divided into a first part and a second part along the dividing line. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 11, the processing area A and the processing area B have a dividing line (shown by a dotted line in the figure), and the second circuit boards X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 are divided into a first part and a second part by the dividing line, wherein the first part is located in the processing area A, and the second part is located in the processing area B. After the first and second parts are assigned to the corresponding processing areas, the first and second parts of the second circuit board are processed according to the processing parts corresponding to the corresponding processing areas, that is, the second circuit board of the first part in the processing area A is processed by the processing part A, and the second circuit board of the second part in the processing area B is processed by the processing part B. It should be noted that when the processing part A processes the second circuit board of the first part, the processing part B stops the processing action. When the processing part A completes the processing of the second circuit board of the first part, the processing part B is controlled to move to the position of the second circuit board of the second part and process it. In this way, the second circuit board in two adjacent processing areas can be divided into the first part and the second part, and the first part and the second part of the second circuit board are processed respectively according to the processing parts of the processing areas corresponding to the first part and the second part, thereby realizing the processing of the second circuit board in two adjacent processing areas, improving the processing efficiency, and preventing processing omissions.
在一些实施例中,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工,包括:获取第二电路板的数量信息;根据数量信息向加工部分配第二电路板,以使各加工部所分配到的第二电路板的数量之差处于预设差值范围。In some embodiments, controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board includes: obtaining quantity information of the second circuit board; allocating the second circuit board to the processing unit according to the quantity information so that the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing unit is within a preset difference range.
具体地,在根据加工部划分加工区域后,确定整版中处于分割线上的第二电路板的数量信息,将处于分割线上的第二电路板分配给两个加工区域所对应的加工部进行加工,需要说明的是,两个加工区域所对应的加工部所加工的第二电路板的数量之差处于预设范围,也是就是说尽量保持两个加工部加工相同数量的第二电路板,从而保证了加工部加工时长基本一致,保证了多个加工部的使用周期尽量相同。Specifically, after dividing the processing areas according to the processing departments, the quantity information of the second circuit boards on the dividing line in the entire page is determined, and the second circuit boards on the dividing line are allocated to the processing departments corresponding to the two processing areas for processing. It should be noted that the difference in the quantity of the second circuit boards processed by the processing departments corresponding to the two processing areas is within a preset range, that is, try to keep the two processing departments processing the same number of second circuit boards, thereby ensuring that the processing time of the processing departments is basically the same, and ensuring that the use cycles of multiple processing departments are as similar as possible.
进一步地,作为一个具体示例,参考图11所示,第二电路板的数量为4,第二电路板分别为X2Y0、X1Y1、X2Y2和X2Y3,可选的,分别通过加工部A加工两个第二电路板以及加工部B加工两个第二电路板,具体来说,首先通过加工部A加工第二电路板X2Y0,然后通过加工部B加工第二电路板X1Y1,再通过加工部A加工第二电路板X2Y2,最后通过加工部B加工第二电路板X2Y3,从而完成所有第二电路板的加工,需要说明的是,上述加工部A和加工部B的加工顺序仅作为一个示例,也可以采用其他次序进行加工,此处不作具体限制。Further, as a specific example, referring to Figure 11, the number of second circuit boards is 4, and the second circuit boards are X2Y0, X1Y1, X2Y2 and X2Y3 respectively. Optionally, two second circuit boards are processed by processing part A and two second circuit boards are processed by processing part B respectively. Specifically, the second circuit board X2Y0 is first processed by processing part A, then the second circuit board X1Y1 is processed by processing part B, then the second circuit board X2Y2 is processed by processing part A, and finally the second circuit board X2Y3 is processed by processing part B, thereby completing the processing of all second circuit boards. It should be noted that the above-mentioned processing order of processing part A and processing part B is only used as an example, and other orders can also be used for processing, and no specific limitation is made here.
由此,通过相邻两个加工区域的加工部分别对所有的第二电路板依次进行加工,不仅可以防止对第二电路板的加工遗漏,而且还可以保证多个加工部的使用周期尽量相同,有利于降低加工部刀具的磨损,提高加工精度。Therefore, all the second circuit boards are processed in sequence by the processing parts of two adjacent processing areas respectively, which can not only prevent the omission of processing of the second circuit boards, but also ensure that the service life of multiple processing parts is as similar as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the wear of the processing tool and improve the processing accuracy.
图15为根据本申请第四个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图,如图15所示,该电路板加工设备的控制方法包括以下步骤:FIG. 15 is a flow chart of a control method for a circuit board processing device according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 15 , the control method for a circuit board processing device includes the following steps:
步骤S401,获取整版所有电路板的坐标信息。Step S401, obtaining coordinate information of all circuit boards in the entire page.
步骤S402,判断是否为复制排版,如果是,执行步骤S303,如果否,执行步骤S304。Step S402, determine whether it is a copy layout, if yes, execute step S303, if not, execute step S304.
步骤S403,提取电路板母版的坐标信息。Step S403, extracting the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard.
步骤S404,输入相邻加工区域的偏置距离。Step S404, inputting the offset distance between adjacent processing areas.
步骤S405,读取相邻加工区域的偏置距离。Step S405, reading the offset distance between adjacent processing areas.
步骤S406,加工部同时对整版各自加工区域的复制排版的电路板进行加工。In step S406, the processing unit processes the duplicated layout circuit boards in the respective processing areas of the entire page at the same time.
步骤S407,加工部分别对整版各自加工区域的非复制排版的电路板单独进行加工。Step S407, the processing department processes the non-copy layout circuit boards in the respective processing areas of the entire page separately.
由此,可以实现电路板加工设备对整版中的复制排版的电路板和非复制排版的电路板的加工,扩展了电路板加工设备的应用范围。Therefore, the circuit board processing equipment can process the circuit boards with duplicate layout and the circuit boards with non-duplicate layout in the whole page, thereby expanding the application scope of the circuit board processing equipment.
综上,根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法,获取每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离;根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向X上移动;获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准,其中,第一方向X与第二方向Y垂直;在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。由此,实现多个加工部对同一整版的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,同时,在控制多个加工部加工之前,控制相邻加工部沿第一方向X的距离与每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离一种,并且使得每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,从而保证了多个加工部共同加工时的加工精度,提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能,有利于提高产品竞争力。In summary, according to the control method of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page is obtained; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance; the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained; at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y; after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area. In this way, multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved. At the same time, before controlling the processing of multiple processing parts, the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction X is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
图16为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板加工设备的控制装置的结构示意图。电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个整版包括多个加工区域,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,多个加工部与多个加工区域一一对应设置。作为一种具体示例,执行图8所示的电路板加工设备的控制方法的电路板加工设备的结构可以如图9所示,图9为根据本申请一个实施例的执行电路板加工设备的控制方法的电路板加工设备的结构示意图。电路板加工设备100包括6组加工装置400,每组加工装置400包括加工部A和加工部B,6组加工装置与6个整版9一一对应设置,参考图10和图11所示,每个整版9包括加工区域A和加工区域B,每个加工区域包括至少一个电路板,电路板的数量根据需要设置,此处不作具体限制,加工部A和加工部B分别和加工区域A和加工区域B一一对应设置。如图14所示,该电路板加工设备的控制装置200包括:获取模块210、控制模块220和校准模块230。FIG16 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a control device of a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application. The circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts, multiple groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple full pages, each full page includes multiple processing areas, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and multiple processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with multiple processing areas. As a specific example, the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device shown in FIG8 can be shown in FIG9, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the circuit board processing device that executes the control method of the circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application. The circuit board processing device 100 includes 6 groups of processing devices 400, each group of processing devices 400 includes a processing part A and a processing part B, and the 6 groups of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with 6 full pages 9. Referring to FIG10 and FIG11, each full page 9 includes a processing area A and a processing area B, each processing area includes at least one circuit board, and the number of circuit boards is set as needed, and is not specifically limited here. The processing part A and the processing part B are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the processing area A and the processing area B, respectively. As shown in FIG. 14 , the control device 200 of the circuit board processing equipment includes: an acquisition module 210 , a control module 220 and a calibration module 230 .
其中,获取模块210用于获取每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离、以及获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,其中,第一方向X与第二方向Y垂直;控制模块220用于根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向X上移动;校准模块230用于根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准;控制模块220还用于在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。Among them, the acquisition module 210 is used to obtain the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in each full page in the first direction X, and to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y; the control module 220 is used to control at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance; the calibration module 230 is used to calibrate at least one processing part according to the deviation distance; the control module 220 is also used to control the processing part in each group of processing devices to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area after the processing part moves to the target position.
在一些实施例中,至少一个加工部包括调节组件,校准模块230还具体用于:调节组件控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第二方向Y上移动,以对加工部进行校准。In some embodiments, at least one processing part includes an adjustment component, and the calibration module 230 is further specifically used for: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of processing devices to move in the second direction Y to calibrate the processing part.
在一些实施例中,至少一个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,以第一加工部为基准,第二加工部的调节组件控制第二加工部在第二方向Y上向第一加工部移动靠近,以到达目标位置的预设范围内。In some embodiments, at least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part. Based on the first processing part, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in the second direction Y to reach within a preset range of the target position.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,获取模块210具体用于:通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息;根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment further includes a calibrator, and the acquisition module 210 is specifically used to: obtain coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; and determine the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information.
在一些实施例中,校准模块230还具体用于:控制多个加工部进行预加工处理;获取每个加工部对应的预加工位置的坐标信息;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离;根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息;根据任一个加工部的位置信息控制多个加工部中的其他加工部移动,以使多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设偏差范围。In some embodiments, the calibration module 230 is also specifically used to: control multiple processing parts to perform pre-processing; obtain coordinate information of the pre-processing position corresponding to each processing part; determine the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; determine the position information of any one of the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position; control the movement of other processing parts in the multiple processing parts according to the position information of any one of the processing parts, so that the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset deviation range.
在一些实施例中,获取模块210具体用于:确定每个加工区域中的第一电路板,第一电路板为第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的电路板;获取每个第一电路板的坐标信息;根据第一电路板的坐标信息确定相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离。In some embodiments, the acquisition module 210 is specifically used to: determine the first circuit board in each processing area, the first circuit board being the first circuit board in the first direction X that is completely in the same processing area; obtain coordinate information of each first circuit board; and determine the offset distance between adjacent processing areas based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
在一些实施例中,获取模块210还具体用于:获取每个加工区域的位置信息;控制模块220还具体用于:根据每个电路板的坐标信息和加工区域的位置信息确定第二电路板,第二电路板未完全处于同一个加工区域中,控制加工部移动至预设位置,以对第二电路板进行加工。In some embodiments, the acquisition module 210 is also specifically used to: acquire the position information of each processing area; the control module 220 is also specifically used to: determine the second circuit board based on the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, the second circuit board is not completely in the same processing area, and control the processing part to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
在一些实施例中,控制模块220还具体用于:确定整版中的分割线,分割线用于划分整版上的加工区域;根据分割线将第二电路板划分为第一部分和第二部分,并确定第一部分和第二部所处的加工区域;控制与加工区域对应的加工部对第一部分和第二部分进行加工。In some embodiments, the control module 220 is also specifically used to: determine a dividing line in the whole page, the dividing line is used to divide the processing area on the whole page; divide the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determine the processing area where the first part and the second part are located; control the processing part corresponding to the processing area to process the first part and the second part.
在一些实施例中,控制模块220还具体用于:获取第二电路板的数量信息;根据数量信息向加工部分配第二电路板,以使各加工部所分配到的第二电路板的数量之差处于预设差值范围。In some embodiments, the control module 220 is further specifically used to: obtain quantity information of the second circuit boards; and allocate the second circuit boards to the processing parts according to the quantity information so that the difference in quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing part is within a preset difference range.
需要说明的是,本申请中关于电路板加工设备的控制装置的描述,请参考本申请中关于电路板加工设备的控制方法的描述,具体这里不再赘述。It should be noted that for the description of the control device of the circuit board processing equipment in this application, please refer to the description of the control method of the circuit board processing equipment in this application, and the details will not be repeated here.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制装置,通过获取模块获取每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离、以及获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,其中,第一方向X与第二方向Y垂直,通过校准模块根据偏差距离对至少一个加工部进行校准;通过控制模块根据偏置距离控制每组加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向X上移动,以及通过控制模块在每组加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。由此,实现多个加工部对同一整版的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,同时,在控制多个加工部加工之前,控制相邻加工部沿第一方向X的距离与每个整版中在第一方向X上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离一种,并且使得每组加工装置中所有加工装置在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内,从而保证了多个加工部共同加工时的加工精度,提高了电路板加工设备的使用性能,有利于提高产品竞争力。According to the control device of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page is obtained by the acquisition module, and the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained, wherein the first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y, and at least one processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance by the calibration module; at least one processing part in each group of processing devices is controlled to move in the first direction X according to the offset distance by the control module, and after the processing part in each group of processing devices moves to the target position by the control module, the processing part is controlled to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area. Thus, multiple processing parts can process the same full page together, and the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment is improved. At the same time, before controlling the processing of multiple processing parts, the distance between adjacent processing parts along the first direction X is controlled to be the same as the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction X in each full page, and the deviation distance of all processing devices in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is within a preset range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy when multiple processing parts are processed together, improving the use performance of the circuit board processing equipment, and being conducive to improving product competitiveness.
图17为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板加工设备的校准方法的流程图。电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组加工装置包括多个加工部,如图17所示,电路板加工设备的校准方法包括以下步骤:FIG17 is a flow chart of a calibration method for a circuit board processing device according to an embodiment of the present application. The circuit board processing device includes multiple groups of processing devices, each group of processing devices includes multiple processing parts. As shown in FIG17 , the calibration method for the circuit board processing device includes the following steps:
步骤S501,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离。Step S501, obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction.
步骤S502,根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向移动,直至多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设距离范围。Step S502 , controlling the processing parts to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance, until the deviation distances of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y are within a preset distance range.
具体地,当多个加工部共同加工时,需要保证加工部在第二方向Y上坐标的一致性,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。如果多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离未处于预设距离范围,则以多个加工部的一个加工部为基准,控制多个加工部中的其他加工部沿第二方向Y移动,以使得直至多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围。Specifically, when multiple processing parts are processed together, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing parts in the second direction Y, and obtain the deviation distance of the processing parts in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y. If the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, then one of the multiple processing parts is used as a reference to control the other processing parts in the multiple processing parts to move along the second direction Y until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within the preset range.
作为一个具体示例,参考图10和图11所示,控制加工部A和加工部B分别对加工区域A在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板与加工区域B在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板进行预加工处理,预加工处理包括但不限于钻孔、切割等,以获取加工区域A第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息和加工区域B第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息,根据加工区域A第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息和加工区域B第一电路板的钻孔位置的坐标信息确定加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,并根据预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息,即确定加工部A的位置信息,并以加工部A的位置信息为基准,判断加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离是否在预设距离范围内,如果加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离未处于预设距离范围,以加工部A的位置信息为基准,控制加工部B沿第二方向Y移动,以使加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设范围内。As a specific example, referring to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the processing unit A and the processing unit B are controlled to perform pre-processing on the first circuit board in the processing area A that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X and the first circuit board in the processing area B that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X, respectively. The pre-processing includes but is not limited to drilling, cutting, etc., so as to obtain the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B. According to the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area A and the coordinate information of the drilling position of the first circuit board in the processing area B, Determine the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y, and determine the position information of any processing part among the multiple processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position, that is, determine the position information of processing part A, and use the position information of processing part A as a reference to judge whether the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is within a preset distance range; if the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is not within the preset distance range, use the position information of processing part A as a reference to control processing part B to move along the second direction Y so that the deviation distance between processing part A and processing part B in the second direction Y is within the preset range.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的校准方法,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离;根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向Y移动,直至多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离处于预设距离范围,从而保证了多个加工部在第二方向Y的坐标一致性,减小了中心坐标偏差,有利于提高加工精度。According to the calibration method of the circuit board processing equipment in the embodiment of the present application, the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y is obtained; the processing part is controlled to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance until the deviation distance of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y is within a preset distance range, thereby ensuring the coordinate consistency of the multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate deviation, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备包括校准仪,获取每组加工装置中的加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,包括:通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息;根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment includes a calibrator to obtain the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of processing devices in the second direction Y, including: obtaining the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices through the calibrator; determining the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y based on the coordinate information.
具体地,可以通过在工作台安装的校准仪的方式对多个加工部进行校准,通过校准仪获取每组加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息,根据坐标信息确定每个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。进一步地,作为一个具体示例,如图13所示,假设加工装置包括加工部A和加工部B,将校准仪放置在工作台上,将加工部A和加工部B依次调整到校准仪的中心位置,分别获取加工部A和加工部B的坐标信息,根据记录的加工部A和加工部B的坐标现象,确定加工部A和加工部B在第二方向Y上的偏差距离。由此,通过设置校准仪便于获取多个加工部在第二方向Y上的偏差距离,提高了偏差距离的获取效率,有利于多个加工部之间的中心坐标调节。Specifically, multiple processing parts can be calibrated by means of a calibrator installed on a workbench, and the coordinate information of multiple processing parts in each group of processing devices can be obtained by the calibrator, and the deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction Y can be determined according to the coordinate information. Further, as a specific example, as shown in FIG13, assuming that the processing device includes a processing part A and a processing part B, the calibrator is placed on the workbench, and the processing part A and the processing part B are adjusted to the center position of the calibrator in turn, and the coordinate information of the processing part A and the processing part B are obtained respectively. According to the recorded coordinate phenomena of the processing part A and the processing part B, the deviation distance of the processing part A and the processing part B in the second direction Y is determined. Therefore, by setting up the calibrator, it is convenient to obtain the deviation distance of multiple processing parts in the second direction Y, which improves the efficiency of obtaining the deviation distance and is conducive to the adjustment of the center coordinates between multiple processing parts.
需要说明的是,校准仪可以是一直安装在工作台上,也可以取下来,只有校准时才临时安装在工作台上,校准工具可以是校准仪,也可以是其他位置测量传感器,只需要获取到B轴相对A轴在X和Y方向的位置偏差值,此处不做具体限制。It should be noted that the calibrator can be installed on the workbench all the time or be removed and temporarily installed on the workbench only during calibration. The calibration tool can be a calibrator or other position measurement sensors. It is only necessary to obtain the position deviation value of the B-axis relative to the A-axis in the X and Y directions. No specific restrictions are made here.
在一些实施例中,多个加工部中的至少一个包括调节组件,根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向Y移动,包括:调节组件根据偏差距离控制多个加工部中的至少一个加工部在第二方向Y上移动,以对加工部进行校准。In some embodiments, at least one of the multiple processing parts includes an adjustment component to control the processing part to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one of the multiple processing parts to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance to calibrate the processing part.
具体地,每组加工装置的加工部中的至少一个加工部包括调节组件,在根据偏差距离对加工部进行校准时,可以选择不具有调节组件的加工部为基准,控制需要校准的加工部中的调节组件,使得调节组件驱动相应的加工部沿第二方向Y移动,以使得所有加工部之前的偏差距离处于预设范围。Specifically, at least one processing part in each group of processing devices includes an adjustment component. When calibrating the processing part according to the deviation distance, the processing part without the adjustment component can be selected as a reference, and the adjustment component in the processing part that needs to be calibrated can be controlled so that the adjustment component drives the corresponding processing part to move along the second direction Y, so that the deviation distance between all processing parts is within a preset range.
在一些实施例中,多个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,第一加工部和/或第二加工部包括调节组件,根据偏差距离控制加工部向第二方向Y移动,包括:调节组件根据偏差距离控制第一加工部和/或第二加工部在第二方向Y上移动靠近,以到达目标位置的预设范围内。In some embodiments, the multiple processing parts include a first processing part and a second processing part, and the first processing part and/or the second processing part include an adjustment component, which controls the processing part to move in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls the first processing part and/or the second processing part to move closer in the second direction Y according to the deviation distance to reach within a preset range of the target position.
具体地,多个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,其中,第一加工部包括调节组件,或者第二加工部包括调节组件,或者第一加工部和第二加工部均包括调节组件。进一步地,当第二加工部包括调节组件时,以第一加工部为基准,控制第二加工部的调节组件43驱动第二加工部在第二方向Y上朝靠近第一加工部的方向移动,以到达目标位置的预设范围内,从而在第二方向Y上保持第一加工部和第二加工部中心坐标的一致性,减小中心坐标误差;当第一加工部包括调节组件时,以第二加工部为基准,控制第一加工部的调节组件43驱动第一加工部在第二方向Y上朝靠近第二加工部的方向移动,以到达目标位置的预设范围内,从而在第二方向Y上保持第一加工部和第二加工部中心坐标的一致性,减小中心坐标误差;当第一加工部和第二加工部均包括调节组件时,以第二加工部为基准或以第一加工部为基准均可,此处不再赘述。Specifically, the plurality of processing parts include a first processing part and a second processing part, wherein the first processing part includes an adjustment component, or the second processing part includes an adjustment component, or both the first processing part and the second processing part include an adjustment component. Further, when the second processing part includes an adjustment component, the adjustment component 43 of the second processing part is controlled to drive the second processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the first processing part, so as to reach the preset range of the target position, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, and reducing the center coordinate error; when the first processing part includes an adjustment component, the adjustment component 43 of the first processing part is controlled to drive the first processing part to move in the second direction Y toward the direction close to the second processing part, so as to reach the preset range of the target position, thereby maintaining the consistency of the center coordinates of the first processing part and the second processing part in the second direction Y, and reducing the center coordinate error; when both the first processing part and the second processing part include an adjustment component, either the second processing part or the first processing part can be used as a reference, which will not be repeated here.
图18为根据本申请一个实施例的电路板整版中电路板的排版方法的流程图。电路板整版被划分为多个加工区域,如图18所示,排版方法包括以下步骤:FIG18 is a flow chart of a layout method of a circuit board in a circuit board layout according to an embodiment of the present application. The circuit board layout is divided into a plurality of processing areas, as shown in FIG18 , and the layout method includes the following steps:
步骤S601,获取待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量,以及获取电路板整版中加工区域的数量。Step S601, obtaining the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction, and obtaining the number of processing areas in the entire layout of the circuit board.
具体地,根据获取的待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量和电路板整版中加工区域的数量对电路板整版进行排版。Specifically, the entire layout of the circuit board is layouted according to the acquired layout quantity of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas in the entire layout of the circuit board.
步骤S602,在排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为整数时,采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。Step S602: when the quotient of the layout quantity and the number of processing areas is an integer, a first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
具体地,若待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为整数,则采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,举例来说,如图10所示,待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量为4,加工区域的数量为2,两者之商为整数,则采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。Specifically, if the quotient of the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is an integer, the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X is 4, and the number of processing areas is 2. The quotient of the two is an integer, then the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
在一些实施例中,采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,包括:获取待排版电路板中电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离,其中,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域中电路板的坐标信息确定;根据电路板母版的坐标信息、预设间隔距离和偏置距离对待排版电路板进行排版。In some embodiments, a first preset typesetting method is used to typeset the circuit board to be typeset, including: obtaining coordinate information of a circuit board motherboard in the circuit board to be typeset, a preset spacing distance and an offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset, wherein the offset distance is determined based on the coordinate information of the circuit boards in adjacent processing areas; and typeset the circuit board to be typeset based on the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance.
具体地,在采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版时获取待排版电路板在第一方向X上的电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离,其中,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域中的第一电路板的坐标信息确定,作为一种示例,参考图10所示,获取电路板母版的坐标信息X0Y0、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离以及偏置距离,其中,相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离根据实际需要进行设置,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域中的第一电路板的坐标信息确定,比如根据加工区域A和加工区域B中的第一电路板X0Y0和第一电路板X2Y0在第一方向X上的距离确定,根据获取的待排版电路板在第一方向X上的电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离对待排版电路板进行排版,能够保证排版较为均匀,每个加工区域均分配合理数量的待加工电路板,提高了整版排版的合理性,有利于提高电路板整版的版面利用率,进而提高单位面积电路板整版的产出效率。Specifically, when the first preset typesetting method is used to typeset the circuit board to be typeset, the coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typeset, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area. As an example, referring to FIG. 10, the coordinate information X0Y0 of the circuit board mother, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the preset spacing distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset is set according to actual needs, and the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area. The coordinate information of the first circuit board is determined, for example, according to the distance between the first circuit board X0Y0 and the first circuit board X2Y0 in the processing area A and the processing area B in the first direction X, and the circuit boards to be typed are typed according to the obtained coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typed, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typed, so that the typesetting is relatively uniform, and a reasonable number of circuit boards to be processed are allocated to each processing area, which improves the rationality of the whole-page typesetting, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the whole page of the circuit board, and thus improves the output efficiency of the whole page of circuit boards per unit area.
步骤S603,在排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为非整数时,采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。Step S603: when the quotient of the layout quantity and the number of processing areas is not an integer, a second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
具体地,若待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为非整数,则采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,举例来说,如图11所示,待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量为5,加工区域的数量为2,两者之商为非整数,则采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。Specifically, if the quotient of the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted. For example, as shown in Figure 11, the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X is 5, and the number of processing areas is 2. The quotient of the two is a non-integer, then the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
在一些实施例中,采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,包括:获取待排版电路板中电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离,其中,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域中第一电路板的坐标信息确定,第一电路板为在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的电路板;根据电路板母版的坐标信息、预设间隔距离和偏置距离对待排版电路板进行排版。In some embodiments, a second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, including: obtaining coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the circuit board to be layouted, and a preset spacing distance and an offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be layouted, wherein the offset distance is determined based on the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area, and the first circuit board is the first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X; and layout the circuit board to be layouted based on the coordinate information of the circuit board mother, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance.
具体地,在采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版时获取待排版电路板在第一方向X上的电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离,其中,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板的坐标信息确定,作为一种示例,参考图11所示,获取电路板母版的坐标信息X0Y0、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离以及偏置距离,其中,相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离根据实际需要进行设置,偏置距离根据相邻加工区域在第一方向X上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的第一电路板的坐标信息确定,比如通过加工区域A和加工区域B中的第一电路板X0Y0和第一电路板X3Y0在第一方向X上的距离确定,根据获取的待排版电路板在第一方向X上的电路板母版的坐标信息、相邻待排版电路板之间的预设间隔距离和偏置距离对待排版电路板进行排版,能够保证排版较为均匀,每个加工区域均分配合理数量的待加工电路板,提高了整版排版的合理性,有利于提高电路板整版的版面利用率,进而提高单位面积电路板整版的产出效率。Specifically, when the second preset typesetting method is used to typeset the circuit board to be typeset, the coordinate information of the circuit board motherboard in the first direction X, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X. As an example, referring to FIG. 11, the coordinate information X0Y0 of the circuit board motherboard, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset are obtained, wherein the preset spacing distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typeset is set according to actual needs, and the offset distance is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board in the adjacent processing area in the first direction X. The coordinate information of the first first circuit board that is completely in the same processing area in the first direction X is determined, for example, by the distance between the first circuit board X0Y0 and the first circuit board X3Y0 in the processing area A and the processing area B in the first direction X. The circuit boards to be typed are typed according to the obtained coordinate information of the circuit board mother in the first direction X of the circuit board to be typed, the preset spacing distance and the offset distance between adjacent circuit boards to be typed, which can ensure that the typesetting is relatively uniform, and each processing area is allocated a reasonable number of circuit boards to be processed, which improves the rationality of the whole-page typesetting, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the whole page of the circuit board, and thus improves the output efficiency of the whole page of circuit boards per unit area.
根据本申请实施例的电路板整版中电路板的排版方法,若待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为整数时,采用第一预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,若待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量与加工区域的数量的商为非整数时,采用第二预设排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版。由此,根据待排版电路板在第一方向X上的排版数量和电路板整版中加工区域的数量采用不同的排版方法对待排版电路板进行排版,提高了整版排版的合理性,有利于提高电路板整版的版面利用率,进而提高单位面积电路板整版的产出效率。According to the layout method of the circuit board in the circuit board layout of the embodiment of the present application, if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is an integer, the first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted, and if the quotient of the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas is a non-integer, the second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted. Thus, different layout methods are used to layout the circuit board to be layouted according to the layout number of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction X and the number of processing areas in the circuit board layout, which improves the rationality of the layout of the whole layout, is conducive to improving the layout utilization rate of the circuit board layout, and thus improves the output efficiency of the circuit board layout per unit area.
需要说明的是,在流程图中表示或在此以其他方式描述的逻辑和/或步骤,例如,可以被认为是用于实现逻辑功能的可执行指令的定序列表,可以具体实现在任何计算机可读介质中,以供指令执行系统、装置或设备(如基于计算机的系统、包括处理器的系统或其他可以从指令执行系统、装置或设备取指令并执行指令的系统)使用,或结合这些指令执行系统、装置或设备而使用。就本说明书而言,"计算机可读介质"可以是任何可以包含、存储、通信、传播或传输程序以供指令执行系统、装置或设备或结合这些指令执行系统、装置或设备而使用的装置。计算机可读介质的更具体的示例(非穷尽性列表)包括以下:具有一个或多个布线的电连接部(电子装置),便携式计算机盘盒(磁装置),随机存取存储器(RAM),只读存储器(ROM),可擦除可编辑只读存储器(EPROM或闪速存储器),光纤装置,以及便携式光盘只读存储器(CDROM)。另外,计算机可读介质甚至可以是可在其上打印程序的纸或其他合适的介质,因为可以例如通过对纸或其他介质进行光学扫描,接着进行编辑、解译或必要时以其他合适方式进行处理来以电子方式获得程序,然后将其存储在计算机存储器中。It should be noted that the logic and/or steps represented in the flowchart or described in other ways herein, for example, can be considered as a sequenced list of executable instructions for implementing logical functions, and can be specifically implemented in any computer-readable medium for use by an instruction execution system, device or equipment (such as a computer-based system, a system including a processor, or other system that can fetch instructions from an instruction execution system, device or equipment and execute instructions), or in combination with these instruction execution systems, devices or equipment. For the purpose of this specification, "computer-readable medium" can be any device that can contain, store, communicate, propagate or transmit a program for use by an instruction execution system, device or equipment, or in combination with these instruction execution systems, devices or equipment. More specific examples (non-exhaustive list) of computer-readable media include the following: an electrical connection portion with one or more wirings (electronic device), a portable computer disk box (magnetic device), a random access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable and editable read-only memory (EPROM or flash memory), an optical fiber device, and a portable compact disk read-only memory (CDROM). In addition, the computer-readable medium may even be paper or other suitable medium on which the program is printed, since the program may be obtained electronically, for example, by optically scanning the paper or other medium and then editing, interpreting or otherwise processing in a suitable manner if necessary, and then stored in a computer memory.
应当理解,本申请的各部分可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的组合来实现。在上述实施方式中,多个步骤或方法可以用存储在存储器中且由合适的指令执行系统执行的软件或固件来实现。例如,如果用硬件来实现,和在另一实施方式中一样,可用本领域公知的下列技术中的任一项或他们的组合来实现:具有用于对数据信号实现逻辑功能的逻辑门电路的离散逻辑电路,具有合适的组合逻辑门电路的专用集成电路,可编程门阵列(PGA),现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)等。It should be understood that the various parts of the present application can be implemented by hardware, software, firmware or a combination thereof. In the above-mentioned embodiments, multiple steps or methods can be implemented by software or firmware stored in a memory and executed by a suitable instruction execution system. For example, if implemented by hardware, as in another embodiment, it can be implemented by any one of the following technologies known in the art or their combination: a discrete logic circuit having a logic gate circuit for implementing a logic function for a data signal, a dedicated integrated circuit having a suitable combination of logic gate circuits, a programmable gate array (PGA), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), etc.
下面参考附图描述根据本申请实施例的加工设备100a。The following describes a processing device 100a according to an embodiment of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings.
参照图19和图26,根据本申请第一方面实施例的加工设备100a,例如加工设备100a可以为钻孔设备、成型设备、激光加工设备、AOI检测设备等电路板作业设备,上述设备都可以应用本申请的实施例的调节装置10a和控制方法,在此不做限制。Referring to Figures 19 and 26, according to the processing equipment 100a of the embodiment of the first aspect of the present application, for example, the processing equipment 100a can be a circuit board operating equipment such as drilling equipment, molding equipment, laser processing equipment, AOI inspection equipment, etc., and the above-mentioned equipment can all apply the adjustment device 10a and control method of the embodiment of the present application, and no limitation is made here.
加工设备100a包括:横梁50a、多个加工组件60a和调节装置10a,例如加工设备100a还包括机台,机台包括加工平台和机座,加工平台设于机座上,且加工平台沿第二方向(参照附图中的Y方向)可运动,加工平台上具有放置待加工件的加工工位;横梁50a设于机座上,且横梁50a位于加工平台的上方。The processing equipment 100a includes: a crossbeam 50a, multiple processing components 60a and an adjustment device 10a. For example, the processing equipment 100a also includes a machine platform, which includes a processing platform and a machine base. The processing platform is arranged on the machine base, and the processing platform can move along a second direction (refer to the Y direction in the accompanying drawing). The processing platform has a processing station for placing the workpiece to be processed; the crossbeam 50a is arranged on the machine base, and the crossbeam 50a is located above the processing platform.
多个加工组件60a沿第一方向(参照附图中的X方向)间隔设置于横梁50a上,加工组件60a适于加工待加工件,调节装置10a连接于加工组件60a和横梁50a之间,调节装置10a至少用于调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置,第二方向平行于加工设备100a的加工平台运动的方向,第二方向与第一方向垂直。例如加工组件60a包括底板61a和加工轴62a,调节装置10a连接横梁50a与底板61a,加工轴62a设于底板61a上且沿第三方向(参照附图中的上下方向)可运动,加工轴62a适于加工待加工件;所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。例如,第三方向为重心方向(参照附图中的上下方向),这样可以使得加工组件60a的加工轴62a沿重心方向运动,这样可以降低由于加工轴62a自身重力的影响而导致地加工精度下降,使得加工组件60a具有较高的加工精度,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。A plurality of processing components 60a are arranged on the crossbeam 50a at intervals along a first direction (refer to the X direction in the attached drawings), the processing components 60a are suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed, the adjustment device 10a is connected between the processing components 60a and the crossbeam 50a, and the adjustment device 10a is at least used to adjust the position of the corresponding processing components 60a in a second direction, the second direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a moves, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction. For example, the processing component 60a includes a bottom plate 61a and a processing axis 62a, the adjustment device 10a connects the crossbeam 50a and the bottom plate 61a, the processing axis 62a is arranged on the bottom plate 61a and can move along a third direction (refer to the up and down direction in the attached drawings), and the processing axis 62a is suitable for processing the workpiece to be processed; the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other. For example, the third direction is the center of gravity direction (refer to the up and down direction in the accompanying drawing), so that the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a can move along the center of gravity direction, which can reduce the decrease in processing accuracy caused by the influence of the gravity of the processing axis 62a itself, so that the processing component 60a has higher processing accuracy and improves the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
需要解释的是,在本申请的描述中,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。It should be explained that, in the description of this application, “plurality” means two or more.
当需要对加工工位上的待加工件进行加工时,可以先将至少两个加工组件60a调节至加工工位的上方,以使加工工位至少对应两个加工组件60a,接着将加工工位所对应的所有的加工组件60a中的相邻的两个之间的间距调节至预设间距,然后控制调节装置10a调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置,将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,再然后控制加工工位所对应的所有加工轴62a对该加工工位上的待加工件进行加工。When it is necessary to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station, at least two processing components 60a can be adjusted to the top of the processing station first, so that the processing station corresponds to at least two processing components 60a, and then the distance between two adjacent ones of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station is adjusted to the preset distance, and then the adjustment device 10a is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, and the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to within the second preset error range, and then all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station.
其中,第一预设误差的最大值和第二预设误差范围的最大值均不大于待加工件的加工精度所允许的误差。Wherein, both the maximum value of the first preset error and the maximum value of the second preset error range are not greater than the error allowed by the machining accuracy of the workpiece to be machined.
通过将每个加工工位对应多个加工组件60a,并控制加工工位所对应的所有加工组件60a的加工轴62a对该加工工位上的待加工件进行加工,可以提高对待加工件加工的效率;由于加工组件60a均设于横梁50a上,且可以调节装置10a可以调节对应的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,可以将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,这样可以保证多个加工轴62a对同一个待加工件加工的加工精度,保证生产质量,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By assigning a plurality of processing components 60a to correspond to each processing station, and controlling the processing axes 62a of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station to process the workpiece to be processed at the processing station, the efficiency of processing the workpiece to be processed can be improved; since the processing components 60a are all arranged on the beam 50a, and the adjusting device 10a can adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of the plurality of processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the plurality of processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within the second preset error range, so that the processing accuracy of the plurality of processing axes 62a on the same workpiece to be processed can be ensured, the production quality can be ensured, the production cost can be reduced, and the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a can be improved.
由于第二方向与第一方向垂直,在调节装置10a调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,不改变加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,在将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同时,或者将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内时,可以不必再次对加工组件60a在第一方向上位置进行调节,可以提高调节效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。Since the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction, when the adjusting device 10a adjusts the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is not changed. When the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or when the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to within the second preset error range, it is not necessary to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction again, which can improve the adjustment efficiency and the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
根据本申请的加工设备100a,通过设置至少用于调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置的调节装置10a,可以将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件60a可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。According to the processing equipment 100a of the present application, by providing an adjustment device 10a at least for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19和图26,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a与加工组件60a的数量相同且一一对应,每个调节装置10a独立调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置。可以实现对每个加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置的精准调节,使得多个加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置调节方式更为多样,提高调节效率。19 and 26, according to some embodiments of the present application, the number of adjusting devices 10a and processing components 60a is the same and corresponds one to one, and each adjusting device 10a independently adjusts the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction. It is possible to achieve precise adjustment of the position of each processing component 60a in the second direction, making the position adjustment methods of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction more diverse and improving the adjustment efficiency.
当需要将加工工位所对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节一致(或将所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内)时,可以通过加工设备100a的检测模块(例如检测模块可以为加工设备的对刀仪)对每个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置进行检测,以检测出的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置为基准,调节其余的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置;When it is necessary to adjust the positions of all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction to be consistent (or adjust the errors between the actual positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction to be within the second preset error range), the actual position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be detected by the detection module of the processing equipment 100a (for example, the detection module can be a tool setting instrument of the processing equipment), and the positions of the remaining processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted based on the detected actual position of the processing axis 62a in the second direction;
这样可以减少对第一个加工组件60a在第二方向进行位置调节的调节操作,同时可以利用检测模块对下一个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置进行检测的时间,调节上一个加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,调节上一个加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置,提高调节效率。This can reduce the adjustment operation of adjusting the position of the first processing component 60a in the second direction. At the same time, the detection module can be used to detect the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the next processing component 60a in the second direction, adjust the position of the previous processing component 60a in the second direction, and adjust the position of the previous processing axis 62a in the second direction, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency.
每个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置可以提前预置在加工设备100a的控制系统内,当需要将加工工位所对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节一致(或将所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内)时,可以在第二方向上预设一个位置基准(例如这个位置基准可以为加工工位对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置的中间值为位置基准),同时控制加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a朝向这个位置基准运动。这样减少使得所有加工组件60a的在第二方向上的移动的总距离较短,降低对所有加工组件60a的在第二方向上调节时间,提高调节效率。The position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be preset in advance in the control system of the processing equipment 100a. When it is necessary to adjust the positions of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to be consistent (or adjust the errors between the actual positions of all processing axes 62a in the second direction to within the second preset error range), a position reference can be preset in the second direction (for example, this position reference can be the middle value of the positions of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction as the position reference), and all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to move toward this position reference. This reduces the total distance of movement of all processing components 60a in the second direction, reduces the adjustment time of all processing components 60a in the second direction, and improves the adjustment efficiency.
参照图19和图26,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a的数量少于加工组件60a的数量,每个调节装置10a独立调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置。例如设有调节装置10a的加工组件可以间隔设置于多个未设置调节装置10a的加工组件60a之间。19 and 26, according to some embodiments of the present application, the number of adjusting devices 10a is less than the number of processing components 60a, and each adjusting device 10a independently adjusts the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction. For example, the processing components provided with adjusting devices 10a can be arranged at intervals between multiple processing components 60a not provided with adjusting devices 10a.
当需要将加工工位所对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节一致(或将所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内)时,可以通过加工设备100a的检测模块(例如检测模块可以为加工设备的对刀仪)对每个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置进行检测,以直接与横梁50a相连的加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置的平均值为基准,调节其余的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置;这样可以减少加工设备100a的调节装置10a的数量,降低加工设备100a的生产成本。When it is necessary to adjust the positions of all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction to be consistent (or adjust the errors between the actual positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction to within the second preset error range), the actual position of the processing axis 62a of each processing component 60a in the second direction can be detected by the detection module of the processing equipment 100a (for example, the detection module can be a tool setting instrument of the processing equipment), and the positions of the remaining processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted based on the average value of the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the processing components 60a directly connected to the beam 50a in the second direction; in this way, the number of adjustment devices 10a of the processing equipment 100a can be reduced, thereby reducing the production cost of the processing equipment 100a.
以12个加工组件为例,相邻两个加工组件60a为一组,共分为6组,每组的所有加工组件60a同时加工一个加工工位的上电路板,每组的加工组件60a包括第一加工组件和第二加工组件,第一加工组件或第二加工组件的任意一个设置调节装置10a,另一个不需要调节装置10a。当第一加工组件不设置调节装置时,第二加工组件设置有调节装置10a,在第二加工组件的调节装置10a将第二加工组件在第二方向上调节至第一加工组件相同的位置或误差范围内,这样可以保证第一加工组件和第二加工组件之间的复制加工精度,在提高效率的同时,节省调节装置10a的数量从而降低了成本。Taking 12 processing components as an example, two adjacent processing components 60a form a group, which is divided into 6 groups in total. All processing components 60a in each group process the upper circuit board of a processing station at the same time. The processing components 60a in each group include a first processing component and a second processing component. Any one of the first processing component or the second processing component is provided with an adjustment device 10a, and the other does not need an adjustment device 10a. When the first processing component is not provided with an adjustment device, the second processing component is provided with an adjustment device 10a. The adjustment device 10a of the second processing component adjusts the second processing component to the same position or error range of the first processing component in the second direction, so that the replication processing accuracy between the first processing component and the second processing component can be ensured, while improving efficiency, saving the number of adjustment devices 10a and thus reducing costs.
参照图19、图22-图24、图26、图27、图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,调节装置10a包括锁紧机构3a,锁紧机构3a至少在所述第二方向上将加工组件60a锁定。在将加工组件60a第二方向上的位置调节到位时,可以通过锁紧机构3a将加工组件60a锁定,然后控制加工工位对应的所有加工轴62a对待加工件进行加工。这样可以防止加工过程中的振动传递至调节装置10a而导致加工组件60a相对横梁50a在第二方向上产生位移,使得加工组件60a可以可靠地在第二方向上相对横梁50a固定,保证加工设备100a加工待加工件的加工精度,保证生产质量。Referring to Figures 19, 22-24, 26, 27, and 29, in some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device 10a includes a locking mechanism 3a, which locks the processing assembly 60a at least in the second direction. When the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction is adjusted to the right position, the processing assembly 60a can be locked by the locking mechanism 3a, and then all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece. In this way, it is possible to prevent the vibration during the processing from being transmitted to the adjustment device 10a, causing the processing assembly 60a to be displaced in the second direction relative to the crossbeam 50a, so that the processing assembly 60a can be reliably fixed relative to the crossbeam 50a in the second direction, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy of the workpiece to be processed by the processing equipment 100a and ensuring the production quality.
参照图19、图22-图24、图26、图27、图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,调节装置10a包括调节状态和锁止状态,在锁止状态,锁紧机构3a将加工组件60a锁定;在调节状态,锁紧机构3a解锁加工组件60a,调节装置10a适于对对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置进行调节。Referring to Figures 19, 22-24, 26, 27, and 29, in some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device 10a includes an adjusting state and a locking state. In the locking state, the locking mechanism 3a locks the processing component 60a; in the adjusting state, the locking mechanism 3a unlocks the processing component 60a, and the adjusting device 10a is suitable for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction.
在需要调节加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置时,可以将调节装置10a调节至解锁状态,然后控制调节装置10a对对应的加工组件60a进行调节,在第二方向上将对应的加工组件60a调节到位后,将调节装置10a调节至锁止状态,将加工组件60a锁定,将加工组件60a在第二方向上相对横梁50a固定。When it is necessary to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the adjusting device 10a can be adjusted to the unlocked state, and then the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the corresponding processing component 60a. After the corresponding processing component 60a is adjusted into place in the second direction, the adjusting device 10a is adjusted to the locked state to lock the processing component 60a and fix the processing component 60a relative to the beam 50a in the second direction.
这样可以实现对调节装置10a实现对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置调节,在加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置调节到位时,可以将加工组件60a在第二方向上相对横梁50a固定,防止加工组件60a相对横梁50a在第二方向上产生位移而导致加工设备100a的加工精度下降,可以提高调节设备的整体性能,保证加工设备100a的加工精度。In this way, the adjusting device 10a can be used to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction. When the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted to the right position, the processing component 60a can be fixed relative to the beam 50a in the second direction to prevent the processing component 60a from being displaced relative to the beam 50a in the second direction, which would cause a decrease in the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a. This can improve the overall performance of the adjusting device and ensure the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19、图20、图22-图27、图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a还包括调节装置1a,调节装置1a包括调节滑块11a和调节滑轨12a,调节滑块11a和调节滑轨12a用于对加工组件60a的运动进行导向,例如调节滑轨12a可以在垂直于调节滑轨12a延伸的方向上对调节滑块11a进行限位,使调节滑块11a仅沿调节滑轨12a延伸的方向可运动。Referring to Figures 19, 20, 22-27, and 29, according to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device 10a also includes an adjusting device 1a, the adjusting device 1a includes an adjusting slider 11a and an adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a and the adjusting slide rail 12a are used to guide the movement of the processing component 60a, for example, the adjusting slide rail 12a can limit the adjusting slider 11a in a direction perpendicular to the extension of the adjusting slide rail 12a, so that the adjusting slider 11a can only move along the direction of extension of the adjusting slide rail 12a.
在本申请的具体地实施例中,调节滑块11a可以为方形结构,通过改变调节滑块11a在调节滑轨12a上的位置,从而改变与调节滑块11a连接的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置。In a specific embodiment of the present application, the adjusting slider 11a may be a square structure, and the position of the processing assembly 60a connected to the adjusting slider 11a in the second direction is changed by changing the position of the adjusting slider 11a on the adjusting rail 12a.
在调节装置10a调节对应的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,调节滑块11a和调节滑轨12a相互配合,可以防止加工组件60a在第一方向产生位移,使得调节装置10a可以可靠地将加工组件60a调节至预定位置,提高调节装置10a的可靠性,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。When the adjusting device 10a adjusts the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, the adjusting slider 11a and the adjusting rail 12a cooperate with each other to prevent the processing component 60a from being displaced in the first direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the processing component 60a to a predetermined position, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a仅在第二方向上移动,即调节滑轨12a沿第二方向延伸,其中,第二方向平行于加工设备100a的加工平台运动的方向,第三方向平行于加工组件60a的加工轴运动的方向。这样可以通过调节滑块11a直接调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,结构简单、可靠,安装方便,调节简单。Referring to FIGS. 19 to 29, according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a only moves in the second direction, that is, the adjusting rail 12a extends along the second direction, wherein the second direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a moves, and the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a moves. In this way, the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction can be directly adjusted by adjusting the slider 11a, which has a simple and reliable structure, is easy to install, and is easy to adjust.
在调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,导向滑轨24a与导向滑块25a相互配合,可以对驱动机构2a在第二方向上的运动起到导向作用,可以防止驱动机构2a在第二方向运动时在第一方向上或第三方向上产生偏移,使得调节装置10a可以可靠地对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节,可以提高调节装置10a的可靠性,提高加工设备100a的可靠性。When adjusting the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the guide rail 24a and the guide slider 25a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction, and prevent the driving mechanism 2a from deviating in the first direction or the third direction when moving in the second direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19、图20、图22-图27、图29,调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第三方向和第二方向上同步移动,由于第三方向平行于加工组件60a的加工轴62a的运动方向,这样可以通过检测加工轴62a在第三方向上的移动距离,计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,从而得到加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置;而且加工轴62a在第三方向上可运动,这样可以在将加工组价的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节加工轴62a在第三方向上的距离补偿加工组件60a在第三方向上运动的距离。这样可以缩短使得调节滑轨12a的长度较长,使得调节滑块11a的调节范围较大,便于通过调节滑块11a调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置。Referring to Figures 19, 20, 22-27, and 29, when the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction. Since the third direction is parallel to the movement direction of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a, the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected by calculating the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a in the second direction of the processing component 60a; and the processing axis 62a can move in the third direction, so that after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction can be adjusted to compensate for the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction. In this way, the length of the adjusting rail 12a can be shortened, the adjustment range of the adjusting slider 11a can be larger, and it is convenient to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction by adjusting the adjusting slider 11a.
参照图19、图2、图22-图27、图29,调节装置10a控制加工组件60a在第二方向上移动至预定位置时,加工组件60a在第三方向上的移动距离大于第二方向上的移动距离,例如调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节方向与第二方向之间的夹角不小于45°且不大于90°。Referring to Figures 19, 2, 22-27, and 29, when the adjusting device 10a controls the processing component 60a to move to a predetermined position in the second direction, the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction. For example, the angle between the adjustment direction in which the adjusting device 10a adjusts the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction and the second direction is not less than 45° and not greater than 90°.
将加工组件60a在第三方向上的移动距离设置为大于第二方向上的移动距离,通过检测加工轴62a在第三方向上的移动距离计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,可以使得计算出的加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离与加工轴62a在第二方向上实际移动的距离之间的误差更小,更为精准、可靠地检测出加工轴62a在第二方向上实际移动的距离,提高调节装置10a在第二方向对加工组件60a进行位置调节的调节精度,提高加工设备100a的加工精度,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。The moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction is set to be greater than the moving distance in the second direction. The moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction is calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction. This can reduce the error between the calculated moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction and the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction. The actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjustment device 10a for position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第一方向和第二方向上同步移动,即加工组件60a在第一方向和第二方向上同步移动。19-29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction, that is, the processing assembly 60a moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction.
由于第一方向平行于调节装置10a的运动方向,这样可以通过检测加工轴62a在第一方向上的移动距离,计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,从而得到加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置;而且调节装置10a在第一方向上可运动,这样可以在将加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节调节装置10a在第一方向上的距离补偿加工组件60a在第一方向上运动的距离。这样可以缩短使得调节滑轨12a的长度较长,使得调节滑块11a的调节范围较大,便于通过调节滑块11a调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置。Since the first direction is parallel to the moving direction of the adjusting device 10a, the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the adjusting device 10a can move in the first direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted, the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the first direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the adjusting device 10a in the first direction. In this way, the length of the adjusting slide rail 12a can be shortened, the adjustment range of the adjusting slider 11a can be larger, and it is convenient to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction through the adjusting slider 11a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a控制加工组件60a在第二方向上移动至预定位置时,加工组件60a在第一方向上的移动距离大于第二方向上的移动距离。例如调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节方向与第一方向之间的夹角不小于45°且不大于90°。19 to 29, according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device 10a controls the processing assembly 60a to move to a predetermined position in the second direction, the movement distance of the processing assembly 60a in the first direction is greater than the movement distance in the second direction. For example, the angle between the adjustment direction in which the adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction and the first direction is not less than 45° and not more than 90°.
将加工组件60a在第一方向上的移动距离设置为大于第二方向上的移动距离,通过检测加工轴62a在第一方向上的移动距离计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,可以使得计算出的加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离与加工轴62a在第二方向上实际移动的距离之间的误差更小,更为精准、可靠地检测出加工轴62a在第二方向上实际移动的距离,提高调节装置10a在第二方向对加工组件60a进行位置调节的调节精度,提高加工设备100a的加工精度,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。The moving distance of the processing component 60a in the first direction is set to be greater than the moving distance in the second direction. The moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction is calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction. This can reduce the error between the calculated moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction and the actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction. The actual moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be detected more accurately and reliably, thereby improving the adjustment accuracy of the adjustment device 10a for position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,第一方向上的移动距离为1μm-150μm,第三方向上的移动距离为1μm-150μm,第二方向上的移动距离为1μm-100μm。这样保证加工组件60a具有足够的调节范围,使得多个加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置调节至相同,或者使得多个加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内;同时使得调节装置10a在第二方向上的尺寸做的较小,使得加工设备100a的整体结构较为紧凑,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。Referring to Figures 19 to 29, according to some embodiments of the present application, the moving distance in the first direction is 1μm-150μm, the moving distance in the third direction is 1μm-150μm, and the moving distance in the second direction is 1μm-100μm. This ensures that the processing assembly 60a has a sufficient adjustment range, so that the positions of multiple processing assemblies 60a in the second direction are adjusted to the same, or the errors between the positions of multiple processing assemblies 60a in the second direction are adjusted to within a second preset error range; at the same time, the size of the adjustment device 10a in the second direction is made smaller, so that the overall structure of the processing equipment 100a is more compact, and the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a is improved.
在本申请的一些实施例中,各个加工组件60a由于装配的误差存在不同的位置偏差,在第二方向上,相邻加工组件60a的位置偏差可能为1μm,100μm,1mm,10mm等任意可能的数值范围,调节装置10a可将其位置偏差的精度控制在1μm—3μm,提高了相邻加工组件60a复制加工的精度。In some embodiments of the present application, each processing component 60a has different position deviations due to assembly errors. In the second direction, the position deviation of adjacent processing components 60a may be in any possible numerical range such as 1μm, 100μm, 1mm, 10mm, etc. The adjustment device 10a can control the accuracy of its position deviation within 1μm-3μm, thereby improving the accuracy of the copy processing of adjacent processing components 60a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a还包括:横移滑轨41a和横移滑座42a,横移滑轨设于横梁50a上,且横移滑轨41a沿第一方向延伸,横移滑座42a设于横移滑轨41a上,且横移滑座42a相对横移滑轨可滑动,调节滑轨12a设于横移滑座42a上。例如横移滑轨41a可以在第二方向上和第三方向上对横移滑座42a进行限位,使横移滑座42a仅沿第一方向可运动。19 to 29, according to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device 10a further includes: a transverse slide rail 41a and a transverse slide seat 42a, the transverse slide rail is arranged on the crossbeam 50a, and the transverse slide rail 41a extends along the first direction, the transverse slide seat 42a is arranged on the transverse slide rail 41a, and the transverse slide seat 42a can slide relative to the transverse slide rail, and the adjustment slide rail 12a is arranged on the transverse slide seat 42a. For example, the transverse slide rail 41a can limit the transverse slide seat 42a in the second direction and the third direction, so that the transverse slide seat 42a can only move in the first direction.
在调节加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置时,横移滑座42a与横移滑轨41a相互配合,可以对加工组件60a的运动起到导向作用,可以防止加工组件60a在第一方向运动时在第二方向上或第三方向上产生偏移,使得调节装置10a可以可靠地对加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置进行调节,可以提高调节装置10a的可靠性,提高加工设备100a的可靠性。When adjusting the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction, the transverse slide 42a and the transverse slide rail 41a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the processing component 60a, and prevent the processing component 60a from being offset in the second direction or the third direction when moving in the first direction, so that the adjustment device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjustment device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,调节装置10a还包括驱动机构2a,驱动机构2a用于驱动加工组件60a运动,调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第三方向和第二方向上同步移动,其中,第三方向平行于加工组件60a的加工轴62a运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。例如驱动机构2a可以通过驱动调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a延伸的方向运动,带动加工组件60a运动。这样可以更为方便地驱动加工组件60a运动,更为方便地调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,提高调节装置10a的整体性能。Referring to Figures 19 to 29, in some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move. When the adjustment slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a, the adjustment slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, wherein the third direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing axis 62a of the processing assembly 60a moves, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other. For example, the driving mechanism 2a can drive the processing assembly 60a to move by driving the adjustment slider 11a to move along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a. In this way, the processing assembly 60a can be driven to move more conveniently, and the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction can be adjusted more conveniently, thereby improving the overall performance of the adjustment device 10a.
由于调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第三方向和第二方向上同步移动,调节滑块11a与加工组件60a相连,所以驱动机构2a在驱动加工组件60a运动时,加工组件60a会在第二方向上运动的同时在第三方向上运动。When the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, and the adjusting slider 11a is connected to the processing component 60a. Therefore, when the driving mechanism 2a drives the processing component 60a to move, the processing component 60a will move in the third direction while moving in the second direction.
由于第三方向平行于加工组件60a的加工轴62a的运动方向,这样可以通过检测加工轴62a在第三方向上的移动距离,计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,从而得到加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置;而且加工轴62a在第三方向上可运动,这样可以在将加工组价的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节加工轴62a在第三方向上的距离补偿加工组件60a在第三方向上运动的距离,结构可靠、布局合理。Since the third direction is parallel to the movement direction of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a, the distance moved by the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the movement distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the processing axis 62a is movable in the third direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the movement distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the processing axis 62a in the third direction, and the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,驱动机构2a包括调节螺杆21a和调节座22a,调节座22a具有与调节螺杆21a相适配的调节螺孔,且调节座22a与加工组件60a相连,例如调节螺杆21a的一端与调节螺孔螺纹配合,调节螺杆21a的另一端与横移滑座42a相连。Referring to Figures 19-29, in some embodiments of the present application, the driving mechanism 2a includes an adjusting screw 21a and an adjusting seat 22a, the adjusting seat 22a has an adjusting screw hole adapted to the adjusting screw 21a, and the adjusting seat 22a is connected to the processing assembly 60a, for example, one end of the adjusting screw 21a is threadedly matched with the adjusting screw hole, and the other end of the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the transverse slide 42a.
当需要调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,可以通过旋转调节螺杆21a驱动调节座22a运动以使调节座22a远离或靠近横移滑座42a,从而带动加工组件60a运动。由于调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第三方向和第二方向上同步移动,且调节滑轨12a的延伸方向与第二方向的夹角为锐角,所以在调节螺杆21a驱动调节座22a运动时加工组件60a会沿着调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动,加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置会发生改变,从而可以实现调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置的调节,结构简单,使用方便。When the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction needs to be adjusted, the adjusting seat 22a can be driven to move by rotating the adjusting screw 21a so that the adjusting seat 22a moves away from or close to the transverse slide 42a, thereby driving the processing assembly 60a to move. Since the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, and the angle between the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a and the second direction is an acute angle, the processing assembly 60a will move along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a when the adjusting screw 21a drives the adjusting seat 22a to move, and the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction will change, so that the adjusting device 10a can adjust the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction, which has a simple structure and is easy to use.
通过设置调节螺杆21a与调节座22a螺纹配合,可以通过旋转调节螺杆21a驱动调节座22a运动带动加工组件60a运动,这样可以较为精确地控制驱动加工组件60a运动的距离,提高调节装置10a的调节精度,使得加工工位对应的所有加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置之间的误差较小,使得加工设备100a可以更为精确地对待加工件进行加工,提高加工质量。By setting the adjusting screw 21a to cooperate with the adjusting seat 22a in a threaded manner, the adjusting screw 21a can be rotated to drive the adjusting seat 22a to move and drive the processing component 60a to move. In this way, the movement distance of the driving processing component 60a can be controlled more accurately, and the adjustment accuracy of the adjusting device 10a can be improved, so that the errors between the positions of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing stations in the second direction are smaller, so that the processing equipment 100a can process the workpiece more accurately and improve the processing quality.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,调节螺杆21a沿第三方向延伸。将调节螺杆21a设置为沿第三方向延伸,这样可以使得驱动机构2a在第二方向上的占用的尺寸较小,可以巧妙地利用加工组件60a与横梁50a之间的空间,使得调节装置10a的结构较为紧凑,使得加工设备100a的结构紧凑;Referring to FIGS. 19 to 29 , in some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting screw 21a extends along the third direction. The adjusting screw 21a is arranged to extend along the third direction, so that the size occupied by the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction can be smaller, and the space between the processing assembly 60a and the crossbeam 50a can be cleverly utilized, so that the structure of the adjusting device 10a is more compact, and the structure of the processing equipment 100a is compact;
而且,这样也可以减少横梁50a至加工组件60a的距离,使得加工组件60a可以更为可靠地相对横梁50a固定,防止加工组件60a相对横梁50a产生晃动,提高加工组件60a的加工精度,保证生产质量,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。Moreover, this can also reduce the distance from the beam 50a to the processing component 60a, so that the processing component 60a can be more reliably fixed relative to the beam 50a, preventing the processing component 60a from shaking relative to the beam 50a, improving the processing accuracy of the processing component 60a, ensuring production quality, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a还包括驱动机构2a,驱动机构2a用于驱动加工组件60a运动,调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第一方向和第二方向上同步移动。19-29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move. When the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction.
由于调节滑块11a沿调节滑轨12a的延伸方向运动时,调节滑块11a在第一方向和第二方向上同步移动,调节滑块11a与加工组件60a相连,所以驱动机构2a在驱动加工组件60a运动时,加工组件60a会在第二方向上运动的同时在第一方向上运动。When the adjusting slider 11a moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail 12a, the adjusting slider 11a moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction, and the adjusting slider 11a is connected to the processing component 60a. Therefore, when the driving mechanism 2a drives the processing component 60a to move, the processing component 60a will move in the first direction while moving in the second direction.
由于第一方向平行于调节装置10a的运动方向,这样可以通过检测加工轴62a在第一方向上的移动距离,计算出加工轴62a在第二方向上移动的距离,从而得到加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置;而且调节装置10a在第一方向上可运动,这样可以在将加工组价的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置调节完毕后,通过调节调节装置10a在第一方向上的距离补偿加工组件60a在第三方向上运动的距离,结构可靠、布局合理。Since the first direction is parallel to the movement direction of the adjusting device 10a, the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the second direction can be calculated by detecting the moving distance of the processing axis 62a in the first direction, thereby obtaining the actual position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component 60a in the second direction; and the adjusting device 10a is movable in the first direction, so after the position of the processing axis 62a of the processing component in the second direction is adjusted, the moving distance of the processing component 60a in the third direction can be compensated by adjusting the distance of the adjusting device 10a in the first direction, and the structure is reliable and the layout is reasonable.
例如,参照图19、图22、图23、图8和图29,根据本申请的一些具体地实施例,锁紧机构3a可以包括锁紧件31a,锁紧件31a设于调节螺杆21a的外周侧,在锁止状态下,锁紧件31a将调节螺杆21a锁止,将调节螺杆21a相对调节座22a固定;在解锁状态下,锁紧件31a解锁调节螺杆21a,调节螺杆21a绕其中心轴线可转动,例如锁紧件31a可以为锁紧螺母。这样可以实现锁紧机构3a将加工组件60a锁定在横梁50a上的目的,结构简单使用方便。For example, referring to Fig. 19, Fig. 22, Fig. 23, Fig. 8 and Fig. 29, according to some specific embodiments of the present application, the locking mechanism 3a may include a locking member 31a, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the adjusting screw 21a. In the locked state, the locking member 31a locks the adjusting screw 21a and fixes the adjusting screw 21a relative to the adjusting seat 22a; in the unlocked state, the locking member 31a unlocks the adjusting screw 21a, and the adjusting screw 21a can rotate around its central axis. For example, the locking member 31a may be a locking nut. In this way, the locking mechanism 3a can achieve the purpose of locking the processing assembly 60a on the beam 50a, and the structure is simple and easy to use.
例如,锁紧件31a也可以为气动锁轴器或电动锁轴器,当锁紧件31a为气动锁轴器或电动锁轴器时,锁紧件31a与控制系统电连接,控制系统适于控制锁紧件31a锁止调节螺杆21a和解锁调节螺杆21a,这样便于实现调节装置10a锁止状态和解锁状态之间的自动化切换,可以缩短调节装置10a在锁止状态与解锁状态之间切换的切换时间,提高调节装置10a对加工组件60a的调节效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。For example, the locking member 31a can also be a pneumatic shaft lock or an electric shaft lock. When the locking member 31a is a pneumatic shaft lock or an electric shaft lock, the locking member 31a is electrically connected to the control system, and the control system is suitable for controlling the locking member 31a to lock the adjusting screw 21a and unlock the adjusting screw 21a. This facilitates the automatic switching between the locked state and the unlocked state of the adjusting device 10a, and can shorten the switching time of the adjusting device 10a between the locked state and the unlocked state, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency of the adjusting device 10a on the processing component 60a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图24,根据本申请的一些可选地实施例,驱动机构2a还包括驱动件23a,驱动件23a用于驱动调节螺杆21a转动,例如驱动件23a可以为电机。这样可以实现调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节的电控制,可以降低作业人员的工作强度,提高调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高调节装置10a的整体性能,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。19 to 24, according to some optional embodiments of the present application, the driving mechanism 2a further includes a driving member 23a, which is used to drive the adjusting screw 21a to rotate, for example, the driving member 23a can be a motor. In this way, the adjusting device 10a can be electrically controlled to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, which can reduce the work intensity of the operator, improve the adjustment efficiency of the adjusting device 10a to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, improve the overall performance of the adjusting device 10a, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
例如,参照图19-图24,驱动件23a可以设于横移滑座42a上且位于横梁50a上侧,这样可以合理地利用横梁50a上侧的空间放置驱动件23a,可以不必在加工组件60a和横梁50a之间设置避让驱动件23a的避让空间,可以使得加工组件60a至横梁50a之间的距离较小,可以使得加工组件60a可靠地相对横梁50a固定,在对待加工件进行加工时,可以有效地防止加工组件60a相对横梁50a产生的振动,提高加工待加工件的加工精度,提高生产质量,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。For example, referring to Figures 19 to 24, the driving member 23a can be arranged on the transverse slide 42a and located on the upper side of the beam 50a. In this way, the space on the upper side of the beam 50a can be reasonably utilized to place the driving member 23a, and there is no need to set an avoidance space between the processing component 60a and the beam 50a to avoid the driving member 23a. The distance between the processing component 60a and the beam 50a can be made smaller, and the processing component 60a can be reliably fixed relative to the beam 50a. When the workpiece to be processed is being processed, the vibration of the processing component 60a relative to the beam 50a can be effectively prevented, thereby improving the processing accuracy of the workpiece to be processed, improving the production quality, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,驱动机构2a还包括导向滑轨24a和导向滑块25a,导向滑轨24a设于横移滑座42a上,且导向滑轨24a沿第二方向延伸,导向滑块25a可滑动地设于导向滑轨24a上,调节螺杆21a与导向滑轨24a相连。例如导向滑轨24a可以在第一方向上和第三方向上对导向进行限位,使导向滑块25a仅沿第二方向可运动。19 to 29, in some embodiments of the present application, the driving mechanism 2a further includes a guide rail 24a and a guide slider 25a, the guide rail 24a is disposed on the transverse slide 42a, and the guide rail 24a extends along the second direction, the guide slider 25a is slidably disposed on the guide rail 24a, and the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the guide rail 24a. For example, the guide rail 24a can limit the guide in the first direction and the third direction, so that the guide slider 25a can only move in the second direction.
在调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,导向滑轨24a与导向滑块25a相互配合,可以对驱动机构2a在第二方向上的运动起到导向作用,可以防止驱动机构2a在第二方向运动时在第一方向上或第三方向上产生偏移,使得调节装置10a可以可靠地对加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置进行调节,可以提高调节装置10a的可靠性,提高加工设备100a的可靠性。When adjusting the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the guide rail 24a and the guide slider 25a cooperate with each other to guide the movement of the driving mechanism 2a in the second direction, and prevent the driving mechanism 2a from deviating in the first direction or the third direction when moving in the second direction, so that the adjusting device 10a can reliably adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction, thereby improving the reliability of the adjusting device 10a and the reliability of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a还包括驱动机构2a,驱动机构2a用于驱动加工组件60a运动,调节滑轨12a沿第二方向延伸,第二方向平行于加工设备100a的加工平台运动的方向。19-29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, the adjusting device 10a further includes a driving mechanism 2a, which is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move, and the adjusting slide rail 12a extends along a second direction, which is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a.
例如驱动机构2a包括调节螺杆21a和调节座22a,调节座22a具有调节螺孔,且调节座22a与加工组件60a相连,调节螺杆21a沿第二方向延伸,调节螺杆21a的一端与调节螺孔螺纹配合,调节螺杆21a的另一端与调节滑轨12a相连。当需要调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,可以通过旋转调节螺杆21a驱动调节座22a运动以使调节座22a远离或靠近横移滑座42a,从而带动加工组件60a运动。For example, the driving mechanism 2a includes an adjusting screw 21a and an adjusting seat 22a, the adjusting seat 22a has an adjusting screw hole, and the adjusting seat 22a is connected to the processing assembly 60a, the adjusting screw 21a extends along the second direction, one end of the adjusting screw 21a is threadedly engaged with the adjusting screw hole, and the other end of the adjusting screw 21a is connected to the adjusting slide rail 12a. When the position of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction needs to be adjusted, the adjusting seat 22a can be driven to move by rotating the adjusting screw 21a to move the adjusting seat 22a away from or close to the transverse slide 42a, thereby driving the processing assembly 60a to move.
由于调节滑轨12a沿第二方向延伸,驱动机构驱动加工组件60a运动时加工组件60a会沿着调节滑轨12a的延伸方向(即第二方向)运动,这样可以直接读取加工组件60a运动的距离,结构简单、使用方便。Since the adjustment rail 12a extends along the second direction, when the driving mechanism drives the processing assembly 60a to move, the processing assembly 60a will move along the extension direction of the adjustment rail 12a (ie, the second direction). In this way, the movement distance of the processing assembly 60a can be directly read, and the structure is simple and easy to use.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,加工设备100a具有至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工组件60a;至少两个相邻加工组件60a包括第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a,调节装置10a用于调节第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,以使第一加工组件60a与第二加工组件60a在第二方向上的间距在第二预设误差范围内,第二方向平行于加工设备100a的加工平台运动的方向。19-29, in some embodiments of the present application, the processing equipment 100a has at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components 60a; the at least two adjacent processing components 60a include a first processing component 60a and a second processing component 60a, and the adjustment device 10a is used to adjust the positions of the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the second direction so that the spacing between the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the second direction is within a second preset error range, and the second direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing platform of the processing equipment 100a.
例如,加工工位还可以对应两个相邻的加工组件60a、三个相邻的加工组件60a、四个相邻的加工组件60a、五个相邻的加工组件60a或六个相邻的加工组件60a,下面以加工工位对应两个相邻的加工组件60a这种情况对加工设备100a进行描述:For example, the processing station may also correspond to two adjacent processing components 60a, three adjacent processing components 60a, four adjacent processing components 60a, five adjacent processing components 60a, or six adjacent processing components 60a. The processing device 100a is described below based on the case where the processing station corresponds to two adjacent processing components 60a.
当需要对加工工位上的待加工件进行加工时,可以先将加工工位对应的相邻的两个加工组件60a调节至加工工位的上方,接着以其中一个加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置为基准,沿第一方向移动另一个加工组件60a,将这两个加工组件60a之间的间距调节至预设间距;然后控制调节装置10a调节对应的加工组件60a的在第二方向上的位置,将这两个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将这两个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,再然后控制这两个加工轴62a对该加工工位上的待加工件进行加工。When it is necessary to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station, the two adjacent processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station can be adjusted to the top of the processing station first, and then the position of one of the processing components 60a in the first direction is used as a reference to move the other processing component 60a along the first direction to adjust the spacing between the two processing components 60a to a preset spacing; then the adjustment device 10a is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, and the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of the two processing components 60a in the second direction are adjusted to be the same, or the error between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of the two processing components 60a in the second direction is adjusted to within the second preset error range, and then the two processing axes 62a are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed on the processing station.
通过将每个加工工位对应至少两个加工组件60a,并设置调节对应的加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置的调节装置10a,可以控制调节装置10a将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者控制调节装置10a将多个加工组件60a的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,可以保证多个加工轴62a对同一个待加工件加工的加工精度,保证生产质量,提高对待加工件加工的效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By corresponding at least two processing components 60a to each processing station and providing an adjusting device 10a for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the second direction, the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the coordinates of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction to be the same, or the adjusting device 10a can be controlled to adjust the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes 62a of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction to within a second preset error range, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy of multiple processing axes 62a for the same workpiece to be processed, ensuring production quality, improving the efficiency of processing the workpiece to be processed, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,在本申请的一些实施例中,加工设备100a包括:控制系统,控制系统用于:19 to 29 , in some embodiments of the present application, the processing equipment 100a includes: a control system, the control system is used to:
控制调节装置10a调节第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,以将第一加工组件60a与第二加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围内;The control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the positions of the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the first direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to within a first preset error range;
和控制调节装置10a调节第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,以将第一加工组件60a与第二加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际间距调节至第二预设误差范围内。The control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the positions of the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the second direction to adjust the actual spacing between the first processing assembly 60a and the second processing assembly 60a in the second direction to within a second preset error range.
通过设置控制系统调节第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置及第二方向上的位置,可以实现调节装置10a对加工组件60a的位置的自动化调节,可以提高加工设备100a的自动化程度,降低作业人员的工作强度,提高对第一加工组件60a和第二加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置及第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By setting up a control system to adjust the positions of the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, the adjustment device 10a can realize automatic adjustment of the position of the processing component 60a, thereby improving the degree of automation of the processing equipment 100a, reducing the workload of operators, improving the adjustment efficiency of the positions of the first processing component 60a and the second processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请第二方面实施例的调节装置10a的控制方法,调节装置10a连接于加工设备100a的加工组件60a和横梁50a之间,调节装置10a用于驱动加工组件60a至少在第二方向上运动,控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to a control method of an adjusting device 10a according to a second aspect of the present application, the adjusting device 10a is connected between a processing assembly 60a and a beam 50a of a processing device 100a, and the adjusting device 10a is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move in at least a second direction. The control method includes:
获取加工组件60a在第二方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component 60a in the second direction;
检测加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction;
控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
当需要利用加工设备100a对待加工件进行加工时,控制系统可以通过检测模块检测出加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际位置坐标(或者直接读取加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a的预置在控制系统中的位置坐标),然后判断出所有的加工组件60a均能调节到的位置范围,并在这个位置范围中选取一个位置作为所有加工组件60a在第二方向的工作位置坐标,When the workpiece needs to be processed using the processing equipment 100a, the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then determine the position range to which all processing components 60a can be adjusted, and select a position in this position range as the working position coordinates of all processing components 60a in the second direction.
当需要利用加工设备100a对待加工件进行加工时,控制系统可以通过检测模块检测出加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际位置坐标(或者直接读取加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a的预置在控制系统中的位置坐标),然后判断出所有的加工组件60a均能调节到的位置范围,并在这个位置范围中选取一个位置作为所有加工组件60a在第二方向的工作位置坐标,When the workpiece needs to be processed using the processing equipment 100a, the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then determine the position range to which all processing components 60a can be adjusted, and select a position in this position range as the working position coordinates of all processing components 60a in the second direction.
然后判断加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差是否在第二预设误差内,若判断加工组件60a实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差在第二预设误差之外,控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,将加工组件60a调节至工作坐标位置或将加工组件60a实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差调节至第二预设误差之内。Then, it is determined whether the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a in the second direction and the working position coordinates is within the second preset error. If it is determined that the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a and the working position coordinates is outside the second preset error, the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing component 60a to move in the second direction, adjusts the processing component 60a to the working coordinate position, or adjusts the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a and the working position coordinates to within the second preset error.
这样可以将多个加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节为一致,或者将多个加工组件60a在第二方向上的实际位置坐标之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件60a可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。In this way, the actual position coordinates of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be consistent, or the errors between the actual position coordinates of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
根据本申请的控制方法,通过利用调节装置10a调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,可以将多个加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的坐标调节至相同,或者将多个加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件60a可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。According to the control method of the present application, by using the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the coordinates of the processing axes of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to be the same, or the errors between the actual positions of the processing axes of multiple processing components 60a in the second direction can be adjusted to within a second preset error range, so that multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a沿第一方向可运动,第一方向平行于横梁50a延伸的方向,控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, the adjustment device 10a is movable along a first direction, the first direction is parallel to the direction in which the beam 50a extends, and the control method includes:
获取加工组件60a在第一方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component 60a in the first direction;
检测加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the first direction;
控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
当需要利用加工设备100a对待加工件进行加工时,控制系统可以通过检测模块检测出加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际位置坐标(或者直接读取加工工位对应的所有加工组件60a的预置在控制系统中的位置坐标),然后以其中一个加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际位置坐标为基准,根据加工组件60a之间的预设间距计算出其余的加工组件60a的工作位置坐标。When the workpiece needs to be processed using the processing equipment 100a, the control system can detect the actual position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station in the first direction through the detection module (or directly read the position coordinates of all processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station preset in the control system), and then use the actual position coordinates of one of the processing components 60a in the first direction as a reference, and calculate the working position coordinates of the remaining processing components 60a according to the preset spacing between the processing components 60a.
然后判断加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差是否在第二预设误差内,若判断加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差在第一预设误差之外,控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第一方向上运动,将加工组件60a调节至工作位置坐标或将加工组件60a实际位置坐标与工作位置坐标之间的误差调节至第二预设误差之内。Then, it is determined whether the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a in the first direction and the working position coordinates is within the second preset error. If it is determined that the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a in the first direction and the working position coordinates is outside the first preset error, the control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing component 60a to move in the first direction, adjusts the processing component 60a to the working position coordinates or adjusts the error between the actual position coordinates of the processing component 60a and the working position coordinates to within the second preset error.
这样可以将多个加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际间距调节至预设间距,或者将多个加工组件60a在第一方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围内,使得多个加工组件60a可以同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。In this way, the actual spacing of the multiple processing components 60a in the first direction can be adjusted to the preset spacing, or the error between the actual spacing of the multiple processing components 60a in the first direction and the preset spacing can be adjusted to within the first preset error range, so that the multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a在将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,加工组件60a在第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,加工组件60a仅在第二方向上移动,或,加工组件60a在第二方向上和第一方向上同步移动;控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device 10a adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component 60a moves only in the second direction, or the machining component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and the first direction; the control method includes:
控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标;The control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing assembly 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction to the working position coordinates;
确认加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirm that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;
控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
先调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,接着调节加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,每次对加工组件60a的位置进行调节的调节幅度小,可以防止加工组件60a在多个方向上运动而导致调节之后的加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置不准确,可以使得控制系统可以精确、可靠将加工组件60a调节至预设位置,可以防止控制系统对加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置进行多次校准,提高调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。The position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is first adjusted, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted. The adjustment amplitude of the position of the processing component 60a is small each time, which can prevent the processing component 60a from moving in multiple directions and causing the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment to be inaccurate. The control system can accurately and reliably adjust the processing component 60a to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency, improving the production efficiency, reducing the production cost, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a在将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,加工组件60a在第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,加工组件60a仅在第二方向上移动;控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device 10a adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component 60a moves only in the second direction; the control method includes:
控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Control the adjustment device 10a to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinate of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinate;
确认加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the first direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;
控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
先调节加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,接着调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,每次对加工组件60a位的位置进行调节的调节幅度小,可以防止加工组件60a在多个方向上运动而导致调节之后的加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置不准确,可以使得控制系统可以精确、可靠将加工组件60a调节至预设位置,可以防止控制系统对加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置进行多次校准,提高调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。First, the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted. The adjustment amplitude of the position of the processing component 60a is small each time, which can prevent the processing component 60a from moving in multiple directions and causing the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment to be inaccurate. The control system can accurately and reliably adjust the processing component 60a to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving the adjustment efficiency, improving the production efficiency, reducing the production cost, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a在将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,加工组件60a在第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,加工组件60a仅在第二方向上移动;控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device 10a adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component 60a moves only in the second direction; the control method includes:
在控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动的同时,控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上和第二方向上的实际位置坐标均调节至工作位置坐标的位置。While the control and adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction, the control and adjustment device 10a drives the machining component 60a to move in the second direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the first direction and the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
同时调节加工轴在第一方向上的位置和第二方向上的位置,可以缩短控制系统对对应的加工组件60a第一方向上的位置和第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节时间,提高对加工组件60a的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本。Simultaneously adjusting the position of the processing axis in the first direction and the second direction can shorten the adjustment time of the control system for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, improve the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the position of the processing component 60a, improve production efficiency, and reduce production costs.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在确认加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置之后,控制方法还包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, after confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates, the control method further includes:
驱动加工轴在第三方向上运动,以补偿加工组件60a在第三方向上移动的距离。The processing axis is driven to move in the third direction to compensate for the distance moved by the processing assembly 60a in the third direction.
这样可以使得加工轴在第一方向、第二方向和第三方向上的位置误差均位于加工误差内,可以保证加工设备100a对待加工件进行加工的加工精度。In this way, the position errors of the machining axis in the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are all within the machining error range, thereby ensuring the machining accuracy of the machining equipment 100a for the workpiece.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,调节装置10a在将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,加工组件60a在第二方向上和第一方向上同步移动;控制方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, when the adjustment device 10a adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and the first direction; the control method includes:
控制调节装置10a驱动加工组件60a在第二方向上运动,将加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置;The control and adjustment device 10a drives the processing assembly 60a to move in the second direction, and adjusts the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly 60a in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates;
确认加工组件60a的加工轴在第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirm that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component 60a in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;
控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动,以将加工组件60a的加工轴在第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly 60a in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
由于加工组件60a在第二方向上和第一方向上同步移动,在调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置时,加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置也会发生一定的改变,先调节加工组件60a在第二方向上位置,然后调节加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,不必再次调节加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置,可以缩短控制系统对对应的加工组件60a第一方向上的位置和第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节时间,提高对加工组件60a的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本。Since the processing component 60a moves synchronously in the second direction and in the first direction, when the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted, the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction will also change to a certain extent. The position of the processing component 60a in the second direction is adjusted first, and then the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction is adjusted. There is no need to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the first direction again, which can shorten the adjustment time of the control system for adjusting the corresponding position of the processing component 60a in the first direction and the second direction, improve the adjustment efficiency of the position of the processing component 60a, improve production efficiency, and reduce production costs.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请第三方面实施例的加工设备100a的加工方法,加工设备100a包括机台、横梁50a和多个加工组件60a,机台包括加工平台和机座,加工平台设于机座上,且加工平台沿第二方向可运动,加工平台上具有至少一个放置待加工件的加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工组件。横梁50a设于机座上,且横梁50a位于加工平台的上方;多个加工组件60a沿第一方向间隔设置于横梁50a上,加工组件60a包括用于加工待加工件的加工轴62a,加工轴62a沿第三方向可运动。Referring to Figures 19 to 29, according to the processing method of the processing equipment 100a of the third embodiment of the present application, the processing equipment 100a includes a machine table, a crossbeam 50a and a plurality of processing components 60a, the machine table includes a processing platform and a machine base, the processing platform is arranged on the machine base, and the processing platform can move along the second direction, the processing platform has at least one processing station for placing the workpiece to be processed, and each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components. The crossbeam 50a is arranged on the machine base, and the crossbeam 50a is located above the processing platform; the plurality of processing components 60a are arranged on the crossbeam 50a at intervals along the first direction, and the processing component 60a includes a processing shaft 62a for processing the workpiece to be processed, and the processing shaft 62a can move along the third direction.
调节装置10a连接于加工设备100a的加工组件60a和横梁50a之间,调节装置10a可在第一方向上运动,且调节装置10a用于驱动加工组件60a至少在第二方向上运动,例如调节装置10a可以与控制系统电连接,控制系统可以控制调节装置10a调节对应的加工组件60a在第一方向上的位置。其中,至少相邻的加工组件60a包括一个第一加工组件,至少相邻的加工组件60a的剩余的加工组件60a为第二加工组件,加工方法包括:The adjusting device 10a is connected between the processing assembly 60a and the crossbeam 50a of the processing equipment 100a, and the adjusting device 10a can move in a first direction, and the adjusting device 10a is used to drive the processing assembly 60a to move at least in a second direction. For example, the adjusting device 10a can be electrically connected to a control system, and the control system can control the adjusting device 10a to adjust the position of the corresponding processing assembly 60a in the first direction. Wherein, at least the adjacent processing assembly 60a includes a first processing assembly, and at least the remaining processing assembly 60a of the adjacent processing assembly 60a is a second processing assembly, and the processing method includes:
控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围;The control adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range;
控制调节装置10a驱动对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上运动,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内;The control and adjustment device 10a drives the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within a second preset error range;
控制加工工位对应的所有的加工组件60a的加工轴62a加工待加工件。The processing axes 62a of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing stations are controlled to process the workpieces to be processed.
例如,当需要对待加工件进行加工时,可以先根据待加工件的加工特征判断每个加工工位可同时对应地加工组件60a的数量,确认第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的预定间距(例如预定间距可以为待加工件的两个相同的加工特征在第一方向上的间距),根据待加工件的加工精度要求确认第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的第一预设误差范围和第二方向上的第二预设误差范围。For example, when it is necessary to process the workpiece to be processed, the number of components 60a that can be processed simultaneously at each processing station can be determined based on the processing features of the workpiece to be processed, and the predetermined spacing between the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction (for example, the predetermined spacing can be the spacing between two identical processing features of the workpiece to be processed in the first direction) can be confirmed. According to the processing accuracy requirements of the workpiece to be processed, the first preset error range in the first direction and the second preset error range in the second direction of the first processing component and all the second processing components can be confirmed.
当需要对待加工件进行加工时,可以先检测第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际位置坐标,接着判断加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差是否在第一预设误差范围内,若否,则对加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置进行调节,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围内;When the workpiece needs to be processed, the actual position coordinates of the first processing component and the second processing component in the first direction can be detected first, and then it is determined whether the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing is within a first preset error range. If not, the positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction are adjusted to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to within the first preset error range;
然后判断加工工位对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差是否在第二预设误差范围内,若否,则对加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置进行调节,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的间距调节至第二预设误差范围内;Then, it is determined whether the error between the actual positions of all the processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction is within the second preset error range. If not, the positions of the first processing assembly and the second processing assembly corresponding to the processing station in the second direction are adjusted to adjust the spacing between the actual positions of the first processing assembly and the second processing assembly corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within the second preset error range;
在确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内,且确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内之后,控制加工工位对应的所有的加工组件60a的加工轴62a加工待加工件。After confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range, and confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction is within the second preset error range, the processing axes 62a of all the processing components 60a corresponding to the processing station are controlled to process the workpiece to be processed.
这样可以使得多个加工组件60a同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,保证生产质量,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。In this way, multiple processing components 60a can process the same workpiece at the same time and ensure processing accuracy, ensure production quality, improve the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a, reduce production costs, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
通过设置调节装置10a,并通过控制调节装置10a对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置进行调节,可以实现对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置调节,这样可以使得作业人员不必手动调节加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置,便于实现对加工组件60a在第二方向上的位置的自动化调节,便于实现将加工工位对应的所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的间距调节至第二预设误差范围内的自动化控制,可以提高加工设备100a的自动化性能,降低作业人员的操作强度,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By providing an adjustment device 10a and controlling the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, the position adjustment of the processing component 60a in the second direction can be achieved. This allows the operator to avoid manually adjusting the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, facilitates the automatic adjustment of the position of the processing component 60a in the second direction, and facilitates the automatic control of adjusting the spacing of all processing axes 62a corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to within the second preset error range. This can improve the automation performance of the processing equipment 100a, reduce the operating intensity of the operator, and improve the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
根据本申请的加工方法,通过利用调节装置10a将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围,利用调节装置10a将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围,可以使得多个加工组件60a同时加工同一个待加工件并保证加工精度,提高加工设备100a的自动化性能,降低作业人员的操作强度,提高加工设备100a的加工效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。According to the processing method of the present application, by using the adjustment device 10a to adjust the error between the actual spacing and the predetermined spacing of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction to a first preset error range, and by using the adjustment device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction to a second preset error range, multiple processing components 60a can be used to process the same workpiece to be processed at the same time and ensure the processing accuracy, thereby improving the automation performance of the processing equipment 100a, reducing the operating intensity of the operating personnel, improving the processing efficiency of the processing equipment 100a, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动之前,以及在控制调节装置10a驱动对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上运动之前,加工方法还包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, before the control and adjustment device 10a moves in the first direction, and before the control and adjustment device 10a drives the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, the processing method further includes:
获取加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围;Obtain a predetermined spacing in a first direction and a first preset error range between the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station;
获取加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置之间的第二预设误差范围;Obtain a second preset error range between positions of the first processing component and all second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction;
检测加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距,并判断加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差是否位于第一预设误差范围之内;Detecting an actual spacing in the first direction between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station, and determining whether an error between the actual spacing in the first direction between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station and a predetermined spacing is within a first preset error range;
检测加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置,并判断加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差是否位于第二预设误差范围之内。Detect the actual positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction, and determine whether the error between the actual positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components corresponding to the processing station in the second direction is within a second preset error range.
若判断加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件中的一个在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差位于第一预设误差范围之外,控制调节装置10a调节这一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和这一个第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围内;If it is determined that the error between the actual spacing in the first direction of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and one of all the second processing assemblies and the predetermined spacing is outside the first preset error range, the control adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing assembly in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing in the first direction of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and the second processing assembly and the predetermined spacing to within the first preset error range;
若判断加工工位对应的第一加工组件和其中一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差位于第二预设误差范围之外,控制调节装置10a调节这一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,以将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和这一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内。If it is determined that the error between the actual positions of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station and one of the second processing components in the second direction is outside the second preset error range, the control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station and the second processing component in the second direction to within the second preset error range.
通过检测第一加工组件和第二加工组件在第一方向上和第二方向上的实际位置,可以使得控制系统更为准确的计算出第一加工组件和第二加工组件需要移动的距离,使得调节装置10a对第一加工组件和第二加工组件的位置调节更为精确,可以提高加工设备100a的加工精度,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By detecting the actual positions of the first processing component and the second processing component in the first direction and the second direction, the control system can more accurately calculate the distance that the first processing component and the second processing component need to move, so that the adjustment device 10a can more accurately adjust the position of the first processing component and the second processing component, thereby improving the processing accuracy of the processing equipment 100a and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在控制调节装置10a驱动对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上运动之前,加工方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, before the control and adjustment device 10a drives the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, the processing method includes:
确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内。即先调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置,接着调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置。Confirm that the error between the actual spacing of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range. That is, the positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies in the first direction are first adjusted, and then the positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction are adjusted.
先调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置,接着调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,每次对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件的位置进行调节的调节幅度小,可以防止第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在多个方向上运动而导致调节之后的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置不准确,可以使得控制系统可以精确、可靠将第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件调节至预设位置,可以防止控制系统对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置进行多次校准,提高调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。First, adjust the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction, and then adjust the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the second direction. The adjustment amplitude of the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components is small each time, which can prevent the first processing component and all the second processing components from moving in multiple directions, resulting in inaccurate positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment. The control system can accurately and reliably adjust the first processing component and all the second processing components to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving adjustment efficiency, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差已调节至第一预设误差范围内之后,加工方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, after confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing has been adjusted to within a first preset error range, the processing method includes:
再次确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内。It is confirmed again that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range.
多次对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件的位置进行检测,这样可以有效地保证每个第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件第一方向上的位置精度和第二方向上的位置精度,保证每个加工工位对应的所有的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件对同一个第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件进行加工的加工精度,保证生产质量,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。The positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components are detected multiple times, which can effectively ensure the position accuracy of each first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction and the position accuracy of each second processing component in the second direction, and ensure the processing accuracy of all the first processing components and all the second processing components corresponding to each processing station for processing the same first processing component and all the second processing components, thereby ensuring production quality, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在控制调节装置10a在第一方向上运动之前,加工方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, before controlling the adjustment device 10a to move in the first direction, the processing method includes:
确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差位于第二预设误差范围之内。即先调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,接着调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置。Confirm that the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the second direction is within the second preset error range. That is, first adjust the positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction, and then adjust the positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies in the first direction.
先调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,接着调节第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置,每次对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件的位置进行调节的调节幅度小,可以防止第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在多个方向上运动而导致调节之后的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置不准确,可以使得控制系统可以精确、可靠将第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件调节至预设位置,可以防止控制系统对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置或第二方向上的位置进行多次校准,提高调节效率,提高生产效率,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。First, adjust the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the second direction, and then adjust the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction. The adjustment amplitude of the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components is small each time, which can prevent the first processing component and all the second processing components from moving in multiple directions, resulting in inaccurate positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction after adjustment. The control system can accurately and reliably adjust the first processing component and all the second processing components to the preset position, and can prevent the control system from calibrating the positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction or the second direction multiple times, thereby improving adjustment efficiency, improving production efficiency, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
参照图19-图29,根据本申请的一些实施例,在确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差已调节至第一预设误差范围内之后,加工方法包括:19 to 29 , according to some embodiments of the present application, after confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing has been adjusted to within a first preset error range, the processing method includes:
再次确认加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差位于第二预设误差范围之内。It is confirmed again that the error between the actual positions of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing components in the second direction is within the second preset error range.
多次对第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件的位置进行检测,这样可以有效地保证每个第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件第一方向上的位置精度和第二方向上的位置精度,保证每个加工工位对应的所有的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件对同一个第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件进行加工的加工精度,保证生产质量,降低生产成本,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。The positions of the first processing component and all the second processing components are detected multiple times, which can effectively ensure the position accuracy of each first processing component and all the second processing components in the first direction and the position accuracy of each second processing component in the second direction, and ensure the processing accuracy of all the first processing components and all the second processing components corresponding to each processing station for processing the same first processing component and all the second processing components, thereby ensuring production quality, reducing production costs, and improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
根据本申请的一些可选地实施例,控制调节装置10a将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内的步骤包括:According to some optional embodiments of the present application, the step of controlling the adjusting device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range includes:
获取加工工位对应的第一加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标;Acquire the actual position coordinates of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction;
以加工工位对应的第一加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标为基准坐标,调节所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,以将所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内。Taking the actual position coordinates of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station in the second direction as the reference coordinates, adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction to adjust the errors between the actual position coordinates of all the second processing components in the second direction and the reference coordinates to within the second preset error range.
当需要对加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置进行调节时,可以先通过检测模块检测第一加工组件在第二位置上的实际位置坐标(例如控制系统可以直接读取第一加工组件在控制系统中的位置坐标,从而获得第一加工组件在第二方向上的位置坐标),然后将第一加工组件的实际位置坐标设置未基准坐标;When it is necessary to adjust the positions of the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the second direction, the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly at the second position can be detected by the detection module first (for example, the control system can directly read the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the control system to obtain the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the second direction), and then the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly are set as the reference coordinates;
接着控制系统可以通过检测模块对所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置进行检测,计算出每个第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差,若判断所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差均在第二预设误差之外,则判断所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置已调节到位;Then, the control system can detect the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction through the detection module, calculate the error between the actual position coordinates of each second processing component in the second direction and the reference coordinates, and if it is determined that the errors between the actual position coordinates of all the second processing components in the second direction and the reference coordinates are outside the second preset error, then it is determined that the positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction have been adjusted to the correct position;
若判断有一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差在第二预设误差之外,则控制调节装置10a调节这一个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置,以将这个第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差调节至第二预设误差内,然后再次通过检测模块对这个第二加工组件进行检测,若控制系统判断这个第二加工组件此时在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差在第二预设误差内,则控制系统判断这个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置已调节到位;若控制系统判断这个第二加工组件此时在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的误差在第二预设误差之外,则重复上述步骤,直至控制系统判断这个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置已调节到位。If it is determined that the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of a second processing component in the second direction is outside the second preset error, the control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the second direction to adjust the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction to within the second preset error, and then the second processing component is detected again by the detection module. If the control system determines that the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction is within the second preset error, the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position; if the control system determines that the error between the actual position coordinates and the reference coordinates of the second processing component in the second direction is outside the second preset error, the above steps are repeated until the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position.
通过设置第二方向上的基准坐标,这样可以使得控制系统可以精准地控制调节装置10a对所有的第二加工组件的一个在第二方向上的位置进行调节,可以不必对所有的第二加工组件在第二方向的位置进行调节,方法简单,可以提高对所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By setting the reference coordinates in the second direction, the control system can accurately control the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of one of the second processing components in the second direction, and there is no need to adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction. The method is simple, and can improve the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction, thereby improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
根据本申请的一些可选地实施例,控制调节装置10a将加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内的步骤包括:According to some optional embodiments of the present application, the step of controlling the adjusting device 10a to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range includes:
获取加工工位对应的第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际位置坐标;Acquire the actual position coordinates of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction;
以加工工位对应的第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际位置坐标为基准坐标,调节所有的第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置,以将所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置坐标与基准坐标之间的实际间距与预设间距的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内。Taking the actual position coordinates of the first processing component corresponding to the processing station in the first direction as the reference coordinates, adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the first direction so as to adjust the errors between the actual spacings and the preset spacings between the actual position coordinates of all the second processing components in the second direction and the reference coordinates to within the second preset error range.
当需要对加工工位对应的第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的间距进行调节时,可以先通过检测模块检测第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际位置坐标(例如控制系统可以直接读取第一加工组件在控制系统中的位置坐标,从而获得第一加工组件在第一方向上的位置坐标),然后将第一加工组件的实际位置坐标设置为基准坐标;When it is necessary to adjust the spacing in the second direction between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station, the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the first direction can be detected by the detection module (for example, the control system can directly read the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the control system to obtain the position coordinates of the first processing assembly in the first direction), and then the actual position coordinates of the first processing assembly are set as the reference coordinates;
接着控制系统可以通过检测模块对所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的实际位置进行检测,计算出每个第二加工组件与第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差,若判断所有的第二加工组件与第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差均在第二预设误差之外,则判断所有的加工轴62a在第二方向上的位置已调节到位;Then, the control system can detect the actual positions of all the second processing components in the second direction through the detection module, calculate the error between the actual spacing between each second processing component and the first processing component in the first direction and the preset spacing, and if it is determined that the errors between the actual spacing between all the second processing components and the first processing components in the first direction and the preset spacing are all outside the second preset error, then it is determined that the positions of all the processing axes 62a in the second direction have been adjusted to the correct position;
若判断有一个第二加工组件与第一加工组件在第二方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差在第一预设误差之外,则控制调节装置10a调节这一个第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置,以将这个第二加工组件与第一加工组件在第一方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差内,然后再次通过检测模块对这个第二加工组件的实际位置进行检测,若控制系统判断这个第二加工组件此时与第一加工组件在第二方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差在第一预设误差内,则控制系统判断这个第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置已调节到位;若控制系统判断这个第二加工组件此时与第一加工组件在第二方向上的实际间距与预设间距之间的误差在第一预设误差之外,则重复上述步骤,直至控制系统判断这个第二加工组件在第一方向上的位置已调节到位。If it is determined that the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the second direction is outside the first preset error, the control and adjustment device 10a adjusts the position of the second processing component in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the first direction to within the first preset error, and then the actual position of the second processing component is detected again by the detection module. If the control system determines that the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the second direction is within the first preset error, the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the second direction has been adjusted to the right position; if the control system determines that the error between the actual spacing and the preset spacing between the second processing component and the first processing component in the second direction is outside the first preset error, the above steps are repeated until the control system determines that the position of the second processing component in the first direction has been adjusted to the right position.
通过设置第一方向上的基准坐标,这样可以使得控制系统可以精准地控制调节装置10a对所有的第二加工组件的一个在第一方向上的位置进行调节,可以不必对所有的第二加工组件在第一方向的位置进行调节,方法简单,可以提高对所有的第二加工组件在第二方向上的位置进行调节的调节效率,提高加工设备100a的整体性能。By setting the reference coordinates in the first direction, the control system can accurately control the adjustment device 10a to adjust the position of one of all the second processing components in the first direction, and there is no need to adjust the positions of all the second processing components in the first direction. The method is simple, and the adjustment efficiency of adjusting the positions of all the second processing components in the second direction can be improved, thereby improving the overall performance of the processing equipment 100a.
下面参考图30-图39描述根据本申请实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件50b。The following describes an adjustment component 50b for circuit board processing equipment according to an embodiment of the present application with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39 .
根据本申请实施例的调节组件50b,电路板加工设备100b包括气浮套组件40b,如图33-图37所示,调节组件50b包括:驱动件54b和调节块53b。According to the adjustment component 50b of the embodiment of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment 100b includes an air floating sleeve component 40b, as shown in Figures 33 to 37, and the adjustment component 50b includes: a driving member 54b and an adjustment block 53b.
具体地,调节块53b连接于驱动件54b和气浮套组件40b之间,且驱动件54b适于驱动调节块53b沿第一方向运动;其中,当驱动件54b驱动调节块53b沿第一方向运动时,调节块53b适于带动气浮套组件40b沿第二方向运动,第一方向与第二方向垂直。Specifically, the adjustment block 53b is connected between the driving member 54b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and the driving member 54b is suitable for driving the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction; wherein, when the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction, the adjustment block 53b is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b to move along the second direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
例如电路板加工设备100b可构造为钻锣机、或者钻孔机、或者成型机等,下面以电路板加工设备100b为钻锣机进行举例说明。For example, the circuit board processing equipment 100b can be constructed as a drilling machine, a drilling machine, or a forming machine, etc. The circuit board processing equipment 100b is taken as a drilling machine as an example below.
驱动件54b安装于电路板加工设备100b的Z轴底板12b上,且调节块53b连接于驱动件54b和气浮套组件之间,且驱动件54b在沿第一方向驱动调节块53b运动时,调节块53b能够带动气浮套组件40b沿沿第二方向运动。The driving member 54b is installed on the Z-axis base plate 12b of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, and the adjustment block 53b is connected between the driving member 54b and the air floating sleeve assembly. When the driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to move along the first direction, the adjustment block 53b can drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move along the second direction.
例如第一方向可为Z轴方向,第二方向可为Y轴方向。For example, the first direction may be the Z-axis direction, and the second direction may be the Y-axis direction.
这样,在实际加工时,可通过驱动件54b驱动调节块在Z轴方向运动,以使调节块53b带动气浮套组件40b相对于Z轴底板12b沿Y轴方向运动,然后调整位置后的气浮套组件40b能够重新对主轴20b进行定位,以在Y轴方向上调整主轴20b的加工中心。In this way, during actual processing, the adjustment block can be driven to move in the Z-axis direction through the driving member 54b, so that the adjustment block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move along the Y-axis direction relative to the Z-axis base plate 12b, and then the air floating sleeve assembly 40b after adjusting the position can reposition the spindle 20b to adjust the machining center of the spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction.
由此,可在Y轴方向上调整主轴20b的加工中心,利于提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度。Therefore, the machining center of the spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
需要说明的是,相关技术中,一块PCB整板上通常排布有多组阵列的或镜像的线路图,单一主轴20b的加工效率较低,因此,本申请的电路板加工设备100b上可设置有至少两个相邻的主轴20b,且两个主轴20b可同时对电路板进行加工,以提高加工效率,其中,两个主轴20b中的至少一个主轴20b通过气浮套组件40b导向定位,且该气浮套组件40b可通过调节组件50b实现其在Y轴方向上的位置的调节。It should be noted that in the related art, a whole PCB board is usually arranged with multiple groups of arrayed or mirrored circuit diagrams, and the processing efficiency of a single spindle 20b is low. Therefore, the circuit board processing equipment 100b of the present application may be provided with at least two adjacent spindles 20b, and the two spindles 20b can process the circuit board at the same time to improve the processing efficiency, wherein at least one of the two spindles 20b is guided and positioned by an air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can adjust its position in the Y-axis direction through the adjustment assembly 50b.
这样,在通过至少两个主轴20b同时加工一块电路板时,可通过调节组件50b驱动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向运动,然后通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率。In this way, when a circuit board is processed simultaneously by at least two spindles 20b, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the adjustment assembly 50b, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
由此,使得电路板加工设备100b可通过至少两个主轴20b同时加工一块电路板,以提高加工效率,且通过调节组件50b在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,利于提高加工精度。Thus, the circuit board processing equipment 100b can process a circuit board simultaneously through at least two spindles 20b to improve processing efficiency, and the processing center of the corresponding spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction by adjusting the component 50b, which is beneficial to improve processing accuracy.
当然,上述的第一方向、第二方向的限定以及上述的电路板仅用于举例说明,即电路板也可为其它符合要求的待加工工件,在此不做限定。Of course, the above-mentioned limitations of the first direction and the second direction and the above-mentioned circuit board are only used for illustration, that is, the circuit board may also be other workpieces to be processed that meet the requirements, and are not limited here.
根据本申请实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件50b,通过驱动件54b在第一方向上的运动,能够驱动调节块53b在第二方向上带动气浮套组件40b运动,从而便于改变气浮套组件40b在第二方向上的位置,进而减少相邻的主轴20b在第二方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差,利于提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度。According to the embodiment of the present application, the adjustment component 50b for circuit board processing equipment can drive the adjustment block 53b to drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move in the second direction through the movement of the driving member 54b in the first direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b in the second direction, thereby reducing the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
在一些实施例中,调节组件50b还包括:第一支架51b和第二支架52b。In some embodiments, the adjustment assembly 50b further includes: a first bracket 51b and a second bracket 52b.
第一支架51b与气浮套组件40b相连,第二支架52b与电路板加工设备100b相连,且第一支架51b和第二支架52b之间限定出滑动空间,驱动件54b驱动调节块53b在滑动空间内沿第一方向滑动,调节块53b沿第一方向滑动过程中适于带动第一支架51b朝向远离/靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。The first bracket 51b is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, the second bracket 52b is connected to the circuit board processing equipment 100b, and a sliding space is defined between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b. The driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to slide along the first direction in the sliding space. During the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the first direction, it is suitable for driving the first bracket 51b to move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
例如图33所示,第一支架51b与气浮套组件40b相连,第二支架52b与固定支架10b相连,且第一支架51b和第二支架52b之间限定出滑动空间,驱动件54b驱动调节块53b在滑动空间内沿第一方向滑动,调节块53b沿第一方向滑动过程中适于带动第一支架51b朝向远离/靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。For example, as shown in Figure 33, the first bracket 51b is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, the second bracket 52b is connected to the fixed bracket 10b, and a sliding space is defined between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b. The driving member 54b drives the adjustment block 53b to slide along the first direction in the sliding space. During the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the first direction, it is suitable for driving the first bracket 51b to move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
例如图36和图37所示,第一支架51b和第二支架52b在第二方向上间隔开分布,以在第一支架51b和第二支架52b之间限定出滑动空间,调节块53b夹设于第一支架51b和第二支架52b之间,且调节块53b在沿第一方向滑动时,调节块53b对第一支架51b产生力,以使第一支架51b在第二方向上朝向远离/靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。For example, as shown in Figures 36 and 37, the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b are spaced apart and distributed in the second direction to define a sliding space between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b, and the adjustment block 53b is clamped between the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b, and when the adjustment block 53b slides along the first direction, the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b to make the first bracket 51b move in the second direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b.
如图36和图37所示,第一方向为Z轴方向,第二方向为Y轴方向,即第一支架51b和第二支架52b在Y轴方向上间隔开分布,调节块53b沿Z轴方向滑动过程中,调节块53b对第一支架51b产生力,以使第一支架51b在Y轴方向上朝向远离/靠近第二支架52b的方向运动,从而通过第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上运动,以调整气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上的位置,进而通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率。As shown in Figures 36 and 37, the first direction is the Z-axis direction, and the second direction is the Y-axis direction, that is, the first bracket 51b and the second bracket 52b are spaced apart and distributed in the Y-axis direction. During the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b, so that the first bracket 51b moves in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b in the Y-axis direction, thereby driving the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then guiding and positioning the corresponding spindle 20b through the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and facilitating the reduction of the absolute coordinate error of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, or making the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
需要说明的是,调节块53b的运动方向和第一支架51b的运动方向不同,以便于减小调节组件50b在第一方向上的尺寸,利于实现调节组件50b的小型化设计。It should be noted that the movement direction of the adjustment block 53b is different from the movement direction of the first bracket 51b, so as to reduce the size of the adjustment component 50b in the first direction and facilitate the miniaturization design of the adjustment component 50b.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,第一支架51b设有第一配合斜面513b,调节块53b设有第二配合斜面533b,第一配合斜面513b和第二配合斜面533b滑动配合,以使调节块53b沿第一方向向下滑动时驱动第一支架51b朝向远离第二支架52b的方向运动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 35, the first bracket 51b is provided with a first mating bevel 513b, and the adjustment block 53b is provided with a second mating bevel 533b. The first mating bevel 513b and the second mating bevel 533b are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket 51b to move in a direction away from the second bracket 52b.
也就是说,在调节块53b沿第一方向向下滑动时,第一配合斜面513b和第二配合斜面533b滑动配合,以减小调节块53b与第一支架51b之间的摩擦力,且使得调节块53b会推动第一支架51b在第二方向上朝向远离第二支架52b的方向运动,当第一方向为Z轴方向、第二方向为Y轴方向时,调节块53b在Z轴方向向下滑动时,调节块53b会推动第一支架51b沿Y轴方向朝向远离第二支架52b的方向运动。That is to say, when the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction, the first mating bevel 513b and the second mating bevel 533b slide and cooperate to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b, and the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b. When the first direction is the Z-axis direction and the second direction is the Y-axis direction, when the adjustment block 53b slides downward in the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move along the Y-axis direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b.
由此,通过第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上运动,以调整气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上的位置,进而通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率。Thus, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is driven to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then the corresponding main shaft 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding main shaft 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent main shaft 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,第一支架51b设有第三配合斜面514b,调节块53b设有第四配合斜面534b,第三配合斜面514b和第四配合斜面534b滑动配合,以使调节块53b沿第一方向向上滑动时驱动第一支架51b朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 35, the first bracket 51b is provided with a third mating bevel 514b, and the adjustment block 53b is provided with a fourth mating bevel 534b. The third mating bevel 514b and the fourth mating bevel 534b are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block 53b slides upward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket 51b to move toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
也就是说,在调节块53b沿第一方向向下滑动时,第三配合斜面514b和第四配合斜面534b滑动配合,以减小调节块53b与第一支架51b之间的摩擦力,且使得调节块53b会推动第一支架51b在第二方向上朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向运动,当第一方向为Z轴方向、第二方向为Y轴方向时,调节块53b在Z轴方向向上滑动时,调节块53b会带动第一支架51b沿Y轴方向朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。That is to say, when the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the first direction, the third mating inclined surface 514b and the fourth mating inclined surface 534b slide and cooperate to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b, and the adjustment block 53b will push the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b. When the first direction is the Z-axis direction and the second direction is the Y-axis direction, when the adjustment block 53b slides upward in the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b will drive the first bracket 51b to move along the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
由此,通过第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上运动,以调整气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上的位置,进而通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率,同时,能够实现第一支架51b的自动复位,即实现气浮套组件40b的自动复位,利于降低操作难度。Thus, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, and at the same time, it can realize automatic resetting of the first bracket 51b, that is, realize automatic resetting of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, which is conducive to reducing the difficulty of operation.
需要说明的是,沿Z轴方向由上到下的方向上,第一配合斜面513b、第二配合斜面533b、第三配合斜面514b和第四配合斜面534b均朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向倾斜延伸。It should be noted that, from top to bottom along the Z-axis direction, the first mating slope 513b, the second mating slope 533b, the third mating slope 514b and the fourth mating slope 534b all extend obliquely toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
由此,在调节块53b沿Z轴方向向下滑动时,调节块53b的第一配合斜面513b抵压第二配合斜面533b,以使第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向朝向远离第二支架52b的方向运动,且在调节块53b沿Z轴方向向上滑动时,调节块53b的第三配合斜面514b抵压第四配合斜面534b,以使第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向运动。Therefore, when the adjustment block 53b slides downward along the Z-axis direction, the first mating bevel 513b of the adjustment block 53b presses against the second mating bevel 533b, so that the first bracket 51b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction toward the direction away from the second bracket 52b, and when the adjustment block 53b slides upward along the Z-axis direction, the third mating bevel 514b of the adjustment block 53b presses against the fourth mating bevel 534b, so that the first bracket 51b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,第一支架51b设有第一滑动凸起516b,调节块53b设有第一滑动槽535b,第一滑动凸起516b可滑动地安装于第一滑动槽535b内。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 35 , the first bracket 51 b is provided with a first sliding protrusion 516 b , the adjustment block 53 b is provided with a first sliding groove 535 b , and the first sliding protrusion 516 b is slidably installed in the first sliding groove 535 b .
由此,通过第一滑动凸起516b伸至第一滑动槽535b内以与第一滑动槽535b滑动配合,便于增强调节块53b与第一支架51b之间的连接稳定性,利于使得第一支架51b能够更稳定地与调节块53b滑动配合。Thus, by extending the first sliding protrusion 516b into the first sliding groove 535b to slidingly cooperate with the first sliding groove 535b, it is convenient to enhance the connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b, so that the first bracket 51b can slide and cooperate with the adjustment block 53b more stably.
其中,第一配合斜面513b和第三配合斜面514b分别为第一滑动凸起516b在第二方向上相对设置的两侧面,第二配合斜面533b和第四配合斜面534b分别为第一滑动槽535b在第二方向上相对设置的两个内壁面。The first mating bevel 513b and the third mating bevel 514b are respectively two side surfaces of the first sliding protrusion 516b arranged opposite to each other in the second direction, and the second mating bevel 533b and the fourth mating bevel 534b are respectively two inner wall surfaces of the first sliding groove 535b arranged opposite to each other in the second direction.
由此,在保证第一支架51b能够稳定地与调节块53b滑动配合的同时,通过第一滑动凸起516b的不同侧面与第一滑动槽535b的不同侧面之间的配合,实现调节块53b在第一方向上滑动的同时,能够带动第一支架51b在第二方向上的运动,进而实现对气浮套组件40b在Y轴上的坐标的调节。Therefore, while ensuring that the first bracket 51b can stably slide with the adjustment block 53b, through the cooperation between the different side surfaces of the first sliding protrusion 516b and the different side surfaces of the first sliding groove 535b, the adjustment block 53b can slide in the first direction while driving the first bracket 51b to move in the second direction, thereby realizing the adjustment of the coordinate of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b on the Y-axis.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,第一滑动凸起516b和第一滑动槽535b均可设有多个,多个第一滑动凸起516b和多个第一滑动槽535b一一对应。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 35 , a plurality of first sliding protrusions 516 b and a plurality of first sliding grooves 535 b may be provided, and the plurality of first sliding protrusions 516 b and the plurality of first sliding grooves 535 b correspond one to one.
例如,第一滑动凸起516b和第一滑动槽535b均可设有两个,两个第一滑动凸起516b和两个第一滑动槽535b一一对应,且调节块53b夹设于两个第一滑动凸起516b之间。For example, two first sliding protrusions 516b and two first sliding grooves 535b may be provided, the two first sliding protrusions 516b and the two first sliding grooves 535b correspond one to one, and the adjustment block 53b is sandwiched between the two first sliding protrusions 516b.
由此,能够增强调节块53b与第一支架51b之间的连接稳定性,利于使得第一支架51b能够更稳定地与调节块53b滑动配合。Thus, the connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the first bracket 51b can be enhanced, which helps to make the first bracket 51b more stably slideably cooperate with the adjustment block 53b.
在一些实施例中,如图34-图37所示,第一支架51b包括第一安装板511b和第一导向块512b。In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 34-37 , the first bracket 51 b includes a first mounting plate 511 b and a first guide block 512 b .
第一导向块512b与第一安装板511b相连,第一安装板511b与气浮套组件40b相连,且第一滑动凸起516b设于第一导向块512b。The first guide block 512b is connected to the first mounting plate 511b, the first mounting plate 511b is connected to the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the first sliding protrusion 516b is disposed on the first guide block 512b.
例如,第一安装板511b可通过固定螺栓515b与气浮套支撑座41b相连,第一导向块512b安装于第一安装板511b背离气浮套支撑座41b的一侧,这样,可单独在第一导向块512b上加工第一滑动凸起516b,然后再将第一导向块512b安装于第一安装板511b上,便于降低第一滑动凸起516b的设置难度,且第一导向块512b固定于第一安装板511b上,可通过第一安装板511b与气浮套支撑座41b相连,以便于增大气浮套支撑座41b的受力面积,进而在调节块53b推动第一导向块512b,以使第一导向块512b通过第一安装板511b推动气浮套组件40b运动时,保证气浮套组件40b的受力平衡。For example, the first mounting plate 511b can be connected to the air floating sleeve support seat 41b by a fixing bolt 515b, and the first guide block 512b is installed on the side of the first mounting plate 511b away from the air floating sleeve support seat 41b. In this way, the first sliding protrusion 516b can be processed on the first guide block 512b separately, and then the first guide block 512b can be installed on the first mounting plate 511b, which is convenient for reducing the difficulty of setting the first sliding protrusion 516b, and the first guide block 512b is fixed on the first mounting plate 511b, and can be connected to the air floating sleeve support seat 41b through the first mounting plate 511b, so as to increase the force-bearing area of the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, and then when the adjusting block 53b pushes the first guide block 512b, so that the first guide block 512b pushes the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move through the first mounting plate 511b, the force balance of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b is ensured.
当然,上述的第一安装板511b与气浮套支撑座41b的连接方式还可以为卡接相连、插接相连、或者粘结相连、再或者磁吸配合等连接方式,在此不做限定。Of course, the connection method between the first mounting plate 511b and the air floating sleeve support seat 41b can also be a snap connection, a plug connection, a bonding connection, or a magnetic connection, which is not limited here.
在一些实施例中,如图34-图37所示,第二支架52b包括固定部521b和导向部522b,固定部521b与固定支架10b相连,导向部522b与调节块53b滑动配合。In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 34-37 , the second bracket 52b includes a fixing portion 521b and a guiding portion 522b, the fixing portion 521b is connected to the fixing bracket 10b, and the guiding portion 522b is slidably matched with the adjusting block 53b.
由此,通过设置固定部521b,以便于第二支架52b与固定支架10b相连,且导向部522b能够与调节块53b滑动配合,以减小调节块53b与第二支架52b之间的摩擦力,便于调节块53b的滑动。Therefore, by setting the fixing portion 521b, the second bracket 52b is connected to the fixing bracket 10b, and the guide portion 522b can slide with the adjustment block 53b to reduce the friction between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b, thereby facilitating the sliding of the adjustment block 53b.
其中,第二支架52b与固定支架10b的连接方式包括但不限于通过螺栓相连、或者卡接相连、或者插接相连、或者粘结相连、再或者磁吸配合等连接方式。The connection method between the second bracket 52b and the fixed bracket 10b includes but is not limited to connection by bolts, or snap connection, or plug connection, or bonding connection, or magnetic attraction and the like.
进一步地,如图35所示,导向部522b设有第二滑动凸起523b,调节块53b设有第二滑动槽532b,第二滑动凸起523b可滑动地安装于第二滑动槽532b内。Further, as shown in FIG. 35 , the guide portion 522b is provided with a second sliding protrusion 523b, the adjustment block 53b is provided with a second sliding groove 532b, and the second sliding protrusion 523b is slidably installed in the second sliding groove 532b.
由此,通过第二滑动凸起523b伸至第二滑动槽532b内以与第二滑动槽532b滑动配合,便于增强调节块53b与第二支架52b之间的连接稳定性,利于使得第二支架52b能够更稳定地与调节块53b滑动配合。Therefore, by extending the second sliding protrusion 523b into the second sliding groove 532b to slide with the second sliding groove 532b, it is convenient to enhance the connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b, so that the second bracket 52b can slide with the adjustment block 53b more stably.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,第二滑动凸起523b和第二滑动槽532b均可设有多个,多个第二滑动凸起523b和多个第二滑动槽532b一一对应。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 35 , a plurality of second sliding protrusions 523 b and a plurality of second sliding grooves 532 b may be provided, and the plurality of second sliding protrusions 523 b and the plurality of second sliding grooves 532 b may correspond one to one.
例如,第二滑动凸起523b和第二滑动槽532b均可设有两个,两个第二滑动凸起523b和两个第二滑动槽532b一一对应,且调节块53b夹设于两个第二滑动凸起523b之间。For example, two second sliding protrusions 523b and two second sliding grooves 532b may be provided, the two second sliding protrusions 523b correspond to the two second sliding grooves 532b one by one, and the adjustment block 53b is sandwiched between the two second sliding protrusions 523b.
由此,能够增强调节块53b与第二支架52b之间的连接稳定性,利于使得第二支架52b能够更稳定地与调节块53b滑动配合。Thus, the connection stability between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b can be enhanced, which helps to make the second bracket 52b more stably slideably cooperate with the adjustment block 53b.
在一些实施例中,如图34、图35和图37所示,驱动件54b构造为调节螺栓,调节螺栓贯穿调节块53b的穿设孔531b且与第二支架52b的螺纹孔524b螺纹配合。In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 34 , 35 and 37 , the driving member 54 b is configured as an adjusting bolt, which passes through the through hole 531 b of the adjusting block 53 b and is threadedly engaged with the threaded hole 524 b of the second bracket 52 b.
由此,可通过手动拧动调节螺栓,即改变调节螺栓与第二支架52b的螺纹孔524b的配合程度以实现调节块53b在Z轴方向上的滑动,便于实现对调节块53b的控制。Therefore, the adjustment block 53b can be slidably moved in the Z-axis direction by manually turning the adjustment bolt, that is, changing the degree of fit between the adjustment bolt and the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b, so as to facilitate control of the adjustment block 53b.
如用户可拧动调节螺栓,以使调节螺栓拧紧,即调节螺栓伸至第二支架52b的螺纹孔524b长度加长,此时,调节块53b在Z轴方向向下滑动,且调节块53b推动第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b,以使气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上朝向远离第二支架52b的方向运动。If the user can turn the adjusting bolt to tighten the adjusting bolt, that is, the length of the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b is lengthened, then the adjusting block 53b slides downward in the Z-axis direction, and the adjusting block 53b pushes the first bracket 51b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, so that the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves in the Y-axis direction toward and away from the second bracket 52b.
或者用户可拧动调节螺栓,以使调节螺栓松开,即调节螺栓伸至第二支架52b的螺纹孔524b长度缩短,此时,调节块53b在Z轴方向向上滑动,且调节块53b拉动第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b,以使气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上朝向靠近第二支架52b的方向运动,从而实现气浮套组件40b的复位。Alternatively, the user can turn the adjusting bolt to loosen the adjusting bolt, that is, the length of the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b extended by the adjusting bolt is shortened. At this time, the adjusting block 53b slides upward in the Z-axis direction, and the adjusting block 53b pulls the first bracket 51b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, so that the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves in the Y-axis direction toward the direction close to the second bracket 52b, thereby realizing the resetting of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b.
由此,通过拧动调节螺栓,以使调节螺栓伸至第二支架52b的螺纹孔524b的长度改变,从而控制调节块53b在Z轴方向上的滑动方向,进而控制气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上的运动方向,便于降低调节块53b的控制难度,即操作更加简单。Therefore, by turning the adjusting bolt, the length of the threaded hole 524b of the second bracket 52b can be changed, thereby controlling the sliding direction of the adjusting block 53b in the Z-axis direction, and then controlling the movement direction of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, which makes it easier to control the adjusting block 53b, that is, the operation is simpler.
在一些实施例中,如图35所示,调节组件50b还包括弹性件55b。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 35 , the adjustment assembly 50 b further includes an elastic member 55 b .
如图37所示,弹性件55b设于调节块53b与第二支架52b之间,且在第一方向上,弹性件55b适于将调节块53b朝向第二支架52b弹性预紧。As shown in FIG. 37 , the elastic member 55b is disposed between the adjustment block 53b and the second bracket 52b, and in the first direction, the elastic member 55b is suitable for elastically pre-tightening the adjustment block 53b toward the second bracket 52b.
由此,在需要松开调节螺栓时,即调节块53b在Z轴方向向上滑动时,用户在拧动调节螺栓时,可通过弹性件55b对调节螺栓施加向上的力,以便于减小用户所需施加的力,进而便于降低操作难度,利于实现气浮套组件40b的复位。Therefore, when the adjusting bolt needs to be loosened, that is, when the adjusting block 53b slides upward in the Z-axis direction, when the user turns the adjusting bolt, an upward force can be applied to the adjusting bolt through the elastic member 55b, so as to reduce the force required to be applied by the user, thereby reducing the difficulty of operation and facilitating the resetting of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b.
优选地,如图37所示,弹性件55b构造为弹簧,弹簧套设于调节螺栓。Preferably, as shown in FIG. 37 , the elastic member 55 b is constructed as a spring, and the spring is sleeved on the adjusting bolt.
由此,便于实现对弹簧的固定,以增强弹簧的结构稳定性,且便于减小弹簧所占用的安装空间,以实现调节组件50b的小型化设计。Thereby, it is convenient to fix the spring to enhance the structural stability of the spring, and it is convenient to reduce the installation space occupied by the spring to realize the miniaturized design of the adjustment component 50b.
或者,弹性件55b也可构造为蝶形弹簧,在此不做限定。Alternatively, the elastic member 55b may also be configured as a butterfly spring, which is not limited here.
在一些实施例中,如图31和图32所示,第一方向为电路板加工设备100b的Z轴方向,第二方向为电路板加工设备100b的Y轴方向,第一方向和第二方向垂直。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 , the first direction is the Z-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment 100 b , the second direction is the Y-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment 100 b , and the first direction and the second direction are perpendicular.
由此,在调节块53b沿Z轴方向滑动过程中,调节块53b对第一支架51b产生力,以使第一支架51b在Y轴方向上朝向远离/靠近第二支架52b的方向运动,从而通过第一支架51b带动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上运动,以调整气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向上的位置,进而通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率。Therefore, during the sliding process of the adjustment block 53b along the Z-axis direction, the adjustment block 53b generates a force on the first bracket 51b to make the first bracket 51b move in the direction away from/close to the second bracket 52b in the Y-axis direction, thereby driving the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the Y-axis direction through the first bracket 51b to adjust the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the Y-axis direction, and then guiding and positioning the corresponding spindle 20b through the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and facilitating the reduction of the absolute coordinate error of the machining center of the adjacent spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, or making the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
需要说明的是,调节块53b的运动方向和第一支架51b的运动方向不同,以便于减小调节组件50b在Z轴方向上的尺寸,利于实现调节组件50b的小型化设计。It should be noted that the movement direction of the adjustment block 53b is different from the movement direction of the first bracket 51b, so as to reduce the size of the adjustment component 50b in the Z-axis direction and facilitate the miniaturization design of the adjustment component 50b.
如图30所示,根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100b,包括:固定支架10b、主轴20b、驱动结构30b、气浮套组件40b和调节组件50b。As shown in FIG. 30 , the circuit board processing equipment 100 b according to the embodiment of the present application includes: a fixed bracket 10 b , a main shaft 20 b , a driving structure 30 b , an air floating sleeve assembly 40 b and an adjustment assembly 50 b .
具体地,驱动结构30b和主轴20b均安装于固定支架10b,且主轴20b相对于固定支架10b可活动,驱动结构30b与主轴20b相连且用于驱动主轴20b相对于固定支架10b沿第一方向运动,气浮套组件40b安装于固定支架10b,且主轴20b沿第一方向浮动穿设于气浮套组件40b,调节组件50b为上述任一项实施例的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件50b,调节组件50b安装于固定支架10b且与气浮套组件40b相连,调节组件50b适于驱动气浮套组件40b相对于固定支架10b沿第二方向运动,第一方向与第二方向垂直。Specifically, the driving structure 30b and the main shaft 20b are both installed on the fixed bracket 10b, and the main shaft 20b is movable relative to the fixed bracket 10b. The driving structure 30b is connected to the main shaft 20b and is used to drive the main shaft 20b to move along a first direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b. The air flotation sleeve assembly 40b is installed on the fixed bracket 10b, and the main shaft 20b floats along the first direction and penetrates the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b. The adjustment assembly 50b is an adjustment assembly 50b for circuit board processing equipment of any of the above-mentioned embodiments. The adjustment assembly 50b is installed on the fixed bracket 10b and is connected to the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b. The adjustment assembly 50b is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b to move along a second direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
由此,能够在第二方向上调整气浮套组件40b的位置,从而通过气浮套组件40b带动主轴20b沿第二方向运动,进而调整主轴20b在第二方向上的加工中心,以减少相邻的主轴20b在第二方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差,利于提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度。Thus, the position of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b can be adjusted in the second direction, thereby driving the spindle 20b to move along the second direction through the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and then adjusting the machining center of the spindle 20b in the second direction to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
例如,如图30-图32所示,电路板加工设备100b包括固定支架10b、主轴20b、驱动结构30b、气浮套组件40b和调节组件50b。For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 32 , the circuit board processing equipment 100 b includes a fixed bracket 10 b , a spindle 20 b , a driving structure 30 b , an air floating sleeve assembly 40 b and an adjustment assembly 50 b .
如图30所示,固定支架10b包括横梁11b和Z轴底板12b,Z轴底板12b通过导轨13b与横梁11b可滑动地相连,主轴20b、驱动结构30b、气浮套组件40b等均安装于Z轴底板12b上,驱动结构30b可构造为驱动电机31b,且驱动电机31b可通过导轨滑块32b与Z轴底板滑动配合,主轴20b沿第一方向浮动穿设于气浮套组件40b,这样,气浮套组件40b可用于对主轴20b导向定位,且在主轴20b的下端设有用于加工电路板的加工端子。As shown in Figure 30, the fixed bracket 10b includes a crossbeam 11b and a Z-axis base plate 12b. The Z-axis base plate 12b is slidably connected to the crossbeam 11b through a guide rail 13b. The main shaft 20b, the driving structure 30b, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b, etc. are all installed on the Z-axis base plate 12b. The driving structure 30b can be constructed as a driving motor 31b, and the driving motor 31b can be slidably matched with the Z-axis base plate through a guide rail slider 32b. The main shaft 20b floats along a first direction and is penetrated by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b. In this way, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be used to guide and position the main shaft 20b, and a processing terminal for processing the circuit board is provided at the lower end of the main shaft 20b.
其中,如图31所示,气浮套组件40b包括:气浮套支撑座41b、气浮套法兰42b、气浮套43b。As shown in FIG. 31 , the air floating sleeve assembly 40b includes: an air floating sleeve support seat 41b, an air floating sleeve flange 42b, and an air floating sleeve 43b.
调节组件50b固定于Z轴底板12b上,以增强调节组件50b的结构稳定性,且在第二方向上,调节组件50b位于Z轴底板12b和气浮套支撑座41b之间,气浮套法兰42b固定于气浮套支撑座41b上,气浮套43b安装于气浮套法兰42b,以便于调节组件50b能够在第二方向上实现对气浮套组件40b的位置的调整。The adjustment component 50b is fixed on the Z-axis base plate 12b to enhance the structural stability of the adjustment component 50b, and in the second direction, the adjustment component 50b is located between the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, the air floating sleeve flange 42b is fixed on the air floating sleeve support seat 41b, and the air floating sleeve 43b is installed on the air floating sleeve flange 42b, so that the adjustment component 50b can adjust the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b in the second direction.
进一步地,如图31所示,Z轴底板12b相对于横梁11b的滑动方向可为X轴方向,且如图32所示,驱动结构30b可驱动主轴20b相对于Z轴底板12b沿第一方向做上、下给运动,以便于电路板的取放以及加工,调节组件50b可驱动气浮套组件40b沿第二方向运动,其中,第一方向可为Z轴方向,第二方向可为Y轴方向,第一方向与第二方向垂直。Further, as shown in Figure 31, the sliding direction of the Z-axis base plate 12b relative to the cross beam 11b can be the X-axis direction, and as shown in Figure 32, the driving structure 30b can drive the main shaft 20b to move up and down along the first direction relative to the Z-axis base plate 12b to facilitate the placement and processing of circuit boards, and the adjustment component 50b can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the second direction, wherein the first direction can be the Z-axis direction, the second direction can be the Y-axis direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
这样,在实际加工时,可通过驱动结构30b驱动主轴20b向上运动,以便于将电路板放置于加工端子下方的操作台上,接着在X轴方向上,Z轴底板12b可相对于横梁11b滑动,以在X轴方向上调整主轴20b的加工中心,且调节组件50b可驱动气浮套组件40b相对于固定支架10b沿Y轴方向运动,然后调整位置后的气浮套组件40b能够重新对主轴20b进行定位,以在Y轴方向上调整主轴20b的加工中心,最后,驱动结构30b驱动主轴20b向下运动,以通过加工端子实现对电路板的钻、锣加工。In this way, during actual processing, the driving structure 30b can be used to drive the spindle 20b to move upward so that the circuit board can be placed on the operating table below the processing terminal. Then, in the X-axis direction, the Z-axis base plate 12b can slide relative to the crossbeam 11b to adjust the processing center of the spindle 20b in the X-axis direction, and the adjustment component 50b can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the Y-axis direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b. Then, the air floating sleeve component 40b after adjusting the position can reposition the spindle 20b to adjust the processing center of the spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction. Finally, the driving structure 30b drives the spindle 20b to move downward to realize drilling and drilling processing of the circuit board through the processing terminal.
由此,可分别在X轴方向和Y轴方向上调整主轴20b的加工中心,利于提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度。Therefore, the machining center of the spindle 20b can be adjusted in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction respectively, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
需要说明的是,相关技术中,一块PCB整板上通常排布有多组阵列的或镜像的线路图,单一主轴20b的加工效率较低,因此,本申请的电路板加工设备100b上可设置有至少两个相邻的主轴20b,且两个主轴20b可同时对电路板进行加工,以提高加工效率,其中,两个主轴20b中的至少一个主轴20b通过气浮套组件40b导向定位,且该气浮套组件40b可通过调节组件50b实现其在Y轴方向上的位置的调节。It should be noted that in the related art, a whole PCB board is usually arranged with multiple groups of arrayed or mirrored circuit diagrams, and the processing efficiency of a single spindle 20b is low. Therefore, the circuit board processing equipment 100b of the present application may be provided with at least two adjacent spindles 20b, and the two spindles 20b can process the circuit board at the same time to improve the processing efficiency, wherein at least one of the two spindles 20b is guided and positioned by an air floating sleeve assembly 40b, and the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can adjust its position in the Y-axis direction through the adjustment assembly 50b.
这样,在通过至少两个主轴20b同时加工一块电路板时,可通过调节组件50b驱动气浮套组件40b在Y轴方向运动,然后通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,且便于减小相邻的主轴20b在Y轴方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工效率。In this way, when a circuit board is processed simultaneously by at least two spindles 20b, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be driven to move in the Y-axis direction by the adjustment assembly 50b, and then the corresponding spindle 20b is guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b in the Y-axis direction, and it is convenient to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the Y-axis direction, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
由此,使得电路板加工设备100b可通过至少两个主轴20b同时加工一块电路板,以提高加工效率,且通过调节组件50b在Y轴方向上调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,利于提高加工精度。Thus, the circuit board processing equipment 100b can process a circuit board simultaneously through at least two spindles 20b to improve processing efficiency, and the processing center of the corresponding spindle 20b can be adjusted in the Y-axis direction by adjusting the component 50b, which is beneficial to improve processing accuracy.
当然,上述的第一方向、第二方向的限定以及上述的电路板仅用于举例说明,即电路板也可为其它符合要求的待加工工件,在此不做限定。Of course, the above-mentioned limitations of the first direction and the second direction and the above-mentioned circuit board are only used for illustration, that is, the circuit board may also be other workpieces to be processed that meet the requirements, and are not limited here.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100b,其驱动组件50可驱动气浮套组件40b相对于固定支架10b沿第二方向运动,这样,能够在第二方向上调整气浮套组件40b的位置,从而通过气浮套组件40b带动主轴20b沿第二方向运动,进而调整主轴20b在第二方向上的加工中心,以减少相邻的主轴20b在第二方向上的加工中心的绝对坐标的误差,利于提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度。According to the circuit board processing equipment 100b of the embodiment of the present application, its driving component 50 can drive the air floating sleeve component 40b to move along the second direction relative to the fixed bracket 10b, so that the position of the air floating sleeve component 40b can be adjusted in the second direction, thereby driving the spindle 20b to move along the second direction through the air floating sleeve component 40b, and then adjusting the machining center of the spindle 20b in the second direction, so as to reduce the error of the absolute coordinates of the machining centers of adjacent spindles 20b in the second direction, which is beneficial to improving the machining accuracy of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
在一些实施例中,如图32所示,调节组件50b安装于Z轴底板12b和气浮套组件40b之间,且调节组件50b的至少部分可集成于Z轴底板12b,以便于通过Z轴底板12b和气浮套组件40b对调节组件50b起到遮挡的作用,且便于减小调节组件50b的设置对电路板加工设备100b的整体尺寸的影响,利于实现电路板加工设备100b的小型化设计。In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 32, the adjustment component 50b is installed between the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b, and at least a portion of the adjustment component 50b can be integrated into the Z-axis base plate 12b, so that the Z-axis base plate 12b and the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b can be used to shield the adjustment component 50b, and it is convenient to reduce the impact of the setting of the adjustment component 50b on the overall size of the circuit board processing equipment 100b, which is conducive to the miniaturization design of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
在一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100b还包括:影像检测工装。In some embodiments, the circuit board processing equipment 100b further includes: an image detection tool.
影像检测工装可与调节组件50b配合使用,且影像检测工装可实时检测主轴20b的中心坐标。The image detection tool can be used in conjunction with the adjustment component 50b, and the image detection tool can detect the center coordinates of the main shaft 20b in real time.
由此,在实际使用时,在通过调节组件50b调整气浮套组件40b在Y轴上的坐标时,可通过影像检测工装实时检测主轴20b的中心坐标,以确保调节到位,避免出现调节过渡等调节失误的问题,利于提高调节精度。Therefore, in actual use, when adjusting the coordinate of the air flotation sleeve assembly 40b on the Y-axis through the adjustment assembly 50b, the center coordinate of the main shaft 20b can be detected in real time by the image detection tooling to ensure that the adjustment is in place, avoid adjustment errors such as adjustment transition, and help improve the adjustment accuracy.
本申请还提出了一种用于电路板加工设备的控制方法。The present application also proposes a control method for circuit board processing equipment.
根据本申请实施例的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法,控制方法适用于上述实施例的电路板加工设备100b,电路板加工设备100b包括气浮套组件40b和调节组件50b,调节组件50b包括驱动件54b和调节块53b,且如图38所示,控制方法包括:According to the control method for circuit board processing equipment in the embodiment of the present application, the control method is applicable to the circuit board processing equipment 100b in the above embodiment, the circuit board processing equipment 100b includes an air floating sleeve assembly 40b and an adjustment assembly 50b, the adjustment assembly 50b includes a driving member 54b and an adjustment block 53b, and as shown in FIG38, the control method includes:
S10:检测待加工电路板的实际加工中心;S10: Detecting the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed;
S20:获取实际加工中心在第二方向上的位置坐标;S20: Obtaining the position coordinates of the actual machining center in the second direction;
S30:控制驱动件54b驱动调节块53b沿第一方向运动,且调节块53b在沿第一方向运动过程中带动气浮套组件40b沿第二方向相对于实际加工中心对应的位置运动,第一方向与第二方向垂直。S30: Control the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to move along the first direction, and the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move along the second direction relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center during the movement along the first direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
例如,待加工电路板可为电路板,且可通过影像检测工装检测待加工电路板的实际加工中心,以获取实际加工中心在第二方向上的位置坐标,以便于确定驱动件54b驱动调节块53b带动气浮套组件40b的运动距离,以保证调节精度。For example, the circuit board to be processed may be a circuit board, and the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed may be detected by an image detection tool to obtain the position coordinates of the actual processing center in the second direction, so as to determine the movement distance of the driving member 54b driving the adjustment block 53b to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to ensure the adjustment accuracy.
然后通过驱动件54b在第一方向上的运动,能够驱动调节块53b在第二方向上带动气浮套组件40b运动,从而便于改变气浮套组件40b在第二方向上的位置,进而使气浮套组件40b沿第二方向相对于实际加工中心对应的位置运动,以减小主轴20b的加工中心与待加工电路板的实际加工中心之间的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度和加工效率。Then, by the movement of the driving member 54b in the first direction, the adjusting block 53b can be driven to drive the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction, thereby facilitating the change of the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the second direction, and then the air floating sleeve assembly 40b moves along the second direction relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center, so as to reduce the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and machining efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
由此,可使得气浮套组件40b能够与待加工电路板的实际加工中心对齐,从而通过该气浮套组件40b对相对应的主轴20b导向定位,以调整对应的主轴20b的加工中心,以减小该主轴20b的加工中心与待加工电路板的实际加工中心之间的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度和加工效率。Thus, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be aligned with the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, so that the corresponding spindle 20b can be guided and positioned by the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to adjust the machining center of the corresponding spindle 20b, so as to reduce the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or make the machining error within the allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
根据本申请实施例的控制方法,可使得气浮套组件40b能够与待加工电路板的实际加工中心对齐,从而减小主轴20b的加工中心与待加工电路板的实际加工中心之间的绝对坐标的误差、或使加工误差在允许的范围内,进而提高电路板加工设备100b的加工精度和加工效率。According to the control method of the embodiment of the present application, the air floating sleeve assembly 40b can be aligned with the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, thereby reducing the absolute coordinate error between the machining center of the spindle 20b and the actual machining center of the circuit board to be processed, or making the machining error within an allowable range, thereby improving the machining accuracy and efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100b.
在一些实施例中,如图39所示,S30:控制驱动件54b驱动调节块53b运动,以使调节块53b带动气浮套组件40b相对于实际加工中心对应的位置运动包括:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 39 , S30: controlling the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to move so that the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move relative to the position corresponding to the actual machining center includes:
S31:控制驱动件54b驱动调节块53b上升,以使调节块53b带动气浮套组件40b朝远离于实际加工中心对应的位置运动。S31: Control the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to rise, so that the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move toward a position away from the position corresponding to the actual machining center.
S32:控制驱动件54b驱动调节块53b下降,以使调节块53b带动气浮套组件40b朝靠近于实际加工中心对应的位置运动。S32: Control the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to descend, so that the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move toward a position close to the position corresponding to the actual machining center.
也就是说,在调节块53b沿第一方向向上滑动时,调节块53b会带动气浮套组件40b在第二方向上朝向远离实际加工中心的方向运动。例如当调节块53b沿第一方向向上滑动时,调节块53b会带动气浮套组件40b在第二方向上朝向靠近Z轴底板12b的方向运动,以实现气浮套组件40b的自动复位。That is, when the adjusting block 53b slides upward along the first direction, the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction away from the actual machining center. For example, when the adjusting block 53b slides upward along the first direction, the adjusting block 53b drives the air floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the Z-axis bottom plate 12b, so as to realize the automatic reset of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b.
在驱动件54b调节块53b沿第一方向向下滑动时,调节块53b会带动气浮套组件40b在第二方向上朝向靠近实际加工中心的方向运动。例如当调节块53b沿第一方向向下滑动时,调节块53b会带动气浮套组件40b在第二方向上朝向靠近实际加工中心对应的位置运动,以实现气浮套组件40b与实际加工中心的对齐,进而便于降低加工误差。When the adjusting block 53b of the driving member 54b slides downward along the first direction, the adjusting block 53b drives the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the direction close to the actual machining center. For example, when the adjusting block 53b slides downward along the first direction, the adjusting block 53b drives the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b to move in the second direction toward the position corresponding to the actual machining center, so as to achieve the alignment of the air-floating sleeve assembly 40b with the actual machining center, thereby facilitating the reduction of machining errors.
由此,可通过控制驱动件54b驱动调节块53b沿第一方向的上升或下降对气浮套组件40b在第二方向上的位置实现调节,以便于降低调节难度。Therefore, the position of the air floating sleeve assembly 40b in the second direction can be adjusted by controlling the driving member 54b to drive the adjusting block 53b to rise or fall in the first direction, so as to reduce the difficulty of adjustment.
在本说明书的描述中,参考术语“一个实施例”、“一些实施例”、“示例”、“具体示例”、或“一些示例”等的描述意指结合该实施例或示例描述的具体特征、结构、材料或者特点包含于本申请的至少一个实施例或示例中。在本说明书中,对上述术语的示意性表述不一定指的是相同的实施例或示例。而且,描述的具体特征、结构、材料或者特点可以在任何的一个或多个实施例或示例中以合适的方式结合。In the description of this specification, the description with reference to the terms "one embodiment", "some embodiments", "example", "specific example", or "some examples" means that the specific features, structures, materials or characteristics described in conjunction with the embodiment or example are included in at least one embodiment or example of the present application. In this specification, the schematic representation of the above terms does not necessarily refer to the same embodiment or example. Moreover, the specific features, structures, materials or characteristics described may be combined in any one or more embodiments or examples in a suitable manner.
下面参考附图描述根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100c。The following describes a circuit board processing device 100 c according to an embodiment of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings.
如图40-图43所示,根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100c包括:床身10、加工平台20c和多个加工部30c,床身10具有第一横梁11c,加工平台20c设于床身10上表面,加工平台20c适于支撑被加工件,被加工件可以为电路板,多个加工部30c均设于第一横梁11c且位于加工平台20c上方,且多个加工部30c沿床身10的第一方向X排布,至少一个加工部30c包括加工组件31c、安装架32c和调节组件33c,加工组件31c安装于安装架32c,安装架32c可活动地安装于床身10,需要说明的是,安装架32c可以直接可活动地安装于床身10,或者安装架32c可以通过其他零部件间接可活动地安装于床身10。调节组件33c与安装架32c传动连接,调节组件32用于驱动安装架31和加工组件31c整体沿床身1的第二方向Y移动,第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X。As shown in Figures 40-43, the circuit board processing equipment 100c according to the embodiment of the present application includes: a bed 10, a processing platform 20c and a plurality of processing parts 30c, the bed 10 has a first beam 11c, the processing platform 20c is arranged on the upper surface of the bed 10, the processing platform 20c is suitable for supporting the workpiece to be processed, and the workpiece to be processed can be a circuit board, the plurality of processing parts 30c are all arranged on the first beam 11c and located above the processing platform 20c, and the plurality of processing parts 30c are arranged along the first direction X of the bed 10, at least one processing part 30c includes a processing assembly 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjustment assembly 33c, the processing assembly 31c is installed on the mounting frame 32c, and the mounting frame 32c is movably installed on the bed 10. It should be noted that the mounting frame 32c can be directly and movably installed on the bed 10, or the mounting frame 32c can be indirectly and movably installed on the bed 10 through other components. The adjusting assembly 33c is in driving connection with the mounting frame 32c. The adjusting assembly 32c is used to drive the mounting frame 31 and the processing assembly 31c to move as a whole along the second direction Y of the bed 1. The second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
具体地,作为一个具体示例,参考图40所示,床身10的上表面设有加工平台20c,加工平台20c用于放置电路板等被加工件,第一横梁11c上依次排布12个加工部30c,其中,每2个加工部30c为一组,共划分为6组加工部30c,每组加工部30c可以用于加工同一块电路板待加工板。Specifically, as a specific example, referring to Figure 40, a processing platform 20c is provided on the upper surface of the bed 10, and the processing platform 20c is used to place the processed parts such as circuit boards. Twelve processing parts 30c are arranged in sequence on the first beam 11c, wherein every two processing parts 30c form a group, which are divided into 6 groups of processing parts 30c in total, and each group of processing parts 30c can be used to process the same circuit board to be processed.
进一步地,如图41所示,至少一个加工部30c包括加工组件31c、安装架32c和调节组件33c,加工组件31c安装于安装架32c,安装架32c可活动地安装于床身10,调节组件33c用于驱动安装架32c沿床身10第二方向Y移动,因此加工组件31c在调节组件33c的驱动下跟随安装架32c沿床身10第二方向Y移动,从而实现了加工组件31c沿床身10的第二方向Y的位置调整,继续参考图40所示,在每组中的相邻两个加工部30c用于加工同一块电路板待加工板时,需要保证相邻两个加工部30c中加工组件31c坐标的一致性,相邻两个加工部30c沿车身的第一方向X依次排布,通过调节相邻两个加工部30c各自的调节组件33c即可实现加工组件31c在第二方向Y的一致性调节,保证了相邻两个加工组件31c坐标的一致性,对于其它各组加工部30c可以采用类似的调节策略,从而可以减小不同加工组件31c的中心坐标误差,降低了电路板加工设备100c的加工误差,提高了加工精度。Further, as shown in FIG41, at least one processing section 30c includes a processing assembly 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjusting assembly 33c, the processing assembly 31c is mounted on the mounting frame 32c, the mounting frame 32c is movably mounted on the bed 10, and the adjusting assembly 33c is used to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10, so that the processing assembly 31c follows the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10 under the drive of the adjusting assembly 33c, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the second direction Y of the bed 10. Continuing to refer to FIG40, two adjacent processing sections 30c in each group are used When processing the same circuit board to be processed, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the coordinates of the processing components 31c in the two adjacent processing parts 30c. The two adjacent processing parts 30c are arranged in sequence along the first direction X of the vehicle body. The consistency adjustment of the processing components 31c in the second direction Y can be achieved by adjusting the adjustment components 33c of the two adjacent processing parts 30c, thereby ensuring the consistency of the coordinates of the two adjacent processing components 31c. Similar adjustment strategies can be adopted for other groups of processing parts 30c, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing components 31c, reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, and improving the processing accuracy.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备100c,至少一个加工部30c包括加工组件31c、安装架32c和调节组件33c,加工组件31c安装于安装架32c,安装架32c可活动地安装于床身10,调节组件33c可以用于驱动加工组件31c沿床身10第二方向Y移动,实现了加工组件31c沿床身10第二方向Y的位置调节,通过对加工组件31c的位置调节能够减小不同加工组件31c的中心坐标误差,有利于降低电路板加工设备100c的加工误差,提高加工精度。According to the circuit board processing equipment 100c of the embodiment of the present application, at least one processing part 30c includes a processing component 31c, a mounting frame 32c and an adjustment component 33c. The processing component 31c is installed on the mounting frame 32c, and the mounting frame 32c can be movably installed on the bed 10. The adjustment component 33c can be used to drive the processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y of the bed 10, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component 31c along the second direction Y of the bed 10. By adjusting the position of the processing component 31c, the center coordinate error of different processing components 31c can be reduced, which is beneficial to reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100c and improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100c具有至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工部30c。In some embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment 100c has at least one processing station, and each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 30c.
具体地,电路板加工设备100c至少设置一个加工工位,一个加工工位可以加工一张电路板,加工工位的数量根据实际需要设置,每个加工工位对应设置至少两个相邻的加工部30c,每个加工工位设置的加工部30c的数量同样根据实际需要设置,作为一个具体示例,如图40所示,电路板加工设备100c设置6个加工工位,每个加工工位设置两个加工部30c,每个加工工位放置一张电路板,加工工位设置的两个加工部30c可以同时对该电路板进行加工,如此设置,实现了多个加工部30c同时对一块电路板进行加工,提高了电路板加工设备100c的加工效率和稼动率,可以提高电路板加工设备100c单位时间单位面积的产出效率,尤其适用于加工有对称、复制等加工需求的电路板,有利于提高产品竞争力。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment 100c is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board. The number of processing stations is set according to actual needs. Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two adjacent processing parts 30c, and the number of processing parts 30c provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs. As a specific example, as shown in Figure 40, the circuit board processing equipment 100c is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 30c. A circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 30c provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time. With such a setting, multiple processing parts 30c can process one circuit board at the same time, thereby improving the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment 100c per unit time and unit area. It is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, which is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图40所示,每个加工部30c均可活动地设于第一横梁11c,且每个加工部30c可沿第一方向X相对第一横梁11c运动。也就是说,每个加工部30c均安装于床身10的第一横梁11c上,且沿第一方向X依次间隔分布,每个加工部30c可以沿着第一横梁11c在第一方向X上移动,从而实现了加工部30c在第一方向X上位置的灵活调节,且第一横梁11c可以对加工部30c的移动起到一定的支撑导向作用,使得加工部30c的调节更加平稳。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG40 , each processing portion 30c can be movably disposed on the first crossbeam 11c, and each processing portion 30c can move relative to the first crossbeam 11c along the first direction X. That is, each processing portion 30c is mounted on the first crossbeam 11c of the bed 10 , and is sequentially spaced and distributed along the first direction X, and each processing portion 30c can move along the first crossbeam 11c in the first direction X, thereby realizing flexible adjustment of the position of the processing portion 30c in the first direction X, and the first crossbeam 11c can play a certain supporting and guiding role in the movement of the processing portion 30c, so that the adjustment of the processing portion 30c is more stable.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电路板加工设备100c包括控制系统,控制系统被构造为用于控制调节组件33c驱动相应加工组件31c沿第二方向Y上移动,还用于控制相应加工部30c沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment 100c includes a control system, which is configured to control the adjustment component 33c to drive the corresponding processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y, and also to control the corresponding processing part 30c to move along the first direction X.
具体地,电路板加工设备100c还包括控制系统,控制系统可以控制调节组件33c驱动相应加工组件31c沿第二方向Y上移动,从而可以保证不同加工组件31c中心坐标的一致性,减少不同加工组件31c的中心坐标误差,可以降低电路板加工设备100c的加工误差,提高加工精度;控制系统还可以控制相应加工部30c沿第一方向X移动,举例来说,假设一个加工工位具有两个加工部30c,控制系统可以分别控制加工部30c沿第一方向X移动,以调节相邻两个加工部30c沿第一方向X的间隔距离,使得两个加工部30c能够在同一加工工位内,使其能够共同加工一块电路板。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment 100c also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 33c to drive the corresponding processing component 31c to move along the second direction Y, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different processing components 31c, reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing components 31c, and reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, thereby improving the processing accuracy; the control system can also control the corresponding processing part 30c to move along the first direction X. For example, assuming that a processing station has two processing parts 30c, the control system can control the processing parts 30c to move along the first direction X respectively to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 30c along the first direction X, so that the two processing parts 30c can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图40-图42所示,调节组件33c可以包括:第一驱动件331c和第一滑块332c,第一滑块332c与安装架32c固定连接且可滑动地设于第一横梁11c,需要说明的是,第一滑块332c可以直接可滑动地安装于第一横梁11c,或者第一滑块332c可以通过其他零部件间接可滑动地安装于第一横梁11c。第一驱动件331c用于驱动第一滑块332c带动安装架32c沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIGS. 40-42 , the adjustment assembly 33c may include: a first driving member 331c and a first slider 332c, the first slider 332c is fixedly connected to the mounting frame 32c and slidably disposed on the first beam 11c, it should be noted that the first slider 332c may be directly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c, or the first slider 332c may be indirectly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c through other components. The first driving member 331c is used to drive the first slider 332c to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the second direction Y.
具体地,如图41所示,第一滑块332c间接可滑动地安装于第一横梁11c,第一驱动件331c用于驱动第一滑块332c沿第二方向Y移动,可选的,第一驱动件331c可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,第一滑块332c固设有螺母,第一驱动件331c可以通过丝杠与第一滑块332c的螺母进行传动连接,当第一驱动件331c驱动丝杠转动时,丝杠带动螺母驱动第一滑块332c沿第二方向Y移动时,可以保证与其固定连接的安装架32c一起沿第二方向Y平稳移动,由此,通过第一驱动件331c和第一滑块332c的配合使用,能够保证加工组件31c位置调节的平稳性,避免了加工组件31c沿第二方向Y移动时出现方向偏差。Specifically, as shown in Figure 41, the first slider 332c is indirectly slidably mounted on the first beam 11c, and the first driving member 331c is used to drive the first slider 332c to move along the second direction Y. Optionally, the first driving member 331c can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc. The first slider 332c is fixed with a nut, and the first driving member 331c can be connected to the nut of the first slider 332c through a screw. When the first driving member 331c drives the screw to rotate, the screw drives the nut to drive the first slider 332c to move along the second direction Y, which can ensure that the mounting frame 32c fixedly connected thereto moves smoothly along the second direction Y. Therefore, through the coordinated use of the first driving member 331c and the first slider 332c, the stability of the position adjustment of the processing component 31c can be guaranteed, and the direction deviation of the processing component 31c when it moves along the second direction Y can be avoided.
在本申请的一些实施例中,参考图41并结合图40所示,每个加工部30c还可以包括:第二驱动件34c,第二驱动件34c与安装架32c传动连接,第二驱动件34c用于驱动安装架32c沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments of the present application, referring to FIG. 41 and in combination with FIG. 40 , each processing portion 30c may further include: a second driving member 34c, the second driving member 34c is transmission-connected to the mounting frame 32c, and the second driving member 34c is used to drive the mounting frame 32c to move along the first direction X.
具体地,第二驱动件34c可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,进一步地,第二驱动件34c与安装架32c可以通过齿轮、齿条进行传动连接,此处不作具体限制,只要能够实现第二驱动件34c与安装架32c之间的传动即可,举例来说,安装架32c安装有与齿轮配合连接的齿条,第二驱动件34c固定安装于第一横梁11c,需要说明的是,第二驱动件34c可以直接安装于第一横梁11c,或者第二驱动件34c可以通过其他零部件间接安装于第一横梁11c。第二驱动件34c用于驱动齿轮转动,齿轮转动带动齿条沿第一方向X移动,齿条带动安装架32c沿第一方向X的移动,从而实现了加工组件31c沿第一方向X的位置调节,由此,通过设置第二驱动件34c实现了加工组件31c沿第一方向X的位置调节,便于对被加工件进行加工。Specifically, the second driving member 34c can be, but is not limited to, a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc. Further, the second driving member 34c and the mounting frame 32c can be connected by transmission through a gear or a rack. No specific limitation is made here, as long as the transmission between the second driving member 34c and the mounting frame 32c can be realized. For example, the mounting frame 32c is equipped with a rack connected with the gear, and the second driving member 34c is fixedly installed on the first beam 11c. It should be noted that the second driving member 34c can be directly installed on the first beam 11c, or the second driving member 34c can be indirectly installed on the first beam 11c through other parts. The second driving member 34c is used to drive the gear to rotate, the gear rotation drives the rack to move along the first direction X, and the rack drives the mounting frame 32c to move along the first direction X, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the first direction X. Therefore, by setting the second driving member 34c, the position adjustment of the processing assembly 31c along the first direction X is realized, which is convenient for processing the workpiece.
在本申请的一些实施例中,参考图41并结合图40所示,上述的电路板加工设备100c还可以包括第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c,第一导向部40c设于第一横梁11c,需要说明的是,第一导向部40c可以直接安装于第一横梁11c,或者第一导向部40c可以通过其他零部件间接安装于第一横梁11c。第一滑块332c可滑动地设于第二导向部50c,通过第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c导向配合使得安装架32c沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments of the present application, referring to FIG. 41 and in combination with FIG. 40, the circuit board processing equipment 100c may further include a first guide portion 40c and a second guide portion 50c. The first guide portion 40c is disposed on the first beam 11c. It should be noted that the first guide portion 40c may be directly mounted on the first beam 11c, or the first guide portion 40c may be indirectly mounted on the first beam 11c through other components. The first slider 332c may be slidably disposed on the second guide portion 50c, and the mounting frame 32c may be moved along the first direction X through the guiding cooperation of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c.
具体地,第一导向部40c固定安装于第一横梁11c,第二导向部50c与第一导向部40c配合安装,当第二驱动件34c工作时,安装架32c可以在第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c的导向作用下沿第一方向X的移动,通过第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c的配合使用,能够保证安装架32c沿第一方向X平稳移动,避免移动过程中出现方向偏移,提高了加工组件31c在第一方向X移动的平稳性,且第一滑块332c可滑动的设于第二导向部50c,从而实现了加工组件31c在第二导向部50c上沿第二方向Y移动。由此,通过第一导向部40c、第二导向部50c和第一滑块332c的组合使用,可以同时实现加工组件31c在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的位置调整,能够降低多个加工部30c在第一方向X和第二方向Y上的中心坐标偏差,从而降低电路板加工设备100c的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, the first guide portion 40c is fixedly mounted on the first crossbeam 11c, and the second guide portion 50c is installed in cooperation with the first guide portion 40c. When the second driving member 34c is working, the mounting frame 32c can move along the first direction X under the guiding action of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c. Through the coordinated use of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c, it is possible to ensure that the mounting frame 32c moves smoothly along the first direction X, avoid directional deviation during the movement, and improve the stability of the movement of the processing assembly 31c in the first direction X. The first slider 332c is slidably arranged on the second guide portion 50c, thereby realizing the movement of the processing assembly 31c along the second direction Y on the second guide portion 50c. Therefore, by using the first guide portion 40c, the second guide portion 50c and the first slider 332c in combination, the position adjustment of the processing component 31c in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be achieved simultaneously, and the center coordinate deviation of the multiple processing parts 30c in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment 100c, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c中的一个为导向块,第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c中的另一个为导轨,导向块可滑动地设于导轨,导轨沿第一方向X延伸。In some embodiments of the present application, one of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c is a guide block, and the other of the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c is a guide rail. The guide block is slidably disposed on the guide rail, and the guide rail extends along the first direction X.
具体地,第一导向部40c和第二导向部50c对应设置,若第一导向部40c设置为导向块,则第二导向部50c设置为导轨,若第一导向部40c设置为导轨,则第二导向部50c设置为导向块,导向块可以沿导轨在第一方向X上滑动。由此,通过导向块和导轨的配合使用可以实现加工组件31c在第一方向X上的平稳移动,而且导向块和导轨结构简单,便于装配。Specifically, the first guide portion 40c and the second guide portion 50c are correspondingly arranged. If the first guide portion 40c is arranged as a guide block, the second guide portion 50c is arranged as a guide rail. If the first guide portion 40c is arranged as a guide rail, the second guide portion 50c is arranged as a guide block, and the guide block can slide along the guide rail in the first direction X. Therefore, the smooth movement of the processing assembly 31c in the first direction X can be achieved by the coordinated use of the guide block and the guide rail, and the guide block and the guide rail have simple structures and are easy to assemble.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图43所示,第一滑块332c与第二导向部50c相对的端面具有第一导向结构60c,第二导向部50c与第一滑块332c相对的端面具有第二导向结构70c,第一导向结构60c和第二导向结构70c导向配合以使安装架32c沿第二方向Y移动。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figure 43, the end surface of the first slider 332c opposite to the second guide portion 50c has a first guide structure 60c, and the end surface of the second guide portion 50c opposite to the first slider 332c has a second guide structure 70c, and the first guide structure 60c and the second guide structure 70c cooperate to guide and move the mounting frame 32c along the second direction Y.
具体地,第一滑块332c与第二导向部50c形成第一导向结构60c,第二导向部50c与第一滑块332c之间设有第二导向结构70c,第二导向结构70c可以在第一导向结构60c中沿第二方向Y移动,可选的,相互配合的第一导向结构60c和第二导向结构70c可以设置为交叉滚子轴承,如此设置,交叉滚子轴承能够承受较大的轴向力和径向力,保证加工组件31c沿第二方向Y的移动更加平稳,并且空间布置简单,尤其适用于短距离小范围移动。Specifically, the first slider 332c and the second guide portion 50c form a first guide structure 60c, and a second guide structure 70c is provided between the second guide portion 50c and the first slider 332c. The second guide structure 70c can move along the second direction Y in the first guide structure 60c. Optionally, the first guide structure 60c and the second guide structure 70c that cooperate with each other can be set as a cross roller bearing. With such a setting, the cross roller bearing can withstand larger axial force and radial force, ensuring that the movement of the processing component 31c along the second direction Y is smoother, and the spatial layout is simple, which is particularly suitable for short-distance and small-range movement.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图41-图43所示,每个加工部30c还可以包括:第三驱动件35c,安装架32c包括第二横梁321c和移动架322c,第二横梁321c与第一滑块332c固定连接,移动架322c可移动地设于第二横梁321c,加工组件31c的主轴设于移动架322c,第三驱动件35c与移动架322c连接,第三驱动件35c用于驱动移动架322c沿床身10的第三方向Z相对第二横梁321c移动,第一方向X、第二方向Y和第三方向Z相互垂直。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figures 41-43, each processing part 30c may also include: a third driving member 35c, the mounting frame 32c includes a second beam 321c and a movable frame 322c, the second beam 321c is fixedly connected to the first slider 332c, the movable frame 322c is movably disposed on the second beam 321c, the spindle of the processing assembly 31c is disposed on the movable frame 322c, the third driving member 35c is connected to the movable frame 322c, and the third driving member 35c is used to drive the movable frame 322c to move relative to the second beam 321c along the third direction Z of the bed 10, and the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,如图42所示,第二横梁321c固设于第一滑块332c的上方,第一驱动件331c用驱动第一滑块332c时带动第二横梁321c沿第二方向Y移动,移动架322c相对于第二横梁321c仅可以沿床身10的第三方向Z移动,且加工组件31c的主轴设于移动架322c上,如此设置通过第一驱动件331c驱动第一滑块332c即可实现第二横梁321c在第二方向Y上的移动,进而实现了加工组件31c的主轴在第一方向X上的位置调节;可选的,第三驱动件35c可以是但不限于直流电动机、交流异步电动机、永磁同步电动机、开关磁阻电动机等,第三驱动件35c与移动架322c连接,并用于驱动移动架322c沿床身10的第三方向Z相对于第二横梁321c移动,由此,通过驱动第三驱动件35c可以实现加工组件31c在第三方向Z上的位置调整,便于电路板加工设备100c运行过程中加工组件31c的定位加工。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 , the second beam 321c is fixedly arranged above the first slider 332c, and the first driving member 331c drives the second beam 321c to move along the second direction Y when driving the first slider 332c. The movable frame 322c can only move along the third direction Z of the bed 10 relative to the second beam 321c, and the spindle of the processing assembly 31c is arranged on the movable frame 322c. In this way, the first driving member 331c drives the first slider 332c to realize the movement of the second beam 321c in the second direction Y, thereby realizing the processing assembly 31c. The position of the main shaft in the first direction X is adjusted; optionally, the third driving member 35c can be but not limited to a DC motor, an AC asynchronous motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor, a switched reluctance motor, etc. The third driving member 35c is connected to the movable frame 322c and is used to drive the movable frame 322c to move along the third direction Z of the bed 10 relative to the second beam 321c. Thus, by driving the third driving member 35c, the position of the processing component 31c in the third direction Z can be adjusted, which is convenient for the positioning processing of the processing component 31c during the operation of the circuit board processing equipment 100c.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图42和图43所示,第二横梁321c具有导向套筒3211c,导向套筒3211c的轴向方向与第三方向Z平行,移动架322c具有导向杆3221c,导向杆3221c穿设于导向套筒3211c。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, the second crossbeam 321c has a guide sleeve 3211c, the axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c is parallel to the third direction Z, and the movable frame 322c has a guide rod 3221c, which is passed through the guide sleeve 3211c.
具体地,第二横梁321c和移动架322c分别设有配合使用的导向套筒3211c和导向杆3221c,可选的,对应设置4个导向套筒3211c和4个导向杆3221c,导向杆3221c穿设于导向套筒3211c,并可以沿着导向套筒3211c的轴向方向移动,导向套筒3211c的轴向方向与第三方向Z平行,如此设置,能够限定导向杆3221c沿着导向套筒3211c在第三方向Z上运动,避免导向杆3221c在移动过程中出现偏移,保证了移动架322c相对于第二横梁321c移动的平稳性,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, the second crossbeam 321c and the movable frame 322c are respectively provided with a guide sleeve 3211c and a guide rod 3221c for use therewith. Optionally, four guide sleeves 3211c and four guide rods 3221c are correspondingly arranged. The guide rod 3221c is inserted through the guide sleeve 3211c and can move along the axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c. The axial direction of the guide sleeve 3211c is parallel to the third direction Z. Such an arrangement can limit the guide rod 3221c to move along the guide sleeve 3211c in the third direction Z, thereby avoiding the guide rod 3221c from being offset during the movement, ensuring the stability of the movement of the movable frame 322c relative to the second crossbeam 321c, and helping to improve the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图42和图43所示,移动架322c还具有安装板3222c,安装板3222c与导向杆3221c固定连接,加工组件31c安装于安装板3222c。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 , the movable frame 322c further has a mounting plate 3222c, the mounting plate 3222c is fixedly connected to the guide rod 3221c, and the processing assembly 31c is mounted on the mounting plate 3222c.
具体地,安装板3222c水平设置,加工组件31c和导向杆3221c沿第三方向Z固定安装于安装板3222c,当第三驱动件35c驱动移动架322c移动时,导向杆3221c沿导向套筒3211c在第三方向Z上运动,从而带动固定安装于安装板3222c的加工组件31c沿第三方向Z移动,如此设置,能够保证加工组件31c随移动架322c相对于第二横梁321c移动时的平稳性,避免加工组件31c在沿第三方向Z移动时出现偏移,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, the mounting plate 3222c is horizontally arranged, and the processing assembly 31c and the guide rod 3221c are fixedly installed on the mounting plate 3222c along the third direction Z. When the third driving member 35c drives the movable frame 322c to move, the guide rod 3221c moves along the guide sleeve 3211c in the third direction Z, thereby driving the processing assembly 31c fixedly installed on the mounting plate 3222c to move along the third direction Z. Such an arrangement can ensure the stability of the processing assembly 31c when it moves with the movable frame 322c relative to the second crossbeam 321c, avoid the deviation of the processing assembly 31c when it moves along the third direction Z, and is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图42和图43所示,安装架32c还包括第一支架323c和第二支架324c,第一支架323c位于安装板3222c和第二横梁321c之间且与安装板3222c固定连接,第二支架324c位于第二横梁321c远离安装板3222c的一侧且与第二横梁321c固定连接,第三驱动件35c穿设于第二横梁321c,且第三驱动件35c连接在第一支架323c和第二支架324c之间。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, the mounting frame 32c also includes a first bracket 323c and a second bracket 324c, the first bracket 323c is located between the mounting plate 3222c and the second beam 321c and is fixedly connected to the mounting plate 3222c, the second bracket 324c is located on a side of the second beam 321c away from the mounting plate 3222c and is fixedly connected to the second beam 321c, the third driving member 35c is passed through the second beam 321c, and the third driving member 35c is connected between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c.
具体地,第一支架323c设有第一支撑板、第二支撑板和第一连接板,第一支撑板、第二支撑板和第一连接板限定出第一避让空间,加工组件31c位于避让空间内,第一支架323c安装过程中,第一连接板位于安装板3222c和第二横梁321c之间,第一支撑板和第二支撑板与安装板3222c固定连接,第二支架324c设有第三支撑板、第四支撑板和第二连接板,第三支撑板、第四支撑板和第二连接板限定出第二避让空间,第二支架324c安装过程中,第二连接板位于第二横梁321c远离安装板3222c的一侧,第三支撑板和第四支撑板与第二横梁321c固定连接,第二横梁321c中间设有避让孔,第三驱动件35c穿过第二横梁321c的避让孔,并分别与第一支架323c的第一连接板和第二支架324c的第二连接板固定连接,以将第三驱动件35c连接在第一支架323c和第二支架324c之间。Specifically, the first bracket 323c is provided with a first support plate, a second support plate and a first connecting plate, the first support plate, the second support plate and the first connecting plate define a first avoidance space, the processing assembly 31c is located in the avoidance space, and during the installation of the first bracket 323c, the first connecting plate is located between the mounting plate 3222c and the second beam 321c, the first support plate and the second support plate are fixedly connected to the mounting plate 3222c, and the second bracket 324c is provided with a third support plate, a fourth support plate and a second connecting plate, and the third support plate, the fourth support plate and the second connecting plate limit the first avoidance space. A second avoidance space is defined. During the installation of the second bracket 324c, the second connecting plate is located on the side of the second beam 321c away from the mounting plate 3222c. The third support plate and the fourth support plate are fixedly connected to the second beam 321c. An avoidance hole is provided in the middle of the second beam 321c. The third driving member 35c passes through the avoidance hole of the second beam 321c and is fixedly connected to the first connecting plate of the first bracket 323c and the second connecting plate of the second bracket 324c, respectively, so as to connect the third driving member 35c between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c.
第二支架324c与第二横梁321c固定连接,第三驱动件35c连接在第一支架323c和第二支架324c之间,第二支架324c相对于第三驱动件35c固定不动,第三驱动件35c可以驱动第一支架323c相对于第二支架324c沿第三方向Z移动,从而带动安装板3222c沿沿第三方向Z移动,实现了加工组件31c在第三方向Z上的位置调整,并且整个传动设计结构简单,易于装配。The second bracket 324c is fixedly connected to the second crossbeam 321c, the third driving member 35c is connected between the first bracket 323c and the second bracket 324c, the second bracket 324c is fixed relative to the third driving member 35c, the third driving member 35c can drive the first bracket 323c to move along the third direction Z relative to the second bracket 324c, thereby driving the mounting plate 3222c to move along the third direction Z, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the processing component 31c in the third direction Z, and the entire transmission design structure is simple and easy to assemble.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一横梁11c设有导向轨,导向轨沿第一方向X延伸,安装架32c设有滑动件,滑动件可滑动地设于导向轨且可沿导向轨延伸方向移动。也就是说,滑动件可以沿着导向轨在第一方向X上滑动,因此通过导向轨与滑动件的配合使用,可以驱使安装架32c沿着第一横梁11c在第一方向上滑动,且由于导向轨对滑动件具有一定的导向作用,能够保证安装架32c可以沿着第一横梁11c平稳运行,不会出现偏移等问题。In some embodiments of the present application, the first crossbeam 11c is provided with a guide rail, the guide rail extends along the first direction X, and the mounting frame 32c is provided with a sliding member, the sliding member is slidably provided on the guide rail and can move along the extension direction of the guide rail. In other words, the sliding member can slide along the guide rail in the first direction X, so through the coordinated use of the guide rail and the sliding member, the mounting frame 32c can be driven to slide along the first crossbeam 11c in the first direction, and because the guide rail has a certain guiding effect on the sliding member, it can ensure that the mounting frame 32c can run smoothly along the first crossbeam 11c without problems such as deviation.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图41所示,第一横梁11c包括相对且间隔设置的第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c,加工组件31c位于第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c之间。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 41 , the first beam 11c includes a first sub-beam 111c and a second sub-beam 112c that are oppositely and spaced apart, and the processing assembly 31c is located between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c.
具体地,第一横梁11c包括相对且间隔设置的第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c,第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c限定出移动空间,加工组件31c可以在移动空间内沿第一方向X移动,第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c均设有导向轨,从而能够保证加工部30c沿着第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c在第一方向X上平稳运行,且第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c位于30的两侧,可以为加工部30c提供很好的支撑作用,第一横梁11c具有较好的刚性,从而保证加工部30c在移动过程中更加的平稳,有利于提高电路板设备的加工精度。Specifically, the first beam 11c includes a first sub-beam 111c and a second sub-beam 112c that are relatively and spaced apart. The first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c define a moving space. The processing component 31c can move along the first direction X in the moving space. The first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c are both provided with guide rails, thereby ensuring that the processing part 30c can run smoothly along the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c in the first direction X. The first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c are located on both sides of 30, which can provide good support for the processing part 30c. The first beam 11c has good rigidity, thereby ensuring that the processing part 30c is more stable during movement, which is beneficial to improving the processing accuracy of the circuit board equipment.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图41所示,第二横梁321c沿第二方向Y延伸,第二方向Y平行于加工平台20c运动的方向。也就是说,第二横梁321c的可调节方向与加工平台20c运动方向一致,从而保证第二横梁321c在沿第二方向Y进行调节时,第二横梁321c相对于加工平台20c在第二方向Y上平行移动,避免调节过程中第二横梁321c在第二方向Y发生偏移,进而避免调节过程中加工组件31c发生偏移,保证了加工精度,有利于提高加工质量。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG41 , the second beam 321c extends along the second direction Y, and the second direction Y is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform 20c moves. In other words, the adjustable direction of the second beam 321c is consistent with the direction in which the processing platform 20c moves, thereby ensuring that when the second beam 321c is adjusted along the second direction Y, the second beam 321c moves parallel to the processing platform 20c in the second direction Y, thereby preventing the second beam 321c from shifting in the second direction Y during the adjustment process, thereby preventing the processing assembly 31c from shifting during the adjustment process, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy and facilitating improving the processing quality.
在本申请的一些实施例中,沿第二方向上,加工组件31c的移动距离为L,满足关系式:1μm≤L≤10μm。具体地,如图41所示,加工组件31c位于第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c之间,加工组件31c在第一子横梁111c和第二子横梁112c之间可以移动距离之和为L,进一步地,加工组件31c的移动距离可以设置为1μm、5μm、10μm等数值,加工组件31c的移动距离根据具体情况合理选择,如此设置能够保证加工组件31c可以在第二方向Y上移动,并对移动距离进行限定,避免移动过程中加工组件31c与其他组件发生碰撞。In some embodiments of the present application, along the second direction, the moving distance of the processing component 31c is L, which satisfies the relationship: 1μm≤L≤10μm. Specifically, as shown in FIG41 , the processing component 31c is located between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c, and the sum of the moving distances of the processing component 31c between the first sub-beam 111c and the second sub-beam 112c is L. Further, the moving distance of the processing component 31c can be set to values such as 1μm, 5μm, and 10μm. The moving distance of the processing component 31c is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can ensure that the processing component 31c can move in the second direction Y, and limit the moving distance to avoid collision between the processing component 31c and other components during the movement.
图44为根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法的流程图。Figure 44 is a flowchart of a control method for circuit board processing equipment according to an embodiment of the present application.
其中,电路板加工设备包括加工平台,加工平台包含至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工部30c,其中,至少两个相邻的加工部30c中包括一个第一加工部,至少两个相邻的加工部30c中剩余的加工部30c为第二加工部。进一步地,执行图44所示的电路板加工设备的控制方法的电路板加工设备的结构可以如图40所示,图40为根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的主视图,加工平台设置了6个加工工位,每个加工工位设置两个加工部30c,其中一个为第一加工部,另一个为第二加工部,每个加工工位放置一张电路板,加工工位设置的两个加工部30c可以同时对该电路板进行加工,如此设置,实现了多个加工部30c同时对一块电路板进行加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率和稼动率,可以提高电路板加工设备单位时间单位面积的产出效率,尤其适用于加工有对称、复制等加工需求的电路板,有利于提高产品竞争力。The circuit board processing equipment includes a processing platform, the processing platform includes at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts 30c, wherein at least two adjacent processing parts 30c include a first processing part, and the remaining processing parts 30c of at least two adjacent processing parts 30c are second processing parts. Further, the structure of the circuit board processing equipment that executes the control method of the circuit board processing equipment shown in FIG. 44 can be as shown in FIG. 40, which is a front view of the circuit board processing equipment according to the embodiment of the present application, the processing platform is provided with 6 processing stations, each processing station is provided with two processing parts 30c, one of which is the first processing part and the other is the second processing part, each processing station is placed with a circuit board, and the two processing parts 30c provided in the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time, so that multiple processing parts 30c can process a circuit board at the same time, improve the processing efficiency and utilization rate of the circuit board processing equipment, and improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment per unit time and unit area, which is particularly suitable for processing circuit boards with processing requirements such as symmetry and replication, and is conducive to improving product competitiveness.
如图44所示,该电路板加工设备的控制方法包括以下步骤:As shown in FIG. 44 , the control method of the circuit board processing equipment includes the following steps:
步骤S101,获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围。Step S101, obtaining a predetermined distance between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and a first preset error range.
步骤S102,确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内。Step S102 , confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within a first preset error range.
步骤S103,获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的第二预设误差范围。Step S103, obtaining a second preset error range in the second direction Y of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station.
步骤S104,确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内。Step S104, confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within a second preset error range.
步骤S105,控制每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部同时加工被加工件。Step S105, controlling the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts to process the workpiece simultaneously.
具体地,在采用多个加工部同时对同一加工工位进行加工时,需要保证每个加工工位中的多个加工部中心坐标的一致性,因此需要对多个加工部的中心坐标进行调整,以使得多个加工部的中心坐标基本一致,从而减小中心坐标误差,提高加工精度,在进行中心坐标调整时,以第一加工部为基准,第二加工部以第一加工部为基准进行位置调节。Specifically, when multiple processing parts are used to process the same processing station at the same time, it is necessary to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of the multiple processing parts in each processing station. Therefore, the center coordinates of the multiple processing parts need to be adjusted so that the center coordinates of the multiple processing parts are basically consistent, thereby reducing the center coordinate error and improving the processing accuracy. When adjusting the center coordinates, the first processing part is used as a reference, and the position of the second processing part is adjusted based on the first processing part.
作为一个具体示例,如图40所示,控制系统获取每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围,并获取每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第二方向Y上的第二预设误差范围,如果每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内,且每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内,则控制每个加工工位中的相邻的第一加工部和的第二加工部同时加工被加工件。As a specific example, as shown in Figure 40, the control system obtains the predetermined spacing and the first preset error range of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the first direction X, and obtains the second preset error range of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the second direction Y. If the error between the actual spacing and the predetermined spacing of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the first direction X is within the first preset error range, and the error between the actual positions of the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts of each processing station in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range, the adjacent first processing parts and the second processing parts in each processing station are controlled to process the workpiece simultaneously.
根据本申请实施例的电路板加工设备的控制方法,在确定多个加工部中心坐标的基本一致时,控制多加工部共同加工被加工件,从而减小了共同加工时不同加工部的中心坐标误差,降低了电路板加工设备的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。According to the control method of the circuit board processing equipment of the embodiment of the present application, when it is determined that the center coordinates of multiple processing parts are basically consistent, the multiple processing parts are controlled to jointly process the workpiece, thereby reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts during joint processing, reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, and facilitating improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图41所示每个第二加工部包括调节组件33c,调节组件33c用于调节第二加工部在第二方向Y上的位置。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 41 , each second processing portion includes an adjustment component 33 c , and the adjustment component 33 c is used to adjust the position of the second processing portion in the second direction Y.
在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的第二预设误差范围之后,在确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内之前,方法还包括:After obtaining the second preset error range of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction Y, and before confirming that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction Y is within the preset error range, the method further includes:
获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置。The actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction Y are obtained.
若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和第二加工部中有两个在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差不在第二预设误差范围内,控制调节组件33c调节相应的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内。If the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing parts and the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction Y is not within the second preset error range, the control adjustment component 33c adjusts the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction Y so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range.
具体地,参考图40所示,通过控制系统检测每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置,若每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部中有两个在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差不在第二预设误差范围内,控制系统控制调节组件33c调节相应的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内。由此,以第一加工部为基准,通过调节组件33c第二加工部在第二方向Y上的位置,保证每个加工工位的每个第二加工部与第一加工部在第二方向Y上的实际位置之间的误差在第二预设误差范围内,从而保证了每个加工工位中多个加工部在第二方向Y上的相对位置关系,降低了不同加工部在第二方向Y上的的中心坐标误差,从而降低了电路板加工设备的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, as shown in FIG40, the control system detects the actual positions of the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the second direction Y. If the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the second direction Y is not within the second preset error range, the control system controls the adjustment component 33c to adjust the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction Y, so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range. Thus, taking the first processing part as a reference, by adjusting the position of the second processing part of the adjustment component 33c in the second direction Y, it is ensured that the error between the actual position of each second processing part of each processing station and the first processing part in the second direction Y is within the second preset error range, thereby ensuring the relative position relationship of multiple processing parts in each processing station in the second direction Y, reducing the center coordinate error of different processing parts in the second direction Y, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
需要说明的是,如图41所示,电路板加工设备包括第二驱动件34c,第二驱动件34c用于调节第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的位置。It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 41 , the circuit board processing equipment includes a second driving member 34 c, and the second driving member 34 c is used to adjust the positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts in the first direction X.
在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围之后,在确认每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内之前,方法还包括:After obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the first preset error range, before confirming that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the preset error range, the method further includes:
控制系统检测每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距。The control system detects the actual spacing in the first direction X between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station.
若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和第二加工部中有两个在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差不在第一预设误差范围内,控制第二驱动件34c调节相应的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内。If the error between the actual spacing between two of the first processing parts and the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is not within the first preset error range, the second driving member 34c is controlled to adjust the positions of the corresponding first processing parts and the second processing parts in the first direction X so that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing parts corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range.
具体地,参考图40所示,通过控制系统检测每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距,若每个加工工位相邻的第一加工部和第二加工部中有两个在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差不在第一预设误差范围内,控制系统控制第二驱动件34c调节相应的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的位置,以使每个加工工位相邻第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内。由此,通过第二驱动件34c调节第一加工部和/或第二加工部在第一方向X上的位置,保证每个加工工位的第一加工部和第二加工部在第一方向X上的实际间距与相应的预定间距之间的误差在第一预设误差范围内,从而保证了每个加工工位中多个加工部在第一方向X上的相对位置关系,降低了不同加工部在第一方向X上的的中心坐标误差,从而降低了电路板加工设备的加工误差,有利于提高加工精度。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, the control system detects the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X. If the error between the actual spacing between two of the first processing parts and the second processing parts adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is not within the first preset error range, the control system controls the second driving member 34c to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part and the second processing part in the first direction X, so that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part adjacent to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range. Thus, the second driving member 34c adjusts the position of the first processing part and/or the second processing part in the first direction X, ensuring that the error between the actual spacing between the first processing part and the second processing part of each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range, thereby ensuring the relative position relationship of multiple processing parts in each processing station in the first direction X, reducing the center coordinate error of different processing parts in the first direction X, thereby reducing the processing error of the circuit board processing equipment, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,每个加工部还包括:第二驱动件34c,第二驱动件34c用于驱动加工部沿第一方向X移动;在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围之前,方法还包括:In some embodiments of the present application, each processing part further includes: a second driving member 34c, and the second driving member 34c is used to drive the processing part to move along the first direction X; before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the first preset error range, the method further includes:
获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的第一预设位置以及第三预设误差范围。The first preset position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the third preset error range are obtained.
检测每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置。The actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X is detected.
若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差不在第三预设误差范围内,控制第二驱动件34c调节相应的第一加工部的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差在第三预设误差范围内。If the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is not within the third preset error range, the second driving member 34c is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
具体地,在获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部在第一方向X上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围之前,需要确定每个加工工位中的第一加工部在第一方向X上的位置,通过控制系统获取每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的第一预设位置以及第三预设误差范围,并检测每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置,若每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差不在第三预设误差范围内,则说明第一加工部在第一方向X上初始位置定位部准确,通过控制系统控制第二驱动件34c调节相应的第一加工部的位置,以使每个加工工位对应的第一加工部在第一方向X上的实际位置与相应的第一预设位置之间的误差在第三预设误差范围内。由此,在加工之前实现每个加工工位的第一加工部的预先定位,提高了第一加工部的定位精度,从而有利于提高第二加工部在第一方向X和第二方向Y的定位精度,提高了加工精度。Specifically, before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the first preset error range, it is necessary to determine the position of the first processing part in each processing station in the first direction X, obtain the first preset position and the third preset error range of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X through the control system, and detect the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X. If the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is not within the third preset error range, it means that the initial position positioning part of the first processing part in the first direction X is accurate, and the control system controls the second driving member 34c to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction X and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range. Thus, the first processing part of each processing station is pre-positioned before processing, which improves the positioning accuracy of the first processing part, thereby facilitating the improvement of the positioning accuracy of the second processing part in the first direction X and the second direction Y, and improving the processing accuracy.
进一步地,在控制每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部同时加工被加工件之前,方法还包括:控制加工平台沿第二方向Y移动至第二预设位置。也就是说,在控制每个加工工位对应的第一加工部和所有的第二加工部同时加工被加工件之前,还可以通过控制系统控制加工平台沿第二方向Y移动至第二预设位置,从而实现了在加工过程中对被加工件的快速定位,进一步提高加工效率。Furthermore, before controlling the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station to process the workpiece at the same time, the method further includes: controlling the processing platform to move to the second preset position along the second direction Y. That is, before controlling the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station to process the workpiece at the same time, the processing platform can also be controlled by the control system to move to the second preset position along the second direction Y, thereby realizing rapid positioning of the workpiece during the processing, and further improving the processing efficiency.
在本申请的上述实施例中,电路板加工设备包括如下的至少一种:钻孔设备、成型设备、激光加工设备、AOI检测设备等,上述设备都可以应用本申请的实施例的调节组件33c和控制方法,在此不做限制。In the above embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes at least one of the following: drilling equipment, molding equipment, laser processing equipment, AOI inspection equipment, etc. The above equipment can all apply the adjustment component 33c and control method of the embodiments of the present application, and no limitation is made here.
下面参考附图描述本申请实施例提出的加工部100d。The processing portion 100d proposed in the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
如图45和图46所示,根据本申请第一方面实施例的加工部100d包括:安装架10d、主轴组件31d和调节组件40d。As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 , the processing part 100d according to the embodiment of the first aspect of the present application includes: a mounting frame 10d, a spindle assembly 31d and an adjustment assembly 40d.
具体地,主轴组件31d用于加工电路板,主轴组件31d安装于安装架10d,在加工部100d的第一方向X上主轴组件31d相对安装架10d可移动,调节组件40d用于驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向X移动。由此,通过调节组件40d可以驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向X整体移动,从而实现了主轴组件31d在第一方向X上的位置调节,当主轴组件31d出现位置偏移时,能够及时对主轴组件31d进行位置调节,有利于提高加工精度下降。Specifically, the spindle assembly 31d is used to process the circuit board. The spindle assembly 31d is mounted on the mounting frame 10d. The spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d in the first direction X of the processing portion 100d. The adjustment assembly 40d is used to drive the spindle assembly 31d to move along the first direction X. Thus, the spindle assembly 31d can be driven to move as a whole along the first direction X by the adjustment assembly 40d, thereby realizing the position adjustment of the spindle assembly 31d in the first direction X. When the spindle assembly 31d is offset, the position of the spindle assembly 31d can be adjusted in time, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图45和图46所示,主轴组件31d包括:驱动件20d和安装座30d,驱动件20d设于安装座30d,且驱动件20d用于加工电路板,安装座30d安装于安装架10d,沿第一方向X上安装座30d相对安装架10d可移动。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figures 45 and 46, the spindle assembly 31d includes: a driving member 20d and a mounting seat 30d, the driving member 20d is arranged on the mounting seat 30d, and the driving member 20d is used to process the circuit board, the mounting seat 30d is installed on the mounting frame 10d, and the mounting seat 30d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X.
具体地,参考图45和图46所示,安装座30d可以套设于驱动件20d,具体来说,驱动件20d与安装座30d之间采用小过盈配合,并通过热套的方式将驱动件20d安装于安装座30d,以使驱动件20d与安装座30d成为一体,保证了驱动件20d与安装座30d之间的位置精度;也可以根据安装架10d尺寸定制带有安装座30d的驱动件20d,驱动件20d与安装座30d一体化设置,从而节省了驱动件20d与安装座30d之间的安装步骤,提高了装配效率。驱动件20d的下方还安装有转动刀具21d,在电路板加工设备运行时,通过驱动件20d驱动刀具21d转动以实现对电路板的锣切加工。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 , the mounting seat 30d can be sleeved on the driving member 20d. Specifically, a small interference fit is adopted between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d, and the driving member 20d is installed on the mounting seat 30d by shrink sleeve, so that the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d are integrated, thereby ensuring the position accuracy between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d; the driving member 20d with the mounting seat 30d can also be customized according to the size of the mounting frame 10d, and the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d are integrated, thereby saving the installation steps between the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d, and improving the assembly efficiency. A rotating tool 21d is also installed below the driving member 20d. When the circuit board processing equipment is running, the driving member 20d drives the tool 21d to rotate to realize the gong cutting processing of the circuit board.
进一步地,如图46所示,驱动件20d安装于安装座30d,安装座30d安装于安装架10d并可相对于安装架10d沿加工部100d的第一方向X移动,当调节组件40d驱动安装座30d沿第一方向X移动时,驱动件20d跟随安装座30d一起沿第一方向X移动,从而实现了对驱动件20d位置的调节。Further, as shown in Figure 46, the driving member 20d is installed on the mounting seat 30d, and the mounting seat 30d is installed on the mounting frame 10d and can move relative to the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X of the processing portion 100d. When the adjustment component 40d drives the mounting seat 30d to move along the first direction X, the driving member 20d moves along the first direction X with the mounting seat 30d, thereby realizing the adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图45所示,调节组件40d沿第一方向X穿设于安装架10d。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 45 , the adjustment component 40 d is disposed along the first direction X through the mounting frame 10 d .
具体地,在装配过程中,调节组件40d沿第一方向X从远离驱动件20d方向朝靠近驱动件20d方向安装,并穿设于安装架10d,从而保证调节组件40d的装配方向与安装座30d调节方向一致,进而保证了安装座30d调节方向的稳定性,避免调节过程中出现方向偏差。Specifically, during the assembly process, the adjustment component 40d is installed along the first direction X from the direction away from the driving member 20d to the direction close to the driving member 20d, and is passed through the mounting frame 10d, thereby ensuring that the assembly direction of the adjustment component 40d is consistent with the adjustment direction of the mounting seat 30d, thereby ensuring the stability of the adjustment direction of the mounting seat 30d and avoiding directional deviation during the adjustment process.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图45和图46所示,上述的加工部100d还包括:弹性件50d,安装架10d可以为一体成型件,也可以为可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d的组合件,如图45所示,第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d配合装配并限定出安装空间13d,主轴组件31d安装于安装空间13d内,安装座30d的外表面具有第一抵接面,安装空间13d的内侧壁具有第二抵接面,第一抵接面和第二抵接面沿第一方向X相对,弹性件50d抵接在第一抵接面和第二抵接面之间。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figures 45 and 46, the above-mentioned processing portion 100d also includes: an elastic member 50d, the mounting frame 10d can be an integrally formed member, or a detachable assembly of a first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d. As shown in Figure 45, the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d are assembled together to define an installation space 13d, the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d, the outer surface of the mounting seat 30d has a first abutment surface, and the inner side wall of the installation space 13d has a second abutment surface. The first abutment surface and the second abutment surface are opposite to each other along the first direction X, and the elastic member 50d abuts between the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface.
具体地,以安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d为例进行说明,第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d通过螺栓连接并限定出用于安装安装座30d的安装空间13d,如图46所示,安装座30d沿第一方向X朝向安装架10d的外表面具有第一抵接面,安装空间13d的内侧壁具有与第一抵接面相对的第二抵接面。在主轴组件31d安装过程中,安装座30d沿第一方向X朝靠近第一安装架11d方向移动以进行配合安装,并通过第二安装架12d为其提供夹紧力,以使主轴组件31d能够安装于安装空间13d内,弹性件50d位于第一抵接面和第二抵接面之间,当主轴组件31d完成安装后,安装座30d的第一抵接面与弹性件50d的一端抵接,安装空间13d内侧壁的第二抵接面与弹性件50d的另一端抵接,弹性件50d抵接在第一抵接面和第二抵接面之间,从而可以为第一抵接面和第二抵接面提供沿第一方向X的压紧力,保证了主轴组件31d和安装架10d之间位置精度,同时,弹性件50d自身还具有弹性形变功能,当通过调节组件40d调节安装座30d与安装架10d之间的压紧力时,弹性件50d根据压紧力的变化改变自身弹性状态,从而可以实现主轴组件31d沿第一方向X的微调节,进而实现驱动件20d位置沿第一方向X的微调节。Specifically, taking the mounting frame 10d including a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example, the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d are connected by bolts and define an installation space 13d for installing the mounting seat 30d. As shown in FIG46, the mounting seat 30d has a first abutment surface on the outer surface of the mounting frame 10d along the first direction X, and the inner side wall of the installation space 13d has a second abutment surface opposite to the first abutment surface. During the installation of the spindle assembly 31d, the mounting seat 30d moves along the first direction X toward the first mounting frame 11d for matching installation, and the second mounting frame 12d provides a clamping force for it, so that the spindle assembly 31d can be installed in the installation space 13d, and the elastic member 50d is located between the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface. When the spindle assembly 31d is installed, the first abutting surface of the mounting seat 30d abuts against one end of the elastic member 50d, and the second abutting surface of the inner side wall of the installation space 13d abuts against the other end of the elastic member 50d. The elastic member 50d abuts against Between the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface, a clamping force along the first direction X can be provided for the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface, thereby ensuring the position accuracy between the main shaft assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d. At the same time, the elastic member 50d itself also has an elastic deformation function. When the clamping force between the mounting seat 30d and the mounting frame 10d is adjusted by the adjustment assembly 40d, the elastic member 50d changes its own elastic state according to the change of the clamping force, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the main shaft assembly 31d along the first direction X, and then achieving fine adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d along the first direction X.
在本申请的一些实施例中,安装架10d设有第一导向结构,安装座30d设有第二导向结构,通过第一导向结构和第二导向结构导向配合以在第一方向X对安装座30d导向。In some embodiments of the present application, the mounting frame 10d is provided with a first guiding structure, and the mounting seat 30d is provided with a second guiding structure, and the mounting seat 30d is guided in the first direction X through the cooperation of the first guiding structure and the second guiding structure.
具体地,以安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d为例进行说明,第一安装架11d和安装座30d分别设有导向配合的第一导向结构和第二导向结构,在安装座30d安装过程中,安装座30d的第二导向结构沿着第一安装架11d的第一导向结构移动以实现两者的配合安装,同时,当通过调节组件40d对安装座30d进行微调节时,第一导向结构和第二导向结构的配合使用还可以保证在微调节过程中不会出现错位,从而保证了安装座30d微调节的稳定性和精准度,进而保证了驱动件20d微调节的稳定性和精准度。Specifically, taking the mounting frame 10d including a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example, the first mounting frame 11d and the mounting seat 30d are respectively provided with a first guide structure and a second guide structure for guiding cooperation. During the installation process of the mounting seat 30d, the second guide structure of the mounting seat 30d moves along the first guide structure of the first mounting frame 11d to achieve the coordinated installation of the two. At the same time, when the mounting seat 30d is fine-tuned by the adjustment component 40d, the coordinated use of the first guide structure and the second guide structure can also ensure that no misalignment occurs during the fine-tuning process, thereby ensuring the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d, and further ensuring the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the driving member 20d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一导向结构为导向槽和导向销中的一个,第二导向结构为导向槽和导向销中的另一个,导向销插入导向槽内。In some embodiments of the present application, the first guide structure is one of the guide groove and the guide pin, the second guide structure is the other of the guide groove and the guide pin, and the guide pin is inserted into the guide groove.
具体地,第一导向结构和第二导向结构对应设置,若第一导向结构设置为导向槽,则第二导向结构设置为导向销,若第一导向结构设置为导向销,则第二导向结构设置为导向槽,导向销可以插入导向槽内,由此,通过导向销和导向槽的配合使用可以实现安装座30d与安装架10d的装配以及安装座30d微调节过程中的导向作用,同时,导向销和导向槽的配合使用不仅可以保证安装座30d微调节的稳定性和精准度,而且结构简单、装配方便,提高了装配效率。Specifically, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are set correspondingly. If the first guide structure is set as a guide groove, the second guide structure is set as a guide pin. If the first guide structure is set as a guide pin, the second guide structure is set as a guide groove. The guide pin can be inserted into the guide groove. Therefore, the assembly of the mounting seat 30d and the mounting frame 10d and the guiding function during the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d can be achieved through the coordinated use of the guide pin and the guide groove. At the same time, the coordinated use of the guide pin and the guide groove can not only ensure the stability and accuracy of the fine-tuning of the mounting seat 30d, but also has a simple structure and convenient assembly, thereby improving the assembly efficiency.
在本申请的一些实施例中,参考图45-图47所示,调节组件40d包括:第一调节件41d和第二调节件42d,第一调节件41d与第二调节件42d转动连接且与安装座30d固定连接,第二调节件42d可转动地设于安装架10d,通过转动第二调节件42d以驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments of the present application, referring to Figures 45-47, the adjustment assembly 40d includes: a first adjustment member 41d and a second adjustment member 42d, the first adjustment member 41d is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member 42d and is fixedly connected to the mounting seat 30d, and the second adjustment member 42d is rotatably provided on the mounting frame 10d, and the spindle assembly 31d is driven to move along the first direction X by rotating the second adjustment member 42d.
具体地,第一调节件41d固定安装于安装座30d上,安装方式可以为焊接、螺栓连接等,此处不作具体限制,可选的,如图47所示,第一调节件41d可以限定出一端敞开的安装槽411d,安装槽411d的内周面设置有内螺纹,第二调节件42d的外周面设置有外螺纹,第二调节件42d插入安装槽411d内,安装槽411d的内螺纹和第二调节件42d的外螺纹配合连接。Specifically, the first adjusting member 41d is fixedly mounted on the mounting seat 30d, and the mounting method may be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 47, the first adjusting member 41d may define a mounting groove 411d with one end open, and the inner circumferential surface of the mounting groove 411d is provided with an internal thread, and the outer circumferential surface of the second adjusting member 42d is provided with an external thread, and the second adjusting member 42d is inserted into the mounting groove 411d, and the internal thread of the mounting groove 411d and the external thread of the second adjusting member 42d are matched and connected.
进一步地,以安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d为例进行说明,第二调节件42d可转动地设于第二安装架12d,但第二调节件42d相对于第二安装架12d在第一方向X不可移动,当第二调节件42d转动时,由于第一调节件41d和第二调节件42d螺纹配合连接且第一调节件41d固定不可转动,因此,在反作用力的作用下,第二调节件42d的转动会驱动第一调节件41d沿第一方向X移动。举例来说,假设顺时针旋转第二调节件42d可以使得第一调节件41d沿第一方向X朝靠近第一安装架11d方向移动,则当第二调节件42d逆时针旋转时,第一调节件41d在螺纹转动以及弹性件50d的作用下驱动第一调节件41d沿第一方向X朝远离第一安装架11d的方向移动,从而实现了对主轴组件31d位置的微调节,进而实现对驱动件20d位置的微调节。Further, taking the mounting frame 10d including a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example, the second adjusting member 42d is rotatably provided on the second mounting frame 12d, but the second adjusting member 42d is not movable in the first direction X relative to the second mounting frame 12d. When the second adjusting member 42d rotates, since the first adjusting member 41d and the second adjusting member 42d are threadedly connected and the first adjusting member 41d is fixed and cannot rotate, under the action of the reaction force, the rotation of the second adjusting member 42d will drive the first adjusting member 41d to move along the first direction X. For example, assuming that the second adjusting member 42d is rotated clockwise, the first adjusting member 41d can move along the first direction X toward the first mounting bracket 11d, then when the second adjusting member 42d is rotated counterclockwise, the first adjusting member 41d is driven by the rotation of the thread and the action of the elastic member 50d to move along the first direction X toward the direction away from the first mounting bracket 11d, thereby achieving fine adjustment of the position of the spindle assembly 31d, and further achieving fine adjustment of the position of the driving member 20d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第二调节件42d可以设置为为丝杆,第一调节件41d套设于丝杆。也就是说,当第二调节件42d选择为丝杆时,将第一调节件41d的安装槽411d套设于丝杆上,如此设置丝杆相对于第一调节件41d可以转动,当丝杆转动时会驱动第一调节件41d沿第一方向X移动,从而可以实现对安装座30d位置的微调节,同时,丝杠结构简单可靠,成本低廉,有利于提高装配效率和降低成本。In some embodiments of the present application, the second adjusting member 42d can be configured as a screw rod, and the first adjusting member 41d is sleeved on the screw rod. That is, when the second adjusting member 42d is selected as a screw rod, the mounting groove 411d of the first adjusting member 41d is sleeved on the screw rod, so that the screw rod can rotate relative to the first adjusting member 41d, and when the screw rod rotates, it drives the first adjusting member 41d to move along the first direction X, so that the position of the mounting seat 30d can be finely adjusted. At the same time, the screw rod has a simple and reliable structure and low cost, which is conducive to improving assembly efficiency and reducing costs.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图46所示,安装架10d具有安装耳121d,当安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d时,安装耳121d设置于第二安装架12d上,安装耳121d具有安装孔1211d,丝杆穿设于安装孔1211d。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figure 46, the mounting frame 10d has a mounting ear 121d. When the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d, the mounting ear 121d is arranged on the second mounting frame 12d, and the mounting ear 121d has a mounting hole 1211d, and the screw rod is passed through the mounting hole 1211d.
具体地,以安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d为例进行说明,第二安装架12d上的安装耳121d与安装座30d配合安装并为安装座30d提供夹紧力,以使安装座30d能够安装于安装空间13d内,安装耳121d还具有安装孔1211d,当安装耳121d与安装座30d配合安装时,使第一调节件41d的安装槽411d和丝杠穿设于安装孔1211d,其中,安装槽411d的外周面与安装孔1211d的内周面过渡配合,当安装耳121d与安装座30d固定安装后,安装耳121d可以为第一调节件41d提供一定的支撑作用,从而可以在转动丝杆时,使第一调节件41d和丝杆之间的转动更加平稳。Specifically, the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example. The mounting ear 121d on the second mounting frame 12d is installed in cooperation with the mounting seat 30d and provides a clamping force for the mounting seat 30d so that the mounting seat 30d can be installed in the mounting space 13d. The mounting ear 121d also has a mounting hole 1211d. When the mounting ear 121d is installed in cooperation with the mounting seat 30d, the mounting groove 411d of the first adjusting member 41d and the lead screw are passed through the mounting hole 1211d, wherein the outer circumferential surface of the mounting groove 411d is transitionally matched with the inner circumferential surface of the mounting hole 1211d. When the mounting ear 121d is fixedly installed with the mounting seat 30d, the mounting ear 121d can provide a certain support for the first adjusting member 41d, so that when the lead screw is rotated, the rotation between the first adjusting member 41d and the lead screw is smoother.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图46所示,上述的加工部100d还包括:轴承60d,轴承60d安装于安装孔1211d内,且丝杆穿设于轴承60d的内圈。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 46 , the processing portion 100d further includes: a bearing 60d, the bearing 60d is installed in the mounting hole 1211d, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 60d.
具体地,当安装耳121d固定安装后,将轴承60d沿第一方向X朝靠近安装耳121d的方向装配,以使轴承60d安装于安装孔1211d内,丝杆穿设于轴承60d的内圈并与轴承60d内圈过渡配合,同时丝杆设置有止挡面,以对轴承60d进行止挡,如此设置能够对丝杆提供一定的支撑作用,从而可以在转动丝杆时,进一步提高第一调节件41d与丝杆之间转动的平稳性。Specifically, after the mounting ear 121d is fixedly installed, the bearing 60d is assembled along the first direction X toward the direction close to the mounting ear 121d, so that the bearing 60d is installed in the mounting hole 1211d, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing 60d and transitionally matched with the inner ring of the bearing 60d. At the same time, the screw rod is provided with a stop surface to stop the bearing 60d. Such a setting can provide a certain support for the screw rod, so that when the screw rod is rotated, the stability of the rotation between the first adjusting member 41d and the screw rod can be further improved.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图46所示,上述的加工部100d还包括:端盖70d,端盖70d具有避让孔71d,端盖70d设于安装耳121d的外表面,且避让孔71d与安装孔1211d对应,丝杆穿设于避让孔71d,端盖70d用于止挡轴承60d。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figure 46, the above-mentioned processing part 100d also includes: an end cover 70d, the end cover 70d has an avoidance hole 71d, the end cover 70d is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear 121d, and the avoidance hole 71d corresponds to the mounting hole 1211d, the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole 71d, and the end cover 70d is used to stop the bearing 60d.
具体地,将端盖70d固定安装于安装耳121d的外表面,且保证端盖70d的避让孔71d与安装耳121d的安装孔1211d对应放置,其中,固定安装方式可以为焊接、螺栓连接等,此处不作具体限制,丝杆穿设于避让孔71d并伸出一定长度,以便于丝杆的转动调节,同时,端盖70d还用于止挡轴承60d,限制轴承60d沿第一方向X移动,进而限制丝杆沿第一方向X移动,从而在丝杠转动时,为驱动件20d的移动提供反作用力。Specifically, the end cover 70d is fixedly installed on the outer surface of the mounting ear 121d, and the avoidance hole 71d of the end cover 70d is placed corresponding to the mounting hole 1211d of the mounting ear 121d, wherein the fixed installation method can be welding, bolt connection, etc., which is not specifically limited here. The screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole 71d and extends a certain length to facilitate the rotation adjustment of the screw rod. At the same time, the end cover 70d is also used to stop the bearing 60d, limit the movement of the bearing 60d along the first direction X, and then limit the movement of the screw rod along the first direction X, so as to provide a reaction force for the movement of the driving member 20d when the screw rotates.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图46所示,上述的加工部100d还包括:锁紧件90d,锁紧件90d用于锁紧丝杠,如此设置,当转动丝杠驱动驱动件20d移动至合适位置时,能够使驱动件20d保持在调节位置处,避免驱动件20d出现位置复位,提高了驱动件20d位置调节的稳定性。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in Figure 46, the above-mentioned processing part 100d also includes: a locking member 90d, and the locking member 90d is used to lock the lead screw. With this arrangement, when the lead screw is rotated to drive the driving member 20d to move to a suitable position, the driving member 20d can be maintained at the adjusted position, thereby preventing the driving member 20d from being reset, thereby improving the stability of the position adjustment of the driving member 20d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图46所示,安装架10d可以为一体成型件,也可以为可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d的组合件,如图45所示,第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d配合装配并限定出安装空间13d,主轴组件31d安装于安装空间13d内,在加工部100d的第二方向Y上,安装空间13d具有相对的第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d,第一侧壁131d和/或第二侧壁132d设有顶杆80d,顶杆80d适于沿第二方向Y相对安装架10d移动且适于与安装座30d抵接,第一方向X与第二方向Y垂直。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 46 , the mounting frame 10d may be an integrally formed part, or may be a removable assembly of a first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d. As shown in FIG. 45 , the first mounting frame 11d and the second mounting frame 12d cooperate to be assembled and define an installation space 13d. The spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d. In the second direction Y of the processing portion 100d, the installation space 13d has a first side wall 131d and a second side wall 132d relative to each other. The first side wall 131d and/or the second side wall 132d are provided with a push rod 80d. The push rod 80d is suitable for moving relative to the mounting frame 10d along the second direction Y and for abutting against the mounting seat 30d. The first direction X is perpendicular to the second direction Y.
具体地,以安装架10d包括可拆卸的第一安装架11d和第二安装架12d为例进行说明,安装空间13d在第二方向Y上具有相对的第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d,其中,可以仅在第一侧壁131d设有顶杆80d,也可以仅在第二侧壁132d设有顶杆80d,还可以同时在第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d设有顶杆80d,为了使本领域技术人员更加理解本申请,如图46所示,以第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d同时设有顶杆80d为例进行说明,第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d设有通孔以安装顶杆80d,顶杆80d沿第二方向Y相对第一安装架11d可移动,且顶杆80d可以与安装座30d抵接,通过调节第一侧壁131d和第二侧壁132d的两个顶杆80d可以实现对安装座30d在第二方向Y的位置调整,进而实现了主轴组件31d在第二方向Y位置上的调整,由此,通过丝杆调节主轴组件31d在第一方向X上的位置以及通过顶杆80d调节主轴组件31d在第二方向Y上的位置,可以保证主轴组件31d的垂直度,进而保证了加工精度。Specifically, the mounting frame 10d includes a detachable first mounting frame 11d and a second mounting frame 12d as an example for explanation, the mounting space 13d has a first side wall 131d and a second side wall 132d opposite to each other in the second direction Y, wherein only the first side wall 131d may be provided with a top rod 80d, only the second side wall 132d may be provided with a top rod 80d, or both the first side wall 131d and the second side wall 132d may be provided with a top rod 80d. In order to make those skilled in the art better understand the present application, as shown in FIG. 46, the first side wall 131d and the second side wall 132d are provided with a top rod 80d as an example for explanation, the first side wall 131d and The second side wall 132d is provided with a through hole for installing a push rod 80d. The push rod 80d is movable relative to the first mounting frame 11d along the second direction Y, and the push rod 80d can abut against the mounting seat 30d. By adjusting the two push rods 80d of the first side wall 131d and the second side wall 132d, the position of the mounting seat 30d in the second direction Y can be adjusted, thereby achieving adjustment of the position of the spindle assembly 31d in the second direction Y. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the spindle assembly 31d in the first direction X by the screw rod and adjusting the position of the spindle assembly 31d in the second direction Y by the push rod 80d, the verticality of the spindle assembly 31d can be ensured, thereby ensuring the processing accuracy.
在本申请的一些实施例中,安装座30d的外表面设有绝缘层。如此设置能够保证安装座30d和驱动件20d的绝缘需求,避免驱动件20d和安装座30d因导电造成安全事故,提高了加工部100d的安全性。In some embodiments of the present application, an insulating layer is provided on the outer surface of the mounting seat 30d, which can ensure the insulation requirements of the mounting seat 30d and the driving member 20d, avoid safety accidents caused by the driving member 20d and the mounting seat 30d due to conduction, and improve the safety of the processing part 100d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一方向X平行于电路板加工设备的加工平台运动的方向。也就是说,驱动件20d的可调节方向与电路板加工设备的加工平台运动方向一致,从而保证驱动件20d在沿第一方向X进行调节时,主轴相对于加工平台平行移动,避免调节过程中驱动件20d发生偏移,保证了加工精度,有利于提高加工质量。In some embodiments of the present application, the first direction X is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the circuit board processing equipment moves. In other words, the adjustable direction of the driving member 20d is consistent with the direction in which the processing platform of the circuit board processing equipment moves, thereby ensuring that when the driving member 20d is adjusted along the first direction X, the spindle moves parallel to the processing platform, avoiding the driving member 20d from being offset during the adjustment process, ensuring the processing accuracy, and facilitating improving the processing quality.
在本申请的一些实施例中,沿第一方向,主轴组件31d与安装架10d间的间隔距离为L1,满足关系式:10µm≤L1≤30µm。具体地,主轴组件31d安装于安装架10d限定的安装空间13d,沿第一方向X,安装架10d相对于主轴组件31d的两侧预留一定的间隔距离,两侧间隔距离之和为L1,进一步地,主轴组件31d与安装架10d间的间隔距离可以设置为10µm、15µm、20µm、30µm等数值,主轴组件31d与安装架10d间的间隔距离根据具体情况合理选择,如此设置能够保证主轴组件31d与安装架10d之间具有足够的空间,避免调节主轴组件31d时与安装架10d之间发生碰撞。In some embodiments of the present application, along the first direction, the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d is L1, satisfying the relationship: 10µm≤L1≤30µm. Specifically, the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d defined by the mounting frame 10d, and along the first direction X, the mounting frame 10d reserves a certain spacing distance relative to both sides of the spindle assembly 31d, and the sum of the spacing distances on both sides is L1. Further, the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d can be set to values such as 10µm, 15µm, 20µm, 30µm, etc. The spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can ensure that there is enough space between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d, and avoid collision between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d when adjusting.
在本申请的一些实施例中,主轴组件31d沿第一方向X的移动距离为L2,满足关系式:1µm≤L2≤10µm。具体地,主轴组件31d安装于安装架10d限定的安装空间13d,沿第一方向X,安装座30d相对于安装架10d的前后可移动距离为L2,进一步地,主轴组件31d沿第一方向X的移动距离可以设置为1µm、5µm、10µm等数值,主轴组件31d沿第一方向X的移动距离根据具体情况合理选择,如此设置能够避免主轴组件31d沿第一方向X的移动距离与主轴组件31d与安装架10d之间的间隔距离发生冲突,进一步避免了安主轴组件31d与安装架10d之间发生碰撞的可能性。In some embodiments of the present application, the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X is L2, satisfying the relationship: 1µm≤L2≤10µm. Specifically, the spindle assembly 31d is installed in the installation space 13d defined by the mounting frame 10d, and along the first direction X, the front and rear movable distance of the mounting seat 30d relative to the mounting frame 10d is L2. Further, the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X can be set to values such as 1µm, 5µm, and 10µm. The moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X is reasonably selected according to the specific situation. Such a setting can avoid the conflict between the moving distance of the spindle assembly 31d along the first direction X and the spacing distance between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d, and further avoid the possibility of collision between the spindle assembly 31d and the mounting frame 10d.
根据本申请第二方面实施例的电路板加工设备包括:A circuit board processing device according to a second aspect of the present application includes:
机座,包括沿第二方向Y延伸的横梁;A machine base, comprising a beam extending along a second direction Y;
加工部100d,需要说明的是,所述加工部100d为第一方面实施例中的加工部100d,多个加工部100d沿第二方向Y滑接于横梁,加工部100d用于对电路板加工,每个加工部100d均包括安装架10d和主轴组件31d,在加工部100d的第一方向X上,主轴组件31d相对安装架10d可移动,第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X。The processing part 100d, it should be noted that the processing part 100d is the processing part 100d in the embodiment of the first aspect, and multiple processing parts 100d are slidably connected to the beam along the second direction Y. The processing part 100d is used to process the circuit board. Each processing part 100d includes a mounting frame 10d and a spindle assembly 31d. In the first direction X of the processing part 100d, the spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
具体地,在电路板加工设备机座的横梁上沿第二方向Y依次间隔分布多个加工部100d,其中,每个加工部100d对应各自的加工区域,每个加工部100d可在各自加工区域独立进行加工,也可与其他加工设备进行配合加工,例如,多个加工部100d同时对各自的加工区域进行加工,或多个加工部100d按照预设程序依次控制相应加工部100d进行加工,从而实现了电路板加工设备的自动化运行,提高了加工效率。Specifically, a plurality of processing parts 100d are distributed in sequence along the second direction Y on the crossbeam of the base of the circuit board processing equipment, wherein each processing part 100d corresponds to its own processing area, and each processing part 100d can be processed independently in its own processing area, or can be processed in cooperation with other processing equipment. For example, a plurality of processing parts 100d process their own processing areas at the same time, or a plurality of processing parts 100d control the corresponding processing parts 100d to perform processing in sequence according to a preset program, thereby realizing the automated operation of the circuit board processing equipment and improving the processing efficiency.
进一步地,每个加工部100d均设有安装架10d和主轴组件31d,主轴组件31d安装于安装架10d,且在加工部100d的第一方向X上主轴组件31d相对安装架10d可移动,从而可以在第一方向X上对每个加工部100d的主轴组件31d进行位置调节,以保证多个加工部100d中心坐标的一致性。Furthermore, each processing section 100d is provided with a mounting frame 10d and a spindle assembly 31d, the spindle assembly 31d is mounted on the mounting frame 10d, and the spindle assembly 31d is movable relative to the mounting frame 10d in the first direction X of the processing section 100d, so that the spindle assembly 31d of each processing section 100d can be position-adjusted in the first direction X to ensure the consistency of the center coordinates of multiple processing sections 100d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,加工部100d包括调节组件40d,调节组件40d用于驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向X移动。In some embodiments of the present application, the processing portion 100d includes an adjusting component 40d, and the adjusting component 40d is used to drive the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X.
具体地,每个加工部100d还均设有调节组件40d,调节组件40d用于驱动所述主轴组件31d沿所述第一方向X移动,进一步地,主轴组件31d设置有驱动件20d,驱动件20d与主轴组件31d为一体,当驱动组件40驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向移动时,驱动件20d跟随主轴组件31d一起沿第一方向X移动,从而可以实现对驱动件20d位置的调节。Specifically, each processing part 100d is also provided with an adjusting component 40d, and the adjusting component 40d is used to drive the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X. Furthermore, the spindle component 31d is provided with a driving member 20d, and the driving member 20d is integrated with the spindle component 31d. When the driving component 40 drives the spindle component 31d to move along the first direction, the driving member 20d moves along the first direction X with the spindle component 31d, so that the position of the driving member 20d can be adjusted.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电路板加工设备具有至少一个加工工位,每个加工工位对应设置至少两个加工部100d,调节组件40d用于调节加工部100d沿第一方向X位置相同。In some embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment has at least one processing station, each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts 100d, and the adjustment component 40d is used to adjust the processing parts 100d to have the same position along the first direction X.
具体地,电路板加工设备至少设置一个加工工位,一个加工工位可以加工一张电路板,加工工位的数量根据实际需要设置,每个加工工位对应设置至少两个加工部100d,每个加工工位设置的加工部100d的数量同样根据实际需要设置,作为一个具体示例,电路板加工设备设置6个加工工位,每个加工工位设置两个加工部100d,每个加工工位放置一张电路板,加工工位设置的两个加工部100d可以同时对该电路板进行加工,如此设置,实现了多个加工部100d对同一电路板的共同加工,提高了电路板加工设备的加工效率,可以提高电路板加工设备单位时间单位面积的产出效率,有利于提高产品竞争力。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment is provided with at least one processing station, and one processing station can process one circuit board. The number of processing stations is set according to actual needs. Each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts 100d, and the number of processing parts 100d provided at each processing station is also set according to actual needs. As a specific example, the circuit board processing equipment is provided with 6 processing stations, and each processing station is provided with two processing parts 100d. A circuit board is placed in each processing station, and the two processing parts 100d provided at the processing station can process the circuit board at the same time. With such a setting, the common processing of the same circuit board by multiple processing parts 100d is realized, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment, and can improve the output efficiency of the circuit board processing equipment per unit time and unit area, which is beneficial to improving product competitiveness.
进一步地,调节组件40d用于调节加工部100d在第一方向X上的位置,使多个加工部100d在第一方向X上处于相同位置,具体来说,当至少两个加工部100d对一个加工工位同时加工时,为保证至少两个加工部100d在第一方向X位置相同,每个加工部的调节组件40d各自调节对应的主轴组件31d的位置以保证主轴组件31d在第一方向X上处于相同位置,由此,当至少两个加工部100d同时加工一个工位的同一个电路板时,保证各个加工部100d在第一方向X上的相同位置,有利于提高多个主轴组件31d同时加工同一个工位的电路板时的加工精度。Furthermore, the adjustment component 40d is used to adjust the position of the processing part 100d in the first direction X, so that the multiple processing parts 100d are in the same position in the first direction X. Specifically, when at least two processing parts 100d process one processing station at the same time, in order to ensure that at least two processing parts 100d are in the same position in the first direction X, the adjustment component 40d of each processing part respectively adjusts the position of the corresponding spindle component 31d to ensure that the spindle component 31d is in the same position in the first direction X. Therefore, when at least two processing parts 100d process the same circuit board at one station at the same time, the same position of each processing part 100d in the first direction X is ensured, which is conducive to improving the processing accuracy when multiple spindle components 31d process circuit boards at the same station at the same time.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电路板加工设备包括控制系统,控制系统被构造为控制相邻两个加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动预定间隔距离,控制每个加工部100d的主轴组件31d沿第一方向X上移动至相同位置。In some embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is constructed to control two adjacent processing parts 100d to move a predetermined interval distance along the second direction Y, and control the spindle assembly 31d of each processing part 100d to move to the same position along the first direction X.
具体地,电路板加工设备还包括控制系统,控制系统控制驱动部驱动电路板加工设备运行,驱动部包括第一驱动部和第二驱动部,第一驱动部安装于机座上,用于驱动加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动,以控制相邻两个加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动预定的的间隔距离,第二驱动部安装于加工部100d上,用于驱动主轴组件31d沿第一方向X移动,以调节多个加工部100d的主轴组件31d在第一方向X的位置,保证多个加工部100d的主轴组件31d在第一方向X上处于相同位置。在本实施例中,第二驱动部为调节组件。进一步地,假设加工工位具有两个加工部100d,控制系统首先控制第一驱动部驱动加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动,以调节相邻两个加工部100d沿第二方向Y的间隔距离,使得两个加工部100d能够在同一加工工位内,使其能够共同加工一块电路板,然后控制第二驱动部驱动两个加工部100d中的两个或任意一个安装座30d沿第一方向X移动,从而保证两个加工部100d在第一方向X位置的一致性,有利于提高了多个加工部100d共同加工时的精度。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment further includes a control system, the control system controls the driving unit to drive the circuit board processing equipment to operate, the driving unit includes a first driving unit and a second driving unit, the first driving unit is mounted on the machine base, and is used to drive the processing unit 100d to move along the second direction Y, so as to control two adjacent processing units 100d to move a predetermined spacing distance along the second direction Y, and the second driving unit is mounted on the processing unit 100d, and is used to drive the spindle assembly 31d to move along the first direction X, so as to adjust the positions of the spindle assemblies 31d of the multiple processing units 100d in the first direction X, and ensure that the spindle assemblies 31d of the multiple processing units 100d are in the same position in the first direction X. In this embodiment, the second driving unit is an adjustment assembly. Further, assuming that the processing station has two processing parts 100d, the control system first controls the first driving unit to drive the processing part 100d to move along the second direction Y to adjust the spacing distance between two adjacent processing parts 100d along the second direction Y, so that the two processing parts 100d can be in the same processing station, so that they can jointly process a circuit board, and then controls the second driving unit to drive two or any one of the mounting seats 30d of the two processing parts 100d to move along the first direction X, thereby ensuring the consistency of the positions of the two processing parts 100d in the first direction X, which is beneficial to improving the accuracy of the joint processing of multiple processing parts 100d.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电路板加工设备包括控制系统,控制系统还被构造为用于控制调节组件40d驱动相应的主轴组件31d沿第一方向X移动,并控制主轴组件31d沿第三方向Z加工电路板,以及用于控制相应的加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动,第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。In some embodiments of the present application, the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is also constructed to control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, and to control the spindle component 31d to process the circuit board along the third direction Z, and to control the corresponding processing part 100d to move along the second direction Y, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
具体地,电路板加工设备还包括控制系统,控制系统可以控制调节组件40d驱动相应主轴组件31d沿第一方向X上移动,以控制每个加工部100d的主轴组件31d沿第一方向X上移动至相同位置,从而可以保证不同加工部100d中心坐标的一致性,减少不同加工部100d的中心坐标误差,可以降低电路板加工设备的加工误差,提高加工精度;控制系统还可以控制相应主轴组件31d沿第二方向Y移动,举例来说,假设一个加工工位具有两个加工部100d,控制系统可以分别控制加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动,以调节相邻两个加工部100d沿第二方向Y移动预定间隔距离,当加工部100d在第一方向X上的位置和第二方向Y上的位置调节到位时,控制系统控制主轴组件31d的驱动件20d沿第三方向Z开始加工电路板。Specifically, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a control system, which can control the adjustment component 40d to drive the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the first direction X, so as to control the spindle component 31d of each processing part 100d to move to the same position along the first direction X, thereby ensuring the consistency of the center coordinates of different processing parts 100d, reducing the center coordinate errors of different processing parts 100d, reducing the processing errors of the circuit board processing equipment, and improving the processing accuracy; the control system can also control the corresponding spindle component 31d to move along the second direction Y. For example, assuming that a processing station has two processing parts 100d, the control system can control the processing parts 100d to move along the second direction Y respectively, so as to adjust the two adjacent processing parts 100d to move a predetermined spacing distance along the second direction Y. When the position of the processing part 100d in the first direction X and the position in the second direction Y are adjusted in place, the control system controls the driving member 20d of the spindle component 31d to start processing the circuit board along the third direction Z.
此外,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括至少一个该特征。在本申请的描述中,“多个”的含义是至少两个,例如两个,三个等,除非另有明确具体的限定。In addition, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only and should not be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of the indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include at least one of the features. In the description of this application, the meaning of "plurality" is at least two, such as two, three, etc., unless otherwise clearly and specifically defined.
在本申请中,除非另有明确的规定和限定,术语“安装”、“相连”、“连接”、“固定”等术语应做广义理解,例如,可以是固定连接,也可以是可拆卸连接,或成一体;可以是机械连接,也可以是电连接;可以是直接相连,也可以通过中间媒介间接相连,可以是两个元件内部的连通或两个元件的相互作用关系,除非另有明确的限定。对于本领域的普通技术人员而言,可以根据具体情况理解上述术语在本申请中的具体含义。In this application, unless otherwise clearly specified and limited, the terms "installed", "connected", "connected", "fixed" and the like should be understood in a broad sense, for example, it can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral connection; it can be a mechanical connection or an electrical connection; it can be a direct connection or an indirect connection through an intermediate medium, it can be the internal connection of two elements or the interaction relationship between two elements, unless otherwise clearly defined. For ordinary technicians in this field, the specific meanings of the above terms in this application can be understood according to specific circumstances.
尽管上面已经示出和描述了本申请的实施例,可以理解的是,上述实施例是示例性的,不能理解为对本申请的限制,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的范围内可以对上述实施例进行变化、修改、替换和变型。Although the embodiments of the present application have been shown and described above, it can be understood that the above embodiments are exemplary and cannot be understood as limitations on the present application. Ordinary technicians in the field can change, modify, replace and modify the above embodiments within the scope of the present application.
Claims (90)
- 一种电路板加工设备,其中,包括:A circuit board processing device, comprising:多组加工装置,每组所述加工装置包括多个加工部,多个所述加工部设于横梁上且沿床身的第一方向排布;A plurality of processing devices, each of which comprises a plurality of processing parts, and the plurality of processing parts are arranged on the crossbeam and arranged along a first direction of the bed;至少一个所述加工部包括主轴和调节组件,所述调节组件与所述主轴连接,所述调节组件被配置为驱动所述主轴沿所述床身的第二方向移动,所述第二方向垂直于所述第一方向。At least one of the processing parts includes a main shaft and an adjusting component, wherein the adjusting component is connected to the main shaft, and the adjusting component is configured to drive the main shaft to move along a second direction of the bed, wherein the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- 根据权利要求1所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件与所述主轴滑动连接,所述调节组件的滑动方向与第二方向相交;或,所述调节组件与所述主轴转动连接,所述转动的轴心线平行于第二方向。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 1, wherein the adjustment component is slidably connected to the main shaft, and the sliding direction of the adjustment component intersects with the second direction; or, the adjustment component is rotationally connected to the main shaft, and the axis of rotation is parallel to the second direction.
- 根据权利要求2所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括:安装部,所述调节组件连接在所述安装部和所述主轴之间,所述安装部安装于所述横梁;所述安装部沿所述第一方向可滑动地安装于所述横梁。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 2, the circuit board processing equipment further comprises: a mounting portion, the adjustment assembly is connected between the mounting portion and the main shaft, the mounting portion is mounted on the beam; the mounting portion is slidably mounted on the beam along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求3所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述主轴包括旋转驱动件和安装架,所述安装架包括安装板和移动架,所述安装板与所述调节组件连接,所述移动架设于所述安装板,且沿所述床身的第三方向所述移动架相对所述安装板可移动,所述旋转驱动件安装于所述移动架,所述第一方向、所述第二方向和所述第三方向相互垂直。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 3, the spindle includes a rotating drive member and a mounting frame, the mounting frame includes a mounting plate and a movable frame, the mounting plate is connected to the adjustment component, the movable frame is mounted on the mounting plate, and the movable frame is movable relative to the mounting plate along a third direction of the bed, the rotating drive member is mounted on the movable frame, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- 根据权利要求3所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件包括:第一调节件和第二调节件,所述第一调节件与所述第二调节件转动连接且与所述主轴固定连接,所述第二调节件可转动地设于所述安装部,通过转动所述第二调节件以驱动所述主轴沿所述第二方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 3, the adjustment component includes: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and is fixedly connected to the main shaft, and the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting portion, and the main shaft is driven to move along the second direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
- 根据权利要求5所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第二调节件为丝杆,所述第一调节件套设于所述丝杆;所述安装部具有安装耳,所述安装耳具有安装孔,所述第二调节件穿设于所述安装孔。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 5, the second adjusting member is a screw rod, the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod; the mounting portion has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, and the second adjusting member is inserted into the mounting hole.
- 根据权利要求2所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件包括:第一驱动件和第一滑块,所述第一滑块与所述主轴固定连接且可滑动地设于所述横梁,所述第一驱动件被配置为驱动所述第一滑块带动所述主轴沿所述第二方向移动。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 2, wherein the adjustment component includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the main shaft and is slidably disposed on the crossbeam, and the first driving member is configured to drive the first slider to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求7所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括:第一导向机构和第二导向机构,所述第一导向机构设于所述横梁,所述第一滑块可滑动地设于所述第二导向机构,通过所述第一导向机构和所述第二导向机构导向配合以使所述主轴沿所述第一方向移动。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 7, wherein the circuit board processing equipment further comprises: a first guide mechanism and a second guide mechanism, wherein the first guide mechanism is arranged on the cross beam, and the first slider is slidably arranged on the second guide mechanism, and the first guide mechanism and the second guide mechanism are guided and cooperated to enable the spindle to move along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求8所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第一滑块与所述第二导向机构相对的端面具有第一导向结构,所述第二导向机构与所述第一滑块相对的端面具有第二导向结构,所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构导向配合以使所述主轴沿所述第二方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 8, wherein the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide mechanism has a first guide structure, and the end surface of the second guide mechanism opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure, and the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to guide and move the main shaft along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求3所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件包括:调节滑块和调节滑轨,所述调节滑轨安装于所述安装部,所述调节滑块和所述调节滑轨滑动配合以驱动所述主轴沿第二方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 3, the adjustment component includes: an adjustment slider and an adjustment slide rail, the adjustment slide rail is installed on the mounting portion, and the adjustment slider and the adjustment slide rail are slidably matched to drive the main shaft to move along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求10所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节滑块和所述调节滑轨滑动配合以同时在所述第二方向和第三方向对所述主轴运动进行导向,所述调节滑块在所述调节滑轨上沿第二方向的移动距离小于所述调节滑块在所述调节滑轨上沿第三方向的移动距离。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 10, wherein the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail are slidably matched to guide the movement of the spindle in the second direction and the third direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider on the adjusting slide rail along the second direction is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider on the adjusting slide rail along the third direction.
- 根据权利要求10所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节滑块和所述调节滑轨滑动配合以同时在所述第一方向和第二方向对所述主轴运动进行导向,所述调节滑块在所述调节滑轨上沿第二方向的移动距离小于所述调节滑块在所述调节滑轨上沿第一方向的移动距离。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 10, wherein the adjusting slider and the adjusting slide rail are slidably matched to guide the movement of the spindle in the first direction and the second direction at the same time, and the moving distance of the adjusting slider on the adjusting slide rail along the second direction is smaller than the moving distance of the adjusting slider on the adjusting slide rail along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求10所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件还包括:驱动单元,所述驱动单元被配置为驱动所述调节滑块在调节滑轨上的移动;所述调节组件还包括锁紧机构,所述锁紧机构被配置为限制所述调节滑块在调节滑轨上的移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 10, the adjustment component further includes: a driving unit, which is configured to drive the adjustment slider to move on the adjustment slide rail; the adjustment component also includes a locking mechanism, which is configured to limit the movement of the adjustment slider on the adjustment slide rail.
- 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括工作台,所述工作台沿所述床身的第二方向移动,所述主轴沿第三方向加工电路板,所述第一方向、所述第二方向、所述第三方向相互垂直。The circuit board processing equipment according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein the circuit board processing equipment also includes a workbench, the workbench moves along the second direction of the bed, the spindle processes the circuit board along the third direction, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- 根据权利要求14所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括控制系统,所述控制系统被配置为控制所述调节组件驱动相应所述主轴沿所述第二方向上移动,控制所述主轴沿第三方向加工电路板,还被配置为控制相应所述加工部沿所述第一方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 14, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a control system, which is configured to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle to move along the second direction, control the spindle to process the circuit board along the third direction, and is also configured to control the corresponding processing part to move along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,所述校准仪被配置为检测所述多个加工部之间在第一方向上的偏差距离和在第二方向上的偏差距离;The circuit board processing equipment according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the circuit board processing equipment further comprises a calibrator, wherein the calibrator is configured to detect the deviation distance between the plurality of processing parts in the first direction and the deviation distance in the second direction;所述横梁上还设有绝对光栅尺,所述绝对光栅尺被配置为微调和补偿所述多个加工部之间在第一方向上的偏差距离;An absolute grating ruler is also provided on the crossbeam, and the absolute grating ruler is configured to fine-tune and compensate for the deviation distance between the multiple processing parts in the first direction;所述调节组件跟随对应的所述主轴沿所述第一方向移动,所述调节组件被配置为微调对应的所述主轴与所述横梁之间的所述第二方向上的偏差距离。The adjusting assembly moves along the first direction following the corresponding main shaft, and the adjusting assembly is configured to fine-tune a deviation distance between the corresponding main shaft and the beam in the second direction.
- 一种电路板加工设备的控制方法,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组所述加工装置包括多个加工部,所述多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个所述整版包括多个加工区域,每个所述加工区域包括至少一个电路板,所述多个加工部与所述多个加工区域一一对应设置,所述方法包括:A control method for a circuit board processing device, wherein the circuit board processing device comprises a plurality of processing devices, each of which comprises a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of full pages, each of which comprises a plurality of processing areas, each of which comprises at least one circuit board, the plurality of processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of processing areas, and the method comprises:获取每个所述整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离;Obtaining an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each of the full pages;根据所述偏置距离控制每组所述加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;Controlling at least one processing part in each group of the processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance;获取每组所述加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;Obtaining a deviation distance of a processing part in each group of the processing devices in the second direction;根据所述偏差距离对所述至少一个加工部进行校准,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直;calibrating the at least one processing portion according to the deviation distance, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction;在每组所述加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制所述加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。After the processing parts in each group of the processing devices move to the target position, the processing parts are controlled to process the circuit boards in the corresponding processing areas.
- 根据权利要求17所述的控制方法,其中,至少一个加工部包括调节组件,根据所述偏差距离对所述加工部进行校准,包括:调节组件控制每组所述加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第二方向上移动,以对所述加工部进行校准。According to the control method of claim 17, at least one processing part includes an adjustment component, and the processing part is calibrated according to the deviation distance, including: the adjustment component controls at least one processing part in each group of the processing devices to move in the second direction to calibrate the processing part.
- 根据权利要求18所述的控制方法,其中,所述至少一个加工部包括第一加工部和第二加工部,以第一加工部为基准,所述第二加工部的调节组件控制第二加工部在第二方向上向第一加工部移动靠近,以到达目标位置的预设范围内。According to the control method according to claim 18, wherein the at least one processing part includes a first processing part and a second processing part, and with the first processing part as a reference, the adjustment component of the second processing part controls the second processing part to move closer to the first processing part in a second direction so as to reach within a preset range of the target position.
- 根据权利要求17所述的控制方法,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括校准仪,获取每组所述加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,包括:According to the control method of claim 17, wherein the circuit board processing equipment further comprises a calibrator, and obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of the processing devices in the second direction comprises:通过所述校准仪获取每组所述加工装置中多个加工部的坐标信息;Acquiring coordinate information of a plurality of processing parts in each group of the processing devices through the calibrator;根据所述坐标信息确定每个加工部在所述第二方向上的偏差距离。The deviation distance of each processing part in the second direction is determined according to the coordinate information.
- 根据权利要求17所述的控制方法,其中,获取每组所述加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,根据所述偏差距离对所述至少一个加工部进行校准,包括:The control method according to claim 17, wherein obtaining the deviation distance of the processing part in each group of the processing devices in the second direction, and calibrating the at least one processing part according to the deviation distance comprises:控制多个所述加工部进行预加工处理;Controlling the plurality of processing units to perform pre-processing;获取每个所述加工部对应的预加工位置的坐标信息;Acquire coordinate information of a pre-processing position corresponding to each of the processing parts;根据所述预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个所述加工部在所述第二方向上的偏差距离;Determining deviation distances of the plurality of processing parts in the second direction according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position;根据所述预加工位置的坐标信息确定多个所述加工部中任一个加工部的位置信息;Determining the position information of any one of the plurality of processing parts according to the coordinate information of the pre-processing position;根据所述任一个加工部的位置信息控制多个所述加工部中的其他加工部移动,以使多个所述加工部在所述第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设偏差范围。The movement of other processing parts among the plurality of processing parts is controlled according to the position information of any one processing part, so that the deviation distance of the plurality of processing parts in the second direction is within a preset deviation range.
- 根据权利要求17所述的控制方法,其中,获取每个所述整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离,包括:The control method according to claim 17, wherein obtaining the offset distance between adjacent processing areas in the first direction in each of the full pages comprises:确定每个所述加工区域中的第一电路板,所述第一电路板为所述第一方向上首个完全处于同一加工区域中的电路板;Determine a first circuit board in each of the processing areas, the first circuit board being the first circuit board in the first direction that is completely in the same processing area;获取每个所述第一电路板的坐标信息;Acquire coordinate information of each of the first circuit boards;根据所述第一电路板的坐标信息确定所述相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离。The offset distance between the adjacent processing areas is determined according to the coordinate information of the first circuit board.
- 根据权利要求22所述的控制方法,其中,所述控制方法还包括:The control method according to claim 22, wherein the control method further comprises:获取每个所述加工区域的位置信息;Acquiring location information of each of the processing areas;根据每个所述电路板的坐标信息和所述加工区域的位置信息确定第二电路板,所述第二电路板未完全处于同一个加工区域中;Determining a second circuit board according to the coordinate information of each circuit board and the position information of the processing area, wherein the second circuit board is not completely located in the same processing area;控制所述加工部移动至预设位置,以对所述第二电路板进行加工。The processing part is controlled to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board.
- 根据权利要求23所述的控制方法,其中,控制所述加工部移动至预设位置,以对所述第二电路板进行加工,包括:According to the control method of claim 23, wherein controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board comprises:确定所述整版中的分割线,所述分割线被配置为划分所述整版上的加工区域;determining a dividing line in the full page, wherein the dividing line is configured to divide a processing area on the full page;根据所述分割线将所述第二电路板划分为第一部分和第二部分,并确定所述第一部分和第二部所处的加工区域;Dividing the second circuit board into a first part and a second part according to the dividing line, and determining processing areas where the first part and the second part are located;控制与所述加工区域对应的加工部对所述第一部分和第二部分进行加工。A processing unit corresponding to the processing area is controlled to process the first portion and the second portion.
- 根据权利要求23所述的控制方法,其中,控制所述加工部移动至预设位置,以对所述第二电路板进行加工,包括:According to the control method of claim 23, wherein controlling the processing unit to move to a preset position to process the second circuit board comprises:获取所述第二电路板的数量信息;Acquire quantity information of the second circuit board;根据所述数量信息向所述加工部分配所述第二电路板,以使各加工部所分配到的第二电路板的数量之差处于预设差值范围。The second circuit boards are allocated to the processing parts according to the quantity information, so that the difference in quantity of the second circuit boards allocated to each processing part is within a preset difference range.
- 一种电路板加工设备的控制装置,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组所述加工装置包括多个加工部,所述多组加工装置与多个整版一一对应设置,每个所述整版包括多个加工区域,每个所述加工区域包括至少一个电路板,所述多个加工部与所述多个加工区域一一对应设置,所述控制装置包括:A control device for a circuit board processing device, wherein the circuit board processing device comprises a plurality of processing devices, each of which comprises a plurality of processing parts, the plurality of processing devices are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of full pages, each of which comprises a plurality of processing areas, each of which comprises at least one circuit board, the plurality of processing parts are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of processing areas, and the control device comprises:获取模块,被配置为获取每个所述整版中在第一方向上相邻加工区域之间的偏置距离、以及获取每组所述加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直;An acquisition module is configured to acquire an offset distance between adjacent processing areas in a first direction in each of the full pages, and acquire a deviation distance of a processing part in each group of the processing devices in a second direction, wherein the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction;控制模块,被配置为根据所述偏置距离控制每组所述加工装置中的至少一个加工部在第一方向上移动;A control module, configured to control at least one processing part in each group of the processing devices to move in a first direction according to the offset distance;校准模块,被配置为根据所述偏差距离对所述至少一个加工部进行校准;a calibration module, configured to calibrate the at least one processing part according to the deviation distance;所述控制模块,还被配置为在每组所述加工装置中的加工部移动达到目标位置后,控制所述加工部对相应的加工区域中的电路板进行加工。The control module is further configured to control the processing part in each group of the processing devices to process the circuit board in the corresponding processing area after the processing part moves to the target position.
- 一种电路板加工设备的校准方法,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括多组加工装置,每组所述加工装置包括多个加工部,所述校准方法包括:A calibration method for a circuit board processing device, wherein the circuit board processing device comprises a plurality of groups of processing devices, each group of the processing devices comprises a plurality of processing parts, and the calibration method comprises:获取每组所述加工装置中的加工部在第二方向上的偏差距离;Obtaining a deviation distance of a processing part in each group of the processing devices in the second direction;根据所述偏差距离控制所述加工部向所述第二方向移动,直至多个所述加工部在所述第二方向上的偏差距离处于预设距离范围。The processing part is controlled to move in the second direction according to the deviation distance until the deviation distances of the plurality of processing parts in the second direction are within a preset distance range.
- 一种电路板整版中电路板的排版方法,其中,所述电路板整版被划分为多个加工区域,所述排版方法包括:A layout method for a circuit board in a circuit board layout, wherein the circuit board layout is divided into a plurality of processing areas, and the layout method comprises:获取待排版电路板在第一方向上的排版数量,以及获取所述电路板整版中所述加工区域的数量;Obtaining the number of layouts of the circuit board to be layouted in the first direction, and obtaining the number of the processing areas in the entire layout of the circuit board;在所述排版数量与所述加工区域的数量的商为整数时,采用第一预设排版方法对所述待排版电路板进行排版;When the quotient of the layout quantity and the quantity of the processing areas is an integer, a first preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted;在所述排版数量与所述加工区域的数量的商为非整数时,采用第二预设排版方法对所述待排版电路板进行排版。When the quotient of the layout quantity and the quantity of the processing areas is a non-integer, a second preset layout method is used to layout the circuit board to be layouted.
- 一种加工设备,其中,包括:A processing device, comprising:多个加工组件,所述多个加工组件沿第一方向间隔设置于横梁上;A plurality of processing components, wherein the plurality of processing components are arranged on the beam at intervals along a first direction;调节装置,所述调节装置连接于所述加工组件和所述横梁之间,所述调节装置至少被配置为调节对应的所述加工组件的在第二方向上的位置,所述第二方向平行于所述加工设备的加工平台运动的方向,所述第二方向与所述第一方向垂直。An adjusting device is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam, and the adjusting device is at least configured to adjust the position of the corresponding processing component in a second direction, wherein the second direction is parallel to the direction in which the processing platform of the processing equipment moves, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- 根据权利要求29所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置还包括调节机构,所述调节机构包括调节滑块和调节滑轨,所述调节滑块和所述调节滑轨被配置为对所述加工组件的运动进行导向。The processing equipment according to claim 29, wherein the adjustment device also includes an adjustment mechanism, the adjustment mechanism includes an adjustment slider and an adjustment slide rail, and the adjustment slider and the adjustment slide rail are configured to guide the movement of the processing component.
- 根据权利要求30所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节滑块沿调节滑轨的延伸方向运动时,所述调节滑块仅在所述第二方向上移动,或,所述调节滑块在第三方向和所述第二方向上同步移动,或,所述调节滑块在所述第一方向和所述第二方向上同步移动;所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。According to the processing equipment according to claim 30, when the adjusting slider moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail, the adjusting slider only moves in the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction, or the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction; the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing axis of the processing component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- 根据权利要求31所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置控制所述加工组件在所述第二方向上移动至预定位置时,所述加工组件在所述第三方向上的移动距离大于所述第二方向上的移动距离,或,所述加工组件在所述第一方向上的移动距离大于所述第二方向上的移动距离。The processing equipment according to claim 31, wherein, when the adjusting device controls the processing component to move to a predetermined position in the second direction, the moving distance of the processing component in the third direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction, or the moving distance of the processing component in the first direction is greater than the moving distance in the second direction.
- 根据权利要求30所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置还包括:横移滑轨和横移滑座,所述横移滑轨设于所述横梁上且沿所述第一方向延伸,所述横移滑座设于所述横移滑轨上且相对所述横移滑轨可滑动,所述调节滑轨设于所述横移滑座上。According to the processing equipment according to claim 30, the adjustment device also includes: a transverse slide rail and a transverse slide seat, the transverse slide rail is arranged on the beam and extends along the first direction, the transverse slide seat is arranged on the transverse slide rail and can slide relative to the transverse slide rail, and the adjustment slide rail is arranged on the transverse slide seat.
- 根据权利要求33所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置还包括驱动机构,所述驱动机构被配置为驱动所述加工组件运动,所述调节滑块沿所述调节滑轨的延伸方向运动时,所述调节滑块在第三方向和所述第二方向上同步移动;所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直。According to the processing equipment according to claim 33, the adjusting device also includes a driving mechanism, and the driving mechanism is configured to drive the processing component to move, when the adjusting slider moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail, the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the third direction and the second direction; the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the processing axis of the processing component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- 根据权利要求33所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置还包括驱动机构,所述驱动机构被配置为驱动所述加工组件运动,所述调节滑轨沿第二方向延伸。The processing equipment according to claim 33, wherein the adjusting device further comprises a driving mechanism, the driving mechanism being configured to drive the processing component to move, and the adjusting slide rail extends along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求33所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置还包括驱动机构,所述驱动机构被配置为驱动所述加工组件运动,所述调节滑块沿调节滑轨的延伸方向运动时,所述调节滑块在所述第一方向和所述第二方向上同步移动。According to the processing equipment according to claim 33, the adjusting device also includes a driving mechanism, and the driving mechanism is configured to drive the processing component to move, and when the adjusting slider moves along the extension direction of the adjusting slide rail, the adjusting slider moves synchronously in the first direction and the second direction.
- 根据权利要求34-36中任一项所述的加工设备,其中,所述驱动机构还包括驱动件、调节螺杆和调节座,所述调节座具有与所述调节螺杆相适配的调节螺孔且与所述加工组件相连,所述驱动件被配置为驱动所述调节螺杆转动。The processing equipment according to any one of claims 34-36, wherein the driving mechanism also includes a driving member, an adjusting screw and an adjusting seat, the adjusting seat has an adjusting screw hole adapted to the adjusting screw and is connected to the processing assembly, and the driving member is configured to drive the adjusting screw to rotate.
- 根据权利要求29-36中任一项所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置包括锁紧机构,所述锁紧机构至少在所述第二方向上将所述加工组件锁定。The processing equipment according to any one of claims 29 to 36, wherein the adjustment device includes a locking mechanism, which locks the processing assembly at least in the second direction.
- 根据权利要求38所述的加工设备,其中,所述调节装置包括调节状态和锁止状态,在所述锁止状态,所述锁紧机构至少在所述第二方向上将所述加工组件锁定;在所述调节状态,所述锁紧机构解锁所述加工组件,所述调节装置适于对对应的所述加工组件的在所述第二方向上的位置进行调节。The processing equipment according to claim 38, wherein the adjusting device includes an adjusting state and a locking state, wherein in the locking state, the locking mechanism locks the processing component at least in the second direction; in the adjusting state, the locking mechanism unlocks the processing component, and the adjusting device is suitable for adjusting the position of the corresponding processing component in the second direction.
- 根据权利要求29-36中任一项所述的加工设备,其中,所述加工设备具有至少一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应至少两个相邻的所述加工组件;所述至少两个相邻加工组件包括第一加工组件和第二加工组件,所述调节装置被配置为调节所述第一加工组件和所述第二加工组件在所述第二方向上的位置,以使所述第一加工组件与所述第二加工组件在第二方向上的间距在第二预设误差范围内。The processing equipment according to any one of claims 29-36, wherein the processing equipment has at least one processing station, each of the processing stations corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components; the at least two adjacent processing components include a first processing component and a second processing component, and the adjustment device is configured to adjust the positions of the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction so that the spacing between the first processing component and the second processing component in the second direction is within a second preset error range.
- 一种调节装置的控制方法,其中,所述调节装置连接于加工设备的加工组件和横梁之间,所述调节装置被配置为驱动所述加工组件至少在第二方向上运动,所述控制方法包括:A control method for an adjusting device, wherein the adjusting device is connected between a processing assembly and a crossbeam of a processing device, and the adjusting device is configured to drive the processing assembly to move in at least a second direction, and the control method comprises:获取所述加工组件在所述第二方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component in the second direction;检测所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction;控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to drive the machining component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- 根本权利要求41所述控制方法,其中,所述调节装置沿第一方向可运动,所述第一方向平行于所述横梁延伸的方向,所述控制方法包括:The control method of claim 41, wherein the adjustment device is movable along a first direction, the first direction being parallel to the direction in which the beam extends, and the control method comprises:获取所述加工组件在所述第一方向的工作位置坐标;Acquire the working position coordinates of the processing component in the first direction;检测所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标;Detecting the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction;控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- 根本权利要求42所述控制方法,其中,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动,或,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和所述第一方向上同步移动;所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:The control method of claim 42, wherein when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component moves only in the second direction, or the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the first direction; the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the machining axis of the machining component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method comprises:控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标;Controlling the adjusting device to drive the processing assembly to move in the second direction, and adjusting the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly in the second direction to the working position coordinates;确认所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- 根本权利要求42所述控制方法,其中,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动;所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:The control method of claim 42, wherein when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component moves only in the second direction; the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the machining axis of the machining component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method comprises:控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Controlling the adjusting device to move in the first direction to adjust the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining assembly in the first direction to the position of the working position coordinates;确认所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上的实际位置坐标已调节至工作位置坐标的位置;Confirming that the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the first direction have been adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates;控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置。The adjusting device is controlled to drive the processing assembly to move in the second direction, and the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing assembly in the second direction are adjusted to the position of the working position coordinates.
- 根本权利要求42所述控制方法,其中,所述调节装置在将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第二方向上的实际位置坐标调节至工作位置坐标的位置时,所述加工组件在所述第二方向上和第三方向上同步移动,或,所述加工组件仅在第二方向上移动;所述第三方向平行于所述加工组件的加工轴运动的方向,所述第一方向、第二方向、第三方向相互垂直;所述控制方法包括:The control method of claim 42, wherein when the adjustment device adjusts the actual position coordinates of the machining axis of the machining component in the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates, the machining component moves synchronously in the second direction and the third direction, or the machining component moves only in the second direction; the third direction is parallel to the direction of movement of the machining axis of the machining component, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other; the control method comprises:在控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动的同时,控制所述调节装置驱动所述加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工组件的加工轴在所述第一方向上和第二方向上的实际位置坐标均调节至工作位置坐标的位置。While controlling the adjustment device to move in the first direction, the adjustment device is controlled to drive the processing component to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the actual position coordinates of the processing axis of the processing component in the first direction and the second direction to the position of the working position coordinates.
- 一种加工设备的加工方法,其中,所述加工设备包括加工平台和调节装置,所述加工平台至少包括一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工组件,所述调节装置连接于所述加工设备的加工组件和横梁之间,所述调节装置可在第一方向上运动且被配置为驱动所述加工组件至少在第二方向上运动;至少相邻的所述加工组件包括一个第一加工组件,至少相邻的所述加工组件的剩余的加工组件为第二加工组件,所述加工方法包括:A processing method for a processing device, wherein the processing device comprises a processing platform and an adjusting device, the processing platform comprises at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing components, the adjusting device is connected between the processing component and the crossbeam of the processing device, the adjusting device can move in a first direction and is configured to drive the processing component to move at least in a second direction; at least the adjacent processing components comprise a first processing component, and at least the remaining processing components of the adjacent processing components are second processing components, and the processing method comprises:控制所述调节装置在所述第一方向上运动,以将所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的所述第二加工组件在所述第一方向上的实际间距与预定间距之间的误差调节至第一预设误差范围;Controlling the adjusting device to move in the first direction to adjust the error between the actual spacing between the first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies corresponding to the processing station in the first direction and the predetermined spacing to a first preset error range;控制所述调节装置驱动对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的第二加工组件在所述第二方向上运动,以将所述加工工位对应的将所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工组件和所有的所述第二加工组件在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差调节至第二预设误差范围内;Controlling the adjustment device to drive the corresponding first processing assembly and all the second processing assemblies to move in the second direction, so as to adjust the error between the actual positions of the first processing assembly corresponding to the processing station and all the second processing assemblies in the second direction to within a second preset error range;控制所述加工工位对应的所有的所述加工组件的加工轴加工待加工件。Control the machining axes of all the machining components corresponding to the machining stations to machine the workpiece.
- 一种用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,电路板加工设备包括气浮套组件,其中,所述调节组件包括:An adjusting component for a circuit board processing device, the circuit board processing device comprising an air flotation sleeve component, wherein the adjusting component comprises:驱动件;Driving parts;调节块,所述调节块连接于所述驱动件和所述气浮套组件之间,且所述驱动件适于驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动;An adjusting block, wherein the adjusting block is connected between the driving member and the air flotation sleeve assembly, and the driving member is suitable for driving the adjusting block to move along a first direction;当所述驱动件驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动时,所述调节块适于带动所述气浮套组件沿第二方向运动。When the driving member drives the adjusting block to move along the first direction, the adjusting block is suitable for driving the air floating sleeve assembly to move along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求47所述用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,还包括:The adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 47, further comprising:第一支架和第二支架,所述第一支架和所述第二支架之间限定出滑动空间,所述驱动件驱动所述调节块在所述滑动空间内沿所述第一方向滑动。A first bracket and a second bracket are provided, wherein a sliding space is defined between the first bracket and the second bracket, and the driving member drives the adjusting block to slide along the first direction in the sliding space.
- 根据权利要求48所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一支架设有第一配合斜面,所述调节块设有第二配合斜面,所述第一配合斜面和所述第二配合斜面滑动配合,以使所述调节块沿所述第一方向向下滑动时驱动所述第一支架朝向远离所述第二支架的方向运动。According to the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 48, wherein the first bracket is provided with a first mating bevel, and the adjustment block is provided with a second mating bevel, and the first mating bevel and the second mating bevel are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block slides downward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move in a direction away from the second bracket.
- 根据权利要求49所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一支架设有第三配合斜面,所述调节块设有第四配合斜面,所述第三配合斜面和所述第四配合斜面滑动配合,以使所述调节块沿所述第一方向向上滑动时驱动所述第一支架朝向靠近所述第二支架的方向运动。According to the adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 49, wherein the first bracket is provided with a third mating bevel, the adjustment block is provided with a fourth mating bevel, and the third mating bevel and the fourth mating bevel are slidably matched so that when the adjustment block slides upward along the first direction, it drives the first bracket to move toward the direction close to the second bracket.
- 根据权利要求50所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一支架设有第一滑动凸起,所述调节块设有第一滑动槽,所述第一滑动凸起可滑动地安装于所述第一滑动槽内。According to the adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 50, wherein the first bracket is provided with a first sliding protrusion, the adjustment block is provided with a first sliding groove, and the first sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the first sliding groove.
- 根据权利要求51所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一滑动凸起和所述第一滑动槽均可设有多个,多个所述第一滑动凸起和多个所述第一滑动槽一一对应。According to the adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 51, wherein each of the first sliding protrusion and the first sliding groove can be provided in plurality, and the plurality of first sliding protrusions and the plurality of first sliding grooves correspond one to one.
- 根据权利要求51所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一支架包括第一安装板和第一导向块,所述第一导向块与所述第一安装板相连,所述第一安装板与所述气浮套组件相连,且所述第一滑动凸起设于所述第一导向块。According to the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 51, wherein the first bracket includes a first mounting plate and a first guide block, the first guide block is connected to the first mounting plate, the first mounting plate is connected to the air floating sleeve assembly, and the first sliding protrusion is arranged on the first guide block.
- 根据权利要求48所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第二支架包括固定部和导向部,所述固定部与所述固定支架相连,所述导向部与所述调节块滑动配合。According to the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 48, wherein the second bracket includes a fixing portion and a guide portion, the fixing portion is connected to the fixing bracket, and the guide portion is slidably matched with the adjustment block.
- 根据权利要求54所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述导向部设有第二滑动凸起,所述调节块设有第二滑动槽,所述第二滑动凸起可滑动地安装于所述第二滑动槽内。According to the adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 54, wherein the guide portion is provided with a second sliding protrusion, the adjustment block is provided with a second sliding groove, and the second sliding protrusion can be slidably installed in the second sliding groove.
- 根据权利要求48-55中任一项所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述驱动件构造为调节螺栓,所述调节螺栓贯穿所述调节块且与所述第二支架的螺纹孔螺纹配合。An adjustment assembly for circuit board processing equipment according to any one of claims 48-55, wherein the driving member is constructed as an adjustment bolt, the adjustment bolt passes through the adjustment block and is threadedly engaged with the threaded hole of the second bracket.
- 根据权利要求56所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述调节组件还包括弹性件,所述弹性件设于所述调节块与所述第二支架之间,且在所述第一方向上,所述弹性件适于将所述调节块朝向所述第二支架弹性预紧。According to claim 56, the adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment further comprises an elastic member, wherein the elastic member is arranged between the adjustment block and the second bracket, and in the first direction, the elastic member is suitable for elastically pre-tightening the adjustment block toward the second bracket.
- 根据权利要求47-55中任一项所述的用于电路板加工设备的调节组件,其中,所述第一方向为所述电路板加工设备的Z轴方向,所述第二方向为所述电路板加工设备的Y轴方向,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。An adjustment component for circuit board processing equipment according to any one of claims 47-55, wherein the first direction is the Z-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment, the second direction is the Y-axis direction of the circuit board processing equipment, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- 一种电路板加工设备,其中,包括:A circuit board processing device, comprising:固定支架;Fixed bracket;主轴和驱动结构,所述驱动结构和所述主轴均安装于所述固定支架,且所述主轴相对于所述固定支架可活动,所述驱动结构与所述主轴相连且被配置为驱动所述主轴相对于所述固定支架沿第一方向运动;A main shaft and a driving structure, wherein the driving structure and the main shaft are both mounted on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft is movable relative to the fixed bracket, and the driving structure is connected to the main shaft and is configured to drive the main shaft to move relative to the fixed bracket along a first direction;气浮套组件,所述气浮套组件安装于所述固定支架,且所述主轴沿第一方向浮动穿设于所述气浮套组件;An air flotation sleeve assembly, wherein the air flotation sleeve assembly is mounted on the fixed bracket, and the main shaft floats and penetrates the air flotation sleeve assembly along a first direction;调节组件,所述调节组件安装于所述固定支架且与所述气浮套组件相连,所述调节组件适于驱动所述气浮套组件相对于所述固定支架沿第二方向运动,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。An adjusting component is installed on the fixing bracket and connected to the air flotation sleeve component. The adjusting component is suitable for driving the air flotation sleeve component to move along a second direction relative to the fixing bracket. The first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- 一种用于电路板加工设备的控制方法,所述控制方法适用于电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括气浮套组件和调节组件,所述调节组件包括驱动件和调节块,所述控制方法包括:A control method for a circuit board processing device, the control method is applicable to the circuit board processing device, wherein the circuit board processing device comprises an air flotation sleeve assembly and an adjustment assembly, the adjustment assembly comprises a driving member and an adjustment block, and the control method comprises:检测待加工电路板的实际加工中心;Detect the actual processing center of the circuit board to be processed;获取所述实际加工中心在第二方向上的位置坐标;Acquire the position coordinates of the actual machining center in the second direction;控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块沿第一方向运动,且所述调节块在沿所述第一方向运动过程中带动所述气浮套组件沿所述第二方向相对于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。The driving member is controlled to drive the adjusting block to move along a first direction, and the adjusting block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move along a second direction relative to a position corresponding to the actual machining center during the movement along the first direction, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- 根据权利要求60所述的用于电路板加工设备的控制方法,其中,控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块运动,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件相对于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动包括:According to the control method for circuit board processing equipment according to claim 60, wherein controlling the driving member to drive the adjusting block to move so that the adjusting block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move relative to the position corresponding to the actual processing center comprises:控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块上升,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件朝远离于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动;Controlling the driving member to drive the adjusting block to rise, so that the adjusting block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move toward a position away from a position corresponding to the actual machining center;控制所述驱动件驱动所述调节块下降,以使所述调节块带动所述气浮套组件朝靠近于所述实际加工中心对应的位置运动。The driving member is controlled to drive the adjusting block to descend, so that the adjusting block drives the air floating sleeve assembly to move toward a position close to a position corresponding to the actual machining center.
- 一种电路板加工设备,其中,包括:A circuit board processing device, comprising:床身,所述床身具有第一横梁;A bed, the bed having a first crossbeam;加工平台,所述加工平台设于所述床身,所述加工平台适于支撑被加工件;A processing platform, which is arranged on the bed and is suitable for supporting a workpiece;多个加工部,多个所述加工部均设于所述第一横梁且位于所述加工平台上方,且多个所述加工部沿所述床身的第一方向排布,至少一个所述加工部包括加工组件、安装架和调节组件,所述加工组件安装于所述安装架,所述安装架可活动地安装于所述床身,所述调节组件与所述安装架传动连接,所述调节组件被配置为驱动所述安装架和所述加工组件沿所述床身的第二方向移动,所述第二方向垂直于所述第一方向。A plurality of processing parts, wherein the plurality of processing parts are all arranged on the first cross beam and above the processing platform, and the plurality of processing parts are arranged along a first direction of the bed, and at least one of the processing parts comprises a processing component, a mounting frame and an adjustment component, wherein the processing component is mounted on the mounting frame, and the mounting frame is movably mounted on the bed, and the adjustment component is transmission-connected with the mounting frame, and the adjustment component is configured to drive the mounting frame and the processing component to move along a second direction of the bed, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- 根据权利要求62所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述调节组件包括:第一驱动件和第一滑块,所述第一滑块与所述安装架固定连接且可滑动地设于所述第一横梁,所述第一驱动件被配置为驱动所述第一滑块带动所述安装架沿所述第二方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 62, the adjustment component includes: a first driving member and a first slider, the first slider is fixedly connected to the mounting frame and is slidably disposed on the first beam, and the first driving member is configured to drive the first slider to drive the mounting frame to move along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求62所述的电路板加工设备,其中,每个所述加工部还包括:第二驱动件,所述第二驱动件与所述安装架传动连接,所述第二驱动件被配置为驱动所述安装架沿所述第一方向移动。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 62, wherein each of the processing parts further comprises: a second driving member, the second driving member is transmission-connected to the mounting frame, and the second driving member is configured to drive the mounting frame to move along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求63所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备还包括第一导向部和第二导向部,所述第一导向部设于所述第一横梁,所述第一滑块可滑动地设于所述第二导向部,通过所述第一导向部和所述第二导向部导向配合以使所述安装架沿所述第一方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 63, the circuit board processing equipment also includes a first guide part and a second guide part, the first guide part is arranged on the first beam, the first slider is slidably arranged on the second guide part, and the mounting frame is moved along the first direction through the guiding cooperation of the first guide part and the second guide part.
- 根据权利要求65所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第一导向部和所述第二导向部中的一个为导向块,所述第一导向部和所述第二导向部中的另一个为导轨,所述导向块可滑动地设于所述导轨,所述导轨沿所述第一方向延伸。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 65, one of the first guide part and the second guide part is a guide block, the other of the first guide part and the second guide part is a guide rail, the guide block is slidably disposed on the guide rail, and the guide rail extends along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求65所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第一滑块与所述第二导向部相对的端面具有第一导向结构,所述第二导向部与所述第一滑块相对的端面具有第二导向结构,所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构导向配合以使所述安装架沿所述第二方向移动。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 65, wherein the end surface of the first slider opposite to the second guide portion has a first guide structure, and the end surface of the second guide portion opposite to the first slider has a second guide structure, and the first guide structure and the second guide structure cooperate to guide and move the mounting frame along the second direction.
- 根据权利要求63所述的电路板加工设备,其中,每个所述加工部还包括:第三驱动件,所述安装架包括第二横梁和移动架,所述第二横梁与所述第一滑块固定连接,所述移动架可移动地设于所述第二横梁,所述加工组件的主轴设于所述移动架,所述第三驱动件与所述移动架连接,所述第三驱动件被配置为驱动所述移动架沿所述床身的第三方向相对所述第二横梁移动,所述第一方向、所述第二方向和所述第三方向相互垂直。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 63, each of the processing parts further includes: a third driving member, the mounting frame includes a second beam and a movable frame, the second beam is fixedly connected to the first slider, the movable frame is movably arranged on the second beam, the spindle of the processing assembly is arranged on the movable frame, the third driving member is connected to the movable frame, and the third driving member is configured to drive the movable frame to move along a third direction of the bed relative to the second beam, and the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
- 根据权利要求68所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第二横梁具有导向套筒,所述导向套筒的轴向方向与所述第三方向平行,所述移动架具有导向杆,所述导向杆穿设于所述导向套筒。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 68, the second crossbeam has a guide sleeve, the axial direction of the guide sleeve is parallel to the third direction, and the movable frame has a guide rod, and the guide rod is inserted into the guide sleeve.
- 根据权利要求69所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述移动架还具有安装板,所述安装板与所述导向杆固定连接,所述主轴安装于所述安装板。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 69, the movable frame also has a mounting plate, the mounting plate is fixedly connected to the guide rod, and the main shaft is mounted on the mounting plate.
- 根据权利要求70所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述安装架还包括第一支架和第二支架,所述第一支架位于所述安装板和所述第二横梁之间且与所述安装板固定连接,所述第二支架位于所述第二横梁远离所述安装板的一侧且与所述第二横梁固定连接,所述第三驱动件穿设于所述第二横梁,且所述第三驱动件连接在所述第一支架和所述第二支架之间。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 70, the mounting frame also includes a first bracket and a second bracket, the first bracket is located between the mounting plate and the second beam and is fixedly connected to the mounting plate, the second bracket is located on the side of the second beam away from the mounting plate and is fixedly connected to the second beam, the third driving member is passed through the second beam, and the third driving member is connected between the first bracket and the second bracket.
- 根据权利要求62-71任一项所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述第一横梁包括相对且间隔设置的第一子横梁和第二子横梁,所述加工组件位于所述第一子横梁和所述第二子横梁之间。The circuit board processing equipment according to any one of claims 62-71, wherein the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam that are oppositely and spaced apart, and the processing component is located between the first sub-beam and the second sub-beam.
- 一种电路板加工设备的控制方法,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括加工平台,所述加工平台包含至少一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应至少两个相邻的加工部,至少两个相邻的所述加工部中包括一个第一加工部,至少两个相邻的所述加工部中剩余的所述加工部为第二加工部,所述控制方法包括:A control method for a circuit board processing device, wherein the circuit board processing device comprises a processing platform, the processing platform comprises at least one processing station, each processing station corresponds to at least two adjacent processing parts, at least two adjacent processing parts include a first processing part, and the remaining processing parts of at least two adjacent processing parts are second processing parts, and the control method comprises:获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在第一方向上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围;Obtaining a predetermined distance between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and a first preset error range;确认每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在所述第一方向上的实际间距与相应的所述预定间距之间的误差在所述第一预设误差范围内;Confirming that an error between an actual spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding predetermined spacing is within the first preset error range;获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在第二方向上的第二预设误差范围;Obtaining a second preset error range in the second direction of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each of the processing stations;确认每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在所述第二预设误差范围内;Confirming that an error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each of the processing stations and all of the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range;控制每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部同时加工被加工件。The first processing part corresponding to each processing station and all the second processing parts are controlled to process the workpiece simultaneously.
- 根据权利要求73所述的电路板加工设备的控制方法,其中,每个所述第二加工部包括调节组件,所述调节组件被配置为调节所述第二加工部在第二方向上的位置;The control method of the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 73, wherein each of the second processing parts includes an adjustment component, and the adjustment component is configured to adjust the position of the second processing part in the second direction;在获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在第二方向上的第二预设误差范围之后,在确认每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在所述第二预设误差范围内之前,所述方法还包括:After obtaining a second preset error range in the second direction between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station, and before confirming that an error between actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the second direction is within the second preset error range, the method further includes:获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在第二方向上的实际位置;Acquire the actual positions of the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each of the processing stations in the second direction;若每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所述第二加工部中有两个在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差不在所述第二预设误差范围内,控制所述调节组件调节相应的所述第二加工部在第二方向上的位置,以使每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在所述第二方向上的实际位置之间的误差在所述第二预设误差范围内。If the error between the actual positions of two of the first processing parts and the second processing parts corresponding to each of the processing stations in the second direction is not within the second preset error range, the adjustment component is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding second processing part in the second direction so that the error between the actual positions of the first processing part corresponding to each of the processing stations and all of the second processing parts in the second direction is within the second preset error range.
- 根据权利要求74所述的电路板加工设备的控制方法,其中,每个所述加工部还包括:第二驱动件,所述第二驱动件被配置为驱动所述加工部沿所述第一方向移动;The control method of circuit board processing equipment according to claim 74, wherein each of the processing parts further comprises: a second driving member, the second driving member being configured to drive the processing part to move along the first direction;在获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部和所有的所述第二加工部在第一方向上的预定间距以及第一预设误差范围之前,所述方法还包括:Before obtaining the predetermined spacing between the first processing part and all the second processing parts corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the first preset error range, the method further includes:获取每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部在第一方向上的第一预设位置以及第三预设误差范围;Acquire a first preset position of the first processing part in the first direction and a third preset error range corresponding to each processing station;检测每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置;Detecting an actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each of the processing stations in the first direction;若每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置与相应的所述第一预设位置之间的误差不在所述第三预设误差范围内,控制所述第二驱动件调节相应的所述第一加工部的位置,以使每个所述加工工位对应的所述第一加工部在第一方向上的实际位置与相应的所述第一预设位置之间的误差在所述第三预设误差范围内。If the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is not within the third preset error range, the second driving member is controlled to adjust the position of the corresponding first processing part so that the error between the actual position of the first processing part corresponding to each processing station in the first direction and the corresponding first preset position is within the third preset error range.
- 一种加工部,应用于电路板加工设备,其中,包括:A processing unit, applied to circuit board processing equipment, comprising:安装架;Mount;主轴组件,被配置为加工电路板,所述主轴组件安装于所述安装架,在所述加工部的第一方向上所述主轴组件相对所述安装架可移动;A spindle assembly is configured to process a circuit board, the spindle assembly is mounted on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame in a first direction of the processing portion;调节组件,所述调节组件被配置为驱动所述主轴组件沿所述第一方向移动。An adjusting assembly is configured to drive the spindle assembly to move along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求76所述的加工部,其中,所述主轴组件包括:驱动件和安装座,所述驱动件设于所述安装座,所述安装座安装于所述安装架,沿所述第一方向上所述安装座相对所述安装架可移动。According to the processing part according to claim 76, the spindle assembly includes: a driving member and a mounting seat, the driving member is arranged on the mounting seat, the mounting seat is installed on the mounting frame, and the mounting seat is movable relative to the mounting frame along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求77所述的加工部,其中,所述调节组件沿第一方向穿设于所述安装架。The processing portion according to claim 77, wherein the adjustment assembly is penetrated through the mounting frame along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求77所述的加工部,其中,所述加工部包括:弹性件,所述安装架限定出安装空间,所述主轴组件安装于所述安装空间内,所述安装座的外表面具有第一抵接面,所述安装空间的内侧壁具有第二抵接面,所述第一抵接面和所述第二抵接面沿所述第一方向相对,所述弹性件抵接在所述第一抵接面和所述第二抵接面之间。The processing part according to claim 77, wherein the processing part includes: an elastic member, the mounting frame defines an installation space, the spindle assembly is installed in the installation space, the outer surface of the mounting seat has a first abutment surface, the inner side wall of the installation space has a second abutment surface, the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface are opposite to each other along the first direction, and the elastic member abuts between the first abutment surface and the second abutment surface.
- 根据权利要求77所述的加工部,其中,所述安装架设有第一导向结构,所述安装座设有第二导向结构,通过所述第一导向结构和所述第二导向结构导向配合以在所述第一方向对所述安装座导向。According to the processing part according to claim 77, wherein the mounting frame is provided with a first guiding structure, and the mounting seat is provided with a second guiding structure, and the first guiding structure and the second guiding structure are guided and cooperated to guide the mounting seat in the first direction.
- 根据权利要求80所述的加工部,其中,所述第一导向结构为导向槽和导向销中的一个,所述第二导向结构为所述导向槽和所述导向销中的另一个,所述导向销插入所述导向槽内。The processing part according to claim 80, wherein the first guide structure is one of a guide groove and a guide pin, the second guide structure is the other of the guide groove and the guide pin, and the guide pin is inserted into the guide groove.
- 根据权利要求76-81中任一项所述的加工部,其中,所述调节组件包括:第一调节件和第二调节件,所述第一调节件与所述第二调节件转动连接且与所述安装座固定连接,所述第二调节件可转动地设于所述安装架,通过转动所述第二调节件以驱动所述主轴组件沿所述第一方向移动。A processing part according to any one of claims 76-81, wherein the adjustment assembly comprises: a first adjustment member and a second adjustment member, the first adjustment member is rotatably connected to the second adjustment member and fixedly connected to the mounting seat, the second adjustment member is rotatably provided on the mounting frame, and the spindle assembly is driven to move along the first direction by rotating the second adjustment member.
- 根据权利要求82所述的加工部,其中,所述第二调节件为丝杆,所述第一调节件套设于所述丝杆;所述安装架具有安装耳,所述安装耳具有安装孔,所述丝杆穿设于所述安装孔;轴承安装于所述安装孔内,且所述丝杆穿设于所述轴承的内圈。According to the processing part according to claim 82, wherein the second adjusting member is a screw rod, the first adjusting member is sleeved on the screw rod; the mounting frame has a mounting ear, the mounting ear has a mounting hole, the screw rod is passed through the mounting hole; the bearing is installed in the mounting hole, and the screw rod is passed through the inner ring of the bearing.
- 根据权利要求83所述的加工部,其中,所述加工部还包括:端盖,所述端盖具有避让孔,所述端盖设于所述安装耳的外表面,且所述避让孔与所述安装孔对应,所述丝杆穿设于所述避让孔,所述端盖被配置为止挡所述轴承。The processing part according to claim 83, wherein the processing part further includes: an end cover, the end cover has an avoidance hole, the end cover is arranged on the outer surface of the mounting ear, and the avoidance hole corresponds to the mounting hole, the screw rod is passed through the avoidance hole, and the end cover is configured to stop the bearing.
- 根据权利要求77所述的加工部,其中,所述安装架限定出安装空间,所述主轴组件安装于所述安装空间内,在所述加工部的第二方向上,所述安装空间具有相对的第一侧壁和第二侧壁,所述第一侧壁和/或所述第二侧壁设有顶杆,所述顶杆适于沿所述第二方向相对所述安装架移动且适于与所述安装座抵接,所述第一方向与所述第二方向垂直。The processing part according to claim 77, wherein the mounting frame defines an installation space, the spindle assembly is installed in the installation space, and in the second direction of the processing part, the installation space has a first side wall and a second side wall relative to each other, the first side wall and/or the second side wall is provided with a push rod, the push rod is suitable for moving relative to the mounting frame along the second direction and suitable for abutting against the mounting seat, and the first direction is perpendicular to the second direction.
- 一种电路板加工设备,其中,包括:A circuit board processing device, comprising:机座,包括沿第二方向延伸的横梁;A machine base, comprising a beam extending along a second direction;加工部,多个所述加工部沿所述第二方向滑接于所述横梁,所述加工部被配置为对电路板加工,每个所述加工部均包括安装架和主轴组件,在所述加工部的第一方向上,所述主轴组件相对所述安装架可移动,所述第二方向垂直于所述第一方向。A processing part, a plurality of the processing parts are slidably connected to the crossbeam along the second direction, the processing part is configured to process the circuit board, each of the processing parts includes a mounting frame and a spindle assembly, in the first direction of the processing part, the spindle assembly is movable relative to the mounting frame, and the second direction is perpendicular to the first direction.
- 根据权利要求86所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述加工部包括调节组件,所述调节组件被配置为驱动所述主轴组件沿所述第一方向移动。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 86, wherein the processing portion includes an adjusting assembly, and the adjusting assembly is configured to drive the spindle assembly to move along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求87所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备具有至少一个加工工位,每个所述加工工位对应设置至少两个所述加工部,所述调节组件被配置为调节所述加工部在所述第一方向处于相同位置。According to the circuit board processing equipment according to claim 87, the circuit board processing equipment has at least one processing station, each processing station is correspondingly provided with at least two processing parts, and the adjustment component is configured to adjust the processing parts to be in the same position in the first direction.
- 根据权利要求87或88所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括控制系统,所述控制系统被构造为控制相邻两个所述加工部沿所述第二方向移动预定间隔距离,控制每个所述加工部的所述主轴组件沿所述第一方向上移动至相同位置。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 87 or 88, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, which is constructed to control two adjacent processing parts to move a predetermined spacing distance along the second direction, and control the spindle assembly of each processing part to move to the same position along the first direction.
- 根据权利要求87或88所述的电路板加工设备,其中,所述电路板加工设备包括控制系统,所述控制系统还被构造为被配置为控制所述调节组件驱动相应的所述主轴组件沿所述第一方向移动,并控制所述主轴组件沿第三方向加工电路板,以及被配置为控制相应的所述加工部沿所述第二方向移动,所述第一方向、所述第二方向、所述第三方向相互垂直。The circuit board processing equipment according to claim 87 or 88, wherein the circuit board processing equipment includes a control system, and the control system is also constructed to be configured to control the adjustment component to drive the corresponding spindle component to move along the first direction, and control the spindle component to process the circuit board along a third direction, and is configured to control the corresponding processing part to move along the second direction, and the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction are perpendicular to each other.
Applications Claiming Priority (14)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202211634238.0A CN118234130A (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Circuit board processing equipment and control method thereof |
CN202223423969.9 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202211634240.8 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202211634236.1A CN118218628A (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Processing part and circuit board processing equipment |
CN202211634241.2 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202223425408.2 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202223423969.9U CN219053571U (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Circuit board processing equipment |
CN202211634238.0 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202223425408.2U CN219053792U (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Processing equipment |
CN202211634244.6 | 2022-12-19 | ||
CN202211634241.2A CN118219002A (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Processing apparatus, control method, and processing method |
CN202211634244.6A CN118234132A (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Circuit board processing equipment, control method and device thereof and calibration method |
CN202211634240.8A CN118234131A (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2022-12-19 | Adjusting assembly, circuit board processing equipment and control method |
CN202211634236.1 | 2022-12-19 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024131579A1 true WO2024131579A1 (en) | 2024-06-27 |
Family
ID=91587706
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/137739 WO2024131579A1 (en) | 2022-12-19 | 2023-12-10 | Processing device, control apparatus, adjusting assembly, processing portion and method |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2024131579A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN118411000A (en) * | 2024-07-02 | 2024-07-30 | 浙江省标准化研究院(金砖国家标准化(浙江)研究中心、浙江省物品编码中心) | Intelligent factory-oriented standardization method and system |
Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1144150A (en) * | 1995-04-13 | 1997-03-05 | Emag-机械销售服务股份有限公司 | Multiple main axle machine tool |
US5920973A (en) * | 1997-03-09 | 1999-07-13 | Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. | Hole forming system with multiple spindles per station |
US20030053875A1 (en) * | 2001-08-21 | 2003-03-20 | Franco Pasquetto | Numerical-control milling machine |
US20070053756A1 (en) * | 2004-02-13 | 2007-03-08 | Ex-Cell-O Gmbh | Machine Tool and Method for the Correction or Compensation of Different Tool Lengths in a Machine Tool |
US20100119317A1 (en) * | 2008-11-05 | 2010-05-13 | Norishige Kumagai | Machining apparatus and machining method |
US20180079044A1 (en) * | 2015-03-23 | 2018-03-22 | Horkos Corp | Machine tool |
KR20200115379A (en) * | 2019-03-29 | 2020-10-07 | 상하이 마이크로 일렉트로닉스 이큅먼트(그룹) 컴퍼니 리미티드 | Optical measurement apparatus and method |
CN219053571U (en) * | 2022-12-19 | 2023-05-23 | 苏州维嘉科技股份有限公司 | Circuit board processing equipment |
-
2023
- 2023-12-10 WO PCT/CN2023/137739 patent/WO2024131579A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1144150A (en) * | 1995-04-13 | 1997-03-05 | Emag-机械销售服务股份有限公司 | Multiple main axle machine tool |
US5920973A (en) * | 1997-03-09 | 1999-07-13 | Electro Scientific Industries, Inc. | Hole forming system with multiple spindles per station |
US20030053875A1 (en) * | 2001-08-21 | 2003-03-20 | Franco Pasquetto | Numerical-control milling machine |
US20070053756A1 (en) * | 2004-02-13 | 2007-03-08 | Ex-Cell-O Gmbh | Machine Tool and Method for the Correction or Compensation of Different Tool Lengths in a Machine Tool |
US20100119317A1 (en) * | 2008-11-05 | 2010-05-13 | Norishige Kumagai | Machining apparatus and machining method |
US20180079044A1 (en) * | 2015-03-23 | 2018-03-22 | Horkos Corp | Machine tool |
KR20200115379A (en) * | 2019-03-29 | 2020-10-07 | 상하이 마이크로 일렉트로닉스 이큅먼트(그룹) 컴퍼니 리미티드 | Optical measurement apparatus and method |
CN219053571U (en) * | 2022-12-19 | 2023-05-23 | 苏州维嘉科技股份有限公司 | Circuit board processing equipment |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN118411000A (en) * | 2024-07-02 | 2024-07-30 | 浙江省标准化研究院(金砖国家标准化(浙江)研究中心、浙江省物品编码中心) | Intelligent factory-oriented standardization method and system |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US6325576B1 (en) | High throughput hole forming system with multiple spindles per station | |
US7637702B2 (en) | Drilling method | |
WO2024131579A1 (en) | Processing device, control apparatus, adjusting assembly, processing portion and method | |
US6231279B1 (en) | Drilling machine with at least two machining heads for machining printed circuit boards | |
EP1378315B1 (en) | Machine for machining large parts | |
US6283681B1 (en) | Method and device for aligning a workpiece on a machine tool table | |
US7624661B2 (en) | Supporting unit, and moving table device and linear-motion guiding device that use the supporting unit | |
US6325578B1 (en) | Method of error compensation for angular errors in machining (droop compensation) | |
EP1008419B1 (en) | Vertical axis translation mechanism | |
DE69716719T2 (en) | IMPROVED MONITORING SYSTEM FOR THE MOVEMENT OF A TOOL AND TOOL SLIDE | |
EP1396014B1 (en) | Apparatus for the measurement or machining of an object, provided with a displacement stage with wedge-shaped guides | |
CN101169976B (en) | High precision regulation tool equipment and its regulation method | |
CN219633965U (en) | Spindle deviation adjusting device and circuit board processing equipment | |
CN219053792U (en) | Processing equipment | |
US8174154B2 (en) | Air bushing linear stage system | |
KR20080020103A (en) | A variable stage system | |
CN118234132A (en) | Circuit board processing equipment, control method and device thereof and calibration method | |
CN118219002A (en) | Processing apparatus, control method, and processing method | |
KR101527695B1 (en) | Boring device | |
CN115418636B (en) | Device for conical hole directional laser processing | |
WO2008152662A1 (en) | Moving portal for a machine tool or a measuring machine | |
CN219372691U (en) | Circuit board processing equipment and calibrating mechanism | |
CN218481393U (en) | Adjusting device for rotating and lifting coaxial light source | |
KR100284554B1 (en) | Positioning Table | |
CN210615253U (en) | Milling positioning device and milling equipment |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23905746 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |